Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
1
Annex 11
To the Particular conditions of
contract No. EDZL-_________ as of__________ 20__
WORKS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
2
CONTENT CONTENT ............................................................................................................................. 2
1. GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 11
1.1. Terminology .......................................................................................................................... 11
1.2. Project description ................................................................................................................ 12
1.3. Subject of the Procurement .................................................................................................. 15
1.4. Deadlines for the performance of Works .............................................................................. 19
1.5. Location for the performace of Works.................................................................................. 19
1.6. The framework of the Financial Offer ................................................................................... 19
1.7. Description and characterization of the existing situation of the Works execution area ..... 20
1.7.1. Urban development ............................................................................................................... 20
1.7.2. Railway bridge over Daugava ................................................................................................ 21
1.7.3. Railway station ..................................................................................................................... 22
1.7.4. Bus terminal .......................................................................................................................... 24
1.7.5. Riga Central Market .............................................................................................................. 24
1.7.6. Description of the curent situation ....................................................................................... 25
1.7.7. Other projects affecting the territory .................................................................................... 26
1.7.8. Local planning ....................................................................................................................... 26
1.8. Available documents to start the design works ................................................................... 27
1.9. Other study materials ........................................................................................................... 28
1.10. Land and structures acquisition process ............................................................................. 28
1.11. List of applicable legal acts and documents ........................................................................ 29
2. PROJECT SECTIONS........................................................................................... 31
2.1. Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 31
2.2. Sections of the Procurement subject ................................................................................... 31
2.3. Construction works excluded from the Contract .................................................................. 33
3. Project management and cooperation ............................................................... 36
3.1. Stakeholders ......................................................................................................................... 36
3.2. Project coordination and meetings ....................................................................................... 36
3.2.1. Project coordination ............................................................................................................. 36
3.2.2. Meeting before starting the design ....................................................................................... 37
3.2.3. Meeting before starting the construction works .................................................................. 38
3.2.4. Meetings before installation of devices and equipment ....................................................... 39
3.2.5. Progress meetings ................................................................................................................ 40
3.2.6. Coordination meetings ......................................................................................................... 41
3
3.2.7. Quality management meetings ............................................................................................. 42
3.2.8. Finance control meetings ..................................................................................................... 42
3.2.9. BIM coordination meetings ................................................................................................... 43
3.3. Cooperation between Contractor and stakeholders ............................................................. 43
3.3.1. General .................................................................................................................................. 43
3.3.2. Organisation of work and staff ............................................................................................. 44
Organisation of Contractor’s staff ................................................................................................... 44
Design phase ................................................................................................................................... 44
Construction phase.......................................................................................................................... 44
3.3.3. Contractor’s cooperation with the Employer and the Engineer ............................................ 45
Reporting procedure ........................................................................................................................ 45
Overtime work .................................................................................................................................. 45
Progress reports .............................................................................................................................. 46
Monthly progress reports ................................................................................................................ 46
Records and situation capture using videos and photos ................................................................ 48
3.3.4. Goods .................................................................................................................................... 49
Shipping and handling ..................................................................................................................... 49
Storage and protection .................................................................................................................... 50
Installation requirements ................................................................................................................. 50
Article acceptance standarts ........................................................................................................... 50
Material testing ................................................................................................................................ 50
List of Goods ................................................................................................................................... 51
3.3.5. Replacement, substitution of goods ..................................................................................... 51
Materials to be submitted ................................................................................................................ 52
Engineer’s operations ...................................................................................................................... 53
Optional and substitute goods......................................................................................................... 53
3.3.6. Procedures for making changes ........................................................................................... 53
Contract prices and supporting documentation regarding contractual deadline changes ............. 54
3.4. Exchange of documents and information ............................................................................ 56
3.4.1. General (technical drawings, coordination and production drawing, defect works) ............ 56
Shop drawings ................................................................................................................................. 57
Product and producer data .............................................................................................................. 60
Defect works .................................................................................................................................... 60
Submission of goods ....................................................................................................................... 61
Written communication and product data submission ................................................................... 62
Submission of Contractor’s samples .............................................................................................. 62
3.4.2. Coordination procedure of documents ................................................................................. 62
3.5. Deliverables .......................................................................................................................... 65
3.5.1. Contract fulfilment deliverables............................................................................................ 65
4
Work programme ............................................................................................................................. 65
Time schedule, plans and progress control ..................................................................................... 69
Organisation table............................................................................................................................ 74
Other documents to be attached ..................................................................................................... 74
Project quality assurance plan ........................................................................................................ 74
BIM execution plan .......................................................................................................................... 75
3.5.2. Design documents and building design (Detailed Technical Design) ................................... 75
Engineering survey reports (BPN-01) .............................................................................................. 75
Construction Intention (BPN-02) ..................................................................................................... 75
Master Design (BPN-03) .................................................................................................................. 76
Technical requirements for Master Design regarding 1535mm gauge railway infrastructure........ 76
Detailed Technical Design (BPN-04) ................................................................................................ 77
3.5.3. Completion of construction works and taking over of structures ........................................ 78
As-built documentation ................................................................................................................... 79
3.6. Engineer’s liability for reviewing materials submitted by the Contractor ............................. 80
3.7. Defect notification period ..................................................................................................... 81
Detailed requirements ..................................................................................................................... 82
Materials to be submitted ................................................................................................................ 83
3.8. Public relations ..................................................................................................................... 83
3.9. Quality requirements and control ......................................................................................... 83
3.9.1. Project quality assurance plan ............................................................................................. 83
Design control .................................................................................................................................. 84
3.9.2. Quality control plan for design period ................................................................................... 85
3.9.3. Quality control plan for construction period ......................................................................... 86
3.9.4. Contractor’s and subcontractors’ personnel ........................................................................ 87
3.9.5. On-site quality verifications for construction works ............................................................. 87
Preparation inspection ..................................................................................................................... 88
Quality control on works outside of the construction site ............................................................... 89
Quality Control protocols ................................................................................................................. 89
In force documentation ................................................................................................................... 90
Testing and inspection devices ....................................................................................................... 90
Manufacturer’s services at the construction site ............................................................................ 90
Monitoring of inspection carried out by the Engineer and monitoring of the Contractor
performance .................................................................................................................................... 90
Materials to be submitted for quality assurance ............................................................................. 91
Samples ........................................................................................................................................... 91
Installation requirements ................................................................................................................. 92
Identification marking ...................................................................................................................... 92
3.9.6. Laboratory services for verification and testing of materials ............................................... 92
Testing laboratory services ............................................................................................................. 93
5
Choice of laboratory and payment .................................................................................................. 93
Quality asurance .............................................................................................................................. 93
Materials to be submitted by Contractor ......................................................................................... 94
Contractor’s obligations for laboratory inspections ........................................................................ 94
Laboratory reports ........................................................................................................................... 94
Authorization restrictions of testing laboratories ............................................................................ 94
Contractor’s obligations .................................................................................................................. 95
3.9.7. Operation and technical maintenance instructions, training ................................................ 95
Documents....................................................................................................................................... 95
Training ............................................................................................................................................ 96
3.9.8. Software control ................................................................................................................... 96
3.10. Project control forms ............................................................................................................ 97
3.11. BIM requirements ................................................................................................................. 98
3.11.1. General .................................................................................................................................. 98
3.11.2. Model types, content and file formats .................................................................................. 98
3.11.3. BIM execution plan (BEP) ..................................................................................................... 98
3.11.4. Consistency Control and BIM Coordination .......................................................................... 99
3.11.5. Data sharing .......................................................................................................................... 99
3.11.6. Level of Development/Definition (LOD) ................................................................................ 99
3.11.7. 2D CAD documents and drawing production...................................................................... 100
3.11.8. Simulations ......................................................................................................................... 100
3.11.9. Visualizations ...................................................................................................................... 100
3.11.10. Common Data Environment (CDE) ..................................................................................... 100
3.11.11. Other ................................................................................................................................... 101
3.12. Site documents ................................................................................................................... 101
4. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 103
4.1. General requirements ......................................................................................................... 103
4.2. Expected lifetime ................................................................................................................ 108
4.3. Requirements to passenger and transport flows ............................................................... 108
4.3.1. General ................................................................................................................................ 108
4.3.2. The current amount of station train turnover ..................................................................... 109
4.3.3. Estimated amount of train turnover at station ................................................................... 110
1435mm gauge infrastructure ....................................................................................................... 110
1520mm gauge infrastructure ....................................................................................................... 110
Principal passenger flows.............................................................................................................. 111
4.4. Requirements as regards preservation of cultural values .................................................. 111
6
4.5. Design requirements as regard design of reconstruction of Riga Central Passenger Station
building 116
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 116
Present situation ............................................................................................................................ 116
Heritage status of territory ............................................................................................................ 118
Requirements to the developer of the Detailed Technical Design ................................................. 118
Content of Detailed Technical Design ........................................................................................... 120
General part and photos (VD, FF) .................................................................................................. 121
Territory section (TS) ..................................................................................................................... 121
Architecture section (AR) ............................................................................................................... 123
Buildings and structures subject to demolition within the borders of design works .................... 144
Physical accessibility for disabled according to LBN .................................................................... 145
Requirements for heating, ventilation and air conditioning networks ........................................... 147
Requirements for water supply and sewage networks .................................................................. 151
Fire-safety requirements and description of fire safety measures (UPP) ..................................... 153
Energy-efficiency requirements ..................................................................................................... 154
Cost analysis of the building’s life-cycle, elaborated feasibility studies ........................................ 155
Requirements as regards sustainable maintenance solutions...................................................... 156
4.6. Requirements on design of bridges and overpasses ......................................................... 156
4.6.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 156
4.6.2. Methodology ....................................................................................................................... 157
Actions to be carried out by the Contractor .................................................................................. 157
Conditions imposed by the Employer ............................................................................................ 158
Content of Detailed Technical Design ........................................................................................... 160
4.6.3. Common requirements for bridges and overpasses .......................................................... 160
4.6.4. Bridges and overpasses to be built within the Project ....................................................... 162
Lāčplēša street overpass (P-01) .................................................................................................... 162
Dzirnavu Street overpass (P-02) .................................................................................................... 163
Dzirnavu Street overpass of Rail Baltica (P-03) ............................................................................. 163
Overpass from Timoteja Street till Tunnel B (P-04) ....................................................................... 164
Overpass from Timoteja Street till Gogoļa Street (P-05) ............................................................... 165
Gogoļa Street overpass (P-06) ....................................................................................................... 166
Overpass from Gogoļa Street till Kungu Street (P-07) ................................................................... 168
Overpass from Prāgas Street till Kungu Street (P-08) ................................................................... 170
Bridge over Daugava (P-09) ........................................................................................................... 171
Bridge over Mazā Daugava (P-10) ................................................................................................. 172
4.7. Requirements on design of railway infrastructure ............................................................. 174
4.7.1. General requirements ......................................................................................................... 174
4.7.2. Methodology ....................................................................................................................... 174
Actions to be carried out by the Contractor .................................................................................. 174
Conditions by the Employer ........................................................................................................... 176
7
Content of Detailed Technical Design ........................................................................................... 177
4.7.3. Technical requirements as to railway infrastructure sections ........................................... 177
Common technical requirements for sections .............................................................................. 177
Specific technical requirements as to individual sections ............................................................ 180
4.7.4. Requirements on the design of overhead contact lines (OCL) and traction power supply
subsystems......................................................................................................................... 186
1520mm railway system ............................................................................................................... 186
General requirements for OCL ....................................................................................................... 186
Requirements imposed on elements of the OCLs ......................................................................... 189
Requirements imposed on consoles ............................................................................................. 192
Requirements imposed on earthing .............................................................................................. 193
4.7.5. Design and construction of 1520mm gauge tracks signalling subsystem ........................ 194
General ........................................................................................................................................... 194
Description of current situation ..................................................................................................... 195
Description of reconstruction works and cooperation with the performer of works ..................... 196
4.7.6. Requirements on design of 1435mm signalling subsystems ............................................. 199
General ........................................................................................................................................... 199
Key requirements to the interlocking system ................................................................................ 199
Requirements as regards interlocking system .............................................................................. 200
ERTMS system .............................................................................................................................. 200
Train detection system .................................................................................................................. 200
Axle counters ................................................................................................................................. 200
Signals ........................................................................................................................................... 201
Switch drives ................................................................................................................................. 201
4.8. Requirements on power supply systems ............................................................................ 201
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 201
Medium and low voltage supply .................................................................................................... 201
Key energy-intensive devices ......................................................................................................... 202
Transformer points ........................................................................................................................ 204
Crossings with other communications .......................................................................................... 205
Earthing and overvoltage protection.............................................................................................. 205
4.8.1. Requirements on low current systems ............................................................................... 206
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 206
General requirements .................................................................................................................... 206
4.9. Work organization plans ..................................................................................................... 207
5. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 208
5.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 208
5.2. General requirements ......................................................................................................... 208
5.3. Documents .......................................................................................................................... 210
5.3.1. Work performance design .................................................................................................. 210
8
Method statements for particular works ....................................................................................... 212
5.3.2. Report on construction methods ........................................................................................ 212
5.3.3. Construction works execution documents ......................................................................... 213
5.3.4. Taking-over documentation ................................................................................................ 214
Railway infrastructure, bridges, overpasses .................................................................................. 214
5.4. Organization of the construction site ................................................................................. 214
5.4.1. Temporary structures, premises and equipment ............................................................... 214
General ........................................................................................................................................... 214
Temporary fence............................................................................................................................ 215
Warehouses and equipment .......................................................................................................... 217
Engineer and Employer accomodation .......................................................................................... 217
Parkings ......................................................................................................................................... 222
Termination of provision, servicing and removal .......................................................................... 222
Protection of current construction site elements .......................................................................... 223
Lighting and power supply ............................................................................................................. 223
Water supply .................................................................................................................................. 224
Construction works equipment ..................................................................................................... 224
Sanitary / toilet equipment of the construction site ...................................................................... 225
Changing rooms ............................................................................................................................ 225
Temporary sewerage ..................................................................................................................... 226
5.4.2. Information stands ............................................................................................................. 226
5.4.3. Mobilization ........................................................................................................................ 226
5.4.4. Establishment, maintenance and recultivation of the construction site ............................ 227
Storage of materials ...................................................................................................................... 229
5.4.5. Organization of street and railway traffic and traffic safety ............................................... 230
Street traffic ................................................................................................................................... 230
Railway traffic ................................................................................................................................ 232
Safety ............................................................................................................................................. 232
5.5. Technical and technological requirements for the types and processes of works to be
performed .......................................................................................................................................... 233
5.5.1. Investigation, geodetic setup and survey works ................................................................. 233
5.5.2. Demolition of structures ..................................................................................................... 237
Demolition of concrete structures ................................................................................................. 238
Demolition of asphalt concrete pavement and damp proof course .............................................. 238
Demolition of metal structures ...................................................................................................... 238
Demolition of other structures ....................................................................................................... 239
Dismantling of cables (transfer, protection) .................................................................................. 239
Inspection and monitoring of buildings ......................................................................................... 239
5.5.3. Earthworks .......................................................................................................................... 239
Excavation and filling of foundation pit ......................................................................................... 239
9
Crushed stone foundations ........................................................................................................... 242
5.5.4. Structures in ground (pile foundations, shallow foundations, retaining walls) .................. 243
Driven piles .................................................................................................................................... 243
Bored piles ..................................................................................................................................... 246
Sheet piling and retaining walls ..................................................................................................... 247
Reinforcement of slopes................................................................................................................ 250
5.5.5. Concrete works ................................................................................................................... 251
Post shores, temporary bracings and covering structures............................................................ 251
Telescopic post shores .................................................................................................................. 252
Formwork ....................................................................................................................................... 253
Construction joints ........................................................................................................................ 254
Reinforcement ............................................................................................................................... 255
Prestressed reinforcement ............................................................................................................ 257
Concrete ........................................................................................................................................ 260
5.5.6. Metal structures .................................................................................................................. 267
Delivery of steel materials ............................................................................................................. 267
Bolts with nuts and washers .......................................................................................................... 268
Treatment and connection of steel elements ................................................................................ 268
Welding .......................................................................................................................................... 270
Bolted connections ........................................................................................................................ 272
Test assembly ............................................................................................................................... 273
Anti-corrosion treatment of steel structure surface ...................................................................... 273
5.5.7. Structural bearings and expansion joints ........................................................................... 275
Structural bearings ........................................................................................................................ 275
Bridge and overpass expansion joints ........................................................................................... 276
Building expansion joints ............................................................................................................... 276
5.5.8. Waterproofing ..................................................................................................................... 277
5.5.9. Masonry .............................................................................................................................. 278
Quality of the materials used ......................................................................................................... 278
Works technology requirements .................................................................................................... 278
Works quality requirements ........................................................................................................... 278
5.5.10. Wall insulation .................................................................................................................... 279
Works technology requirements .................................................................................................... 279
5.5.11. Internal water supply, heating systems, heating units, gas pipes, pressure pipes ............. 279
Internal water supply ..................................................................................................................... 279
Heating system. Heating units ...................................................................................................... 280
Gas piping ...................................................................................................................................... 282
Ventilation equipment .................................................................................................................... 284
5.5.12. Pavement construction ....................................................................................................... 284
Works technology requirements .................................................................................................... 284
10
Works quality requirements ........................................................................................................... 285
5.5.13. Construction of elevators ................................................................................................... 285
Quality of the materials used ......................................................................................................... 285
Works technology requirements .................................................................................................... 285
Works quality requirements ........................................................................................................... 287
5.5.14. Openings in building structures .......................................................................................... 288
5.5.15. Railway infrastructure ......................................................................................................... 288
Earthworks and subgrade .............................................................................................................. 288
Railway tracks ................................................................................................................................ 294
5.6. Protection of structures ...................................................................................................... 324
5.6.1. Protection against mechanical damage ............................................................................. 324
5.6.2. Protection against weather ................................................................................................. 325
5.7. Labour protection and construction site safety requirements ........................................... 325
Labour protection measures ......................................................................................................... 326
Reporting on accidents .................................................................................................................. 328
Work safety instructions ................................................................................................................ 329
Non-compliance with safety requirements .................................................................................... 329
Labour Protection Plan .................................................................................................................. 330
5.8. Fire safety requirements ..................................................................................................... 331
Fire safety ...................................................................................................................................... 331
5.9. Environmental protection requirements ............................................................................. 333
5.9.1. Site cleaning ....................................................................................................................... 333
Removal of waste .......................................................................................................................... 334
5.9.2. Erosion and sediment control ............................................................................................. 335
5.9.3. Water drainage control ....................................................................................................... 335
5.9.4. Protection of waters ........................................................................................................... 335
5.9.5. Reduction of noise .............................................................................................................. 336
5.9.6. Dust control ........................................................................................................................ 336
5.9.7. Pollution control .................................................................................................................. 336
5.9.8. Supervision of structures and constructions thereof ......................................................... 336
6. ASSUMPTIONS AND POSSIBLE RISKS ............................................................. 338
7. LIST OF ANNEXES ............................................................................................ 340
11
1. GENERAL
1.1. Terminology
Construction – engineering survey and design works of all and any structures, both construction works,
author supervision works, and the activities and works relevant for the commissioning and verification
of all Works, their outputs.
Detailed Technical Design – set of relevant graphical and textual documents to implement the
Construction intention. Within the Works, the Contractor shall elaborate and approve (accept) at least
three Detailed Technical Designs. Within the Works, the Detailed Technical Design includes also the
relevant dismantling (dismantling of structures) design documentation, along with any other design
documentation relevant for the performance of Works.
Works – construction works of Rail Baltica Riga railway bridge, embankment and Riga Central
passenger station, including, but not limited to elaboration and acceptance of Detailed technical design,
construction works, author supervision works, and the verification and commissioning works related
to the reconstructed structures.
Work Stage – the Works consists of four Work Stages:
(a) Section One – all engineering survey and design works;
(b) Section Two – reconstruction and territory improvement works, as well as author supervision works of the Southern part of the Riga Central Passenger Station, commissioning thereof and receipt and execution of all other approvals, permits and verifications, and submission of all documents established in the Employer’s requirements;
(c) Section Three – construction and author supervision works of the new railway bridge for Rail
Baltica 1435 mm tracks in section from Maskavas Street to Jelgavas Street, commissioning
thereof, as well as receipt and execution of all other approvals, permits and verifications, and
submission of all documents established in the Employer’s requirements;
(d) Section Four – construction and author supervision works of the Northern part of the Riga
Central Station, commissioning thereof, as well as receipt and execution of all other approvals,
permits and verifications, and submission of all documents established in the Employer’s
requirements;
Work organisation project (hereinafter - DOP) – part of the Detailed technical design, which includes
the construction engineering solutions according to specific construction regulations and Employer's
requirements.
Work performance plan (hereinafter - DVP) – a document to be elaborated before construction start
according to Employer's requirements and CoM Regulations No. 655 „Regulations regarding the
Latvian Construction Standard LBN 310-14 “Work performance plan““ and the binding specific
construction regulations.
Rail Baltica global project – European railway transport project aimed to integrate the Baltic States
within the European railway network.
12
Procurement – procurement procedure “Rail Baltica Riga railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga
Central Passenger Station design and build project (procurement ID: EDZL 2017/2 CEF).
Engineer – a person, which according to the Contract fulfils the Engineer's duties. During Contract
fulfilment, the Engineer is entitled to issue binding instructions to the Contractor regarding the Work,
performance of any part thereof, which shall be met and delivered by the Contractor.
Contract – Contract on work performance concluded between the Employer, Engineer and the
Contractor.
NoBo – Notified Body; see an extended definition thereof under Chapter 3.1.
Employer – SIA „Eiropas dzelzceļa līnijas”, registration No. 40103836785, registered address: 3 Gogoļa
Street, Riga, LV-1743 (hereinafter – EDZL or Employer).
Employer's requirements – requirements stipulated by the Contract, the present Technical
specification and its appendices.
Project – part of the Rail Baltica global project, which includes the performance of Works by
reconstructing the Riga Central passenger station to integrate Rail Baltica.
Applicable law – relevant legal acts to deliver the Contract works.
Programme – a Programme is meant to cover both the Design Programme, the Construction Works
Programme, and both combined.
Design Programme – detailed schedule of engineering surveys, design activities and key construction
works as an integral part of the Programme according to Article 8.3.1 of the Specific regulations of the
Contract.
Construction Works Programme – detailed schedule of construction works and author supervision
activities as an integral part of the Programme according to Article 8.3.2 of the Specific regulations of
the Contract.
Contractor – a candidate that has been preferred within the procurement procedure and with whom
the Contract on the performance of Works has been concluded.
Common Data Environment (CDE) – virtual platform for the exchange of Project information and data
(hereinafter – CDE or Common Data Environment). See more under Chapter 3.11. BIM requirements.
Individual terms have been defined under Chapter 3.1 Employer’s Requirements, as well as under other
chapters herein.
1.2. Project description
The Baltic countries Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania have historically been linked to the east-west railway
transport axis using the 1520mm gauge railway system. Because of the existing historical and
technical constraints, the existing rail system is incompatible with mainland European standards, thus
there is a consensus that Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania need to be fully integrated into the wider
13
European rail transport system. Currently there is no efficient 1435 mm railway connection along the
Warsaw-Kaunas-Riga-Tallinn axis, i.e. there are missing links or significant bottlenecks. Thus, there are
no direct passenger or freight services along the railway axis as the existing infrastructure does not
allow for competitive services compared to alternative modes of transport. Thus, the clear majority of
the North-South freight is being transported by road transport and the overall accessibility in the region
is low.
The ambitions of the Rail Baltica Global Project are:
• to become a powerful catalyst for sustainable economic growth in the Baltic States;
• to set a new standard of passenger and freight mobility;
• to ensure a new economic corridor will emerge;
• sustainable employment and educational opportunities;
• an environmentally sustainable infrastructure;
• new opportunities for multimodal freight logistics development;
• new intermodal transport solutions for passengers;
• safety and performance improvements;
• a new value platform for digitalization and innovation;
• completion of Baltic integration in the European Union transport ecosystem.
Rail Baltica is already designed to become a part of the EU TEN-T North Sea – Baltic Core Network
Corridor, which links Europe’s largest ports of Rotterdam, Hamburg and Antwerp – through the
Netherlands, Belgium, Germany and Poland – with the three Baltic States, further connecting to Finland
via the Gulf of Finland short sea shipping connections with a future fixed link possibility between Tallinn
and Helsinki. Further northbound extension of this corridor shall pave the way for future connectivity
also with the emerging Arctic corridor, especially in light of the lucrative prospects of the alternative
Northern Circle maritime route development between Europe and Asia. Furthermore, the North Sea –
Baltic Corridor crosses with the Baltic-Adriatic Corridor in Warsaw, paving the way for new supply chain
development between the Baltic and Adriatic seas, connecting the Baltics with the hitherto
inadequately accessible Southern European markets. In a similar fashion, Rail Baltica shall strengthen
the synergies between North-South and West-East freight flows, creating new trans-shipment and
logistics development opportunities along the Europe and Asia overland trade routes. The new Rail
Baltica infrastructure would, therefore, not only put the Baltics firmly on the European rail logistics map,
but also create massive opportunities for value creation along this infrastructure with such secondary
economic benefits as commercial property development, revitalization of dilapidated urban areas,
private spin-off investment, new business formation, technology transfer and innovation, tourism
development and other catalytic effects. Rail Baltica aims to promote these effects from the early
stages of the Global Project, learning from the key global success stories and benchmarks in this
regard.
The expected core outcome of the Rail Baltica Global Project is a European gauge (1435mm)
doubletrack railway line of almost 900 km in length meant for both passenger and freight transport and
the required additional infrastructure (to ensure full operability of the railway). It will be interoperable
14
with the TEN-T Network in the rest of Europe and competitive in terms of quality with other modes of
transport in the region.
The main technical parameters shall correspond to traffic code P2-F1 as per INF TSI (Commission
Regulation 1299/2014/EU) and shall have the following main technical parameters:
• double track, design speed on the main track 249 km/h, design speed on side tracks minimum
100 km/h;
• axle load 25 t;
• distance between track centres at least 3.80 m on the main tracks;
• distance between two sided passing loops approximately 50 km and crossovers approximately
25 km but staged according to a train traffic forecast;
• all pedestrian, road and 1520mm rail crossings only as above or below grade crossings
(segregated grade crossings), fencing and noise barriers where needed;
• ERTMS Level 2 with possible update to the newest version;
• communications system GSM-R with a view to accommodate the new generation railway
communications standard;
• electrification 2x25 kV AC;
• length of freight trains 740m, but for spatial planning and track geometry design a length of
1050m shall be used;
• length of passenger trains 200m, but for spatial planning and track geometry design a length
of 400m shall be used;
• height of passenger platforms 550mm;
The indicative timeline and phasing of the project implementation can be found here:
http://www.railbaltica.org/about-rail-baltica/project-timeline/.
The contracting authority SIA Eiropas Dzelzceļa līnijas (hereinafter - EDZL) is a state-owned company,
which according to the global project implementation structure (see Fig. 1.1) and the delegation
agreement since 2016 is the implementing party of Rail Baltica Stage One in Latvia. The task of EDZL
is the construction of Rail Baltica public use railway infrastructure in Latvia and the establishment of a
Centre of Competence on European gauge railway.
The diagram below illustrates the shareholder and project governance structure of the Rail Baltica
Global Project.
15
Figure 1.1 Rail Baltica project governance structure
In a result of the procurement and within the Contract scope the Contractor shall execute Works that
among the other things include engineering surveys, design and construction works, author’s
supervision and all the activities necessary for verifications and commissionings of the Riga Central
Passenger station, railway bridge, fly-overs, embankments, overpasses, facilitation premises and
railway line infrastructure. The Contract and the Project is one of the measures in the implementation
of the Rail Baltica global project.
There are three main stages in the development of each individual structure (building, bridge, fly-over,
overpass, railway line):
1. Engineering survey;
2. Design;
3. Construction works.
Works (including, but not limited to engineering survey, design, author supervision, construction works,
dismantling works) shall be carried out according to the Contract, incl., the applicable statutory
requirements and requirements of the present technical specification, i.e., according to the Contract,
Applicable Law and Employer's Requirements.
1.3. Subject of the Procurement
The subject of the procurement is execution of the Works according to the Contract. Execution of the
Works among the other things covers all the Construction works of the Riga Central Passenger station
buildings, bridge, fly-overs and overpasses, embankments, rail track infrastructure and facilitation
premises according to the scope of Works and requirements contained within the Contract, present
Technical Specification and its annexes.
16
The design works to be executed within the framework of the Works includes development and
confimations of the Detailed Technical Design, development and confirmations of any other necessary
detailed technical designs as well as other works execution that results from the respective
documents.
Contractor, when planning and executing the Works, shall take into consideration that during the whole
Contract execution period (including the construction works period) it is planned to continue the using
and exploitation (including but not only for cargo and passenger traffic purposes) of the railway
infrastructure objects (including the ones to be rebuilt) and the Contractor among the other things shall
plan and execute the Works in such manner that provides safe, harmless and uninterrupted usage of
the railway infrastructure objects (including the ones to be rebuilt) through all the Contract execution
period (including the construction works period). Any particular short-term interruptions/outages of the
respective railway infrastructure objects exploitation shall be planned and confirmations shall be
acquired in a timely manner according to the requirements by the Contract and Applicable Law.
Also operation of the railway infrastructure objects to be new-built/rebuilt is planned before
commissioning it into a permanent operation, therefore Contractor, when planning and executing the
Works, shall foresee that it will be necessary to provide commissioning of the Works Sections or their
respective parts into temporary operation. Contractor is responsible for commissioning of the
respectively necessary Works Sections (Sections or their respective parts) into temporary operation,
where it is acceptable by the Applicable Law, in a timely manner.
See the Construction works of the procurement subject split into Sections in Chapter 2 herein.
Project split by structures:
Structure Legend
Riga Central passenger station buildings (see Chapter 4.5)
Lāčplēša Street overpass P-01
Dzirnavu Street overpass P-02
Dzirnavu Street overpass of Rail Baltica P-03
Fly-over from Timoteja Street till Tunnel B P-04
Fly-over from Timoteja Street till Gogoļa Street P-05
Gogoļa Street overpass P-06
Fly-over from Gogoļa Street till Kungu Street P-07
Fly-over from Prāgas Street till Kungu Street P-08
Bridge over Daugava P-09
Bridge over Mazā Daugava P-10
Railway infrastructure section Lāčplēša - Dzirnavu streets
19.092 km – 19.596 km
DIP-01
17
Railway infrastructure section Dzirnavu-Timoteja streets
19.596 km – 19.777 km
DIP-02
Railway infrastructure section Timoteja-Gogoļa streets
19.777 km – 20.018 km
DIP-03
Railway infrastructure section Gogoļa-Prāgas streets 20.018
km – 20.248 km
DIP-04
Railway infrastructure section Prāgas-Maskavas streets
20.248 km – 20.587 km
DIP-05
Railway infrastructure section Maskavas-Jelgavas streets
20.587 km – 21.630 km
DIP-06
Table 1.1. Project split by structures
The Contractor in Contract execution is in charge of the following, but not only:
1. Employing construction experts of relevant qualification in the construction process;
2. Receiving relevant additional technical conditions and approvals, and prolongation of expiry date
of technical conditions received by Contracting Authority from stakeholders and authorities;
3. Inspection, analysis and assessment of all technical parameters, including the technical
parameters identified at earlier studies;
4. Elaboration of the detailed technical design, as well as any other construction documentation
related to performance of Works, elaboration of other detailed technical designs relevant for the
Contract fulfilment along with the delivery of all and any relevant surveys, including engineering-
topography, geotechnical and hydrometeorological surveys;
5. Getting approvals of detailed technical design, getting approvals of other Construction
documentation, other detailed technical designs and relevant approvals to start the construction
works, as well as receiving relevant permits;
6. To receive all relevant (incl. introduction of clarifications) approvals of the Detailed technical design
to receive a positive statement of Construction Expert-examination. The expertise of the detailed
technical design is provided by the Employer or by the authority according to Applicable Law, and
the Contractor is in charge of receiving all approvals of the relevant (incl. introduction of
clarifications) other (related to Project implementation) construction documentation, other (related
to Project implementation) detailed technical designs, positive statement of Construction Expert-
examination (if such is needed according to Engineer’s instructions or Applicable Law), incl. also in
case where due to any reasons an extra or repeated expertise is needed. The expertise on such
detailed technical designs (related to Project implementation) is provided by the Employer or the
authority according to Applicable Law;
7. Elaboration of the Construction Works Programme and communication thereof with the Engineer
and relevant authorities;
8. Elaboration of the quality control system of construction works according to profile, type and scope
of works to be undertaken; the system shall include: initial control of construction works'
18
performance documentation, construction products and structures, appliances, mechanisms and
similar devices; technological control of individual work operations or processes; final control of
the completed (to be delivered) work type of construction work cycle (structural element);
9. Author supervision, incl. on other works to be done by the Project contractors (see Specific
Regulations of the Contract) according to Engineer’s instructions.
10. To receive verification of Detailed technical design and construction works to introduce relevant
clarifications according to Engineer’s requirements, requirements by the competent authorities and
the Technical specification for interoperability relating to the rail system in the European Union,
incl. receiving a positive NoBo verification statement(s);
11. Organisation of additional measures during the Works, where such measures are relevant to ensure
public safety and the uninterrupted operation of AS „Rīgas starptautiskā autoosta” (International
Bus Terminal Riga) and other (incl. railway) elements of urban infrastructure;
12. Receiving all relevant (including, but not limited to individual building permits and technical
conditions), which are relevant for the demolition (dismantling) of structures, which are not
included within the existing building permits (such as, for the demolition of the commercial building
and multi-storey car parking „Titāniks“ an individual building permit from Riga City Construction
Board shall be acquired);
13. Amendments to existing building permits in case of need, where such amendments shall be
communicated with the Engineer and the Employer;
14. Suitability of activities and methods used at the construction site, and regarding the stability and
safety of performed construction activities;
15. Organising and carrying out construction works according to contractual and Applicable Law
requirements, incl. carrying out, organising and managing the work of Sub-Contractors, and the
construction, connection, disconnection of relevant public utilities’ networks, and carrying out the
relevant dismantling works to meet contractual liabilities;
16. Establishment of a monitoring system to monitor the impact by construction works on environment
and monitoring thereof during construction works;
17. Supply, storage and installation, development and integration of the equipment, elements, spare
parts, structures, construction products and materials relevant for the performance of works;
18. Use of contract-complying construction products, materials, facilities, equipment, spare parts,
structures and elements in construction works and provision of relevant documentation supporting
the compliance;
19. Delivery and installation of facilities and systems to be installed within the Works;
20. Work inspections, including field work and laboratory tests on construction structures, elements
and materials within the quality control;
21. Elaboration and submission of performance documentation and other Works-related
documentation according to Applicable Law and Contract, and the commissioning of structures
(incl. temporary and permanent commissioning), as well as elaboration and submission of other
Construction documentation stipulated by the Applicable Law, e.g., in relation to construction,
connection, disconnection and dismantling of public utilities networks within the Works;
22. Training of the Employer’s staff or staff assigned by the latter;
23. Meeting liabilities of due quality during the defect announcement period;
19
24. Drafting and submitting the content of the Structures' information modelling (hereinafter – BIM) to
the Employer according to requirements under Chapter 3.11 herein and the Design guidelines
(Annex 9).
25. Meeting all other Contractor’s contractual duties.
1.4. Deadlines for the performance of Works
Section One of the Works shall be completed by the Contractor within no later than 21 (twenty-one)
months starting from Contract conclusion date.
Section Two of the Works shall be completed by the Contractor not later than by 31 December 2022.
Section Three of the Works shall be completed by the Contractor within no later than 27 (twenty-seven)
months starting from the date of issue of the Order for performance of the Section Three by the
Employer.
Section Four of the Works shall be completed by the Contractor within no later than 18 (eighteen)
months starting from the date of issue of the Order for performance of the Section Four by the
Employer.
1.5. Location for the performace of Works
Riga Central Passenger Station, urban and railway infrastructure in the section from Lāčplēša Street to
Jelgavas Street. See project territory attached as Annex 3.
1.6. The framework of the Financial Offer
The offer price shall include all and any costs relevant and sufficient to ensure the Contract is fulfilled
of due quality and according all contractual provisions, requirements imposed by the Contracting
Authority and within set deadlines. The offer price shall include all activities to carry out the design,
construction works and other relevant activities and put the structures under procurement subject into
service, incl. all costs of relevant materials, labour, transport, mechanisms, and work organisation
measures, administrative and other expenditures relevant for the performance of works in accordance
with the terms and conditions of the Contract.
The work costs shall provide for the renewal of structures or surfaces affected or damaged during the
Works, i.e., renewal of infrastructure, streets, sidewalks and lawns.
In the Financial Offer, the costs of Works shall cover all costs of materials, labour, machinery and other
related to the construction of 1435 mm track gauge superstructure (incl. rail tracks); however, the
Employer is entitled to reject the materials proposed by the Contractor for respective works; in such
case the Employer shall provide the relevant materials for the construction of 1435 mm track gauge
superstructure and the Contractor carries out the construction works with these materials, and is paid
20
only for the work undertaken (labour, machinery, additional materials), excluding the costs of materials
for the rail superstructure from its financial offer.
1.7. Description and characterization of the existing situation of the Works
execution area
1.7.1. Urban development
The territory of Works execution is in close proximity of Old Riga and UNESCO World Heritage listed
protection zone of Riga Historical Centre.
The most important era in the build-up of Riga City Centre began mid-19th century when Riga
fortification ramparts were allowed to be demolished. In 1856, by order of Tsar Alexander II, the
liquidation of Riga city fortification was approved, which started the emerging changes in the urban
construction. In 1857, the leading city architect J.D.Felsko, with the participation of architect O.Dice,
elaborated the reconstruction plan of Riga protective rampart and esplanade for the territory in-
between the existing 13.Janvāra Street and Turgeņeva Street.
Figure 1.2. Riga, 1860 Author F.Totleben (1862)
The fragment of Riga plan by F.Totleben of 1862 depicts the Old Riga and the newly erected railway
line Riga-Daugavpils, which was launched in 1861, and the Kārlis swimming-pool. Kārlis swimming-
pool was built already in 1792 at the southern part of the fortification ditch, which is nowadays seen
as the extended section of the city channel – stretching from Daugava till the culvert under the railway
embankment. The swimming-pool was established as winter harbour and it was navigable by small
vessels, which were able to go to the sea after the winter and the after the ice had melted. In the SE
part of Old Riga, toward the suburb Maskava, there was designed a transport and commercial zone
with railway station, market, storage area and harbour pool.
21
1.7.2. Railway bridge over Daugava
Thanks to the modernisation of Riga Port, the first railway bridge (Zemgale Bridge or also called –
Metal (Dzelzs) Bridge) over Daugava due to Bolderāja railway construction was built by the newly
established Rīga-Bolderāja railway society (based on a state-granted concession) in 1872.
Figure 1.3. Metal bridge (Zemgale bridge) over Daugava made of uninterrupted metal bearing system, 1872
Zemgale Bridge was an efficient solution to solve the Riga centre traffic problems, since on the side of
Old Riga a fly-over was leading to the bridge over Daugava bank. The bridge was reserved only for
railway, but also pedestrians, and therefore the rail tracks were located in the middle of the bridge with
wide pedestrian lanes on both sides of the bridge. The use of the bridge by horse-pulled traffic was
subject to a charge. Demolished during World War I and renewed later. Following a thorough renovation
of the bridge in the 30s of the 20th century the bridge was adjusted to accommodate horse-pulled
vehicles. During World War II the bridge was blown up and was never restored. Only bridge piers are
preserved until nowadays.
The clarity of the spatial structure of the central part of the city was slightly deformed by the railway
embankment SE of the Old Riga, which was built in 1873 following the construction of Metal Bridge.
Already since 1872, the fortification area was crossed by railway embankment.
In Autumn 1880 the city construction board reviewed the Old Riga reconstruction plan and accepted it
in general. To improve traffic with Old Riga, according to the plan Kungu Street should be extended,
while rail tracks should be placed on a fly-over with free traffic flows going all direction underneath it,
and constructing shops and other institutions, which would generate income to partly cover the
construction costs of the fly-over. The city construction board deemed such proposal as being too
unrealistic for that time, however with future potential (source: (J.Krastiņš „Eklektisms Rīgas
arhitektūrā, 1988).
The design of a new railway bridge with eight arched bearings was started in 1902. Bridge designers
were P.Vozņesenskis and A.Žibers. The construction of a bridge over Daugava was related to the
22
reconstruction of the whole railway hub, and it lasted from 1909 to 1914. In the central part of the city,
all rail tracks were placed on embankments and several overpasses were built over the streets.
Figure 1.4. Metal bridges in 1917 following the withdrawal of Russian army
During World War II (in 1944) the railway bridge was blown up, and later it was restored. The still
operating railway bridge over Daugava was launched in 1950 (it was completely renewed only in 1955).
The bridge was put on bridge piers built in 1914 according to the design of the Leningrad Bridge Design
Institute engineer A.Starcew. In 1945–1951 trains over Daugava in Riga ran along the temporary bridge
built by the Soviet army; a bridge standing on wooden piles, and the bridge was built within 1.5 months
upstream of the exploded railway bridge.
1.7.3. Railway station
The construction of the first railway station in Riga started already in 1858, and it was finished already
in 1860. There were only two platforms and four rail tracks at the station. On ground floor, there were
passenger premises, while on the first floor there was the Riga–Orla railway chancellery, mobilisation
unit and legal department. In the right wing, there was the telegraph, office of the manager of the
station, office of the station ward, while in the left wing – post office and gendarme police office. In
1861, the first railway line in Latvia running from Riga to Daugavpils, along with the first passenger
railway station building in Riga, a small house of 2 storeys, was launched. In 1884–1885, according to
the plan of the architect H.Scheel the station was extended with three-storey lateral buildings and the
waiting rooms were improved.
In the second half of 19th century, there were two stations in Riga – Dunaburg station (the present
central station) and Riga–Bolderāja or the later Tukums railway station. Dunaburg station served traffic
running East and South, while Tukums station (the station existed as a separate station until the central
station was launched shortly before WWI) the traffic running West. Tukums station was built in the
place of the former Kārlis Gate, opposite of Kungu Street, at the railway access embankment along the
present 13. Janvāra Street.
According to Riga railway reconstruction plan of 1902 a single railway station for all incoming trains in
Riga was developed. Until the beginning of WWI, the plan was only partly developed; „Riga I“ became
the Riga central railway station, while the station building itself was not finished. A new station plan
was elaborated in 1937, however its implementation was stopped by WWII.
23
Figure 1.5. Old Dünaburg station before WW2
Figure 1.6. Riga Central Station in 1934, view to platforms
In the 30s of 20th century, with the start of monumental construction in Latvia, there was an idea to
reconstruct the humble, classical Riga station giving it a new look. However, the idea was not
implemented. The initial station building was torn down only in the 50s, when the new station building
was erected.
The new station introduced radical changes to the Riga City Centre settings – the former at grade rail
tracks vanished, railway workshops and the buildings near Marijas Street were demolished to give room
to the existing Station Square and the new section of Satekles Street. The new station, which was built
according to the plan designed by Leningrad architects V.Kuzņecovs and V.Cipuļins, visually largely
24
resembled the idea of Latvian architects of 1937, which was not implemented due to WWII and the
Soviet occupation. From 1959 to 1965 the new Riga railway station was erected – Stage 1 of the station
was launched on 20 July 1960 – the passenger, service and technical premises, while in 1965 the post
building and inter-city traffic cash offices were opened.
Next to the new railway station, in 1965 the Station Clock was launched, which initially served the
functions of a water tower to supply water to the station. In the 70s the clock-face was changed to
digital screen.
The station faced significant changes in 2003, when it was joined by the shopping centre „Origo“ next
to it. The old station clock made of metal structures was torn down and instead of that a new, equally
high clock tower with a glass outbuilding and cafés was erected.
1.7.4. Bus terminal
After WWII, with the traffic developments in Riga a need for a bus terminal arouse. The design of it was
developed by “Pilsētprojekts”, and it was implemented in 1964 based on the plan by G.Mincs. The bus
terminal is located in the historical city centre, next to Central Market, at the side of the railway
embankment.
According to the bus terminal plan, the channel bank should have been reconstructed to give room to
the buses to turn around and to passenger platforms. The administrative premises of the terminal are
perpendicularly to the railway embankment. For the passenger shelters, the architect G.Mincs designed
light-weight, open shelters along the railway embankment and the channel. For the purposes of
organisation of pedestrian traffic, an underground tunnel from Vaļņu Street was developed, which
made the traffic flow organisation on 13. Janvāra Street significantly easier.
1.7.5. Riga Central Market
In 1922, Riga City Council adopted a decision on the establishment and construction of the central food
market in the city. The plan was designed under the lead of the city architect P.Dreimanis. Between
1924 and 1930 a huge project was implemented – Riga City Central Market, which was the largest and
most modern in Europe. The metal structures for the five market pavilions came from Vaiņode zeppelin
hangars and these were adjusted to the new dimensions (h=20.5m, width 35 m) with freezers in the
basement and the spacey indoors was equipped with modern ventilation systems. Market halls were
linked to the city channel bank by underground hallways, while the pavilions were linked with covered
corridors with each other. Within the project, a special railway tie-in should have been built between
the red storage houses and the city channel, for the purposes of the new market. The fifth pavilion
(meat) respectively was placed perpendicularly to the rest of the dimensions, and next to it a railway
platform, warehouses and service premises were built thinking of a station in future.
Riga Central Market pavilions are an architecture monument of national significance – „Central Market
pavilion build-up premises“ (state protection No. 6633).
25
Figure 1.7. Pavilions of the Central Market before WW2.
1.7.6. Description of the curent situation
The territory is to some extent part of the Riga City Centre Boulevard circle, which in this place is
spatially fragmented by houses, streets and the railway embankment.
The key objects located around Riga Central Passenger Station include (this is not an exhaustive list)
the Ministry of Transport and VAS ”Latvijas Dzelzceļš” building, Hotel “Mercure”, Riga Taxi Fleet
microbus station, various retail shops along Satekles Street, shopping centre Stockmann, Riga City
channel and the park walks along the channel and Riga Central Market. The study territory, on Abrenes
Street, borders with the end destination stop of urban public transport (bus) with a respective parking
lot.
At the place, where the current bus terminal is located – Prāgas Street 1, further development is limited
due to the territory restrictions, and it lacks the capacity to provide bus parking, which is why the buses
while waiting for their next route are parked on the streets in Krasta Street block. More than one third
of passengers arriving to Riga from Kurzeme and Zemgale move to various suburbs on the left bank
of Daugava (Pārdaugava area). Due to the poor infrastructure accessibility and public transport
network, the passengers are forced to go to the bus terminal in the city centre and later take public
transport back to Pārdaugava, which results in a waste of time and money, as well as excessive load
on Riga City transport and traffic infrastructure.
See archive materials depicting individual structures affected by the project in Annex 1. Employer does
not take any responsibility for correctness and corresponcence of the Annex 1 content to the actual
situation in the field. If the Contractor identifies differences between the actual situation in the field
and the information from documents in Annex 1, it can not be used as a basis for extra cost to be
covered by the Employer. It is recognized that the Contractor has included in the initial Financial Offer
all the costs related to such risks.
26
1.7.7. Other projects affecting the territory
In the fulfilment of the Contract, the Contractor shall take into account the probable impact of other
development projects affecting the territory. Below are listed the projects known to the Contracting
Authority; the Contractor is in charge of the update and clarification of the list.
1. The reconstruction of the canal bank within Riga Central Market territory, in the section from
Maskavas Street to Prāgas Street and from Prāgas Street in direction to Gogoļa Street, as well as
the reconstruction of pavement on Centrāltirgus Street and sidewalk in the section from Prāgas
Street towards Maskavas and Gogoļa street is scheduled within the project „Riga Central Market
territory development Stage 1“. The project is expected to be implemented by Spring 2020;
2. The territory within Zaķusala Island is part of the territory, which is subject to the Zaķusala Island
Northern area usage and build-up regulations adopted in November 2017;
3. Construction works of the business centre „Origo“, address: Stacijas laukums 1, are ongoing;
4. Multimodal traffic hub in the suburb of Torņakalns;
5. Reconstruction of Merķeļa Street pavement; elaborated Approval card, estimated implementation
period – 2018.
6. Reconstruction of pavement on Marijas Street in the section from Merķeļa Street to A.Čaka Street
and on A.Čaka Street in the section from Marijas Street to Ērgļu Street. Estimated implementation
period – 2019.
7. Construction and renewal of facilitated urban access infrastructure in the relevant scope in
Turgeņeva Street; Project under elaboration, estimated implementation period – 2018;
8. Construction of Ģertrūdes Street tunnel. Elaborated building design;
9. Pavement reconstruction on Krasta Street in the section from Salu Bridge to Ogres Street.
Estimated implementation period – 2018.
10. Reconstruction of the Daugava bank promenade on Mūkusalas Street. The construction works are
expected to be launched at the end of 2018.
11. Pavement reconstruction on Elizabetes Street in the section from Eksporta Street to E.Birznieka
Upīša Street; completed construction works, commissioning is ongoing, estimated implementation
period – 2018;
12. Pavement reconstruction on Dzirnavu Street in the section from Gogoļa Street to Tērbatas Street;
elaborated Statement card, commissioning is ongoing, estimated implementation period – 2018;
13. Renovation of the pedestrian tunnel leading from Central Market to railway station; construction is
ongoing, estimated implementation period – October 2017;
14. Construction works regarding the academic centre of the University of Latvia in Torņakalns.
1.7.8. Local planning
By Riga City Council decision No. 3782 of 17 May 2016 (subject to its amendments adopted by Riga
City Council decision No. 1230 of 23 May 2018) a local planning to elaborate a local planning of public
use railway line Rail Baltica route and related urban infrastructure territory was started (see Annex 28).
27
1.8. Available documents to start the design works
1. Documents approving the rights to land use:
• SIA “Eiropas Dzelzceļa līnijas” will conclude a contract with VAS “Latvijas Dzelzceļš” on the
rights to use land units.
2. Land border plans:
• See Annex 2.
3. Technical drawings of current situation:
• The borders of the construction object, including the construction site (see Annex 3).
• Topographic surveys (2015) are carried out within the “RB Latvija” study „Detailed technical
study and environmental impact assessment of the Latvian section of the European gauge
railway line Rail Baltica“ and its findings are attached in the annex thereof, as well as are
available in digital format as .dwg files. (See Annex 4 and Annex 5).
4. Regarding building permits and respective design conditions (see Annex 6):
• Building permit issued on 23/10/2017 by State Railway Technical Inspectorate regarding the
construction object „Elaboration of a construction plan and construction works of Rail
Baltica Riga railway bridge, embankment and Riga central passenger station premises”.
Stage 1. Reconstruction of Riga Central Passenger Station building and passenger platforms,
reconstruction and facilitation of the territory adjoining the building”;
• Building permit issued on 23/10/2017 by State Railway Technical Inspectorate regarding the
construction object „Elaboration of a construction plan and construction works of Rail
Baltica Riga railway bridge, embankment and Riga central passenger station premises”.
Stage 2. Construction of new railway bridge for Rail Baltica 1435 mm gauge tracks in the
section from Maskavas Street to Jelgavas Street”;
• Building permit issued on 23/10/2017 by State Railway Technical Inspectorate regarding the
construction object „Elaboration of a construction plan and construction works of Rail
Baltica Riga railway bridge, embankment and Riga central passenger station premises”.
Stage 3. Reconstruction of existing railway infrastructure owned by VAS “Latvijas Dzelzceļš”
for the purposes of 1520 mm gauge tracks and construction of Rail Baltica railway
infrastructure for the 1435 mm gauge tracks in the section from Jelgavas Street to Lāčplēša
Street.”
5. Technical and specific conditions (see Annex 7):
• Technical conditions of 22/01/2018 issued by VAS “Latvijas Dzelzceļš“;
• Technical conditions of 28/12/2017 issued by AS “Sadales tīkls“;
• Technical conditions of 29/12/2017 issued by SIA “Lattelecom“;
• Technical conditions of 22/12/2017 issued by VAS “Latvijas Valsts ceļi“;
• Technical conditions of 26/02/2018 issued by Riga City Transport Department;
• Technical conditions of 04/12/2017 issued by Riga municipal agency “Rīgas Gaisma”;
• Technical conditions of 20/12/2017 issued by AS “Rīgas Siltums“;
• Technical conditions of 16/01/2018 issued by AS ”Gaso”;
• Technical conditions of 18/01/2018 issued by AS “Rīgas starptautiskā autoosta”;
28
• Technical conditions of 10/01/2018 issued by State Environmental Service Lielrīga regional
environmental board;
• Technical conditions of 15/01/2018 issued by State Inspection for Heritage Protection;
• Technical conditions of 09/04/2018, 12/03/2018 and 06/03/2018 issued by Riga City
Construction Board;
• The answer of 21/12/2018. By Ministry of Agriculture on technical conditions request;
• chnical conditions of 31/01/2018 issued by Riga municipal SIA “Rīgas Satiksme” (provided
separately after the issuance of this Technical Specification);
• Technical conditions of 22/06/2018 issued by Riga municipal SIA “Rīgas Ūdens” (provided
separately after the issuance of this Technical Specification).
6. Statement No.5 by the State Environmental Bureau regarding the EIA report on the construction of
European gauge width public use railway infrastructure Rail Baltica of 03/05/2016. (See Annex 8).
The provisions included in the statement are binding during the whole course of Project
implementation. The Contractor shall study the statement at the preparation of its offer;
7. Rail Baltica Design guidelines (see Annex 9);
8. Sketch design R2I0G1A6 developed in 2017 by PLH Arhitekter, which was underlying to the
elaboration of the construction concept of the construction object (see Annex 10) and author’s
confirmed amendments of the Sketch design (see Annex 11);
9. Building Design in a Minimum Composition of 2017 “Elaboration of the construction project and
construction works of Rail Baltica's Riga Railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central
Passenger Station premises“ (see Annex 12).
1.9. Other study materials
• Study „Integration of Rail Baltica railway line within the Riga central multimodal public
transportation hub – elaboration of the technical solution“ by the partnership “AECOM Rail
Baltica Latvia Central Station Joint Venture”, 29 January 2016 (see Annex 13). (hereinafter –
AECOM study). AECOM study has been underlying to the elaboration of architecture sketch
design and the construction plan at minimum content
• Study „Determination and study of cultural heritage within the partition zone of Rail Baltica
route, section in Latvia“. The study is planned to be carried out in 2018, and it will be followed
by a statement and design recommendations;
• Summary form the previous geology surveys. The Contracting Authority has collated
information available in the archives of VSIA “Latvijas Vides, ģeoloģijas un metereoloģijas
centra” and VAS “Latvijas Dzelzceļš” regarding geology surveys/studies carried out within the
Project territory or close to it. (See Annex 14).
1.10. Land and structures acquisition process
Mainly according to Article 15 of Railway Law, land under Project’s public use railway infrastructure is
state property.
29
The acquisition of right to use the relevant real estate properties needed for Project’s public use railway
infrastructure is organised and ensured by Employer, which includes the acquisition of relevant real
estate properties for the need of general public.
Since the acquisition of real estate properties for the purposes of general public is time-consuming
and may take several years, the Contractor shall consider the acquisition process and expected
duration when planning its works, and it shall also consider that one of the design conditions of the
building permit for execution of Works is the acquisition of rights to use the real estate properties
affected by the design. It shall be noted that the real estate may cover both structures, land registered
according to Applicable Law, and non-registered structures, land, where the title to these may also be
unclear, vague.
In planning the works, the Contractor shall bear in mind that the Employer may undertake the
compulsory purchase of real estates relevant for the Project’s public use railway infrastructure by 30
June 2020 and the Contractor may not request, receive any compensation, reimbursement and/or
prolongation of Contract milestones (incl., any interim milestones), or file any claims against the
Employer, incl. for the compensation of losses, lost profit, etc., where the Employer does not provide
the real estate usage rights, approvals relevant for Project implementation by the expiry of the said
deadline. Where due to Employer the real estate compulsory purchase or real estate usage rights,
receipt of approvals relevant for the Project’s public use railway infrastructure is delayed for more than
six (6) months starting from the final deadline set within this clause as the final expiry date for the real
estate compulsory purchase relevant for the Project’s public use railway infrastructure and if thus the
Contractor cannot complete a material part of design works within the Works, the Contractor shall
according to the Contract be entitled to requesting prolongation of respective milestone(s) (however,
the prolongation of the overall deadline for the performance of Works is only allowed according to the
procedures and in cases stipulated by the Contract), and in case the Engineer and the Employer
according to contractual procedures deem such request by the Contractor to be satisfied, the Employer
may freely, at its own discretion (and following the receipt of recommendations by the Engineer) decide,
whether to grant such prolongation of the respective milestone(s) to the Contractor, or may according
to contractual provisions compensate, reimburse for costs incurred to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure that the built railway infrastructure (rail tracks, bridges, overpasses,
communications and other railway systems) fit in their respective railway partition zone. See the
envisaged partition zone in Annex 15.
The infrastructure for access, facilitation, pedestrian or passenger flow, such as cycle road ramps, may
be placed on land owned by municipality, if this is communicated with the municipality.
1.11. List of applicable legal acts and documents
In the Contract fulfilment and delivery of Works according to Procurement subject, the Contractor shall
apply and meet the following legal acts and documents:
1. Applicable EU laws (e.g., Technical specification for interoperability relating to the rail system in
the European Union (TSI) and other);
30
2. Laws and regulations of the Republic of Latvia;
3. Rail Baltica Design Guidelines;
4. Statement No.5 by the State Environmental Bureau regarding the EIA report on the construction of
European gauge width public use railway infrastructure Rail Baltica of 03/05/2016. (See Annex 8);
5. Building Design in a Minimum Composition “Elaboration of the construction project and
construction works of Rail Baltica's Riga Railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central
Passenger Station premises“ (Annex 12);
6. Sketch design R2I0G1A6 developed by PLH Arkitekter (Annex 10);
7. Study „Integration of Rail Baltica railway line within the Riga central multimodal public
transportation hub - elaboration of the technical solution“ by “AECOM Rail Baltica Latvia Central
Station Joint Venture”, February 2016 (Annex 13).
31
2. PROJECT SECTIONS
2.1. Introduction
According to Submission of Construction Intention the performance of Works is split into three rounds
subject to three construction permits to be received by the Employer, while according to the Contract
the Works have been split into five Sections. Besides the construction permits provided by the
Employer, the Contractor shall independently receive any other construction permits relevant for the
performance of Works under the Contract.
During the elaboration of the Detailed Technical Design, the Contractor may offer a more detailed
breakdown of Sections/rounds of construction, which enable the performance of Works according to
Employer’s requirements, set limitations and Work deadlines (incl., interim deadlines); however, in case
of an optional breakdown of Sections/rounds of construction, the five Sections of Works under this
Technical specification and Contract cannot be merged.
To provide for compatibility of solutions at places where the rounds or Sections border with each other,
especially in case of rail track design, and thus to enable successful Project implementation, the three
Detailed technical designs under Chapter 4.1, and all other Construction documentation relevant and
desired for the complete performance of Works shall be elaborated.
The elaboration of documentation of the Detailed technical design within the Project, shall be done in
two consecutive phases – first, elaboration and approvals of Master design according to contractual
procedures, and, second, elaboration of Detailed technical design documentation (incl., receipt of
remark(s) on the detailed technical design(s) approving that all design conditions have been met) and
all other Construction documentation relevant and desired for the complete performance of Works.
2.2. Sections of the Procurement subject
The procurement subject consists of four Sections of Works:
Section One of Works – all planning, survey and detailed technical design works to be carried out within
the Project.
Within this Section, all planning, survey and detailed technical design works to be carried out within the
Project (incl., elaboration of the Detailed technical design documentation and other documentation
relevant for the Project implementation, and approval thereof) are carried out. For a successful Project
implementation and to consider all relevant temporary 1520 mm gauge infrastructure solutions, the
design of all Sections shall be mutually linked, i.e., twinning with the construction of rail tracks under
Section Two, Three and Four;
Section Two of Works – reconstruction and territory improvement works, as well as author supervision
works of the Southern part of the Riga Central Passenger Station, commissioning thereof and receipt
and execution of all other approvals, permits and verifications, and submission of all documents
established in the Employer’s requirements.
32
Within the Section Two, it is planned to close the Southern part of the train station for train traffic and
to perform construction works in section from Lāčplēša Street to Maskavas Street. Tracks No. 5, 6, 7,
8, 9, 18, 19 and 20 shall be closed in the Southern part. Simultaneously passenger platforms No. 4 and
5 shall be dismantled. Train traffic shall be ensured on the remaining station tracks, rearranging the
connections of station switches and rebuilding the existing signalling and telecommunication
equipment. By closing 1520mm tracks in the Southern part of the station, tail tracks No. 14 and 15 of
the station are planned to be partially closed according to the work performance boundaries specified
in the Detailed Technical Design. Simultaneously the Contractor shall perform all necessary relocation
and transfer works of communication and engineering systems (including catenaries and air blowing
systems) to ensure movement of rolling stock in the remaining station tracks in accordance with the
Cabinet Regulations No. 724 “Regulations on Railway Technical Operation”.
In the site of the closed tracks, all necessary dismantling and preparation works are planned to be performed, as well as construction works necessary for commissioning of at least the following structures:
1) Construction of overpasses P-01; P-03; P-05; P-06; P-07, as well as overpasses P-04 and P-02 in the necessary amount;
2) Complex of the station buildings from axis A-A up to the border of Southern/Northern section;
3) Infrastructure of all tracks within Southern section, ensuring its usability after commissioning of the Section Two;
4) Access and improvement works within Southern section of the station;
5) Reconstruction of all communications and engineering networks, ensuring their operation at least in the amount established in the Employer’s requirements, the Detailed Technical Design and the technical conditions;
6) Performance of all other necessary works necessary for completion of the Section Two of the Works.
Section Three of Works – construction and author supervision works of the new railway bridge for Rail
Baltica 1435 mm tracks in section from Maskavas Street to Jelgavas Street, commissioning thereof, as
well as receipt and execution of all other approvals, permits and verifications, and submission of all
documents established in the Employer’s requirements.
Within this Section, a new railway crossing is built over Daugava in the section from Maskavas Street
till Jelgavas Street, including construction and reconstruction of all bridges and overpasses,
embankments, track infrastructure, relevant infrastructure for emergency services access and
passenger evacuation roads, safety and restricting facilities (construction works). The works cover
also facilitation of adjoining territories, as well as all other construction works relevant for the Section
and Project implementation.
Section Four of Works – construction and author supervision works of the Northern part of the Riga
Central Station, commissioning thereof, as well as receipt and execution of all other approvals, permits
and verifications, and submission of all documents established in the Employer’s requirements.
33
Within the Section Four, it is planned to close the Northern part of the station for train traffic and to
perform construction works in section from Lāčplēša Street to Maskavas Street. Within this section,
the main tracks No. 1, No. 2, No. 3 and station tracks No. 4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 21 are
planned to be closed for train traffic. Simultaneously passenger platforms No. 1, 2 and 3 shall be
dismantled. Train traffic shall be ensured on the remaining station tracks, rearranging the connections
of station switches and rebuilding the existing signalling and telecommunication equipment.
Simultaneously the Contractor shall perform all necessary relocation and transfer works of
communication and engineering systems (including catenaries and air blowing systems) to ensure
movement of rolling stock on the remaining station tracks in accordance with the Cabinet Regulations
No. 724 “Regulations on Railway Technical Operation”.
In the site of the closed tracks, all necessary dismantling and preparation works are planned to be
performed, as well as construction works necessary for commissioning of at least the following
structures:
1) Overpass P-08; as well as overpasses P-02 and P-04 in the remaining amount;
2) Reconstruction of the station in the amount remaining from the border of the Section Two/Four;
3) Infrastructure of all tracks within the Southern section, ensuring its usability after commissioning of the Section Two;
4) Access and improvement works within Southern section of the station;
5) Reconstruction of all communications and engineering networks, ensuring their operation at least in the amount established in the Employer’s requirements, the Detailed Technical Design and the technical conditions;
6) Performance of all other necessary works necessary for completion of the Section Two of the Works.
Following reconstruction of tracks in the Northern part, the Section includes dismantling of 1520 mm
railway infrastructure (including tracks, switches, SCB system and catenaries) in the Southern part of
the station and construction of 1435 mm railway infrastructure (including tracks and switches) in
accordance with the Construction Intention.
During the course of Work performance, the Engineer is entitled to clarify, adjust the borders of each
Section of Works and/or the part of Works relating to each Section of Works, and regarding this the
Contractor is obliged to meet, introduce such instructions by the Engineer, incl. in the documentation
elaborated (or to be elaborated) in respect of the Section, and regarding this the the Contractor is not
entitled to claiming, receiving any compensation, reimbursement and/or prolongation of deadlines
(incl., any interim milestones, Contract deadlines), or file any claims against the Employer, incl. for the
compensation of losses, lost profit, or other costs.
2.3. Construction works excluded from the Contract
The previously elaborated studies and architecture sketch design have indicated several structural
elements, which lie within the borders of the Project's borders (are located on-site of Works), yet are
34
not part of the contractual Works. The Contractor shall elaborate master design of the following
elements. Construction works of the elements listed below shall not be carried out under the Contract:
- Unless the contractual provision stipulate otherwise, the construction works relevant for the
construction of 1435 mm gauge signalling and contact line networks will be done by “other
Project contractors” or the performance of these works will be organised by “AS RB Rail”, but
the Contractor will have to construct piers of these contact line networks, and it will also have
to carry out the design and author supervision works (technically related and related works)
(the Contract covers the installation of piers of contact line networks and the construction of
signalling and communication systems relevant for the 1435 mm gauge tracks, but except
cable laying and installation of field facilities, except for cases when this is needed to enable
commissioning of the structure);
- Construction of the bus terminal and car park next to Timoteja Street.
But for the purposes of the bus terminal planned next to Timoteja Street the Contractor within
the framework of the Contract shall design and build:
• asphalt concrete pavement for bus loads (11.5t per axle, 2 axles, with intensity of 500 buses per 24h);
• rainwater drainage;
• continuous permanent barriers with lockable gates that prevent entering of unauthorized vehicles;
• architectonic wall finish; • lighting as required by PRM TSI for platform lighting;
• video surveillance; • fire safety solutions;
• measures for pedestrian movement organization; • passenger information system;
• 2 outlets of utilities sheath tubes – each being 200m2 area and with diameter of 100mm.
Also, for the purposes of the car park planned next to Timoteja Street the Contractor within the
framework of the Contract shall design and build:
• asphalt concrete pavement for light car parking loads;
• rainwater drainage; • continuous permanent barriers with lockable gates that prevent entering of
unauthorized vehicles;
• architectonic wall finish;
• lighting as needed for car parking areas; • video surveillance;
• fire safety solutions; • measures for pedestrian movement organization;
• passenger information system;
• 2 outlets of utilities sheath tubes – each being 200m2 area and with diameter of 100mm;
• vertical planning of the area shall be suited for later development of two level parking lot. Construction of ramp is not necessary.
35
- Construction of extra commercial areas. (The Contract covers dismantling of commercial
premises of Riga Central passenger station and creating new commercial premises at least in
the same area (meeting the previous functions), and the construction of relevant public utilities
networks’ connections for the area tenant to adapt and use these for the purposes of the
commercial premises).
36
3. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COOPERATION
3.1. Stakeholders
Ministry of Transport (MoT) of the Republic of Latvia – beneficiary of the project Rail Baltica in the
Republic of Latvia.
LDz - VAS “Latvijas Dzelzceļš” – MoT-owned joint stock company, which is the owner of Riga Central
Passenger Station and 1520 mm gauge railway infrastructure.
AS “RB Rail” – coordinator of Rail Baltica global project.
State Railway Technical Inspectorate – authority undertaking the functions of a construction board.
Riga City Construction Board – Riga City Construction Board is a municipal authority subordinate to
the Riga City Mayor coordinating and undertaking monitoring and control of construction process
within Riga city administrative territory.
State Construction Control Bureau of Latvia – a public administration authority subordinate to the
Ministry of Economics, which on behalf of the state controls construction works and supervises
structure operation, in the cases laid ot in Applicable Law organises expertise and grants the rights of
individual practice, and supervises individual practices.
Notified Body or NoBo – an authority to assess the Works (or a particular part) compatibility to the
technical specifications for interoperability relating to the ‘infrastructure’ subsystem of the rail system
in the European Union.
PLH Arkitekter A/S (hereinafter – PLH) – authors of the sketch design solutions of the Project.
3.2. Project coordination and meetings
3.2.1. Project coordination
The following requirements for coordination of project activities shall not replace any of the provisions
of the Contract and shall not prevail thereof. If any contradictions between these requirements and the
provisions of the Contract are found, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing thereof and the
Engineer shall issue instructions or take decisions in accordance with the procedure stipulated in the
Contract.
The Contractor shall coordinate the Construction activities contained in the various sections of the
Technical Specifications and shall coordinate the cooperation during the performance of the Works.
The Contractor shall:
1. Manage and perform the design works, incl. shall also coordinate the compliance of the separate
parts of the Detailed Technical Design with the Detailed Technical Design as a whole;
2. Check the compliance of the separate parts of the Detailed Technical Design with the Construction
Intention and their mutual consistency;
3. Ensure the mutual consistency between the solutions developed within the framework of the
relevant parts;
37
4. Plan the Construction activities in the order approved by the Engineer in order to achieve the best
result;
5. Coordinate the reciprocity of different activities, for example in the installation works of the devices
or equipment, as well as shall ensure the access possibility for maintenance, servicing or repair
purposes;
6. Perform activities to ensure the necessary preconditions for the goods to be installed at the later
stage (including equipment, construction materials);
7. Employ a qualified coordination engineer if necessary or required by the Engineer;
8. Coordinate the performance of Works, activities at the performance place of Works with other
performers of specific construction works or sub-contractors employed by the Employer, as well
as shall coordinate all activities and actions connected with performance of Works or preventing
the performance thereof.
The Contractor, if necessary, shall prepare reports for submitting to each party involved. The report
shall describe in general the specific procedures necessary for the coordination. The necessary time
schedules and the administrative measures shall be coordinated by the Contractor with the Engineer
in order to avoid the conflicts and to ensure the the orderly running of the Works. The administrative
measures shall include but shall not be limited to:
1. Elaboration of schedules and plans;
2. Installation and removal of temporary equipment;
3. Delivery and processing of submitted materials;
4. Progress meetings;
5. Project closing activities.
For the participation in meetings the Contractor shall delegate a representative with a decision-making
rights (hereinafter – the Authorized representative).
In all cases the minutes of the meetings are taken by the Engineer.
The meetings below may be combined, if possible.
3.2.2. Meeting before starting the design
The meeting before starting the design shall take place within 7 days after the day Works are started
and it shall be attended by the Contractor and its proposed main sub-contractors, performers of the
individual construction works, as well as by the Employer and the Engineer. The Engineer is in charge
of the management of the meeting.
On the agenda important issues that may influence the performance of Works must be discussed,
including following items:
1. Sub-contractors, other Project contractors;
2. Design documentation;
3. Information on research, technical regulations and building surveys;
4. Design phases and project development coordination;
5. Signalling part of the Detailed Technical Design;
38
6. Design schedule;
7. Payment applications in the design period;
8. Parts of the Detailed Technical Design to be verified and Expert-examination;
9. Indroduction with Contractor’s organization, organization chart and management team to be
approved by the Engineer.
Initial agreement on form and timing of the main document to be provided by the Contractor within the
first 30 days after starting of the works, icluding:
1. Design and construction programme
2. Design quality control programme
3. Forecasted list of involved sub-contractors for engineering and design stage.
3.2.3. Meeting before starting the construction works
During the execution of Contract, the Engineer is in charge of the organisation, management and
minutes of Work coordination meetings (construction meetings), which are attended by a
representative of the Engineer, representative of the Contractor and, if relevant, other invited
individuals. The representatives of the Employer are entitled to participate in these meetings. The
Contractor at his own cost shall provide suitable premises with relevant equipment for the meetings.
The Contractor shall ensure the meetings are attended by its assigned responsible staff (including the
project manager and other individuals competent and entitled to deal with issues to be discussed at
the meeting and who take part in the performance of the respective part/section of the Works, and any
other experts of the Contractor, Sub-contractor, if this is requested by the Engineer). Decisions taken
at the Design meeting, as well as the instruction by the Engineer and the Employer are binding to the
Contractor and Sub-contractors.
The meeting before starting the construction works shall be held 15 days prior starting of the foreseen
construction works at site and shall be attended by the Contractor and his proposed management staff
for construction stage. The Engineer is in charge of the management of the meeting.
The agenda must contain important issues that may influence the performance of Works, including
following items:
1. Introduction of Contractor’s organization, organization chart and member of management team to
be approved by the Engineer;
2. Preparation stage of the construction works and temporary construction works;
3. Execution plan of construction works;
4. Plan for supervision of the construction work;
5. Construction work performance documentation;
6. Procedures for processing the decisions and variation tasks taken at the site;
7. Procedures for processing the payment applications of construction work;
8. Submitting of work drawings, product data and samples;
9. Drawing up accounting documents;
10. Use of premises;
11. Availability of parking;
39
12. Office, work and storage areas;
13. Delivery of equipment and priorities;
14. Safety procedures;
15. First aid;
16. Safety;
17. Cleaning;
18. Working time.
The Contractor shall prepare himself for the meeting – a representative of the Contractor shall prepare
a summary weekly report according to the template approved by the Engineer, and the original report
shall be submitted to the Engineer a Day before the respective meeting. The report shall contain
information of the works scheduled for the next week, works done during the present week and
previous week, number of workers employed for the performance of Works, labour safety control
report, accidents (if relevant), scheduled material deliveries, scheduled actual impacts on traffic flow,
other parties' issues affecting the Project.
The original counterpart of the report shall be signed by the representative of the Contractor. The
representative of the Contractor shall keep a copy of the report.
3.2.4. Meetings before installation of devices and equipment
The Contractor must organise a meeting before installation of devices and equipment prior to each
event, which requires coordination with other performers of special construction works involved in
contract, sub-contractors (suppliers of equipment / parts). The events, when a meeting before
installation of devices and equipment, must be organised shall be established by the Engineer.
The meeting shall be attended by the installer of devices or equipment and, if relevant, by the
representative of the manufacturer and producer thereof, who shall be involved in the installation and
coordination thereof, or in coordination with other individuals, if relevant. The Contractor shall notify
the Engineer on the expected meeting dates in due time.
In each pre-installation meeting the related construction activities and the preparation process for the
particular work shall be reviewed, including the requirements in regard of:
1. Contract documents;
2. Variation order;
3. Related variation tasks;
4. Purchases;
5. Deliveries;
6. Work drawings, product data and quality control samples;
7. Review of models;
8. Possible conflicts;
9. Compatibility problems;
10. Time schedules;
40
11. Restrictions imposed by weather conditions;
12. Manufacturer’s recommendations;
13. Warranty requirements;
14. Acceptability of base;
15. Temporary equipment;
16. Restrictions of premises and access;
17. Safety;
18. Inspection and testing requirements;
19. Performance results;
20. Accounting requirements;
21. Device protection.
The installation is not allowed if the meeting fails to be successfully completed. The Contractor must
perform all necessary steps to prevent delays in the performance of the Works and to convene a new
meeting as soon as possible.
3.2.5. Progress meetings
The progress meetings shall be held weekly or in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer, in
order to review the Contractor’s schedule for design and construction works and to discuss the
progress of Works. Those meetings are attended by the Employer, the Engineer, the Contractor, the
sub-contractors approved or by the performers of individual construction works, or by other experts –
if necessary. The progress meetings at site shall be convened in accordance with the instructions of
the Engineer. The Engineer is in charge of the management and of taking the minutes of such meetings.
Those meetings shall be attended by:
1. the Employer, the Engineer;
2. the Contractor, its management, including but not limited to:
a. Authorised representative
b. Construction Chief Project manager (during construction)
c. Design Chief Project manager
d. Designated leader of Author supervision team (during construction)
e. Contractor’s programme manager
f. Contractor’s Quality manager
g. Contractor’s Safety manager ( partial attendance )
h. Contractor’s Chief Quantity Surveyor
Request for attendance of any other individul shall be approved by the Engineer or shall be submitted
either during the previous meeting and at least 48 hours before the meeting.
The minutes of the meeting and comments shall be addressed and sent also to the Member of the
Board of the Contractor or to his formally designated representative.
The agenda of the meeting shall include:
1. Review and correction or approval of minutes of the previous progress meeting;
41
2. Review of other items of significance that could affect progress. Shall include topics for discussion
as appropriate to the status of the project;
3. Evaluation of documents submitted that are sent by the Contractor 24 hours prior to meeting that
shall include but are not limited to:
a. Progress measurement report during the design and construction works, inclusive but not
limited to:
I. List of completed activities
II. List of current activities, with an estimate of time required for completion.
III. List of any variations in starting dates and duration of outstanding activities from
planned dates and times.
IV. Percentage of completion of current activities.
b. Summary of resources present at site since the previous meeting (during construction phase)
compared with forecasted resources;
c. List of tests and inspections performed since last week;
d. List of non conformities;
e. List of activities:
I. Announced in the previous meeting that have to be performed;
II. Performed during the week till actual meeting;
III. To be performed till next meeting.
f. Summary of events and activities performed for Safety protection (during construction
schedule);
g. Explanatory report on accidents registered since previous meeting (during construction phase)
h. List of activities expected in incoming routes with those that may require rail or road traffic
interference;
i. Summary of actions performed under value engineering or variation procedure activities;
j. Contractor’s submittals status log;
k. Contractor’s procurement status log.
3.2.6. Coordination meetings
The coordination meetings shall be held on regular basis or in accordance with the instructions of the
Engineer, by agreeing with the Engineer on time of such meetings, issues to be discussed and other
aspects. The coordination meetings shall be supplemented by special meetings that shall be organized
for other purposes, such as regular progress meetings and special meetings before installation of
devices or equipment.
The Contractor shall require the attendance of representatives from each party then involved in the
coordination or planning of each specific construction activity in the meeting, including other sub-
contractors and performers of individual construction works.
42
3.2.7. Quality management meetings
Once a month on request of the Engineer the Contractor shall participate in the specific Quality
management meeting where shall the following be discussed:
1. Issues related to the quality control;
2. Modification proposals of the common and Contractor’s procedures;
3. Status of non conformities;
4. Status of performed inspections;
5. Management of non conformities and reconciliation.
Presence:
1. Construction Chief Project manager (during construction);
2. Design Chief Project manager;
3. Designated leader of Author supervision team (during construction);
4. Contractor’s programme manager;
5. Contractor’s Quality manager.
The minutes of the meeting and comments shall be addressed and sent also to the Member of the
Board of the Contractor.
3.2.8. Finance control meetings
Once a month on request of the Engineer the Contractor shall participate in the specific Financial
control meeting where shall the following be discussed:
1. Issues related to Clause 13 and 14 of the Special conditions of the Contract;
2. Modification proposals of the common and Contractor’s procedures;
3. Status of approval of the proposed variations and the respective decisions of the Engineer.
Presence:
1. Authorised representative
2. Design Chief Project manager
3. Contractor’s programme manager
4. Contractor’s Chief Estimator.
The minutes of the meeting and comments shall be addressed and sent also to the Member of the
Board of the Contractor.
None of the decisionss or resolutions taken during the meeting and /or included and approved by the
Parties in the minutes of the meeting in accordance with this procedure, may modify the provisions of
the contract , the liability and obligations of the parties as stipulated in the Contract , price and /or
intermediate terms, deadlines of the performance of Works.
43
3.2.9. BIM coordination meetings
According to instructions by Engineer during the Contract execution the Contractor shall organize BIM
coordination meetings and provide premises with the relevant equipment (including an overhead
projector or a screen of the purpose-suited size, yet excluding the computers for the meeting
participants). The meetings shall be organised regarding design or project change works whenever
required by Engineer. Whenever possible, BIM coordination meetings shall be organised at the
construction site, at preliminary office premises, if such are erected. The meetings shall be attended
by the BIM coordinator of the Contractor and representatives of the Contractor or its subcontractors,
who are qualified and in charge of the model development coordination within their design section and
where respective issues at the meeting are discussed or if issues are related to their design section.
See detailed BIM requirements in Chapter 3.11.
3.3. Cooperation between Contractor and stakeholders
3.3.1. General
The Contractor is responsible for any relevant approvals and statements from governmental
authorities, managers of public utilities' networks and any other stakeholders, where such approvals
are needed to get a remark on the building permit regarding meeting the design conditions and
conditions to start construction works, and to carry out the construction works.
Besides the building permits and technical conditions provided by the Contracting Authority, the
Contractor shall request, receive, fulfil and get approval of any other building permits and technical and
specific conditions to carry out the Contract works.
Where the technical conditions or any other document or approval, or permit issued by a competent
authority has expired or become invalid in any other way, the Contractor shall extend the deadline of
such document or receive a new document.
The costs for the receipt and fulfilment of all relevant approvals, permits and positive statements
(including verification of construction plan) as well as costs for the fulfilment of technical requirements
shall be included in the offered Contract price.
At the design, construction works and commissioning stages the Contractor shall invite, cooperate
with and get approvals from the NoBo to ensure compatibility of Project, Works and respective results
to the technical specifications for interoperability relating to the ‘infrastructure’ subsystem of the rail
system in the European Union. At the design stage, the positive assessment for interoperability
elaborated by NoBo shall be achieved by the Contractor before launching construction works.
Employment of NoBo and costs for its services are covered by the Contractor.
44
3.3.2. Organisation of work and staff
Organisation of Contractor’s staff
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, with a copy to the Employer, a full list of the proposed
staff for the purposes of the organization, management and monitoring of the work, within fourteen
(14) calendar days from the day of signing the Contract and before the start of the design activities.
The list shall include all staff, from the Employer's representative to the level of the managers of works
(at the level of managers of works the position may be indicated, without indicating the name of the
person) and shall expand and reflect the information that the Employer has already provided in the
organization's plan (table) submitted together with the tender and included in the Contract. Such a list
shall be supplemented by verified information on the qualification and experience of the relevant staff
(where not previously provided in the Tender and included in the Contract) for the consideration and
approval of the Engineer.
Prior to any approval of the Contractor’s staff, the Engineer shall be entitled to negotiate with any
employee offered by the Contractor. Regardless of their approval, the Employer reserves the right to
require the Contractor to withdraw any of the persons employed in or in connection with the Works
that, in the opinion of the Employer, behaves inappropriately or incompetently or carelessly to the
proper performance of their duties or whose employment is deemed by the Employer to be otherwise
unwelcome.
Following positions and experts shall be mandatory included in the Contractor’s organization and shall
be employed over all period defined below for 100% at the Contractor’s site office, by employing only
on the specific task assigned to them.
Design phase 1. Authorised representative (100% presence);
2. Contractor’s technical director in charge of design coordination and Author supervision
coordination - cannot be involved in the design or belong to any of sub-contractors involved in the
design (100% presence);
3. Contractor’s Schedule Manager (100% presence);
4. Main Quality control manager , Main Contractor’s site estimator (minimum 30% presence over all
this period).
Construction phase
In addition to those above that shall remain appointed to object for all duration of works:
1. Main quality control manager, Main Contractor’s site estimator (100% presence over this period);
2. Safety manager (100% presence at site).
45
3.3.3. Contractor’s cooperation with the Employer and the Engineer
Reporting procedure
The administrative and procedural requirements for the submission and coordination of the materials
necessary for the performance of the design and construction works include, but are not limited to:
1. Engineering research, topographical and technical survey materials;
2. Technical regulations and requirements;
3. Site organisation, site staff organisation tables;
4. Construction Works Programme;
5. Construction supervision plan;
6. Construction work logbook;
7. Contractor’s construction work quality control system;
8. Contractor’s construction work schedule system, if relevant;
9. Contractor’s material submission log;
10. Contractor’s procurement log;
11. Progress reports;
12. Defective works;
13. Manufacturing, information and as-built technical drawings;
14. Product data and manufacturer’s data;
15. Samples, including models, if relevant;
16. Approvals of sub-contracts, sub-contractors (including performers of individual construction
works);
17. Materials to be submitted during the construction works that are connected with the quality
assurance, quality control, inspection and testing plans and inspection reports/results;
18. Site layout, site staff organisation table (schedule) and method description;
19. Photographs of construction works;
The materials to be submitted shall include following documents, but not limited to:
1. Permits;
2. Payment applications;
3. Contract performance and advance payment securities, guarantees;
4. Insurance policies.
Overtime work
If it is offered to work outside the normal working hours, the Contractor shall request the confirmation
from the Engineer notifying thereof not less than two working days in advance and indicating the
working time, types and places of work, as well as the approximate number of workers involved and
the name and surname of the person responsible for safety. Safety manager shall be present at site
during the whole performance period of works.
46
For the performance of inspections the uncovering of the covered work carried out outside of normal
working hours and for which no approval has been given may be required, and their re-covering shall
be performed at the Contractor’s costs.
Progress reports
During all Design and Construction Period Contractor shall provvide to Engineer the following progress
reports described hereinafter in a form to be approved and or amended and accepted by Engineer.
Monthly progress reports
The monthly progress report shall comply with the template agreed on with the Engineer and it shall
contain the minimum required information for the information level contained within reports to meet
requirements it is subject to and to contribute to efficient supervision of works to be undertaken.
The progress report shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer by Day 5 of each month.
Contractor shall Submit to the Employer three original copies and to the Engineer two original copies
of a detailed report reflecting the monthly progress and status of work:
1. General report signed by Contractor’s authorized representative describing in 3 A4 pages;
2. Progress of Construction activities;
3. General construction progress according to system submitted in Inception report and approved by
Engineer;
4. List of contractual correspondence between Contractor and Engineer/Employer showing not
answered correspondence by both parties;
5. Report signed by Contractor’s Scheduling Engineer inclusive but not limited to:
a. Red lined construction schedule
b. 3 page A4 report with main interference incurred with LDZ traffic over last month and
forecasted interference over next month
c. description of problem incurred in critical areas
d. List and plan of areas under construction during the month
e. List and plans of areas to be under construction following months
f. current or anticipated causes of delay and their estimated impact on progress, together
with a description of corrective measures taken or proposed.
Monthly report shall contain a copy of the latest monthly updated Contractor's construction schedule,
cash flow diagrams, submittals/approvals status, procurement status, and resources distribution and
progress - photographs. Monthly status report which shows detailed activities, actual start and
completion dates, percent complete or remaining duration, and any other requirement by the Engineer.
The report shall also contain material description, unit, material delivered (during the month,
accumulaed), material planned (during the month, accum., variance (quantity, %) and any other
requirements requested by the Engineer and actual weighted progress compared to weighted
forecasted courve of progress.
47
Summary of personnel presence on site for each day of the month, showing for each profession:
1. Precise Number
2. Precise working days
3. Precise working hours
4. Total man‑days.
5. Total day and how during which was necessary overtime work
6. Summary of main quantities of installation works done over the month
The report shall contain quality control chapter, signed by quality manager, and inclusive but not limited
to:
1. List of test executed during month
2. List of test to be executed during next month
3. List of non conformities with table showing their number following subcontractor
4. When work has been delivered and accepted by Employer and Engineer with outstanding minor
defect list of defect to be solved
5. List of quality critical issue with forecasted remedy measure
6. Copy of all quality audit executed during the month
7. List of approved by Engineer material and sample using appropriate log
8. List of approved by Engineer works shop drawings using appropriate log.
The report shall contain cost estimation chapter, report signed by certified estimator of Contractor
inclusive but not limited to:
1. Copy of monthly forecasted IPC
2. List of already approved IPC with actual date of payment
3. List of variation with status of progress of approval
4. Forecasted cash flow schedule for the incoming months
5. List of claim with status
The report shall contain work safety chapter, signed by Contractor safety manager inclusive but not
limited to:
1. List of eventual accident with reason and prevention activities performed
2. List safety meeting and synopsys of the action implemented
3. List of penalties for not respect of safety rules applied by company
4. List of subcontractor with monthly notes and average since the beginning ordered from highest till
lower ( month of not presence on site does not reduce the average )
5. List of personnel authorized by Engineer to enter site showing name, surname, company, date of
arrival, date of approval by Engineer, last date of entrance on site ( highlight when more than 1
month).
Monthly progress reports shall include no less than 10 digital colour photos of the construction works
from places and at angles, where the number is indicated by the Contracting Authority and Engineer
for their needs so that the photos would as much as close depict the progress of construction works.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with each photo in digital format and of a quality with a
48
resolution to enable wholesome and detailed visualisation of the captured situation. The name of each
photo shall contain a sequence number and date, and the title of the work/object captured; the title
may optionally be listed on a separate file. The Contractor shall ensure each month the digital photos
are accessible by Contracting Authority and Engineer on a Common Data Environment. The photos are
the property of the Contracting Authority; therefore, the photos are forbidden to be transferred neither
in digital, nor electronic format at the disposal of any person or persons (except the Engineer) without
the written approval from the Contracting Authority. The intellectual property subject is regualted by
the Contract.
Daily work report during construction period
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer with a copy to the Employer. The report shall describe on daily
basis within 12 o clock of day + 1 to the Engineer with a copy to the Employer:
1. Number of workers present on site the labour force and its allocation
2. Materials, equipment utilized
3. Information about the work in progress during the day
4. The form of daily reports in Annex 17 shall be used
5. 2 times a week photographical pictures, taken following the requirements of this document
6. Registry of automatic access control and registration system, developed following the
requirements of this document
7. Register of system of biometric registration installed following the requirements of this
document.
As well, the Contractor shall every day document the performance information in accordance with
the requirements of the regulatory enactments and the Contract.
Records and situation capture using videos and photos
90 days prior of starting of works contractor shall organize photographic survey of all building located
at a distance less than 100 meter from location of forecasted site fence or inside fence to identify
presence of cracks or eventual structural defficiencies.
Photos shall be compiled in a report. Report shall be signed by authorised representative and submitted
in 2 originals to Engineer. Electronic version of report shall be also submitted to Engineer, size of picture
shall be 18x9 cm , 2 pictures by page A4 format. Area presenting structural deficiencies shall be
covered with high number of pictures.
During construction period Contractor shall realise daily video shooting with means of drone once a
day ( if weather conditions allow) flying over area of the Project 2 times in North – South and East -
West direction at 30 meter height. Video shall be submitted in electronic form to Engineer once a week
with clear indication on each file of date when video was taken.
Prior to starting of construction period Contractor shall submit to approval of Engineer complete
project set of drawings that are proposing location of forecasted photos for photofixation report. 1
49
picture has to be taken for every 200 m2 of external surface and 1 picture every room larger than 9 m2
inside the buildings. After 5 days engineer shall approve documents or submit possible suggestions.
Contractor shall prepare every half week (Monday and Wednesday) photofixation on the area where
works are ongoing following location defined on above set of drawing.
Contractor shall submit 2 copies of such report in electronic to Common Data Environment once a
week, under each picture shall be indicated date, time and location where it has been shot following
codification included in above set of drawings.
When requested by the Engineer, the photographer shall prepare extra prints of photographs.
All expenses in connection with the photographs and video recordings shall be covered by the
Contractor.
Photos can be taken by designated Employee of Contractor, it is not required engagement of a qualified
commercial photographer to take photographs during construction. Engineer may nevertheless require
replacement of designated person if quality of documentation is not satisfactory.
In case of not submission of such documentation Engineer is entitled to delay approval of IPC for the
ongoing month.
The Contractor shall allow all reasonable facilities for the responsible government authorities to take
photographs and films or televise the works at no additional expense to the Employer.
3.3.4. Goods
The term “Goods” is defined in the Contract and inter alia it covers new construction products,
construction materials, machinery, components, facilities, auxiliary devices and systems to be used in
the performance of Works (including description of facilities, installation methods, producer, brand,
brand name or other).
Shipping and handling
The Goods shall be reasonably packaged to protect these from damages during shipping and handling.
The Contractor shall provide the facilities and staff with methods for handling Goods in order to prevent
staining or damages.
The Contractor shall immediately check the deliveries (deliverables) to make sure the Goods meet the
requirements, the quantities are correct, and the Goods are not damaged.
For more detailed requirements imposed on shipping and handling see the respective chapters in the
specifications.
50
Storage and protection
The Contractor shall store the Goods according to manufacturer’s instructions – bearing non-damaged
and legible seals and labels. If applicable, Goods shall be stored in weatherproof coating; within the
temperature and air humidity range as indicated by the manufacturer.
Manufactured Goods to be stored outdoors shall be placed by the Contractor on inclined pallets above
ground. To protect the Goods from damaging, these shall be covered by waterproof plates enabling
ventilation to avoid condensation.
Non-packaged bulk materials shall be stored on solid ground with due drainage.
The Contractor shall provide for storage which enables access for inspection purposes. The Contractor
shall check regularly that the Goods are not damaged and are reasonably stored.
Installation requirements
Goods (spare parts, materials and devices) shall be used, installed, connected, assembled, applied,
cleaned and prepared according to manufacturer’s instructions, unless the Contract provides for more
stringent requirements.
Article acceptance standarts
References to an “approved equivalent”, “approved alternative” or similar terms require an approval
from the Engineer. See chapter Substitution (replacement).
All specifications and characteristics of products shall be approved by Engineer prior to installation
and incorporation.
Priority of standards – Latvian and/or European standards.
Proof of compliance: Whenever the Contract documents require that a product complies with Latvian
standards, European standards, or other government or association standard, the Contractor shall
present an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the product complies therewith. Where
requested or specified, submit supporting data certified by test executed in certified independent
laboratory approved by Engineer to substantiate compliance.
Material testing
All materials and works have to be tested by the Contractor according to specifications and/or in a way
and at a time required by the Engineer. The Contractor covers all fees related to material testing.
The Contractor shall provide the relevant labour, containers, packaging and labels regarding testing
samples, and the Contractor shall cover all transport costs.
Testing samples shall be removed by the Contractor at their source site or work area, or Work
performance site – depending on the situation and according to Engineer’s requirements.
51
The Contractor shall provide at the construction site the relevant equipment for testing works, and the
testing is carried out by an approved testing authority, but the costs thereof are covered by the
Contractor.
List of Goods
Together with Final to be approved Contractor shall submit to Engineer not later than 60 days before
forecasted starting of work on site three copies of a log of request for approval of all products which
are proposed for installation, for each material separate request of approval of material for each
material to be installed.
Request of approval of material shall be issued compeleted with:
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Name of installator
3. Copy of all specification, technical documentation, protocol of test that may allow Engineer or
expert to verify compatibility with requirement of life expectancy.
Engineer has right and Contractor shall supply all necessary information Engineer may require.
Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the listed products comply with the requirements of the
Contract documents.
The Engineer will reply in writing stating whether there is reasonable objection to listed items. Failure
to object to a listed item shall not constitute a waiver of requirements of Contracts documents.
3.3.5. Replacement, substitution of goods
The present chapter covers administrative and procedure requirements regarding processing the
Goods substitution requests after Contract conclusion or following the approval of documentation in
respect of the detailed technical design (incl. the Detailed technical design itself). The Contractor is
not entitled to introduce changes to the approved design documentation, even if it applies to the Author
Supervision Order, without the previous consent of Engineer and Employer.
The related chapters “Documents to be submitted”, which list the requirements imposed on the
Contractor regarding submission of the Construction works’ time schedule and material submission
schedule, and the chapter “Goods”, which list requirements stipulating the choice of Goods by the
Contractor and optional Goods.
References to an “approved equivalent” or similar terms mean that any optional Goods proposed by
the Contractor is subject to an approval from the Engineer. However, the Contractor’s rights to propose
alternatives for review and approval by the Engineer are not limited to Goods, which in the Contract
documents are referred to with the term “approved equivalent” or similar, and he can propose
alternative, equivalent (or of higher quality) options for any of the Goods, provided these alternatives
are in general equivalent to the listed Goods in terms of quality, resistance and performance.
52
Where the Contractor cannot acquire the indicated Goods with all its efforts and where he cannot find
and propose a suitable equivalent, he may provide for review and approval by the Engineer a
substitution, which is similar and reasonably close to the Goods in terms of quality, resistance and
performance, if not better. A replacement product is only considered, if the contractor has sufficiently
demonstrated to the Engineer that the indicated Goods cannot be acquired.
Engineer is entitled to execute all necessary market research for the specified product and in case
availability is found Contractor shall proceed to procure material at condition and price found by
Engineer without being able to request any cost increase.
Materials to be submitted
In the substitution request submission process the Engineer reviews the Contractor's approved
substitution request as follows:
1. The Contractor submits each substitution request for review according to the template (see Annex
17);
2. In each request, the Contractor indicates the Goods to be replaced, or its production or installation
method, including the numbers of respective specification chapters and technical drawings;
3. The Contractor shall provide complete documentation, which demonstrates the compatibility to
the requirements as regards replacement and, if needed, the following information shall be
prepared by the Contractor:
a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or amendments relevant for
coordination with other parts of Works and the construction undertaken by the Employer
and individual contractors, which will be needed to implement the proposed replacement;
b. Detailed comparison of the key features of the proposed substitution with the features of
the indicated Goods; Key features may include such elements as performance, weight, size,
durability, and outlook;
c. Data of the Goods, including technical drawings and descriptions of production and
installation procedures of the Goods;
d. Samples, where needed and required;
e. Notification stating the replacement impact on the Contractor’s Construction works
schedule compared to a schedule without the substitution approval. The substitution
impact on the set interim and overall Contract deadline shall be indicated;
f. Cost information, including net cost savings proposed in the Contract price. Extra costs are
not accepted. These should be replaced by comparison pricing (CIF) with complete rate
breakdown both by the proposed alternative/substitutes, and the indicated element;
g. The Contractor's waiver from rights to extra payments or time, which later might be needed
due to damaging of the optional variant, and the substitution shall be carried out correctly.
53
Engineer’s operations
Approvals on all and any Goods alternatives or substitutes are decided by the Engineer only, and such
approval or non-approval does not in any way release the Contractor from its contractual liabilities and
duties. The Contractor is liable for sufficient proof to satisfy the Engineer as regards suitability of any
proposed Goods alternative or substitute. The Engineer may request and the Contractor is obliged to
submit additional data, undertake tests, etc., which the Engineer might reasonably request to make
sure of the suitability. The Contractor is liable for any additional costs due to delays, where the
Contractor fails to propose alternatives in due time to provide for enough time for the Engineer to
review these, or due to rejection of alternatives or substitutes, where the Engineer establishes their
non-suitability, and the Contractor is neither entitled to additional payment, nor to prolongation of
deadlines in this regard.
Where the Engineer does not approve of any of the Goods alternatives or substitutes, the Contractor
bears the increase of all net costs above the costs of the indicated price, and all benefit arising out of
the net cost savings gets the Employer.
Optional and substitute goods
The indication of the producer and titles of its articles, brand names, catalogue numbers, etc., do
neither release the Contractor from the liability to meet other specifications’ requirements, nor from
the liability to submit the materials for approval.
Alternative or substitute goods, if allowed and approved, shall comply with the requirements in Contract
documents. All such alternative or substitute products not complying to respective requirements,
irrespective of the receipt of approval shall be replaced at the cost of Contractor, as is the case of
introduction of changes or replacement of systems due to that.
3.3.6. Procedures for making changes
The Contractor shall provide the name of the contact authorised to receive the change documentation
and is in charge of informing other Contractor’s employed or sub-contractors regarding changes in the
Works.
The change offer templates shall be coordinated with the Engineer.
Engineer, will advise variations in the Work and if there will be requirement for an adjustment to
Contract Price or Contract Time, Engineer will provide a written instruction.
Engineer, may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed variation,
a variation in Contract Time for executing the variation. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate
within time forecasted in article 13 of Contract. All delays in submit proposal or any requested
substantiation from side of Contractor is risk under responsibility of Contractor and in case those
delays will impact completion time of works this will be a Contractor’s risk and responsibility. If
instructed by Engineer to prevent delay in execution of Works Contractor shall proceed to execute
54
variation without wait acceptance of Engineer of cost of variation Order, in such case cost of variation
Order and needs to modify contract price or contract time will be determined by Engineer under article
3.5 of Contract determination.
Engineer, may issue a Proposal Request which requests the Contractor to submit alternative options
for specific item(s).
The Contractor may propose a variation by submitting a request for variation to the Engineer,
describing the proposed variation and its full effect on the Works, with a statement describing the
reason for the variation, and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time with full documentation
(including bills of additions and omissions) and a statement describing the effect on the Works by
separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section
Substitutions.
Contract prices and supporting documentation regarding contractual deadline changes
The Contractor shall make detailed entries of the works completed based on unit pricing. The
Contractor shall ensure relevant information in full amount to assess the proposed changes and to
justify the costs regarding changes in Works.
Contractor shall document each quotation for a variation in cost or time with sufficient data and
substantiation to allow evaluation of the quotation.
Contractor shall provide all additional data Engineer may require to support evaluation doen by
Contractor of price of variation:
1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment inclusive of all design extract or remeasurement
substantion Engineer may require
2. Evaluation of cost of installation using hourly rate submitted at time of Tender
3. Cost of product inclusive of taxes, import duties, transport costs, insurance, and guarantees or
bonds.( Engineer may require and Contractor shall submit detailed substantiated analysis of each
price with breakdown of above items inclusive of copies of invoice or any other commercial
document in copy or original)
4. Overhead and profit.
5. Justification for any variation in Contract Time.
6. This apply both in case to deletion of works
7. Analysis shall as possible be established using as base the units rates established following
requirement of article 14 of Contract’s Particular Conditions but in case Engineer would find that
Contractor has overestimated some of the prices prepared following requirement of article 14 he
will have the right to ask for revision and correction of such unit prices for porpose of calculation
of cost of variation only .
8. Contractor cannot rely on Author Supervison advise to substantiate necessity of any of requested
variation
9. All request arisen following request of Author Supervisor shall be considered as included in risk of
Contractor and cannot give right to Contractor to modify Contract price or Contract time
55
Contractor shall support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a stipulated price basis,
with additional information:
1. Origin and date of claim.
2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom.
3. Time records and wage rates paid.
4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented.
In case of variation instructed or requested prior to completion of design phase or submission of unit
prices following article 14 of Contract, Contractor shall submit all documentation that may be
requested by Engineer to substantiate all unit prices that will be used to evaluate cost impact of
Variation.
Variation directive
The Employer, through the Engineer, may issue a variation Directive instructing the Contractor to
proceed with a variation in the Works, for subsequent inclusion in a Variation Order.
The Directive will describe variations in the Works. After receiving this Directive and within two weeks,
the Contractor is to submit to the Engineer, his price details, supported as specified under Variation
Procedures above, as well as construction schedule/milestones analysis for issuing a Variation Order.
The Contractor shall promptly execute the variation in Works following receipt of the Directive. If
instructed by Engineer to prevent delay in execution of works Contractor shall proceed to execute such
variation without wait acceptance of Engineer of cost of variation Order, in such case cost of Variation
Order and needs to modify Contract price or Contract time will be determined by Engineer under article
3.5 of Contract determination.
Variation order price
Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's price quotation or Contractor's request for a Variation or
Variation Directive and Contractor’s price details, the Engineer will determine the Variation Order price
and construction schedule/milestones impact thereof.
Execution of variation orders
The Engineer will issue Variation Orders for signatures of the Contractor. The Variation Order will detail
the authorized change and the cost and time consequences. The Contractor will execute the change
identified on the Variation Order. Contractor after reciept of accepted variation from Engineer will have
to submit his acceptance on price within 5 working days. Missing receipt of acceptance within 5
working days Contractor will be considered having accepted proposal of Engineer. In case of
Contractor rejection of Engineer proposal Contractor is obliged to proceed with execution of works
while issuing notification under article 20.1. of Contract’s Particular Conditions. Missing possibility to
56
reach an agreement, final settlement will be done on base of article 3.5 of Contract’s Particular
Conditions Engineer determination.
In case Contractor fails to accept Engineer proposal but Engineer requests to proceeed with execution
of Works, Employer is entitled to pay when Works will be executed and till settlement will be not reached
only 50% of amount accepted by Engineer.
Correlation of contractor submittals
Contractor shall promptly revise schedule of values and application for payment forms to record each
authorized Variation Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price.
Contractor shall promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any variation in Contract Time, revise
sub‑schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the variation, and resubmit.
Contractor shall maintain a Variation Order log, to be included in specific section of Monthly report with
status of all variations and dates of submission, Engineer acceptance or rejection.
3.4. Exchange of documents and information
3.4.1. General (technical drawings, coordination and production drawing, defect
works)
To enable performance of Works of due quality, the Contractor shall in cooperation and harmonization
with the Engineer elaborate the document and drawing management and exchange plan within the
Programme, and during performance of contractual Works, the Contractor and its employed sub-
contractors shall ensure they work in line with it. It defines the exchange and registration of documents
and technical drawings (including introduction of changes), and storage thereof during all Project
stages until Contract completion. According to the plan, the documentation to be elaborated within the
Detailed technical design and documentation regarding other Works shall be elaborated according to
a common standard.
Considering the digitalisation of Construction Process in Latvia, the envisaged use of BIM solutions
during Contract fulfilment and the general development of digital technologies, optional and envisaged
changes and deviations from the requirements in the Technical specification regarding the physical
formats of information (documents, drawings, etc.) and their exchange procedures, where such
changes/deviations facilitate the work of stakeholders, but do not decrease the functionality, status
and quality of documents and processes, which shall be coordinated with the Employer and Engineer.
Such changes/deviations may include the elaboration, submission, approval, and digital archiving of
individual documents dismissing the hard copy for the respective document as indicated by the
Technical specification. In case the Contractor spots such optimisation possibilities in the document
and drawing management programme, it is obliged to propose to the Engineer and Employer for
approval respective changes in the plan.
Metric units shall be used in all documents, drawings and communications.
57
Engineer has the right and Contractor shall submit all additional design and material documentation
that Engineer may request including but not limited to the listde ones below. The list is not exhaustive.
Over the course of work, the Contractor shall permanently completely and precisely document all and
any changes and deviations from Contract documents, which shall be stored at the construction site
and Common Data Environment for the Employer and/or Engineer to check it. To meet this requirement,
the Contractor shall use Template 17 of Annex 17 of Technical specifications.
Coordination Drawings
Coordination drawings show relationship and unification of various construction elements that require
careful coordination during the manufacturing or construction works to fit within the respective space
or provide functionality as designed.
The preparation of coordination drawings may include components that previously have been detailed
in shop drawings or Goods data.
Contractor shall prepare coordination drawings in case in opinion of Engineer careful coordination is
needed for:
1. Design one or other portion of works or
2. Proceed to Installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
Contractor shall prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum
utilization of space for efficient installation of different components, show the relationship of
components shown on separate Shop Drawings, indicate required installation sequences.
In drafting coordination drawings, Employer's and BIM requirements and the chapter “Project
coordination” shall be considered. Coordination drawings may include components, which are
depicted in detail in production drawings or article data.
The Contractor shall draft coordination drawings, where accurate coordination in the installation of
Articles produced by various companies is required. The Contractor shall draft coordination drawings,
where limited access to the room requires optimal use thereof to install various Articles (facilities,
equipment, construction products).
Contractor shall submit coordination drawings for all areas where Engineer my advise that such
drawings are necessary to insure correct and quick execution of installation works and prevent arising
of non-conformities.
Shop drawings
The Contractor shall provide equipment installation, production and construction works’ drawings,
coordination drawings matched with the architectural structure, as well as all other information, all
together referred to as shop drawings. The Contractor shall reserve time to complete all these
drawings, for the inspection by the Engineer and any later amendments, repeated submission and
inspection(s) by drafting the Works schedule or for the Contractor to undertake inspections.
58
Shop drawings determine the actual plans, cross-sections and details of all mounted, produced or
manufactured structure elements; determine the proportionality compared to nearby works, sufficient
structure elements’ proportionality in comparison to physical space, whether or not these are included
in Contract drawings in respect to all work, including but not limited to architectural, indoors,
mechanical, electrical works and works at the construction site; and these include minor changes in
project solutions to comply with actual conditions, without extra costs.
Each shop drawing is submitted by the Contractor in one (1) electronic and four (4) printed
counterparts. Drawings are folded in A4 and collated by groups in folders. At the submission of
documents, each time the submission template signed by an authorised representative of the
Contractor is attached and the attached template is in a format stipulated by the Engineer.
Engineer reviews drawings:
1. any comments made by the Engineer will not relieve the Contractor, subcontractors and/or
suppliers of responsibility for compliance with Contract requirements, design, documentation and
checking as appropriate.
2. Engineer shall return drawings to contractor with comment or approved or rejected with following
comment:
a. Authorized for further design activities
b. Authorized for construction
c. To be corrected before proceed for construction and design
d. Rejected.
Contractor shall ensure that any necessary amendments to drawings are made in accordance with any
comments of the Engineer and resubmitted without delay. Unless and until the Engineer indicates that
resubmission is not required, Contractor obtains copies of amended drawings, checks, re-submits to
the Engineer ensuring incorporation of necessary further amendments all as before.
Prior submission of each of the final design documentation block to authority Contractor shall submit
original of documentation for the signature of Engineer, this documentation shall include only Drawings
authorized for further design activities.
Metric measurements shall be used in all documents and drawings. shall be labelled and text described
in English and Latvian.
Should any amendment to drawings required by the Engineer, any discrepancy, or divergence that the
Contractor may find, be in the Contractor’s opinion a variation, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer
with a copy to the Employer without delay and in any case within 5 days, and not proceed with design
ordering, fabrication, erection or installation until subsequently instructed. Engineer has right to reject
any claims for the extra cost of such work if notified after this period.
Building Design drawings and shop drawings shall include detailed drawings for production and
assmebly, drawings indicating locations in the field, schematic drawings and lists of materials together
with respective samples.
59
Each shop drawing shall be clearly marked to indicate which Goods or element is submitted for review,
and each Goods or element shall be indicated to match it with the respective page and clause on the
specifications and/or details and page number of the contractual drawing.
The shop drawings shall include material types, dimensions and finishing, and these shall refer to the
brand name and producers type ID, if finishing in workshops is needed.
Each set of production drawings shall include enough information to enable detailed insight into the
submitted Goods or system.
Together with drawing Contractor shall submit manufacturer's or fabricators pre-printed product
literature and data sheets, normally transmitted in booklet or brochure form, in bound and indexed
brochures.
Immediately after the individual drawings are approved, the Contractor shall submit matched drawings,
duly coordinated with indicated chapters, height marks, ceiling plans, etc., with all level, alignment,
access, room and other conflict solutions.
Individual shop drawings shall indicate the mutual link of elements and the sequence of their
installation.
Contractor ir responsible the drawings to be liable for the coordination of all structural, architectural,
plumbing, heating, ventilation and air conditioning, fire-safety, electrical, information technologies’,
audiovisual and multimedia infrastructure works, as well as the coordination of materials and facilities
manufactured by various companies outside of the construction site.
Even if this could be not necessary required by Latvian Construction Legislation, before materials are
fabricated or installation begins, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval in 3 original
copies and electronic form.
The matched shop drawings shall indicate completely coordinated all electrical-mechanical
communication installations, where each communication is coordinated with all others and with the
nearby structural and architectural works. The matched shop drawings shall include sufficiently
elaborated details, dimensions, levels and scales to depict also all overhead systems, pipes, cable
mains, facilities, fastenings, structure spare parts and related architectural elements, and these
drawings shall depict the distance between these.
The matched shop drawings are intended for use by the Contractor and Engineer during construction
and shall not serve as a substitution of any production, as-built drawings or information drawings,
which are required elsewhere in the Contract documents.
The Engineer shall review the matched shop drawings, but it does not release the Contractor neither
from its general liability for the coordination of all contractual Works, nor from other contractual
liabilities.
Following the approval of the matched shop drawings by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit
work drawings related to communications, structure works, architectural finishing and other expert
work for the Engineer to approve these and adapt these to work of others. Such works include the
60
creation of openings, casings, in-built elements, inlets, trenches, facility foundations and similar works
(this is not an exhaustive list).
The shop drawings shall clearly indicate each position to document the actual construction works,
including:
1. Measured depth of foundation elements relative to the first-floor remark;
2. Measured horizontal and vertical alignment and dimensions of underground public utilities’
networks and accessories, taking the permanent above-ground facilities as a reference.
3. The measured alignment of indoors utilities’ networks and accessories hidden inside the
structures, taking the visible and available elements of structures as a reference.
4. Changes in dimensions and spare parts undertaken at the construction site;
5. Spare parts, which were not on the initial technical drawings of the Contract;
6. References to related shop drawings.
The Contractor shall keep manufacturer’s instruction manuals and certificates, inspection protocols,
field inspection materials, along with any other documents required by specifications chapters.
Product and producer data
If indicated in individual specifications, the Contractor shall submit producer’s printed instructions of
delivery, storage, assembly, installation, running, set-up, and finishing.
The Contractor shall submit quality control documents, including design data, certificates, producer’s
instructions, producer's field reports and other quality control materials to be submitted, which are
required in other specifications chapters.
Certificates: If other specification chapters require a statement that an Article, material or installation
complies with indicated requirements, the Contractor shall submit a respective certificate or a
producer's declaration to demonstrate the compliance to these requirements.
Defect works
After it has been established that part of the Works is or might be defect, the Contractor shall as fast
as possible submit to the Engineer for approval an offer as regards further testing, opening,
inspections, corrections or dismantling and repeated performance. Where the testing or inspections
demonstrate the works are non-compatible to contractual documents and measures are undertaken ti
determine the compliance of Works (such as, testing, opening, trial correction), at least the following
Works shall be carried out:
1. Such works are carried out at the cost of Contractor, and are not deemed as a reason to prolong
the deadline(s), increase costs.
2. Prior to repair of any defective works Contractor shall establish Non conformity form and submit
to approval of Engineer
3. Engineer shall verify Non conformity form, evaluate and answer in less than 10 days from receipt
61
4. Engineer is entitled at any moment to establish Non conformity in case have ascertained violation
in execution of works.
Submission of goods
During Contract fulfilment the Contractor is obliged:
1. The preparation and application of Goods to be submitted shall be coordinated at the cost of
Contractor. Each of Goods to be submitted shall be sent sufficient time before the performance of
related construction works to avoid any delays;
2. The mutual coordination of solutions elaborated within the respective detailed technical design
sections shall be ensured;
3. Each of Goods to be submitted shall be coordinated with production, purchase, testing, delivery,
other materials to be submitted and related works, which require gradual operations;
4. The sending of various Goods to be submitted (those intended for related construction products)
shall be coordinated for the need to concomitantly review the Goods to be submitted for approval
would not delay document processing;
5. Where a brochure shall be attached to the Goods description, the Contractor shall submit two (2)
copies together with sending templates to the Engineer and a sending template and an additional
copy of brochure to the Employer with indicated date and time when these have been received by
the Engineer. Brochures shall be in English or Latvian, or with an attached verified translation into
Latvian or English.
To avoid delays due to the time needed to review the Goods to be submitted, the Contractor shall
reserve enough time, including time for repeated submission.
In all Goods submission cases the Contractor shall include a statement that the information complies
with contractual document requirements.
1. At least 15 days shall be reserved for initial review, and additional time where the Engineer requests
extra time to coordinate with materials submitted at a later stage;
2. If interim materials shall be submitted, these shall be processed in the same way as initially
submitted materials;
3. For each repeated processing of material submitted the same amount of time as under clause (1)
shall be reserved;
4. The prolongation of Contract deadline is not acceptable.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two (2) sets of samples of each construction product of a
building together with sending templates for the Engineer and copies of sending templates for the
Employer with indicated date and time when these have been received by the Engineer.
Two (2) counterparts of brochures, one of which is an original, together with sending templates to the
Engineer and a sending template and an additional copy of brochure to the Employer with indicated
date and time when these have been received by the Engineer. Brochures shall be in English or Latvian,
or with an attached verified translation into Latvian or English.
62
The Contractor shall review the Goods to be submitted before these are sent off; he shall indicate and
check field measurements, field construction criteria, producer’s catalogue numbers and compliance
of Goods to the contractual document requirements.
The Contractor shall coordinate the Goods to be submitted with Works’ and contractual document
requirements.
The Contractor is not allowed to commence working, where the Goods to be submitted are needed
before Engineer’s accept on all Goods to be submitted.
Written communication and product data submission
All and any written communication and product data, except for cases where the Contract stipulates
more, shall be submitted to the Engineer in the following way:
1. Parcels and letters, including appendices: one original and two photo-copies together with an
extra photo-copy with indicated date and time, when it has been received by the Engineer.
2. All written communication sent by the Contractor to the Engineer shall be, if possible, submitted
on A4 paper. The communication shall bear a clear reference to the following:
a. Contract number;
b. Contract title;
c. Contractor’s name;
d. Date and reference number of the communication;
e. Signed by the duly authorised representative of the Contractor.
Submission of Contractor’s samples
In all cases the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two (2) sets of samples. One set is handed over
bearing a remark of the action. The Contractor shall keep the set of samples, handed over by the
Engineer, at the construction site of the Project to enable quality control comparisons during the whole
course of Works.
3.4.2. Coordination procedure of documents
The Contractor is responsible for the elaboration and coordination of all necessary documentation with
the State Railway Technical Inspectorate and other involved institutions.
Drawings, 3D models, quality documents, datasheets, etc documentation of the Detailed Technical
Design and the as-built documentation of the accomplished Works shall be stored on the dedicated
thereof data exchange platform CDE (Common Data Environment). If the CDE is not provided at the
time the execution of Contract is started, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing and using
of an equivalent platform in accordance with the requirements specified in this Technical Specification.
The solution of the temporary data exchange platform shall be coordinated with the Employer in
advance. As soon as the operation of CDE is ensured whereof the Employer, the Engineer shall notify
63
the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for transferring all data to the CDE and for further
use thereof.
After the approval of the Detailed Technical Design, other design documentation elaborated for the
performance of Works by the Engineer in accordance with the procedures specified in the Contract,
after a positive Construction Expert-examination, a positive NoBo verification statement, note on
fulfilling the design conditions, the Contractor shall convey the developed and accepted design
documentation, incl. the Detailed Technical Design documentation, to the Employer in an electronic
format (CAD, BIM data original formats and open data formats, DOC, XLS and PDF format by
maintaining the search function) on the data carrier and shall also place it on the CDE. Detailed
requirements for BIM information file formats are given in chapter No.3.11.
Prior to the commencement of the construction works the Contractor shall ensure the elaboration of
the Construction work programme (DVP) based on the Work organization project (DOP) included in the
Detailed Technical Design. Requirements of DVP see in chapter 5.3.1.
Contractor is responsible for development of all the documents necessary for execution of activities
described section 1.3. as well as development of all the documents mentioned in the section 3.5.
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval within time defined in Employer’s
requirements or time determined by Engineer or as soon as possible, if time is not defined, the
following:
- Aim of an engineering survey, respective work types and sequence of execution (engineering
survey works shall be approved by the owners of respective utilities or structures owner, where
it is applicable):
- In case of public building- the main usage type and usage types of necessary room groups and
rom types their number as well as furniture, fixtures and equipment for the rooms;
- Type of automatic fire protection system;
- Works Program;
- Quality assurance plan for the Project;
- BIM Execution Plan;
- Engineering survey reports;
- Detailed Technical Design deliverables;
- Works Execution Project;
- Detailed solutions developed during the construction period;
- Coordination drawings;
- Shop drawings;
- Acts of setup of main construction grids;
- Schedule/journal of materials to be submitted by Contractor;
- Contractor’s schedule/journal of supply;
- Documents necessary for payment calculations / summaries of works executed;
- Information regarding materials to be used, including declarations of conformity and
certificates;
- Layouts for traffic organization and construction site organization;
64
- Statements on acceptance of hidden (covered) works;
- Statements on acceptance of significant constructions;
- As-built drawings;
- Verification and testing programmes and reports;
- Programs and reports of personnel training;
- As well as other documents required by Engineer or resulting from Contract (incl. Employer’s
Requirements).
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for its review five printed copies of all technical documents
and one electronic copy thereof. At the submission, the Contractor shall clearly indicate the previously
submitted related documents as well as any changes made in these.
All design, technical drawings and documents, which are submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer
for review and approval, shall be checked by the Contractor before submission, they shall be signed by
a person in charge representing the Contractor, according to set quality assurance procedures thus
approving the inspection has been done. Before forwarding the documents to the Engineer, the
Contractor shall in the same way check also the documents received from its sub-contractors or from
any other source.
Each page of the document shall bear the document number, date, page number, total number of pages
in the document. Each and any pages of documents or parts of pages shall be in clear and legible print.
The pages of documents shall be numbered in sequence. Each volume shall have a title to represent
information included therein.
The Contractor shall regularly make entries to and update the logbook of technical drawings and
documents. It includes information on document status (cancelled, being elaborated, under production,
etc.). The recent version of the logbook shall be stored on the Common Data Environment according
to requirements of Chapter 3.11.
Any changes made to the drawings or documents shall be clearly indicated by the Contractor on the
drawing sheet, where appropriate. Changes in the documents shall be either crossed through with a
red line, deleted or marked on the edge of the page containing a reference to the person who has
introduced the changes and the date when introduced.
During the execution of the Contract, the Engineer shall be entitled to provide the Contractor with
binding instructions regarding the preparation, insertion, processing and other operations that the
Contractor must take on documents and data, both in the Common Data Environment and in other
communication means with the Engineer, the Employer.
Documents the coordination of which requires the approval of the Employer:
Master Design;
Detailed Technical Design;
Temporary Taking-over certificates;
Taking-over certificates;
Intermediate Payment Certificates.
65
3.5. Deliverables
All deliverables listed under this chapter shall be agreed according to the procedures stipulated by this
Technical Specification.
3.5.1. Contract fulfilment deliverables
At the start of Contract fulfilment, the Contractor shall according to the procedures and within the term
stipulated by the Contract submit and coordinate with the Engineer the following documentation -
deliverables regarding kick-off of Contract fulfilment.
Work programme
The Contractor shall, in accordance with the procedure stipulated by the Contract, develop and
coordinate the Work Execution Programme, which consists of the Programme for design (Clause 8.3.1
of the Special conditions of the Contract) and the Programme for construction works (Clause 8.3.2 of
the Special conditions of the Contract). During the implementation of the Project, the Contractor shall
fulfill his obligations complying with the Programme developed and approved in accordance with the
Contract, incl. by elaborating, coordinating and implementing the Programme for design in accordance
with the procedure established by the Contract after the entering into the Contract, as well as by
elaborating, coordinating and implementing the Programme for construction works in due time in
accordance with the procedure established by the Contract before starting the construction works to
be performed in the framework of the Works. The Programme for construction works is a continuation
/ addition to the Programme for design with a more expanded level of detail regarding the activities to
be performed within the Works and actions in the author's supervision and work completion and
conveyance phases.
The Contractor shall plan the Programme and own resources to ensure completion of the contractual
obligations in accordance with the procurement documentation and Contract, including the
intermediate terms and deadlines established thereof.
Programme for design (to be elaborated and coordinated prior starting the planning, research and
design works to be performed within the framework of Works) shall include:
1. A detailed order and interrelationship of the Works performed by the Contractor, time limits for
executing the Works, detailing how the Contractor intends to carry out the Works, including the
preparation, approval of the technical design documentation of the Works, obtaining of the
required permits, Contractor's Documents, purchases of material, manufacturing of Plant,
transportation of Materials and Plant to the Site, construction, assembly and testing etc.; the
order in which the Contractor intends to carry out the Works, including the anticipated detailed
timing of each stage of design (Contractor's Documents, procurement, manufacture of Plant,
delivery to Site, construction, erection and testing). Programme for design phase shall be
developped at sufficient level of detail including each single section of building, portion of works
and design for each different construction activities and discipline;
66
2. Programme for design shall be developed at an appropriate level of detail of working day without
including saturday and sunday, the section for construction works shall be developed at a level of
week timeframe;
3. Programme shall include interrelationship and links between the Works (incl. design and
construction) carried out by the Contractor and other Parties taking part in the Project
implementation, indicating all principal Works, the time limits whereof depend on the execution of
the works by other Parties taking part in the Project implementation;
4. The periods for review under Contract’s Particular Conditions subclause 5.2 (Contractor’s
documents) and any other submissions approvals and consents specified in Employer's
requirements;
5. The sequence and timing for each necessary investigation necessary to perform design;
6. The sequence and timing of inspections and tests specified in the Contract;
7. The timing to receive approval from any relevant public institution and all necessary approval to
get Authorization for starting of works;
8. The timing necessary for each relevant expertise that may be required under actual in force
regulation and latvian Construction Law;
9. Supporting report which includes:
a. A general description of the methods which the Contractor intends to adopt, and of the
major stages, in the execution of the Design and Works;
b. Details showing the Contractor's reasonable estimate of the number of each class of
Contractor's personnel and specialist and of each type of Contractor's equipment,
required on the site for each major stage;
c. List of each involved consultant in design project and structure of organization of design
team;
d. Proposal to be approved by Engineer of progress measuring methodology to be used over
design period to measure progress of activities;
e. Details of the Contractor's design works stated in the general timetable of works without
changing the time limit set for completion and indicating the entities responsible for each
work (names of the companies of the Contractor and subcontractors, information about
concluded subcontracting agreements);
f. List of activities of design & construction programme with respective weigh to measure
progress forecasted;
g. Weighted progress evaluation courve showing forscasted weighted progress of activities;
h. Documents and drawings management and exchange program.
Programme for construction works (to be elaborated and coordinated prior starting the construction
works at the Work execution place) shall include:
1. The order in which the Contractor intends to carry out the Works, detailed Programme for
construction shall be developed at sufficient level of detalization including each single section of
building, portion of works and each different construction activities and discipline;
2. Programme shall be developed at level of detail of working day without including working on
Saturdays and Sundays;
67
3. Interrelationship and links between the Works carried out by the Contractor and other parties
taking part in the Project implementation, indicating all principal Works the time limits whereof
depend on the execution of the works by other parties taking part in the Project implementation;
4. The sequence and timing of inspections and tests specified in the Contract;
5. The timing for receiving approval from any relevant public institution and all necessary approvals
to get delivery in exploitation of the Buiding;
6. Any necessary phase of occupation of public areas, closing of roads and surrounding public
spaces defining precise limitations and time;
7. A supporting report which includes:
a. A detailed description of the methods which the Contractor intends to adopt;
b. Graphic documentation explaing for each week of Works area of construction site where
Works will be performed;
c. Graphic documentation explaining for each week public area where eventually works will
be performed and timetable of the traffic breaks necessary to execute the Works, which
shall be agreed separately with the Employer and the Engineer until the time limit to
submit the Programme;
d. details schedules developed at a level of weeks showing:
I. The Contractor's reasonable estimate of the number of each class of
Contractor's personnel for each type of Contractor's equipment, required on the
site for each major stage;
II. Detailed procurement programme to be approved by Engineer for each item of
construction including following activities:
1. Works shop design and its approval;
2. Submission of samples of materials and mock-ups;
3. Procurement and timing for acceptance of subcontractor by Employer;
4. Shipping and delivery time.
e. Proposal, to be accepted by engineer, of progress measuring system;
f. Details of the Contractor's works stated in the general timetable of works without
changing the time limit set for completion and indicating the entities responsible for each
work (names of the companies of the Contractor and subcontractors, information about
concluded subcontracting agreements);
g. Time for commission and performing of any necessary handover procedure, including but
not limited to Engineer activities, but all what may be required by regulation;
h. List of activities of design & construction programme with respective weigh to measure
progress forecasted;
i. Wheighted progress evaluation courve showing forecasted weighted progress of
activities.
In preparing the Programme for construction works, the Contractor shall exercise care to produce a
clear, legible, and accurate diagram. Activities related to specific areas of the project shall be
grouped on the diagram for ease, understanding, and simplification. The diagram shall show the
following for each construction activity, where applicable:
68
1. Concise description of the work
2. Early start and finish dates
3. Number of working days
4. Manpower loading
5. Cost loading
6. Equipment & Machinery Loading
7. Any activity to be carried out on existing working rails.
Contractor shall demonstrate work activities in the Contractor's Programme for construction works
that shall have minimum duration of one (1) day and maximum duration of seven (7) days. Both The
Programme for design and Programme for construction works described above shall not be changed
throughout the duration of the Project without getting prior approval from the Engineer. The Design
Programme for design and Programme for construction works shall incorporate complete
procurement and submittals details. The dates should take into consideration the time required for
preparation, the approvals duration as per Contract, manufacturing durations, shipping and the start of
construction of the pertinent activities.
The content of the plan shall be in line with the contractual provisions and it shall include a detailed
action plan with the relevant visual materials. It shall define the actions relevant for the elaboration of
the Detailed Technical Design and other documentation required for the performance of Works, scope
of engineering surveys to be performed, methods applied in the elaboration of Detailed Technical
Design solutions, applied standards and other applicable requirements, as well as shall include actions
for completing the design activities, expert-examination of design, getting relevant approvals from
involved authorities and meeting design conditions, as well as actions for the construction works'
activities, inspections, testing and taking-over.
The plan shall be elaborated by complying with Work performance deadlines established by the
Contract and this technical specification and other requirements imposed on it by the present
Technical Specification and other binding documents.
The Contractor shall take into account local weather conditions in Latvia, and it shall provide sufficient,
appropriate and adequate resources for the proper (qualitative, complete and timely) performance of
Works.
Under no circumstances may the Programme provide for suspension of works thus leaving any part or
stage of Works incomplete, where before work suspension Works' conservation is needed according
to statutory procedures.
During the execution of the Contract, the Engineer is entitled to provide the Contractor with binding
instructions regarding the elaboration, updating, adaptation of the Programme, any section (-s) thereof,
and other activities, which the Contractor must comply with and enforce.
69
Time schedule, plans and progress control
This chapter shall include the administrative and procedural requirements for the performance
schedule of Works and elaboration of reports the Contractor shall be required to fulfil during the
execution of Works.
If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of this chapter of the specifications, it shall be
the reason for the Employer not to make further progress payments until the Contractor has fully
complied with these requirements.
Contractor’s submittals schedule / log
Within 15 days after the approval of the Programme for design, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer, with a copy to the Employer, the submittals log for initial review, including all information to
be submitted in accordance with the Contract documents. The Engineer shall examine it and the
Contractor shall be obliged to receive the Engineer’s approval for these documents.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, by sending a copy to the Employer, the journal of
Engineer's materials to be submitted, including therein from the approved schedule all the specific
dates and information on all potential materials to be submitted. These materials to be submitted are
for review and approval by the Engineer.
For each question the following shall be indicated:
1. The deadline for submitting the materials to be submitted under contract;
2. Deadline when, under contract, the Engineer must approve;
3. The responsible person in the organisation of the Contractor and sub-contractor which shall
elaborate the materials to be submitted;
4. Expected submission date;
5. Last expected submission date.
Upon receipt of the Engineer's approval, the Contractor shall print and issue copies to the Employer,
Engineer, sub-contractors and other parties who must comply with the submission dates specified.
Copies shall be placed in the project meeting room and at the site bureau (office).
After review, the Contractor shall issue the copies to the Engineer and the Employer.
The Contractor shall review and update the schedules once every two weeks and shall submit them
(48) hours before the progress meeting to the Engineer for review, with a copy to the Employer.
Contractor’s procurement schedule
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, with a copy to the Employer, his procurement log for the
initial review, by indicating the design activities that he intends to outsource, including all the
information to be provided in accordance with the Contract documents.
Together with the submission of the Programme for design, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer, by sending a copy to the Employer, the Contractor's procurement log, including therein all the
70
specified dates and information from the approved schedule, approvals of the manufacturers /
suppliers and agents for all possible purchases. These materials to be submitted are for review and
approval by the Engineer.
Issuing: When the activity is performed after the initial submission, the Contractor shall print and issue
copies to the Employer, the Engineer, the sub-contractors and other parties who must comply with the
procurement dates indicated. Copies of the schedule shall be placed in the project meeting room and
at the site office. After review, the copies shall be issued to the same parties and placed in the same
places.
Updating: The Contractor shall review and update the log once every two weeks and shall submit it (48)
hours before the progress meeting to the Engineer for review, with a copy to the Employer.
The format shall be used as specified in the chapter “Quality control”.
In addition the Contractor shall, at any time upon the request of the Employer or the Engineer, provide
full and complete information on the supply of all products in relation to all finished products that the
Contractor has ordered and / or purchased for inclusion in the Works.
Such information shall include product ordering forms, manufacturer and / or supplier approvals,
pricing requests, copies of information request letter etc.
Time schedule
The detailed time schedule of the Project within the Programme shall be designed by means of a
suitable software, which enables easy and efficient control of the progress and changes in the
schedule.
The time schedule shall include work activities for the Contract fulfilment, such as surveys, design
activities, approval terms, construction works activities, temporary commissioning of objects and final
commissioning thereof.
The information included in a time shedule, control milestones, deadlines (including intermediate
terms) and commencement, completion and conveyance (including also taking over) milestones of
Works, parts thereof, deadlines shall be realistic, as well as, when setting and executing them, the
Contractor shall strictly comply with each and every deadline (-s), intermediate deadline (-s) of Works,
parts thereof and commencement, completion and conveyance deadline (-s), intermediate deadline (-
s) of Stages established by the Contract and this Technical Specification.
The schedule shall be integrated or supplemented with the resource plan (labour, devices, machines)
considering the activities, and it shall contain a reference to sub-contractors in charge of activities, as
well as show the 1520mm gauge tracks signalling subsystem design and construction works.
The Work schedule shall be updated every month or at the request of the Employer or the Engineer at
regular progress meetings or special meetings. Update shall be performed only for the monitoring
purposes.
Construction project planning and scheduling method: where the activities are arranged on the basis
of their interconnectedness, and through network calculations it is determined when the activities can
be performed, as well as the Project critical path.
71
The Work schedule shall include the main deadlines and the general deadline for completion, as
indicated in the Contract documents. The Contractor shall plan, execute and coordinate his work in
such a way as to meet the Project time requirements.
The Contractor shall provide the following additional data together with his Work schedule and any
subsequent updated and revised information in the form approved by the Engineer.
1. Number of working days proposed per week;
2. National holidays and other holidays to be taken into account during the contract (by dates);
3. Expected number of shifts per day;
4. Number of hours in shift;
5. Planned use of the main construction equipment at the object per week;
6. Planned use of main construction equipment at the site per month;
7. Planned procurement and delivery of materials per month;
8. Average weekly labor force (eg carpenters, rebar workers, workers, etc.) of each industry experts
to be employed in works, considering the measures, duration and production speed;
9. Explanation of all logistics, time, labour and equipment changes;
10. Actual commencement and end dates of the activities already completed.
If any of the Work elements necessary for the performance of the Contract is not included, this shall
not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to complete all necessary work until the respective deadline
of each phase or all Works, parts thereof, regardless of the Engineer's approval of the Programme or
any construction work schedule.
The critical path within the meaning of this document is the longest continuous series of activities in a
network graph that defines the minimum general Work, parts thereof, duration of Stages.
The network schedule for the purpose of this document is a graphical network plan that outlines the
activities and their interconnectedness.
The activities within the meaning of this document is a part of a separate project that can be
distinguished in the planning, scheduling, monitoring and control of the construction project. Activities
included in the construction work schedule:
1. Critical activities are activities within the critical path;
2. Predecessor: an activity is an activity that must be completed before a specific activity can be
initiated;
3. One activity is defined as an activity whose performace take at least one day both in case of design
and construction;
4. Event: An event is the starting or ending point of an activity;
5. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement;
6. Float is the measure of leeway in activity performance. Accumulative float time belongs to the
Employer;
7. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early
start of the following activity;
72
8. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting
the planned project completion date.
The Contractor shall use actual IT software in version issued not later than end 2016 in preparing the
Construction Schedule. The software to be used by the Contractor for the Schedule shall be Microsoft
Project or similar.
The Contractor shall develop the Programme to be provided following Contract’s article 8.3
demonstrating fulfillment of all Contract requirements by linking Construction schedule activities with
the further construction activities.
The Programme shall be updated when required by the Employer or Engineer, for review at regular
progress meetings or for special meetings.
Each revised Work shedule shall be signed by a duly authorized Contractor’s representative and, upon
the approval of the Engineer, it shall be included in the Project Contract documents and used as a basis
for further questions regarding the dates.
Contractor’s scheduling engineer
The Contractor shall designate a Scheduling Engineer within 10 days after signing of Agreement who
shall be responsible for the content and development of the Contractor's construction schedule. This
representative shall have direct control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in
fulfilling the requirements of the construction schedule requirements and such authority shall not be
interrupted throughout the duration of the contract.
Approval of Scheduling Engineer shall be submitted to Engineer and approved prior to appointment.
Engineer has right to request changing of Scheduling Engineer without prior consent from Employer by
submitting written request.
Contractor shall within 10 working days from receipt of request of Engineer submit to Engineer CV and
qualification of proposed new Scheduling Engineer.
Scheduling Engineer shall have minimum ten (10) years experience and capacity to work with Microsoft
Project, AutoCAD and experience in BIM environment as far as it is necessary for the respective job
responsibilities.
Scheduling Engineer shall not bear any other responsibility in Contractor organization and shall be
present in site office of Contractor every working day during working time over design and construction
period. In case of sickness and /or holiday lasting more than 3 days Contractor shall temporary approve
with Engineer approval of substitute within 5 days from starting of absence.
Missing approval of Scheduling Engineer Employer will be entitled to apply penalties as described in
Contract’s Particular Conditions article 8.3 for not submission of Programme.
73
Both construction and design schedule shall be implemented according to requirements of Engineer,
including graphical documentation, showing when requested in 3D and in plan phases of progressing
of work by week for overal construction and by day in area where works are taking place outside of
fenced area, showing ongoing works, position of heavy equipment ( lifting, excavation equipment),
temporary access roads.
The Contractor shall meet with the Employer and Engineer as and when necessary to review the
scheduling requirement of the Project.
Demonstrated work activities in the Contractor's Programme shall have minimum duration of one (1)
day and maximum duration of seven (7) days.
Programme developed above shall not be changed throughout the duration of the project without
getting prior approval from the Engineer.
The Programme shall incorporate complete procurement and submittals details. The dates should take
into consideration the time required for preparation, the Contract approvals duration, manufacturing
durations, shipping and the start of construction of the pertinent activities.
Every month, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a detailed schedule elaborated
on the basis of the approved Work schedule, on the Contractor’s daily works for the next 30 days,
providing a copy to the Employer.
If any of the Work elements necessary for the performance of the Contract is not included, this shall
not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to complete all necessary work until the respective deadline
of each phase or all Works, parts thereof, Stage (-es) regardless of the Engineer's approval of the
Programme, construction work schedule.
Cost load within time schedule (after approval of construction schedule)
Within Seven (7) days of obtaining approval of the Programme, the Contractor shall submit for the
approval of the Engineer a cost loaded construction schedule with a fully detailed schedule of values
and all necessary supporting details of all activities in the cost loaded construction schedule based
upon the detailed bill of quantity prepared at the end of design phase.
The approved cost loaded schedule shall be the basis for estimating progress of works on site.
The distribution of costs by activities is to be divided over the entire duration of the activity in direct
linear relation, i.e. if an activity costs EUR 15000 per 10 days, the costs are EUR 1500 per day.
Not more than EUR 250 000 may be allocated to one activity, with the exception of procurement items
that may be specified in the list of materials or in the event where the allocation of costs for specific
activities has been approved by the Engineer.
Amendment and review of the time schedule
The intermediate term, deadline of the Contract, incl. Works, parts thereof, Stage(-s), shall be amended
only in accordance with the provisions of the Contract. If the Contractor requests to amend the
74
intermediate term, deadline of the Contract, incl. Works, parts thereof, Stage(-s), he shall ensure such
justification and additional data as the Engineer deems necessary for the Engineer to assess, or the
Contractor shall be granted the extension of intermediate term, deadline for completion. The
submission of evidence based on revised activities, logistics, time and costs is compulsory in the event
of any request.
The Contractor, with each request, shall submit its revised Work schedule whenever the actual field
work shall not comply with the latest valid, approved Work schedule.
Time schdule submittals
Design and/or Construction Schedule submittals including revisions and updates, shall consist of four
(4) copies of the following (two copies to the Engineer and two copies to the Employer):
1. A complete set of copies of the latest approved Work schedule schemes, with red marks
indicating all revisions and modifications according to monthly meetings, signed by the
Contractor;
2. Copies of each scheme together with copies of planning reports.
Organisation table
The Work Programme shall be accompanied by information on the Contractor's representative and
other key executives (also of Sub-contractors) - descriptions of their works and tasks, addresses, 24-
hour telephone numbers, e-mail addresses. The Contractor shall be notified immediately if the
information provided has changed.
Other documents to be attached The Programme shall be supplemented with the document and technical drawings' management and
exchange program, estimated cash flow schedule, meeting administrative liabilities and regulations
(orders, insurance, etc.), planned risks and measures to reduce these. The document and technical
drawings' management and exchange program shall define the exchange of documents, information
and technical drawings to be circulated during Project implementation, including methods to introduce
changes (see also Chapter 3.4.1).
Project quality assurance plan
Within the framework of the programme elaboration (i.e., simultaneously with the elaboration of the
General Programme and the Detailed Programme respectively), the Contractor shall also elaborate and
coordinate the Project quality assurance plan.
See detailed requirements regarding Project quality assurance plan in Chapter 3.9.
The Contractor shall regularly review and, if needed, update the plan at a frequency of no less than 20
Days.
75
BIM execution plan
Within the framework of the programme elaboration (i.e., simultaneously with the elaboration of the
General Programme and the Detailed Programme respectively), the Contractor shall perform the
elaboration and the coordination of the BIM execution plan. Conditions imposed on work within BIM
environment included in the BIM execution plan and approved according to procedure specified in the
Contract shall be met during Contract fulfilment by the Contractor and its employed parties (sub-
contractors). Any deviations or changes in the BIM execution plan, if such are recommended or needed,
shall only be introduced following the coordination according to the procedure specified in the
Contract. See detailed requirements imposed on BIM execution plan in Chapter 3.11.
3.5.2. Design documents and building design (Detailed Technical Design)
During Contract fulfilment the Contractor elaborates of due quality and receives all relevant approvals
for the following documents elaborated within the framework of design:
- Engineering survey reports (BPN-01)
- Construction Intention (BPN-02)
- Master Design (BPN-03)
- Detailed Technical Design (BPN-04)
All documents elaborated during the design period are submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer,
and the final version thereof (i.e. by submitting the original/- s of the relevant documentation after
receipt of all necessary agreements and approvals) shall be submitted by the Contractor to the
Engineer (or following the instructions of the Engineer - to the Employer) in the number of copies
specified by the Engineer, as well as on an electronic data carrier, in a format agreed upon with the
Employer, as well as shall place, store and update these within the Common Data Environment.
Engineering survey reports (BPN-01)
The Contractor carries out engineering surveys and in accordance with the procedure established by
the Contract submits reports on the findings thereof. The engineering surveys include geodesic and
topographic survey, geotechnical survey and hydrometeorological survey. In case of insufficient
information, the Contractor performs the necessary, desirable, incl. additional surveys at his own cost.
Engineering surveys shall be carried out by the Contractor according to the Applicable law (CoM
Regulations No. 334 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 005-15
“Engineering survey regulations in construction““ of 30/06/2015).
Construction Intention (BPN-02)
Where the legal acts provide for the elaboration of the construction concept (including design in the
minimum composition, if relevant according to statutory requirements) and receiving relevant authority
approvals (including also in the event this has been already previously (before start of Contract
76
fulfilment) elaborated and ensured but is not relevant for the needs of Work performance), this has to
be elaborated by the Contractor and agreed with according to procedure established by the Contract,
as well as with relevant authorities and individuals. The Contractor may expect that, in addition to the
elaboration of the Detailed Technical Design, the construction work may require the elaboration and
coordination of construction documentation, for example: (a) the disconnection of the commercial and
multi-storey car park building "Titāniks" from the city communication infrastructure, demolition of the
building /buildings and the improvement of the liberated territory; as well as (b) the construction
documentation required for the performance of other parts of the Works.
Master Design (BPN-03)
Master design is a design deliverable, which shall be elaborated for 1435mm gauge track infrastructure
and which shall cover all technical parts and explanatory documentation and drawings of 1435mm
gauge track infrastructure. The aim of the master design is to determine and ensure the Employer with
the technical solutions of 1435mm gauge track infrastructure (at the level of detail determined by the
Employer), as well as with the results to be achieved in the design and construction work stages.
The technical solutions of 1435mm gauge track infrastructure determined by the master design shall
provide a sufficient and clear detail level of the project scope, so that the Parties and competent
institutions may assess the interoperability, safety, environmental issues, rationality and technical
parameters of the railway and related structures. The master design shall comply with the Technical
specification for interoperability and Rail Baltica Design guidelines.
At the elaboration of the master design for 1435mm gauge track infrastructure, the requirements of
both this technical specification and its annexes, and also the technical and financial considerations
shall be taken into account, and these shall comply with EIA requirements and technical conditions
issued by the stakeholders. At the elaboration of technical solutions, all directly affected stakeholders
shall be involved.
The Contractor shall elaborate the master design in accordance with the time schedule prepared and
submitted with the tender.
Technical requirements for Master Design regarding 1535mm gauge railway
infrastructure
Technical requirements for Master Design regarding 1435mm gauge railway infrastructure are as
follows:
1. To elaborate technical solutions for the 1435 mm gauge track infrastructure, including the typical
technical drawings of railway line, relevant cross-sections, station, noise reduction measures,
fencing, etc. Solutions shall comply with Rail Baltica Design Guidelines.
2. Carry out all relevant surveys for the technical study:
a. Geodesic survey;
b. Geological analysis with profiles;
77
c. Hydrology survey;
d. Any other survey relevant to complete the Master Design (e.g., if prescribed by EIA or local
circumstances).
3. To prepare detailed technical drawings of the 1435 mm gauge infrastructure at a scale 1:1000 at
a level of detail which is sufficiently precise to make the key details clear and the key requirements
for a accurate design;
4. To prepare the necessary schematic drawings of relevant crossings according to multiple level
junctions' requirements, ensuring safe and convenient crossing of rail tracks. The solutions shall
be elaborated in consultation with the managers of the respective infrastructure and local
municipality;
5. To design the planned crossing plans and longitudinal sections at a level of detail, which would
provide for sufficient output data to design the buildings and structures and to make work
estimations. To prepare a preliminary cost sheet with detailed breakdown by infrastructure
elements, types of works, railway sections;
6. To prepare a final version of the list of real estate properties needed for the railway and related
utilities' structures;
7. To prepare technical solutions for the railway, including:
a. Schematic track plan indicating the principal and lateral tracks, station territory, etc.;
b. Railway plan with the location of related buildings and planned rail tracks, longitudinal sections
(vertical scale 1:200, horizontal scale 1:2000) and cross-sections and superstructure;
c. Location of key train control and signalisation system (CCS) and communication system
facilities;
d. Sectioning of overhead contact line network and location of key facilities;
e. Section on railway engineering structures: bridges, crossings and culverts, underwater
management systems;
f. Passenger platforms;
g. Noise barriers and other technical means to reduce noise and vibrations;
h. Cable location along the railway line;
i. Access and maintenance roads along the railway line;
j. Communications and utilities' networks, including crossings.
8. Includes a summary of technical conditions and initial approvals from authorities.
Detailed Technical Design (BPN-04)
The Contractor shall elaborate, obtain respective approvals and submit to the Contracting Authority all
relevant building designs (including Detailed Technical Design) within the Contract fulfilment according
to statutory requirements, building permits provided by the Contracting Authority and requirements
imposed by the present Technical Specification.
78
3.5.3. Completion of construction works and taking over of structures
The Contractor is in charge of the performance of construction works under the Contract and of Works
altogether, and of taking over of each Stage (phase) of Works.
The Contractor shall provide for temporary commissioning of Stages of Works or parts thereof, since
the railway infrastructure objects are envisaged to be used before final commissioning. Thus the
Contractor is in due time obliged to provide the respective Stages of Works (i.e., all such Stages or
parts thereof) for temporary commissioning, where this is allowed according to Applicable Law.
Before commissioning of each Stage of Works, the Contractor shall according to the Contract and the
Applicable Law elaborate the respective construction documentation, incl. the documentation and as-
built documentation determined by the competent authorities and technical regulations, and such
documentation together with a list thereof shall be submitted to the Engineer as well, and the
documentation and data shall also be uploaded on the Common Data Environment. Before temporary
commissioning of each Stage of Works, the Contractor shall in the relevant amount (i.e., according to
the Contract and the Applicable Law requirements) elaborate the respective construction
documentation, incl. the documentation and as-built documentation determined by the competent
authorities and technical regulations (if such is required by the Engineer, competent authorities), and
such documentation together with a list thereof shall be submitted to the Engineer as well, and the
documentation and data shall also be uploaded on the Common Data Environment.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the as-built drawings and as-built documentation regarding
all built elements, incl., rail tracks, buildings, structures and facilities, and such documentation and data
shall be uploaded on the Common Data Environment in due time. The documents shall be submitted
in reproducible graphic format, of a quality acceptable to the Engineer, and in digital (flash or Common
Data Environment) format – .dwg, .pdf and other format according to requirements under Chapter 3.11.
The Contractor shall inter alia submit the as-built documentation of Works according to the
construction regulations of the respective type of structure.
The as-built documentation shall include all technical drawings, models, schemes, plans of all parts of
Works, including rail tracks, buildings, structures, networks and systems.
Following the completion of Works or part thereof, and at the commissioning of the structure, the
Contractor shall provide for the following activities:
1. During transfer and installation of devices, equipment or construction products the structures
under construction and nearby devices, equipment or construction products at the construction
site shall be cleaned and protected.
2. The completed structures shall be cleaned and maintained at a frequency as required for the
residual construction period.
3. Openings, apertures to be used as gateways or to move materials, jams, surfaces of their upper
beams and sills shall by means of finishing be protected from optional damages during work
performance, and this shall be done by new wooden planks or new sheets of plywood, subject to
Engineer’s approval.
79
4. As soon as any of the finished surfaces, e.g., part of flooring, is completed, it shall be protected
from any damages by covering it with new, dense sheeting or other means approved by the
Engineer.
5. The finished surfaces, either finished in a plant or on site, shall be clean and stain-free after the
work is completed. The Contractor shall without extra reimbursement repeatedly finish the places,
where their surfaces turn out to have not been sufficiently protected and are damages, as
instructed by the Engineer.
6. In cases where for the performance of works special measures to ensure their protection are
needed, this is approved by the Engineer.
7. If necessary, the Contractor shall provide a weatherproof fencing during construction works to
protect the place of works from damages due to wind, heat, sun, rain and snow, and proper working
conditions shall be ensured, if needed. Permanent doors, fencing, and other parts may not be
fastened early to use these as temporary fencing; instead, walking through temporary doors,
fencing and other shall be ensured, subject to Engineer’s approval.
8. Before transfer of works, the Contractor shall undertake industrial cleaning. The cleaning works
include collecting construction waste and cleaning visible surfaces indoors and outdoors.
9. Remove temporary protection elements, fencing, marking and signs, the storage of which is not
necessary.
10. Clean surfaces from dust, stains, paint film and spilled mortar, and other foreign bodies.
11. Clean transparent and shiny materials from inside and out to make them shine, remove foreign
bodies.
12. Clean surfaces of devices, remove residual oil.
13. Clean and polish plumbing devices and facilities to reach a proper hygiene level.
14. Clean illumination devices and lamps.
15. Undertake cleaning by the acceptance-delivery protocol date.
16. Collect waste and dispose accordingly, foreign bodies and construction waste from roofs, drains,
territory and drainage systems.
As-built documentation
Within 45 days of the Date of signing of each Taking Over Certificate, Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for approval five printed sets of As-Built Documents plus “soft copy” format As-Built Drawings,
in approved format.
Contractor shall transmit above documents with cover letter, listing date, project title and number,
Contractor's name, address, and telephone number and title of each record document and arrange in
correct sequence. Copies shall contain signature of Contractor or authorized representative.
Documentation to be submitted following Latvian construction legislation, all signed by Engineer with
material approval form, subcontractor approval form for all subcontractor involved in project. Copy of
signed and approved by Engineer Request for Variation.
80
As-built drawings
As-built drawings depict the latest changes in production drawings. Including Contract changes
according to standards.
The Contractor prepares and submits to the Engineer for approval exact as-built drawings, which are
attached at least all production drawings or latest changes thereof, including changes in the Contract
and other as-built documentation according to the present Technical specification.
Before drafting the as-built drawings, the Contractor shall seek to receive Engineer’s approval of
drawing dimensions, drawing method and other important details.
All as-built drawings shall be numbered, and number series of all these shall be approved by the
Engineer. Table of contents of the drawings shall be provided. Hard copies of drawings prepared like
this shall be dated and signed by the Contractor, and following approval these shall be signed also by
the Engineer.
3.6. Engineer’s liability for reviewing materials submitted by the Contractor
The Engineer reviews materials submitted by the Contractor to check for general compliance to Project
concept and information contained within Contract documents, and such review or approval does not
release the Contractor from its liability for any deviations from Contract document requirements.
Engineer’s review is not a complete inspection and does neither release the Contractor from liability
for any type of errors in the submitted materials, nor from the necessity to ensure any works as required
in Contract documents and might be missed in the submitted documents. The Engineer reviews these
as fast as possible and hands over to the Contractor. Neither the accept of submitted materials, nor
approval, not any Engineer’s remarks or requests on any of the submitted documents represent the
permit to undertake any Contract fee increase or Contract term prolongation, or changes in Contract
requirements.
The Contractor is not released from any liability for any deviations from Contract requirements after
the Engineer has approved the materials to be submitted. The Engineer shall be notified of all such
deviations in writing with a copy to the Employer by use of an approved template during submission
period. On repeatedly submitted materials the Contractor shall indicate all reviews, including those
required by the Engineer.
Any such Engineer's comments, which increase the Contract costs or duration, shall be notified to the
Employer and Engineer according to contract and procedures before continuation of Works.
Each submitted materials is returned to the Contractor bearing Engineer’s stamp or remark indicating
the respective activity in the following way:
1. APPROVED means that the making, production or construction may be proceeded, if the Engineer
or the Contract documents do not require further submission of related materials.
2. APPROVED WITH COMMENTS means that if and when the Contractor fulfils Engineer’s comments,
the making, production or construction may be proceeded as determined in the APPROVED version.
81
If for any reason the Contractor cannot fulfil the remarks, the Contractor shall review the submitted
materials and submit these repeatedly, as indicated in the version for REPEATED SUBMISSION.
3. NOT APPROVED, FOR REPEATED SUBMISSION means that the submitted materials do not comply
with Contract documents and the making, production or construction of respective Articles (incl.
Work related to these) may not be continued. Materials to be submitted bearing the seal FOR
REPEATED SUBMISSION shall not be allowed into the construction site and these shall not be used.
The Contractor shall review as required and shall submit and get an approval of the materials
repeatedly.
The Contractor is in charge of preparing all of the drawings in order to extend the drawings relevant for
the construction, and shall cover the costs for this. The Contractor is liable for the proper location of
its works irrespective of the Engineer’s approval.
The Contractor is liable for changes in Works due to discrepancies, errors or omissions to the drawings
and other information provided by it, and it covers the costs thereof, whether or not such drawings and
information has been approved by the Engineer.
After the Engineer has approved the submitted materials, these are not returned, except when
repeatedly submitted and approved by the Engineer, or when these are changed according to the
Change offer, as stipulated according to contractual provisions.
3.7. Defect notification period
Defect notification period for Works is 5 years and is counted from the date stipulated in the Contract.
For individual Work parts and elements, the Defect notification period is longer (prolonged defect
notification period according to Article 11 of the Contract Specific rules):
1. For roof and structural elements of the station building – ten (10) years;
2. For structural elements of bridges and overpasses – ten (10) years;
3. Outer hydro-insulation of the structure surfaces – ten (10) years.
And these periods are counted from the date stipulated by the Contract.
The Defect notification period and the Prolonged defect notification period is applied to any devices,
equipment, elements, spare parts, structures and construction materials integrated, installed and
supplied as a result of the performance of Works, and it shall not be shorter than the Defect notification
period of the respective Works and the Prolonged defect notification period of the respective Works.
During the whole Contract fulfilment period (i.e., according to the Contract a Contract performance
statement accepted by the Engineer is issued) with its own means and resources the Contractor shall
ensure the operation service and maintenance of the devices, equipment, elements, spare parts,
structures and construction materials integrated, installed and supplied as a result of the performance
of Works, incl. the exchange, service and renewal of relevant spare parts, fluids. The Contractor shall
independently and regularly check that these liabilities of the Contractor are met in full and in due time.
Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations regarding the warranties of Articles, Works and parts
thereof do not release the Contractor from the work warranty (Contractor’s liabilities which shall be
82
met during the Defect notification period and the Prolonged defect notification period respectively),
which include Material and Devices. Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations regarding the
warranties of Materials and Devices do not release the suppliers, producers and subcontractors, which
also have to sign and incur special project warranties similar to the Contract jointly with the Contractor.
Standard product warranties are written warranty forms, which are published by individual
manufacturers on particular products, incl., those specially approved by the manufacturer to the
Employer.
Special project warranties are written warranties, which are required by or are included in the Contract
documents, either to prolong the standard warranty term, or to grant larger rights to the Contractor.
Detailed requirements
At the Defect remedy in Works, the Contractor shall dismantle and exchange the structure, which is
damaged due to such damage or shall dismantle or exchange it to access the warranty-protected
structure and fix it. During the Defect notification period the Contractor’s staff together with the
Engineer and the Employer shall at least twice per year organise the inspection and defect check. For
these inspections, the Contractor shall assign a contact person before completion of works.
If it is established that a part of Works is damaged (a Defect is established), the Contractor shall
exchange or redo the work to achieve an acceptable condition to meet the Contract document
requirements. The Contractor bears the costs for the exchange or remake of a damaged work whether
or not the Contractor has got a benefit from using the work for some time of its envisaged efficient
service life.
If it is established that a part of Works is damaged (a Defect is established), the Contractor shall
exchange or redo the work to achieve an acceptable condition to meet the Contract document
requirements. The Contractor bears the costs for the exchange or remake of a damaged work whether
or not the Contractor has got a benefit from using the work for some time of its envisaged efficient
service life.
Explicit warranties extend indirect warranties to the Employer and shall not limit in any other way the
statutory duties, liabilities, rights and legal protection. The deadlines of direct warranties shall not be
translated as limitations on the period of time, during which the Employer may undertake such other
duties, liabilities, rights and legal protection.
The Employer reserves the right to reject warranties and select only such products, the warranties of
which are not in contradiction to the Contract document requirements.
If the Contract documents require a special project warranty or similar liabilities in respect of works or
a part thereof, the Employer reserves the right to reject acceptance of works until the Contractor
demonstrates that the persons, who had to sign such a liability statement have done it.
83
Materials to be submitted
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer written guarantees before the day the delivery-acceptance
protocol is signed. If the delivery-acceptance protocol states a warranty start date, which differs from
the date of the delivery-acceptance protocol for Works or a part thereof, written guarantees following
Engineer’s request shall be submitted.
If according to Contract documents the Contractor and subcontractors, supplier or manufacturer shall
draft a special project warranty, the Contractor shall draft a written document, which contains suitable
conditions and identifications, and is ready to meet these respectively. Before final version, submit the
draft document to be approved by the Engineer.
During delivery-acceptance the Contractor shall collate three (3) counterparts of each requested
warranty, duly drafted by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall bind the warranties and guarantees into durable, industrial quality vinyl folders,
the thickness of which is chosen depending on the content, to insert suitable A4 paper, and providing
respective document dividers with celluloid coating on numbering index for each individual warranty.
Provide printed product or installation description with the product name and installer’s name, address
and phone number. On each folder, the Contractor shall provide identification on front cover and back
with a typed or printed inscription “Warranties”, Project title and Contractor’s name.
If the warranty-protected structure needs operation and service instructions, the Contractor shall
provide additional copies of each relevant warranty, if needed, to be included in each required
instruction.
3.8. Public relations
The Contractor shall assign a public relations expert, who will be the contact of the Contractor as
regards communications and PR issues and will enable communication with target audiences in the
official language of Latvia.
Any PR activities by the Contractor (communication with the public, providing information to media,
publishing information on websites and social networks, etc.) in relation to the Project under the
Contract, shall be agreed with the Employer in advance.
3.9. Quality requirements and control
3.9.1. Project quality assurance plan
The Contractor shall prepare a project quality assurance plan (also covering Sub-contractors' work)
and shall submit it for the coordination at the same time as the Work programme within the relevant
deadline (i.e., simultaneously with the elaboration of the General Program and the Detailed Program
respectively).
Project quality assurance plan shall include a detailed quality assurance strategy, organisation,
responsibility issues and procedures to be followed.
84
The following shall at least be included and the following sections shall be addressed in the quality
assurance plan:
1. Organisation of personnel; resources and means;
2. Management system and duties;
3. Organisation of control and procedures;
4. Control and management of Detailed Technical Design;
5. Checking calculations, and documentation of calculations;
6. Control of measurement and inspection devices;
7. Non-compliance management;
8. Work management;
9. Control of materials, devices and construction works / control of the processes of installation;
10. Detailed program for the inspection of structures and materials on-site;
11. Control of producers, suppliers and sub-contractors;
12. Measurements and inspections, and defect prevention control;
13. Control of occupational safety issues;
14. Problem reporting and corrective actions;
15. Inspections and auditing;
16. Environment management;
17. Preservation and maintenance of records;
18. Risk management system.
Design control
Project quality assurance plan by the Contractor shall include an individual chapter, which describes in
detail the responsibilities and procedures to be applied during construction design. It shall define the
key design stages, documentation to be drafted, propose a verification method of the project
documentation, and the responsibility of the elaboration and verification of the plan. It shall also depict
the link of design activities by the Contractor with activities of other organisations, as well as stages,
when the Project documentation will be submitted to the Engineer.
The project quality assurance plan shall contain at least:
- it shall list Works stages, which were to define work processes, as well as all scheduled
inspections and verifications, which shall be carried out by the Contractor and its
subcontractors to thus demonstrate the compatibility to conditions included in the Technical
Specification;
- it shall define the procedures of work instructions, inspections and verifications to be followed
(control documents);
- it shall define, which records shall be made at each stage of Construction works (verification
documents);
- it shall define or refer to documents, which clarify the acceptance criteria;
- it shall define or refer to documents, which list tools to be used during inspections or
verifications;
85
- it shall define the procedures of works to be carried out beyond the work zone of Contractor
for it to be approved by the Engineer.
Within the elaboration of the programme (i.e., simultaneously with the elaboration of the General
Program, see chapter "Work programme"), the Contractor shall appoint a Quality assurance manager
of the Project, whose duties shall include the quality issues.
Contractor shall maintain quality control system over all period of design and construction, system
shall be applicable to verify suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to deliver Project and work of specified quality.
The Contractor shall ensure and maintain an effective Contractor's quality control (CQC) programme
and shall perform sufficient inspections and tests of all work positions, including works of sub-
contractors and performers of individual construction works in order to comply with the Contract
documents. The monitoring and inspections specified in the work chapters of the specification shall
be included. Appropriate equipment, tools and testing equipment necessary for performing quality
control functions shall be provided. The control shall be sufficient to cover the construction works and
shall be linked to the sequence of works.
15 days after signing of Contract Contractor shall designate and submit to approval of Engineer a
Quality control Manager having relevant and comparable experience as Quality Manager on
construction site and technical degree in engineering.
Five days after submission of documentation related to Quality Manager Engineer shall approve or
reject proposal of Main Contractor. If Engineer rejects, Contractor shall submit alternative proposal.
3.9.2. Quality control plan for design period
15 days after signing of the Contract Contractor shall submit to approval of Engineer Quality Control
Plan for Process of Design including at least following information:
1. Organization chart of Contractor
2. Split of design responsibilities
3. Proposed document codification
4. Proposal of Contractor’s internal procedure for electronic exchange and storage of design
documents
5. Proposal of Contractor’s internal procedure for checking and approval by Contractor of design
documents to be submitted to approval of Engineer And Employer
6. Proposal of Contractor’s internal procedure for choosing of designer and design experts
7. Proposal of Contractor’s internal procedure to insure use of latest in force documentation during
construction process
8. Risk analysis connected with process of design
9. List of proposed involved design subcontractor with criteria substantiating their enrolment
(certificate, capacity reference in line with standard of design works to be executed)
10. Proposal of Contractor’s internal procedure for management of non conformity
86
11. Activity to be performed with clear explanation of responsible person for implementation of
procedure, allocated time and tools
12. Frequency of audit and type of reporting ( all report of audit performed during design period shall
be submitted to Engineer).
Quality Control Plan for Process of Design shall be approved or rejected/commented by Engineer and
Contractor shall comply with Engineer’s remarks, review document and resubmit to approval.
No any approval of design documentation will be issued by Engineer or Employer prior to approval of
Quality Control Plan for Process of Design.
3.9.3. Quality control plan for construction period
60 days prior to starting of construction works on site Contractor shall submit to approval of Engineer
Quality Control Plan for Process of Construction including at least following issues:
1. Organization chart of Contractor with cv and qualification of each of member of management team;
2. Split of responsibilities over construction
3. Proposal of Contractor’s internal procedure for:
a. Procurement of material and choosing of subcontractors
b. Management of logistics process including:
I. Registration of delivery of material at site
II. Storage organization
III. Internal contractor checking of quality of
1. Delivered material
2. Executed works
c. Programme of proposed test and control item
d. List of method statements to be submitted to approval of Engineer for each section and
typology of works
e. Internal management of non conformities
4. Proposal of Contractor’s internal procedure for insure use of latest in force documentation during
construction process
5. Proposal of Contractor’s internal procedure for checking and approval by Contractor of design
documents to be submitted to approval of Engineer And Employer
6. Risk analysis connected with process of design
7. List of proposed involved subcontractors with criteria substantiating their enrolment (certificate,
capacity reference in line with standard of Design works to be executed)
8. Proposal for Contractor’s internal procedures describing contractor’s steps to be implemented in
process of delivery of each section
9. Frequency of audit and type of reporting (all report of audit performed during construction shall be
submitted to Engineer).
Each procedure shall contain:
1. Name and reference of issuer and approval responsible person
87
2. Aim and content of procedure
3. List of persons involved in application of procedure
4. List of related procedures.
Activity to be performed with clear explanation of responsible person for implementation of procedure,
allocated time and tools.
Quality Control Plan for Process of Construction shall be approved or rejected/Commented by Engineer
and Contractor shall comply with Engineer’s remarks, review document and resubmit to approval.
Contractor will be not allowed to start works on site priorto approval of Quality Control Plan for Process
of Construction and any delay may result shall remain under Contractor’s responsibility.
3.9.4. Contractor’s and subcontractors’ personnel
Contractor shall comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified
requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
Contractor shall perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of the specified quality.
3.9.5. On-site quality verifications for construction works
During the entire period of Works, the Contractor shall verify the materials, facilities and Works quality,
as well as do verifications before Works completion. The Contractor shall verify each stage of Works
(Section) and the whole Works before Works completion. Examinations before Works completion shall
verify by demonstrating the set of documents of the construction process (incl. Detailed Technical
Design, expertise statement, verification statement, as-built documentation submitted to Engineer and
approved by Engineer, and any other relevant documentation) and shall guarantee to the Contracting
Authority that the station's passenger building, platforms, other constructed/reconstructed buildings
and structures, station tracks, all built / reconstructed structures and systems comply with Contract
incl. Employer’s requirements and are integrated with the existing railway infrastructure and ready for
railway operations, insofar this is provided within the framework of the Contract.
The examinations or commissioning shall not be carried out in the absence of the Engineer and without
satisfying the Engineer's requirements (except for pre-checks and trial checks carried out by the
Contractor himself).
Inspection results shall comply with the requirements, standards and conditions of the Applicable Law
and Contract (incl. by the Employer).
Within the Contractor's quality assurance plan, a detailed verification schedule shall be elaborated and
submitted for approval by the Engineer, which is a precondition to carry out the construction works.
The provision of measuring instruments, laboratory tests and relevant staff, as well as the issue of
examination certificates are carried out at the cost of Contractor. During construction works the
Engineer is entitled to undertake own measurements and examinations at any time. The Contractor
88
shall contribute to the measurements and examinations carried out by the Engineer by providing its
assistance upon request.
Within 15 Days following the completion of inspections, the Contractor shall submit reports to the
Engineer about the examinations carried out, and such reports shall include examination outputs,
measurements, graphs, and other related data. The Engineer shall check the outputs, and where the
results comply with requirements, it shall approve these and issue verification certificates to the
Contractor.
Materials and facilities will be checked during production and before sending these to the Contractor.
The Engineer is entitled at any time to examine the production plant, where the facilities are produced.
The Contractor shall contribute to these visits by providing its help. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer after a facility is ready to be inspected and checked. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor,
whether he himself will take part in the examinations or whether it authorises the Contractor to
undertake the inspections and submit the respective inspection results to the Engineer. The
inspections do not release the Contractor from liability of defects, which might occur during on-site
examination at the construction site or during the operation of the facility.
All Works’ components and systems shall be subject to examination of operation and inspection,
including mechanical, electric and other examinations, which are relevant to the system. The
examinations will be carried out to make sure, whether the functionality of each part of the overall
system complies with the Contract. The verification schedule shall be included in the Contractor's
Quality assurance system.
he Contractor shall install all measurements hardware relevant to carry out the examinations. Following
completion of all examinations, the Contractor shall remove all temporary connections, devices and
examination appliances, and shall restore the facilities in initial condition for the final acceptance.
In due time before the issue date of each Delivery-acceptance approval of each Stage of Works, and, if
requested so by the Engineer, at each stage of Works’ performance before the issue date of a Delivery-
acceptance approval of all Works (e.g., before temporary commissioning of Works or a part thereof),
the Contractor shall provide for a trial operation to check that the Riga Central passenger station
buildings and structures, rail tracks and their infrastructure, including all systems, work excellently and
according to the Contract, and are ready for operation (incl., temporary operation). The trial run shall
check for the efficiency and coherence of all individual systems, and it shall carry out mass training to
ensure operation in line with the manufacturer's requirements, and shall give instructions to operation
and maintenance staff. The Contractor shall cover all costs of the trial operation.
Preparation inspection
Before starting to work, the Contractor shall inspect a certain part of construction works, including an
overview of Contract requirements, which lists inspectors, who are directly liability for the performance
of works; it shall be checked that the materials, products and facilities are tested, submitted and
approved; it shall be checked that the relevant control checks are planned; the work zone shall be
89
inspected to make sure that the preparation works are done. The Contractor shall physically check the
Articles, incl., materials and facilities, to check that these comply with the production drawings and
data, and that the Articles, incl., materials and facilities, are easily accessible.
Such inspection shall be carried out as soon as work at a typical part of a particular element is started,
including the compliance of control inspection to Contract requirements, and, considering Engineer’s
instructions, to check for uninterrupted compliance to Contract requirements until completion of a
particular work.
Quality control on works outside of the construction site
If the Engineer requests so, the Contractor shall undertake quality control inspection at the plant
(structures in production) on those spare parts, which, instead of the main parts, are made or
assembled outside the construction site, Work performance site. The CQC representative of the
Contractor at the production plant is in charge of returning the finished spare parts to be sent to the
construction site. The CQC representative of the Contractor at the construction site receives the spare
part and marks any damages incurred during the shipping. The Contractor is in charge of the protection
and maintenance of the spare part of due quality during the whole time, while it is stored at the
construction site, as well as during the assembly, installation and maintenance. Although each spare
part, which is found defect, may be rejected before its use, its final acceptance by the Engineer is
subject to the spare part fitting successfully in the Works and the acceptance of the completed Project.
And the inspections at the performance of Works and beyond it is subject to contractual provisions
and procedure.
Quality Control protocols
The Contractor shall in cooperation with the Engineer, at a time indicated by the Engineer, draft and
communicate with the Engineer the list of quality control protocols, which will have to be prepared. The
Engineer will shortlist protocols, which will have to be stored permanently. The protocols to be stored
in long-term, shall be submitted to the Engineer according to a schedule approved by the Engineer. The
types of quality control protocols and the respective process shall be set down in the Project quality
assurance plan of the Contractor.
The inspection and verification protocols shall at least indicate the Contractor, Sub-Contractor,
inspection or verification date and type, the person, who carried out the inspection or verification,
procedure requirements, acceptance criteria, outcomes, whether or not the outcomes are acceptable,
or a reference to any action, which has been carried out due to a quality non-conformity.
The inspection protocols shall be documented and submitted to the Engineer every day on templates
approved by the latter, which states that the spare parts are properly installed or are defective, together
with a notification of the undertaken remedy works.
Engineer shall be invited to attend inspection by Contractor 48 hour prior to inspection will be held.
90
In force documentation
Procedures assuring that the proper parts of Contract documents, shop drawings and instructions as
required by Contract are used for testings and inspections shall be included in the Contractor’s quality
control programme.
Testing and inspection devices
During the whole construction process, the Contractor shall provide and maintain all measurement and
inspection devices, equipment, tools and materials needed to undertake the relevant inspections and
tests, done only at the construction site. All measurement and inspection devices shall be calibrated
on a regular basis for these to comply with the approved standards. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer all calibration reports immediately, if required so by the Engineer.
Manufacturer’s services at the construction site
If indicated so in the respective sections of the specifications, the Contractor and the supplier,
manufacturer or appointed representative shall provide qualified staff to monitor the conditions at the
construction site, surface and installation conditions, performance quality, device running, to test,
adapt and balance the devices as needed, and to provide respective recommendations.
The Contractor shall submit a written report to the Engineer listing observations and recommendations.
Monitoring of inspection carried out by the Engineer and monitoring of the Contractor
performance
To make the verification of performance quality, compliance to specifications, etc., easier for the
Engineer, the Contractor shall submit signed inspection request templates. A request is deemed:
1. Contractor’s request to the Engineer to check the preparation or completion of a particular work
element at a particular place, before going to the next such stage of work.
2. The Contractor’s statement that the work, for which it requires an inspection, is properly
coordinated among all involved field experts and direct contractors, complies with the respective
specifications, production drawings and other data, which are included in the Contract or approved
by the Engineer, and is completed as such and is ready for such inspection and the next related
work stage.
“Inspection request” forms are dated and numbered in the approved sequence, and are submitted for
each Work element or are in accordance with the Engineer’s requirements. Each “Inspection request”
form shall be signed by all involved experts, subcontractors/ direct contractors, while the Contractor's
signature on this form approves that the works of all involved field experts and direct contractors are
properly coordinated and completed before the issue of the “Inspection request” form.
Besides the signatures of all involved expert subcontractors on the “Inspection request” form, such
subcontractors submit via the Contractor to the Engineer also “Inspection request” forms of all public
91
utilities’ networks’ and communications’ elements after completion and verification thereof, before
cementing, laying the finishing, etc. The “Inspection request” forms of public utilities networks/
communications/ electrical/ mechanical/ IT works are signed by the Contractor and its involved
subcontractors on a form and in a way as required and approved by the Engineer.
In inspection request form it shall be indicated by Contractor when in Contractor’s opinion will be
necessary presence of third party; LDZ, NoBo inspector or any other party to be invited by Employer.
Contractor shall submit a register of inspection request at end of each month of works.
Materials to be submitted for quality assurance
The Contractor shall submit quality control materials, including design data certification,
manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's inspection reports, as well as other quality control
materials in accordance with the various chapters of these specifications.
The submission requirements of field samples listed in the chapters of the Technical Specification (but
not the only ones) shall be fulfilled to the fullest extent possible. The Contractor shall fill out the
shipping forms that contain the activity registration. The Contractor shall provide any samples not
mentioned in this Technical Specification if requested by the Engineer and shall not require any
additional payment thereof.
Certification: if other chapters of the Technical Specification specify the requirements for the
certification, that the product, material or device meets the established requirements, or if the Engineer
issues such a request, the Contractor shall submit from the manufacturer a notarized certificate
attesting the conformity with the established requirements.
Signature: the certificate shall be signed by the manufacturer's official or other person authorized to
sign the documents on behalf of the company concerned.
Inspection and testing reports: the requirements for the submission of inspection and testing reports
of independent testing agencies are described in the chapter "Quality control".
Samples
Field samples are physical samples of natural size that are assembled at the site to display finishes,
prime coating or finishing materials. Field samples shall be used to determine the standard, after which
the work shall be evaluated.
The Contractor shall submit perfectly finished samples of natural size, hardened and with a finishing
as specified, as well as physically identical to the material or the article offered for use.
The Contractor shall assemble, show or pack samples in the prescribed manner in order to facilitate
the examination of the specified properties. If indicated, samples conforming to the sample of the
Engineer shall be prepared, by including the following information:
92
1. General description of the sample;
2. Size restrictions;
3. Origin of the sample;
4. Name of the article or name of the manufacturer;
5. Compliance with generally accepted standards;
6. Compliance with regulatory enactments;
7. Availability;
8. Delivery time.
The Contractor shall submit a sample of the reviewed Product for verification of type, color, pattern
and texture properties in comparison with other elements, and for comparison of these properties in
the submitted material and actually supplied and installed component.
1. The Contractor shall submit complete offer of standard finish of the manufacturer with specified
colors, textures and patterns for the Engineer to choose from.
2. If the submitted sample material or product is characteristic of variable color, pattern, texture or
other property, the Contractor shall submit at least 3 different units representing approximate
boundaries of changes.
3. Requirements for samples representing the performance, manufacturing technique, assembly
details, joints, operations and similar design features can be found in other chapter of the
specifications.
4. Information on returning the sample to the Contractor for including in Work can be found in other
chapters of the specifications. Such samples shall be intact at the time of use. Such specific
requirements for dealing with submitted samples shall be specified in the form of conveyance.
5. Samples not included in works shall be the property of the Contractor and shall not be removed
from the site prior to the readiness of the Works for taking over.
Installation requirements
The manufactured parts, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, assembled,
used, cleaned and prepared in accordance with the instructions of the respective manufacturers,
unless stricter requirements are requested.
Identification marking
The marking plates and other identification markings shall not be affixed to visible surfaces on
industrially manufactured components installed in the finished premises.
3.9.6. Laboratory services for verification and testing of materials
All materials and works shall be verified in accordance with the specifications, and the verification shall
be performed at the expense of the Contractor at the following locations, in any order:
1. Laboratory of local authority;
93
2. Approved testing authority or approved independent testing laboratory.
The Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the Engineer for performance of verifications in any or
all of these institutions.
The Contractor shall ensure all the necessary labor force, containers, packaging and labelling
connected with test samples, as well as all transportation costs.
The samples to be tested shall be taken at their place of origin or place of work, or from Works,
depending on the situation and in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer.
Testing laboratory services
Procedure describes requirements to Contractor to provide testing laboratory services.
Testing laboratory services shall be reviewed together with the chapters "Quality control" and "Project
records".
Choice of laboratory and payment
The Contractor shall employ laboratories for performance of specific verifications and tests, preferring
laboratory of local authority or approved independent testing laboratories. The Contractor shall pay for
laboratory services.
Use of testing laboratory shall in no circumstances release the Contractor from the obligation to
perform works in accordance with the requirements of Contract documents.
Prior to employ testing laboratory Contractor shall submit subcontractor approval request and receive
Engineer’s approval.
Laboratory shall be independent from Contractor or each of subcontractors may having been involved
in construction of element to be tested.
Result of test shall be addressed in parallel to Contractor and to engineer following procedure to be
agreed with Engineer.
Quality asurance
Laboratory shall maintain a full time registered engineer on staff to review services.
Laboratory shall be authorised to operate in EU.
Testing equipment shall be calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to
either LVS standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.
Engineer is entitled to require in any moment documentation proving calibration of instrument ,
qualification of personnel.
94
Materials to be submitted by Contractor
15 days Prior to start testing of Works, Contractor shall submit testing laboratories name, address, and
telephone number, and names of full-time professional engineer and responsible officer to approval of
Engineer.
Contractor’s obligations for laboratory inspections
The Contractor, in regard to laboratory inspections, shall ensure the performance of following activities:
1. Test samples of Material mixtures submitted by the Contractor.
2. Provide qualified staff at the site following an appropriate notification; to cooperate with the
Engineer and the Contractor in rendering services.
3. Perform certain product inspections, sampling and testing in accordance with specified standards.
4. Confirm the conformity of materials and mixtures with the requirements of the Contract
documents.
5. Notify the Engineer and the Contractor immediately of observed work or product diversions or non-
compliance. To approve such statement in writing to the Engineer and submit a copy to the
Contractor and the Employer.
6. Perform additional inspections and tests as requested by the Engineer.
7. Attend pre-construction meetings and progress meetings, if requested by the Engineer.
Laboratory reports
After each inspection and test, promptly submit two (2) copies of laboratory report to the Engineer with
an additional copy to Contractor. Include:
• Date issued;
• Project title and number;
• name of inspector;
• date and time of sampling or inspection;
• identification of product and specifications section;
• location in the Project;
• type of inspection or test;
• date of test;
• results of tests and conformance with Contract Documents.
When requested by the Engineer, interpretation of test results shall be provided.
Authorization restrictions of testing laboratories
The laboratory, the tests carried out by it, shall not release the Contractor from the requirements of the
Contract documents, shall not annul, change or supplement those.
95
The laboratory, the tests carried out by it, shall not confirm or accept any part of the Works.
The laboratory may not assume any of the Contractor’s obligations.
The laboratory is not authorized to suspend Works.
Contractor’s obligations
The Contractor shall deliver to the laboratory, at specified and approved locations, suitable samples of
materials intended for use, which require testing, together with the types of mixtures offered, if such
are going to be used for the materials to be tested.
The Contractor shall cooperate with the staff of laboratory and shall provide access to the Works and,
if necessary, to the manufacturer's equipment.
The Contractor shall provide additional labour force and equipment in order to provide access to the
work to be tested, to obtain and process samples at the site or at the place of origin of the products to
be tested in order to facilitate testing and inspections, as well as to store and maintain test samples.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer and the Laboratory 24 hours prior the expected time of
carrying out works requiring inspection and testing services.
The Contractor shall cover the costs of testing laboratory services.
3.9.7. Operation and technical maintenance instructions, training
Documents
Before completing Works, each stage of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
approval a complete set of appropriate operating and maintenance instruction manuals (by considering
that, at the request of the Engineer, the Contractor must submit separate manuals for each specified
structure or group of structures) for all as the result of the work built-in, supplied, created and installed
devices, equipment, components, parts, structures and construction products, in addition, such
operating instructions must comply, inter alia, with the requirements of the Applicable law. Each
volume must be appropriately bound with approved conditional designations.
The operational and maintenance instructions, as separate sections, shall include, inter alia:
1. Power supply and lighting systems;
2. Heating, ventilation, conditioning systems;
3. Installed equipment;
4. BMS;
5. Other engineering systems and equipment, including both for the needs of building and railway
infrastructure;
6. Other chapters according to the Engineer's instructions.
In the operating and maintenance instruction manuals, the Contractor shall also specify, inter alia:
96
List of full names of all parts which may be required to be replaced during the lifetime of each
equipment and replacement instructions for these parts;
Full set of all drawings and descriptions with corresponding index lists;
List of all necessary equipment safety and proper operating instructions.
At the individual request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit 2 printed copies of these manuals
and one electronic copy in * .pdf format in Latvian and English on an electronic data carrier. In any
case, the Contractor shall be obliged to place this manual at the latest until the issueing of Taking-over
certificate in the Common Data Environment in accordance with requirements of chapter 3.11.
Training
The Contractor shall ensure training for the personnel of the infrastructure manager who will be
involved in the operation, maintenance and repair of facilities, equipment, components, structural
elements, construction products, systems built, supplied, established and installed within the scope of
the Works. The Contractor shall cover all expenses connected with training of the infrastructure
manager, including travel allowances.
Training manuals shall be prepared in Latvian and English. Training shall be performed timely, but in
any case not later than within 28 (twenty-eight) days after the Engineer has submitted accordant
request and before the date of commissioning of each Stage of the Works (in case of conveyance-
acceptance for temporary operation of accordant Part, Stage of the Works, training shall be performed
timely, but in any case not later than within 28 (twenty-eight) days after the Engineer has submitted
accordant request). Number of trainees of the infrastructure manager and training details shall be
coordinated timely with the infrastructure manager and the Engineer.
The training shall be carried out in Latvian or in a different language, yet in such case an accurate
translation in Latvian shall be ensured. The Contractor is liable for the translation quality and shall
cover all translation costs.
3.9.8. Software control
If the Contractor uses a computer or programmable logic controllers to design, manage or monitor the
Construction or inspection procedure, it shall ensure its quality plan runs efficiently and that the
hardware and software have been checked and approved according to the Contractor's Project quality
assurance plan.
The Contractor shall consider risks related to illegal use of BIM model development and viewing
software by its employees or subcontractors by developing models for Project purposes. In case of
use of unlicensed BIM software, and where such use is discovered by the software developer, BIM
models at their later development stage may be blocked/ made unusable. The Contractor is in charge
to ensure that within the framework of Contract fulfilment the models, technical drawings and other
documents are elaborated by use of licensed software, which is developed for commercial purposes,
as well as in charge of financial and any other consequences due to use of unlicensed software.
97
3.10. Project control forms In the course of the performance of the Works provided for in the contract, the Contractor must use
the forms specified by the Employer. The blanks prepared by the Empoyer for completing those forms
are given in Annex 17.
The necessary Project control forms may be updated or supplemented as required.
The Engineer may offer to change the format or content of the forms and the Contractor must comply
with the instructions of the Engineer. Form changes cannot be the basis for additional cost claims from
the Contractor. Such forms shall be issued by the Contractor:
1. Dispatch to sub-contractor (FORM 01 );
2. Dispatch to Engineer (FORM 02);
3. Shipment notification (FORM 02-1);
4. Inspection request (FORM 03);
5. Subcontractor’s approval (FORM 04);
6. List of sub-contractors (FORM 04-1);
7. Information request (FORM 06);
8. Variation order (FORM 07);
9. Estimate overview (FORM 07-1);
10. List of variation orders (FORM 07-2);
11. Material approval (FORM 08);
12. Notification on inspections (FORM 09);
13. Concrete works (FORM 10);
14. Submission of samples (FORM 11);
15. Day work report (FORM 12);
16. Supply of materials at site (FORM 13);
17. Request for replacement of materials (FORM 14);
18. Accident declaration (FORM 15);
19. List of Contractor’s drawings (FORM 17);
20. List of materials, products (FORM 18);
21. Comparison of specifications (FORM 19);
22. Archaeology event statement (FORM 20). Such forms shall be issued by the Engineer:
1. Correction of discrepancies (FORM 05);
2. Safety violations (FORM 16).
98
3.11. BIM requirements
3.11.1. General
This chapter together with the section “RBDG-MAN-030 Employer’s Information Requirements” of
Design Guidelines form Employer’s requirements for BIM content and processes.
For BIM terminology and definitions see section “RBDG-MAN-030 Employer’s Information
Requirements”of Design Guidelines.
Section “RBDG-INF-002 BIM Strategy Framework” of Design Guidelines provides general insights on
Rail Baltica BIM principles which are based on PAS 1192 series standards.
All the details about the Rail Baltica BIM principles will be covered in the “Detailed BIM Strategy” (BIM
Manual and its annexes) which will be made available to the Contractor until the end of year 2018. If
during the Contract execution any uncertainties arise regarding BIM content to be developed and BIM
processes and if Employer’s BIM Requirements do not clarify them, Contractor shall follow the
principles, requirements and processes defined by Detailed BIM Strategy (BIM Manual and its annexes)
as far as there is not different approach approved by the Employer. If any contradictions are identified
between Employer’s BIM Requirements and the Detailed BIM Strategy, Employer’s BIM Requirements
shall prevail. The additional information included in the Detailed BIM Strategy details and clarifies the
existing Employer’s BIM Requirements and do not change the Contract’s scope of Works. Fulfilling the
respective requirements shall not be considered a basis for extra cost charge to Employer.
At the current moment the "BIM Strategy Framework" document together with the Employer’s
Information Requirements (EIR) (this document together with Design Guidelines section RBDG-MAN-
030) can be used as a general guideline to understand and evaluate the BIM requirements and
deliverables for this project. Therefore this EIR serves as requirements outline which can be a subject
of change upon finished Detailed BIM Strategy.
3.11.2. Model types, content and file formats
For general requirements regarding model types, content and file formats see Design Guidelines
section RBDG-MAN-030 Building Information Management (BIM) Employers Information
Requirements.
As-built information shall contain all the necessary data for maintenance purposes of the buildings,
structures, utilities, systems and equipment.
3.11.3. BIM execution plan (BEP)
BEP shall be developed according to the respective requirements by PAS 1192-2:2013 as well as it shall
provide the information required by Design Guidelines section RBDG-MAN-030 Building Information
Management (BIM) Employers Information Requirements.
99
BEP shall be submitted to the Contracting Authority after the signing of the Contract for review and
comments/confirmation. Submitting BEP for reviews, comments and confirmations shall be done in
accordance with the same procedure for Works Programme.
It is not permitted to allow any contradictions between BEP and requirements of this Technical
Specification and Employer’s technological solutions. Contractor shall inform Employer about any
possible contradictions and communicate the prevention measures of those.
3.11.4. Consistency Control and BIM Coordination For requirements regarding consistency control and BIM coordination see Design Guidelines section
RBDG-MAN-030 Building Information Management (BIM) Employers Information Requirements.
3.11.5. Data sharing
For requirements regarding data sharing see Design Guidelines section RBDG-MAN-030 Building
Information Management (BIM) Employers Information Requirements.
3.11.6. Level of Development/Definition (LOD)
Level of Development (LOD) covers both level of model geometry detail (LOG) and level of information
detail (LOI).
For LOD concept, abbreviations and fundamental definitions see document “Level of Development
Specification Part I” by BIMForum which is available for download at following page:
https://bimforum.org/lod/
For general requirements regarding BIM Execution Plan see Design Guidelines section RBDG-MAN-030
Building Information Management (BIM) Employers Information Requirements.
For LODs table reflecting the expected Levels of Development at various Project stages and which shall
be used by the Contractor as a basis for further BIM work see Annex 16. Contractor after signing the
Contract and based on the LOD table of Annex 16 and clarifications provided by Detailed BIM Strategy
shall develop detailed LOD matrices for each technical discipline for each Project stage within BEP and
shall obtain Employer’s approval.
BIM content for Building Design in the Minimum Composition is not required.
Facility management models development is not included in the scope of Works of this Contract, but
Contractor shall provide as-built models with all the necessary information and data for buildings,
systems and equipment maintenance (facility management).
Models in of existing structures for complete demolition or existing adjoining structures which will not
undergo any renovation or demolition, but serve as meaningful reference structures shall correspond
to “Stage number 2 - Concept” in Detailed Technical Design. The models of structures for demolition
shall reach level of geometry detail and contain enough information to calculate demolishment
100
volumes and time schedules and therefore to deliver 4D and 5D BIM workflows. That means derogation
from the LODs defined in Annex 16 to lower LOD which shall be defined in more detail in BEP.
Models of elements affected by Works within the buildings that during the Contract Works will be
renovated of moved shall achieve the same LOD as new-construction structures, but models of
structures not affected by Works can be developed to rationally lower LOD which provisionally
conforms with Stage number 2 – Concept as defined by PAS 1192-2:2013.
A detailed LOD specification will be published within the Detailed BIM Strategy documentation and
Contractor shall follow and use it as a basis for BEP document development and execution of Contract
Works. The LOD specification included within the Detailed BIM Strategy will be based on previously
mentioned BIMForum’s LOD specification as far as possible, but additionally it will include LOD
specification for such elements that are not included in BIMForums’s specification, for example,
railway tracks and respective equipment etc. Detailed BIM Strategy will also include requirements
regarding non-graphical information (model element attributes) which shall be contained by the BIM
models.
3.11.7. 2D CAD documents and drawing production
For requirements regarding 2D CAD documents and drawing production see Design Guidelines section
RBDG-MAN-030 Building Information Management (BIM) Employers Information Requirements.
3.11.8. Simulations
For general requirements regarding visualizations see Design Guidelines section RBDG-MAN-030
Building Information Management (BIM) Employers Information Requirements.
For successful deliery of 4D and 5D compatible information consistency and quality criteria for each
models discipline shall be developed and defined in BEP. All elements shall contain structured graphical
and non-graphical parameters information (as a minimum – name, type, material technical
characteristics and specification (class/quality), units) and they shall be modelled using appropriate
authoring tool. BIM coordinator of a discipline shall carry out consistency and quality control.
3.11.9. Visualizations
For requirements regarding visualizations see Design Guidelines section RBDG-MAN-030 Building
Information Management (BIM) Employers Information Requirements.
3.11.10. Common Data Environment (CDE)
AS RB Rail for Project needs will provide a Common Data Environment (CDE) where models, documents
and other information and data exchange and collaboration between Project parties will be done within
the Project framework. It is Contractor’s responsibility to fully use this CDE and carry out data exchange
and models federation and updates in it as per the approach and schedules defined and confirmed in
101
BEP. This does not prohibit Contractor and its subcontractors to additionally use their own internal
CDEs for their own needs, but it shall be reflected in the BEP.
The configuration of CDE provided by AS RB Rail is intended to comply with the one defined by PAS
1192-2:2013.
3.11.11. Other
The Contractor is responsible for delivering BIM content as required by Employer’s BIM Requirements
for Master Design, Detailed Technical Design and As-built Models for the full scope of Works of
Contract. The Contractor’s responsibility includes models delivery also for those structures and
systems that originally are designed by any subcontractors in the traditional way using 2D drafting
tools.
In cases when the Contractor notices rationally unjustified duplication between Construction
information content defined by Employer’s BIM Requirements and the content defined by Employer’s
other requirements (for example, requirement for printed documents when their function can be
fulfilled by BIM content and/or processes) it is Contractor’s responsibility to inform Employer and
Engineer regarding that and provide to Employer for approval a proposal for a respective work
optimization. For example, if coordination drawings function can be fulfilled entirely by BIM content
and processes, Contractor shall inform Engineer and Employer about that and offer for approval
relinquishment of such drawings.
Contractor’s responsibility on models development and updating ends by the issue of All Works Taking
Over Certificate.
3.12. Site documents
Documents to be provided by the Contractor must be available at the site, at the responsible manager
of the construction works, persons specified in the regulatory enactments, as well as at the Employer,
the Engineer and at other persons, according to the Engineer's instructions:
1. Detailed Technical Design;
2. Construction permit/-s and copies of respective insurance policies;
3. Construction work manager’s and construction supervisor’s statements of duties;
4. Orders on appointment of construction work manager, construction supervisor and author’s
supervisor;
5. Project document register;
6. Construction work logbook and author’s supervision logbook;
7. Annexes;
8. Changes and other amendments of the Contract;
9. Revised and stamped production drawings, product data and samples;
10. Inspection acts and checklists;
11. Manufacturer's certificates;
102
12. All supplements and annexes to the Contract;
13. All contract changes and other contract amendments;
14. Originals of revised and approved for construction design drawings, production drawings, product
data and samples;
15. All originals of field test entries;
16. Originals of all inspection certificates and checklists;
17. Originals of all manufacturer's certificates;
18. Copies of all contracts with suppliers and sub-contractors;
19. Copies of all invoices and financial documents.
The Contractor must store documents and samples at the site office premises. The Detailed Technical
Design and other design documents and samples at the site office must be kept separately from the
documents used in construction. Provide folders, shelves and secure, suitable storage for documents
and samples.
The Contractor shall mark and arrange the Detailed Technical Design and other design documents
and samples in accordance with the document nomenclature approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor must keep the documents in clean and appropriate conditions. Do not use documents
of archive for construction purposes.
Documents and samples shall be available for inspection to the Employer and/or the Engineer, as
well as to the representatives of the institutions controlling construction and other persons on the
instructions of the Engineer.
103
4. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The present chapter describes general design requirements by the Employer, along with specific
requirements on various types of structures and equipment.
4.1. General requirements
The Detailed Technical Design solutions shall be elaborated according to requirements contained
within the present chapter, other chapters of this document, technical conditions and statutory
requirements.
Master design shall be elaborated according to the sketch design R2I0G1A6 developed in 2017 by PLH
Arhitekter (Annex 10), and the deviations (Annex 11) of the present Technical specification and
clarifications (Annex 24) therein.
This technical specification (Employer’s requirements) include the minimum set of measures to be
undertaken; thus, in the elaboration of the Detailed technical design, as well as documentation relevant
for the performance of other Works, the Contractor shall if needed and upon use of its professional
and practical knowledge ensure all and any explicitly not listed, but relevant or desired (incl., additional)
measures for the complete and timely performance of Works (incl., any part thereof).
In case the Technical specifications’ (incl., any part thereof) requirements (Employer’s requirements)
are less than the imperative statutory requirements of the Applicable Law, the Contractor shall apply
the respective part of requirements of the technical specifications (i.e., the respective “lower”
requirements) insofar as the imperative statutory requirements of the Applicable Law do not require
otherwise. While in cases the technical specifications Technical specifications’ (incl., any part thereof)
requirements (Employer’s requirements) are higher than the statutory requirements of the Applicable
Law, the Contractor shall apply the requirements of the Technical specifications (i.e., the respective
“higher” requirements) and shall also ensure that Works, any part thereof comply with the requirements
of the Applicable Law.
Within the Contract, the Contractor shall elaborate three detailed technical designs, each individually
for Stage Two, Stage Three and Stage Four of the Works, based in the Contract and this technical
specification, including, the accepted Building Design in the Minimum Composition on “Elaboration of
the detailed technical design and construction works of Rail Baltica's Riga Railway bridge, railway
embankment and Riga Central Passenger Station premises” (see Annex 12) and construction permits
issued for Project implementation (see Annex 6).
• Detailed technical design No.1„Elaboration of the construction project and construction works
of Rail Baltica's Riga Railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central Passenger Station
premises. Stage 1. Reconstruction of Riga Central Passenger Station building and passenger
platforms, reconstruction and facilitation of the territory adjoining the building”;
• Detailed technical design No.2„Elaboration of the construction project and construction works
of Rail Baltica's Riga Railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central Passenger Station
104
premises. Stage 2. Construction of new railway bridge for Rail Baltica 1435 mm gauge tracks
in the section from Maskavas Street to Jelgavas Street”;
• Detailed technical design No.3 „Elaboration of the construction project and construction works
of Rail Baltica's Riga Railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central Passenger Station
premises. Stage 3. Reconstruction of existing railway infrastructure owned by VAS “Latvijas
Dzelzceļš” for the purposes of 1520 mm gauge tracks and construction of Rail Baltica railway
infrastructure for the 1435 mm gauge tracks in the section from Jelgavas Street to Lāčplēša
Street”.
Detailed technical design No. 1, Detailed technical design No. 2 and Detailed technical design No.3
hereinafter and previously are jointly referred to as – Detailed technical design. Reference in the
technical specification and Contract to Detailed technical design means a reference to Detailed
technical design No. 1, Detailed technical design No. 2 and Detailed technical design No.3 or combined,
depending on the context. Despite the fact that for each Stage of Works an individual detailed technical
design is elaborated, the Contractor is in charge of the compatibility and integrity of each detailed
technical design with all other detailed technical designs (of other Stages), i.e., each detailed technical
design shall be at first be elaborated in a way that the Project can be implemented and operated as a
mutually compatible unity according to the Contract.
The Contractor is in charge of the following:
- All that is needed to carry out engineering surveys at the relevant amount;
- Requesting and receiving additional technical conditions, and updating the respective binding
technical conditions considering their expiry date;
- Receiving additional construction permits (for buildings demolishment) as well as development
of all the necessary documentation for that and acquiring respective approvals;
- Elaboration of Building Design in the Minimum Composition, if required according to statutory
requirements and Contractor’s Proposal;
- Elaboration of Master Design for 1435mm gauge railway infrastructure;
- Elaboration of Detailed Technical Design as well as any other documentation necessary for
execution of Works;
- Introducing amendments necessary for receiving approvals and receiving a positive
Construction Expert-examination statement or meeting other design conditions;
- Division of structures by rounds, which enables to commission the structures according to
construction statutory requirements (including stress tests, if required) and according to
division of ownership rights of the structures;
- Meeting work safety, environment protection, fire safety requirements, and requirements by
relevant bodies and owners of affected infrastructure.
Formatting of technical drawings of the Detailed technical design shall be done according to the
professional standard by Latvian Association of construction structure designers LBPA-PS-001:2016
“Requirements as regards content and formatting of construction structures' project”.
Where the elaboration of a Detailed technical design or construction works are subject to risk
evaluation and assessment according to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013, the
105
risk evaluation and assessment according to the regulation is carried out by an independent
assessment body. The responsibility to ensure meeting this requirement lies with the Contractor, who
bears all the relevant costs. A positive statement shall be received in due time before receiving the
Construction Expert-examination, but no later than until a remark on the construction permit issued for
any of Works or a part thereof on the fact that the conditions for start of construction works are met
(depending on which of the construction permits issued for Works such a remark is made earlier).
The Contractor shall provide all relevant (incl., according to Engineer’s instructions) to receive an
approval of the Detailed technical design and a positive Construction Expert-examination statement.
The Construction Expert-examination of a detailed technical design elaborated within all Works is
ensured by the Employer or an authority according to Applicable Law, incl., also in cases where due to
any reason an additional or repeated expert-examination is needed (e.g., examination on the amended
parts of the detailed technical design during construction works and in other cases). The initial costs
of each Expert-examination of the Detailed technical design are covered by the Employer; however, if
for any reason an additional or repeated expert-examination(s) is needed (e.g., examination on the
amended parts of the detailed technical design during construction works and in other cases), the
costs of any further, additional or repeated expertise(s) are covered from Contractor’s own means
completely.
Moreover, the Contractor shall provide all relevant (incl., according to Engineer’s instructions) to get
approvals of other (in relation to Project implementation) Construction documentation, other (in
relation to Project implementation) detailed technical designs and to get a positive statement on
Construction Expert-examination, incl. in cases, for any reason an additional or repeated expert-
examination(s) is needed (if such is needed according to Engineer’s instructions or Applicable Law),
and such expert-examination of the detailed technical designs is provided by the Employer or an
authority according to Applicable Law. Any costs in relation to getting approvals of other (in relation to
Project implementation) Construction documentation, other (in relation to Project implementation)
detailed technical designs and getting a positive statement on Construction Expert-examination is
completely borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall take into account that the period of expert-examination of the Detailed Technical
Design required for implementation of the Project may be at least 60 (sixty) days, while the period of
any other detailed technical design expert-examination may be at least 180 (one hundred and eighty)
days, and regarding this the the Contractor is not entitled to claiming, receiving any compensation,
reimbursement and/or prolongation of deadlines (incl., any interim milestones, Contract deadlines). If
the herein indicated time (180 (one hundred and eighty) days) for an expert-examination of a Detailed
technical design is exceeded due to reasons not applicable to the Contractor, the Contractor shall
according to the Contract be entitled to requesting prolongation of respective milestone(s) (however,
the prolongation of the overall deadline for the performance of Works is only allowed according to the
procedures and in cases stipulated by the Contract), and in case the Engineer and the Employer
according to contractual procedures deem such request by the Contractor to be satisfied, the Employer
may freely, at its own discretion (and following the receipt of recommendations by the Engineer) decide,
whether to grant such prolongation of the respective milestone(s) to the Contractor, or may according
to contractual provisions compensate, reimburse for costs incurred to the Contractor.
106
The names/titles/articles/models of producers/manufacturers of the Articles (incl., materials,
construction products, facilities, equipment, spare parts, structures, elements) listed in this Contract,
this Technical specification (Employer’s requirements) are for information only, i.e., to provide an idea
of the minimum quality, compliance and technical requirements. The Contractor may at its own
discretion suggest Articles (incl., materials, construction products, facilities, equipment, spare parts,
structures, elements) of any producer/manufacturer, if it/these comply with the Contract and
Applicable Law requirements, and if it/these are also technically similar/equivalent and their
compatibility and quality is identical or higher of the requirements according to the present Technical
specification (Employer’s requirements), Contract.
The Articles suggested by the Contractor during the performance of Works (incl., those included in the
Contractor's offer), incl., materials, construction products, facilities, equipment, spare parts, structures
and elements, shall be communicated with the Engineer in due time during the design stage , and the
Contractor shall also take into account that in case of non-compatibility or inadequacy of quality or
technical dimensions of such materials, construction products, facilities (incl., visual non-compatibility
or inadequacy) these may be rejected by the Engineer.
Drawings shall contain such materials but not limited to:
1. Graphical part of Project (drawings).
2. Calculation part.
3. Manufacturing drawings.
4. Installation drawings.
5. Engagement diagrams.
6. Instructions for manufacturing at workshop.
7. Templates and samples.
8. Charts.
Product/Goods data shall contain such materials but not limited to:
1. Manufacturer's Product Specifications.
2. Manufacturer installation instructions.
3. Standard color scale.
4. Catalog samples.
5. Sketch schemes and templates.
6. Standard electric schemes.
7. Printed work characteristic curves.
8. Work range schemes.
9. Factory reports.
10. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.
107
Samples shall contain such materials but not limited to:
1. Partial cross sections of components manufactured or produced.
2. Material samples.
3. Sample of reused materials.
4. Fabric samples showing colour, texture and pattern.
5. Color range sets.
6. Components to be used for independent inspections and testing.
7. Field samples.
The materials to be submitted for quality control shall include the following materials, but not limited
to:
1. Design data.
2. Certificates.
3. Manufacturer's instructions.
4. Manufacturer’s field messages.
Standard specifications and catalogs:
1. Product data.
Sections related to this chapter “Project coordination” (governing the elaboration and submission of
necessary coordination drawings), “Measurements”, “Materials to be submitted” (indicating the
requirements for the submission of production, information and as-built drawing, product data and
samples), “Quality control” (indicating the requirements for the submission of inspection and testing
reports and making of a model), “Conclusion of the Contract” (indicating requirements for submission
of Project archive documents, including copies of drawings, at the end of the Project).
Product data
The Contractor shall gather Product data in one submission for each element or system of the
structure. Each copy shall be marked so as to indicate which choices and options apply to the Project.
If Product data include information about several similar products, some of which are not required for
the Project, the copies shall be clearly marked to indicate which products refer to the Project.
If the required Products, including materials or systems, need the product data to be specifically
prepared, as the standard printed data are not suitable for use, the Contractor shall submit production
drawings, not the Product data.
The following information shall be included in the Product data:
1. Printed recommendations of the manufacturer;
108
2. Compliance with the standards of generally recognized professional associations;
3. Compliance with the standards of generally recognized testing agencies;
4. Use of labels and stamps of testing agencies;
5. Dimensions verified in field measurements;
6. Description of coordination requirements for incorporation of the product.
If the Engineer must choose between any of the options, the Contractor shall provide one copy of
Product data beforehand.
The Contractor shall ensure access to any documents that the Engineer might request during the
Contract (e.g., on the Internet, in Unified Data Environment), or their printouts in Latvian or English. The
Contractor shall submit this data within 3 days after receipt of the request of the Engineer.
4.2. Expected lifetime
The Contractor shall ensure that the expected service life of constructions complies with the
requirements of LVS EN 1990-2003 „Basis of structural design”, unless longer expected service life of
constructions is requested in this document or in the design guidelines for Rail Baltica.
No. Type of the structure
Longevity category
(according to EN 1990-
2003)
Expected lifetime (in years)
1 Replaceable structure parts 2 10 – 25
2 Buildings 4 50
3 Bridges and overpasses 5 100
Table 4.1. Expected service life of constructions
The Contractor shall ensure that all materials, construction products, facilities, equipment,
components, structures, elements built, supplied, established and installed within the scope of the
Works comply with their intended purpose and the above service life.
4.3. Requirements to passenger and transport flows
4.3.1. General
Requirements to passenger and transport flows are determined based on AECOM study (Annex 13)
data and R2I0G1A6 sketch design solutions.
Vehicle and passenger flows in the area of the station to be rebuilt depend on the existing railway,
urban public transport, cyclist and pedestrian links with transport, commercial and public sites located
near the railway station.
109
Urban public transport flows are provided by the nearby streets or streets crossing the station, i.e.
Prāgas, Gogoļa, Dzirnavu, Lāčplēša, Turgeņeva and Abrenes Streets. All of these streets accommodate
public transport having stops around the station. The origin and destination of pedestrian flows is
mainly the commercial sites, as well as the flows between stops and railway station.
By developing the Detailed Technical Design and other documentation necessary for Works execution,
the requirements contained within technical conditions of Riga City Construction Board, Riga City
Traffic Department, VAS “Latvijas Valsts ceļi” and Riga municipal SIA “Rīgas satiksme” as regards
enabling vehicular, cyclist and pedestrian flows, along with the requirements of technical conditions by
VAS “Latvijas dzelzceļš” as regards enabling access by station passengers to passenger platforms,
public premises and other station facilities shall be taken into account.
The Contractor shall provide for barrier-free access to passenger platforms, public transport stops,
commercial and public sites, which includes access by mobility-impaired people.
The envisaged layout of station passenger flows is attached in Annex 19.
At the elaboration of Detailed Technical Design solutions and other documentation necessary for
Works execution the Contractor shall consider the layout of railway overpass supports to enable
existing and future vehicle and pedestrian flows underneath the overpasses. The location of supports
at the new junction of Elizabetes and Timoteja streets shall enable a clearance to accommodate
vehicular traffic for the future urban and regional bus destination to be located underneath the
overpasses.
Under the railway overpass between Maskavas and Prāgas streets, opposite of Kungu Street, the
Contractor shall locate overpass supports considering the Riga International Bus Terminal to be
located under the overpass in future, as envisaged according to AECOM study and R2I0G1A6 sketch
design solutions.
The Contractor shall provide for Riga Central passenger station passengers' evacuation stairs to level
of urban streets from various places, especially at the end of all passenger platforms, to enable faster
evacuation from platforms in case of emergency.
4.3.2. The current amount of station train turnover
Currently two international passenger trains running on Riga–Moscow and double headed train Riga–
St.Petersburg/Riga–Minsk are serviced at the station. Long-distance international trains arrive and
depart every day. Length of the international trains is 400m.
Passengers get on and off the international trains at passenger platform No 2, located near the Track
1.
Regional and commuter trains link Riga Central Passenger Station with all destinations. The electric
train route Riga–Jurmala/Tukums arrives at Track 3 or 4 on platform No 3, Riga–Skulte at Track 5 on
platform No 4, Riga–Aizkraukle at Track 6 on platform No 4, Riga–Jelgava at Track 7 on platform No
5, Riga–Daugavpils at Track 8 on platform 5, Riga–Sigulda on deadend 11 at platform No 1. Tracks 2
110
and 9 are used for cargo and long-distance train leaving without stopping and these tracks are not
equipped with platforms.
Minimum stopping/standing times of passenger trains:
- Leaving for the same direction: 5 min;
- Leaving for the opposite direction (summer): 8 min;
- Leaving for the opposite direction (winter): 12 min;
- International trains: 30 min.
The same applies to trains running to/from engine-shed. There are longer performance times in winter,
when the trains are subject to extra safety checks and increased train use. This means that operation
during winter months is organised different: the service on routes running to sea-side resorts is reduced
during winter. Some train tracks are used only when suitable weather conditions are forecasted. 95%
of passenger trains arrive in Riga within a 1min slot of the indicated time.
All cargo trains are scheduled, however, delays are possible. 85–86% of cargo trains arrive in Riga
within a 1min slot of the indicated time. Cargo trains within Riga territory run to/from station Škirotava.
Cargo train pairs are scheduled through Riga every day: 27 to Jelgava, 5 to Bolderaja via the Tukums
route from station Torņakalns, 6 to Tukums, 3–4 from northern routes to station Šķirotava, without
gong through Riga Central Passenger Station. The maximum cargo train length amounts to 850m. The
length exceeds the through-track at Riga Central station, except for Track 9.
A chart of existing passenger train turnover options is attached as Annex 20.
4.3.3. Estimated amount of train turnover at station
1435mm gauge infrastructure
Project will enable passenger and cargo train traffic on 1435mm track gauge linking Poland with
Estonia. Riga shall accommodate two 1435 mm gauge routes. One international route shall link Estonia
with Poland, while the other, suburban commuter route, shall link Riga Central Passenger Station with
International Airport Riga.
To service the routes, Riga Central Passenger Station shall provide for a passenger platform
accommodating a 1435mm track gauge. The passenger platform shall be 400 m long, which will enable
arrival of international trains. Western end of the platform shall be split into two, in the middle of it a
dead-end for passenger train reception and departure to/from International Airport Riga shall be
accommodated. Useful length of the dead-end is planned 200 m. The platform width shall amount to
14m. International route intensity may amount to up to one train every two hours, while the commuter
train turnover may amount to up to 4 trains per hour starting from 6 am until midnight.
1520mm gauge infrastructure
The future strategy of the operator “Pasažieru vilciens” is to purchase new electric trains to provide for
more frequent regular train traffic on the main routes of electric trains. It is envisaged that the gradual
quality changes will generate a significant passenger flow growth by 2025. The platforms will be rebuilt
111
up to 550mm above rail head mark; however, since there are short platforms at many stations, the
extension of regional and suburban commuter trains is not planned. During the next 10 years the
estimated passenger train turnover at Riga Central Passenger Station may increase by 5%. According
to AECOM study data, the following extra cargo trains per day are forecasted: +2 to Jelgava, +10 to
Bolderaja via the Tukums route from station Torņakalns, +1 from northern routes to station Šķirotava,
without gong through Riga Central Passenger Station.
Principal passenger flows
Passenger access to railway platforms shall be enabled according to AECOM study and solutions of
sketch design by PLH Arkitekter AS. The Project shall enable passengers of Tunnel C getting to/from
passenger platforms, as well as getting to/from platforms located in the middle of Riga Central
Passenger Station (existing Tunnel A and B). In case of emergency, the passengers shall be enabled
getting from platforms in the area of Timoteja (Dzirnavu) Street to both ends of platforms (depending
on requirements of technical conditions by VAS “Latvijas dzelzceļš”).
All connections between ground level and platform level in the central part of the station building shall
be equipped with stairs, escalators and elevators to enable travel opportunities by mobility-impaired
people. The exits of Tunnel C and exits of Timoteja (Dzirnavu) Street to/from platforms shall be
equipped with stairs.
Passenger flow connections with the third level planned at Riga Central Passenger Station building,
which shall be placed at +1 level above the passenger platforms, shall be provided for only in the central
part of the building, and shall be equipped with stairs, escalators and elevators to enable access to
each platform. At the ascent/descent from the third level of the station building to 1520mm gauge
tracks platform, which is planned for receipt/departures of international trains, and to 1435mm gauge
tracks platform, room shall be provided for a future passenger border control with suitable premises
and facilities to carry out the border control functions.
4.4. Requirements as regards preservation of cultural values
The project territory is located within the territory of state significance urban construction monument
„Riga city historical centre“ (protection No. 7442) and within the protection zone of UNESCO World
Cultural and Natural Heritage site No. 852 „Riga historical centre“ (RHC).
In a distance of approximately 150 meters from Project territory a state significance archeological
monument Nr.2070 “Archeological Complex of Riga Old Town” is located.
Besides general statutory requirements regarding construction, the procedure for implementing
development proposals is regulated by:
▪ Law on preservation and protection of Riga historical centre (in Latvian: Rīgas vēsturiskā centra
saglabāšanas un aizsardzības likums);
▪ Law on Protection of cultural monuments (in Latvian: Likums „Par kultūras pieminekļu
aizsardzību“);
112
▪ Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 127 „Regulations regarding preservation and protection
of Riga historical centre“ (in Latvian: Rīgas vēsturiskā centra saglabāšanas un aizsardzības
noteikumi) of 08/03/2004 (hereinafter – CoM Regulations No. 127);
▪ Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 474 „Regulations regarding registration, protection, use,
restoration of cultural monuments and granting the status of environment-degrading object“
(in Latvian: Noteikumi par kultūras pieminekļu uzskaiti, aizsardzību, izmantošanu, restaurāciju
un vidi degradējoša objekta statusa piešķiršanu) of 26/08/2003 (hereinafter – CoM
Regulations No. 474);
▪ Riga City Council binding regulations No. 38 „Regulations regarding use and build-up of Riga
historical centre and its protection zone“ (in Latvian: Rīgas vēsturiskā centra un tā aizsardzības
zonas teritorijas izmantošanas un apbūves noteikumi) (hereinafter – RVC AZ TIAN), and other
legal acts.
113
Picture 4.1. RHC territory and its protection zone
The following cultural monuments or buildings of heritage value are located within project territory:
▪ Railway overpass over Gogoļa Street – state significance architecture monument No. 7806;
▪ Riga Central Passenger Station buildings of cadastre No. 0100 004 2004 001 and No. 0100 004
2004 002 – buildings of small heritage value – and elements of heritage value within their
scope:
▪ Neon sign „Rīga“;
▪ Original wooden doors and terraco floor near exit to railway platforms;
114
▪ Passenger hall ascent stairs and gallery on the second floor of passenger hall.
The following cultural monuments or buildings of heritage value are located within close proximity
project territory:
▪ Wooden residential building at Turgeņeva Street 16 – state significance architecture
monument No. 6634;
▪ Railway bridge over River Daugava – industrial structure of heritage value;
▪ Riga International Bus Terminal building – building of small heritage value;
▪ Riga Central Passenger Station clock – landmark.
Location of the Project territory in a cultural and historical environment requires careful assessment of
the impact of design volumes on the cultural and historical environment from the spatial point of view
and consideration that there is a high possibility to encounter previously unknown cultural and
historical discoveries during construction.
In 2016, „Eiropas dzelzceļa līnijas” Ltd implemented an open international sketch design competition
„Construction of the Rail Baltica railway bridge and complex development of the central multi-modal
public transport hub in Riga”. As a result of the competition, offer R2I0G1A6 elaborated by Danish
architects „PLH Arkitekter AS” and the engineering consultancy company COWI was selected as the
basis for designing (hereinafter – Sketch design). See Annex 10 for the Sketch design.
Deviations from the solutions of the Sketch design contained in the Building Design in the Minimum
Composition and these requirements of the Employer have been coordinated with the authors of the
Sketch design.
In order to obtain more specific information about cultural values in the Project territory, research
„Exploration and research of cultural heritage in the track section of Rail Baltica corridor in Latvia”
(hereinafter - Research of cultural values) is being performed, in the frameworks of which:
▪ information about possible discoveries of cultural values of archaeological, architectural and
industrial character in the Project territory is gathered,
▪ architectural artistic research and inventory of cultural monuments located in the Project
territory is performed.
In accordance with Section 2.3 of the Regulations No. 127, the archaeological cultural layer and
archaeological elements are the most important cultural and historical values to be preserved in RHC
and its protected area. Considering that part of the project territory is located under the railway
embankment and cannot be fully explored prior to commencement of construction works, the
likelihood of encountering yet unknown archaeological findings is high.
Reports on exploration and research of cultural heritage (Annex 29) will be submitted to the Contractor
not later than within 2 (two) weeks from the moment when Stage 2 of the procurement is announced.
In view of the above, during preparation of the Detailed Technical Design as well as other documents
necessary for performance of the Works and construction, the following requirements shall also be
observed regarding preservation of cultural values:
115
▪ the requirements specified in regulatory enactments stated above and others shall be
observed,
▪ recommendations contained in the EIA report, the opinion of the SEBR, exploration of cultural
values and other research materials shall be observed,
▪ solutions of the Detailed Technical Design as well as other documents necessary for
performance of the Works shall be prepared based on the solutions contained in the Sketch
design R2I0G1A6 and the requirements of this document,
▪ changes regarding solutions included in the Sketch design shall be coordinated with the
Employer and, if necessary, per instructions of the Engineer - with authors of the Sketch design,
▪ in developing project solutions, collaborate with the National Cultural Heritage Board (NCHB),
the Latvian National Commission for UNESCO and the RHC Preservation and Development
Board,
▪ the Detailed Technical Design as well as other documents necessary for execution of the Works
shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of the existing local planning
requirements and in the context with the solutions of the local plan currently being elaborated
for the public use railway line “Rail Baltica” and the connected urban environment ensuring
spatial and functional link with the surrounding areas and fitting of the solutions in the urban
structure,
▪ elaborate visual impact analysis during designing process justifying suitability of project
solutions in the cultural and historical environment in accordance with the requirements of the
responsible institutions,
▪ ensure protection and preservation of cultural and historical monuments in the project territory
and nearby without lowering cultural and historical values of RHC environment and conditions
of their exhibition,
▪ before commencing construction, receive the requirements of the NCHB establishing the
required archaeological research (archaeological surveillance or archaeological excavations)
and their volumes,
▪ if the project envisages construction of underground rooms, perform full archaeological
research before starting its construction.
According to the provisions of the NCHB, archaeological supervision shall be ensured during
earthworks below the level of current railroad embankment that, upon finding significant evidence,
shall be replaced by archaeological excavations for clarification of the context. Archaeological
supervision during construction shall be ensured by the Engineer. If additional research or
archaeological excavations are required, the Contractor shall, at the request of the Engineer,
provide additional resources for performance of the works.
116
4.5. Design requirements as regard design of reconstruction of Riga Central
Passenger Station building
Introduction
Reconstruction of Riga Central Passenger Station building is part of Rail Baltica development project,
which includes reconstruction of Riga Central Passenger Station and platforms to suit these to modern
requirements.
The intention of Rail Baltica railway line at Riga Central Passenger Station provides for the construction
of 1435mm passenger railway line track and dead-ends in the section from Lāčplēša Street till Jelgavas
Street. During Project implementation, the operation of the station on existing 1520mm railway
connections with Torņakalns, Zemitāni, Jāņavārti, Šķirotava and Vagonu parks shall be enabled.
Detailed information about the reconstruction of Riga Central Passenger Station see in the Building
Design in the Minimum Composition (attached as Annex 12).
The reconstruction shall affect the buildings with (cadastre No. 01000042004001) basement, first
floor, second, third and fourth floor. As a result of the reconstruction works Riga Central Passenger
Station will be transformed into a multimodal transport hub including the 1520mm and Rail Baltica
railway lines, along with public transport and inter-city bus traffic.
The reconstructed area of the future Riga Central Passenger Station shall amount to approx. 35–40
thousands square meters.
During reconstruction works, some rooms and commercials premises will be dismantled, some rooms
and commercial premises will be removed completely from Tunnel A, B and C, and new rooms and
commercial premises will be built in the reconstructed and newly constructed station building. The
scope of newly constructed rooms and commercial premises shall compensate that of the dismantled.
Present situation
See the historical development of Riga Central Passenger Station building in Chapter 1.7.3.
Riga Central Passenger Station building is located on land plots with cadastre No. 01000042015, land
plot area 0.3356 ha, cadastre No. 01000042004, land plot area 3.2950 ha and on land plot with cadastre
No. 01000042018, land plot area 1.8384 ha, total area of land plots amounts to 5.4690 ha.
Riga Central Passenger Station and its ancillary buildings is a complex of mixed type buildings, which
is connected with buildings of the shopping centre „Origo“; and besides the transport hub functions it
also provides the shopping centre functions.
At the southern and northern side of the station there are station squares – public outdoors and
pedestrian zone. Some part of the northern station square hides an underground car park underneath
it.
The square at southern part of the railway embankment, between Gogoļa and Timoteja Street, is a
pedestrian and vehicular area. The carriageway is connected with Timoteja and Turgeņeva streets.
117
Underneath the station tracks there are three pedestrian tunnels to enable access by passengers to
platforms, public premises of the station and other rooms within the station buildings.
See the inventory files of the station building attached as Annex 23.
-1 storey (basement)
In the basement of Riga Central Passenger Station building, within the reconstruction territory there is
the luggage storage, hallways, sanitary premises, technical premises, ventilation premises and various
ancillary premises to enable station operation.
1st storey
On the 1st floor of Riga Central Passenger Station (cadastre No. 01000042004001) there is the
passenger hall linked with the nearby building (cadastre No. 01000042004002) and nearby shopping
centre „Origo“ (cadastre No.01000042003001). On the façade side of the station passenger hall, near
the entrance, there are commercial premises. Passenger hall leads to male and female lavatories, via
stairs up to the gallery on 2nd floor, and to the exits to Station square and Tunnel A and B (cadastre
No. 01000042004006), which are built underneath the tracks of the station, and from the passenger
hall one may also get to the basement of the station to find luggage storage and various ancillary
premises. Tunnel A and B accommodates commercial premises and passenger corridors. Tunnels
underneath the tracks link the side of Centrāltirgus (Central market) with the Centre side. Tunnel A
leads to passenger platforms.
2nd storey
On the 2nd floor of the Riga Central Passenger Station subject to reconstruction there is a gallery with
commercial premises alongside of it, ancillary premises and stairs leading to the 3rd floor.
3rd storey (passenger platform level)
Within the reconstruction territory, on the 3rd floor there is a waiting hall, blood donation centre,
individual office premises and hall, hallway, dressing rooms, sanitary and ancillary premises. The stairs
from the waiting room lead to passenger platforms.
At present, there are seven passing-through tracks with passenger platforms (numbered 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
and 8), two passing-through tracks without platforms (No 2 and 9) and three eastern direction dead-
end tracks with platforms (No 10, 11, 12) at the Riga Central Passenger Station of VAS “Latvijas
dzelzceļš”. Shortest track with platform is Track 3 (375 m), while the longest is Track 1 (676 m). This
figure is the distance between signals, yet in fact the platform and longest train it accommodates is
shorter.
There are four ascent stairs to the platforms from Tunnel C, and these shall be reconstructed according
to the new overpasses and new passenger platforms to be constructed on these.
118
4th storey
On 4th floor of the station there are two hallways, two stairwells and technical premises.
Façades
The façades of the building feature no particular architectonic formations. The southern façade of the
station building holds a neon sign „Rīga“, which is of small architectonic value and shall be preserved
after the station building is reconstructed.
Finishing of the northern façades of the station building – smooth plates of light-shade limestone.
Façade parapet ends with a horizontal broadening. Part of the façade is made as a glass façade system
with a distinct vertical division and finer glass sections. Façade profiles are in dark shade.
Façades on passenger platforms – smooth plates of light-shade limestone. The parapet is distinct with
a decorative finishing line. Windows and doors feature dark brown frames.
Façades from Gogoļa Street entrance (entrance to Tunnel A, B and C) – a painted cement-lime mortar.
Heritage status of territory
The Works execution area and the object to be designed within it from Jelgavas Street axle to right
bank of River Daugava, and from Prāgas Street axle to Lāčplēša Street axle is located within the
protection zone of UNESCO World Cultural and Natural Heritage site No. 852 „Riga historical centre“.
The object to be designed from right bank of River Daugava to Prāgas Street axle is located within the
protection zone of UNESCO World Cultural and Natural Heritage site No. 852 „Riga historical centre“.
Some part of the object to be designed is located within direct proximity of the state significance
architecture monument „Archelogical complex of Old Riga“ and within proximity of several state
significance architecture monuments.
Railway overpass over Gogoļa Street is a local significance architecture monument No. 7806.
Requirements to the developer of the Detailed Technical Design
The Contractor shall guarantee that the designed and rebuilt station, its newly built parts, tracks, all
systems and structures will be fully integrated also into the existing infrastructure, will be completed
and fully operational in accordance with the Contract.
If during the Works there is any type of work or equipment necessary for execution of the Contract, but
not directly included, specified in this Technical Specification, the Contractor shall perform these works
at its own expense and it shall not be released from its responsibility to complete the Works in
appropriate quality in the period of time specified for completion of the Works (incl. parts, Stages
thereof).
Before commencing designing works, the Contractor shall perform careful research and surveying of
the Work execution site (incl. the objects therein) in order to determine exact and optimal amount of
Works, incl. dismantling works.
119
The Contractor shall ensure that the Detailed Technical Design and other construction documents to
be completed for performance of the Works include materials, construction products, equipment,
components, structures, elements, solutions and facilities that have:
• Available analogous, equivalent solutions (if possible);
• Has been assessed the compatibility according to the Law on Compatibility Assessment (in
Latvian: likums „Par atbilstības novērtēšanu“);
• Certified with competent Latvian or EU authorities.
The Contractor shall ensure the technical solutions are compatible among all the documentation
necessary for Works execution including all the sections of the Detailed Technical Design, for example,
the chapters of architecture-structural design, water supply, sewage, water supply for fire extinction,
heat supply, ventilation, cold supply, power supply, etc. The harmonization of chapters of the Detailed
Tecnical Design shall include the compatibility of the location of systems, determination of the crossing
sites.
Special attention shall be drawn on utilities' networks and equipment intended for railway traffic.
Priority shall be given to any and all the utilities related to railway traffic.
The designed systems, facilities and equipment must be equipped with technical fittings necessary for
safe operation, such as shut-off valves, valves, control valves, filters, counterpressure valves, safety
valves, throttles, measuring instruments (thermometers, manometers), etc., according to LEK 036.
The Contractor shall ensure that a positive assessment of construction experts is received for the
elaborated Detailed Technical Design, recognizing that such expertise is mandatory.
When preparing accordant construction documentation, incl. the Detailed Technical Design, the
Contractor shall make the necessary calculations, prepare descriptions and specifications so that the
Engineer, the Employer or consultants, experts chosen by the Employer could verify their accuracy and
compliance and quality of the accordant construction documentation, incl. the Detailed Technical
Design.
The Contractor shall carry out the calculation of the economic part of the Detailed Technical Design,
and shall include the following:
• Summary of materials, structures and equipment;
• Quantities of construction works;
• Cost calculation is carried out according to the Cabinet of Ministers regulations No. 239
„Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 501-17 „Regulations regarding
determination of construction costs“ (In Latvian – Būvizmaksu noteikšanas kārtība).
The Contractor shall ensure 3D visualization of the Detailed Technical Design in accordance with the
requirements of this Technical Specification and, among other things, the Contractor shall provide a
visualized idea of the offered facade solutions and interior appearance.
120
Content of Detailed Technical Design
The Detailed Technical Design shall be elaborated at a level of detail to avoid cost rise due to non-
considered solutions, such as joint areas or materials. If during construction it is established that the
level of detail of a particular chapter of the Detailed Technical Design is insufficient and shall be
elaborated further, the Contractor shall carry out these tasks at own cost and shall receive
confirmations according to set procedures.
The Detailed Technical Design content shall be done according to Latvian standard LVS 16310
„Engineering services - Terminology to describe engineering services for buildings, infrastructure and
industrial facilities”, Latvian construction standard LBN 202-15 „Būvprojekta saturs un noformēšana“
and according to the Professional standard elaborated by the Latvian Association of Architects
“Projekta stadijas” (http://www.latarh.lv/profesionala-informacija/dokumenti/). Formatting of
technical drawings of the Detailed Technical Design (tehniskais projekts) shall be done according to
the professional standard by Latvian Association of construction structure designers LBPA-PS-
001:2016 „Prasības būvkonstrukciju projekta saturam un noformēšanai“.
The Contractor during the elaboration of the Detailed Technical Design shall elaborate and submit also
the following chapters necessary for a complete and efficient construction and functioning of the
buildings:
- General part (VD);
- Chapter about territory (TS);
- Architecture part (AR);
- Architecture solutions, detailed (ARD);
- Interior by premises (IN);
- Location of devices (IE);
- Structural part (BK);
- Engineering networks (ŪK, ŪKT, SAT, SM, AVK, EL, ELT, VAS, EST, UAS, ESS, GA, GAT, DT, LKT);
- Technological part (TN);
- Work organisation project (DOP);
- Description of fire safety measures (UPP);
- Energy efficiency assessment of the building for the calculated energy-efficiency, preliminary
energy certificate of the building for each construction round;
- Cost analysis of the buildings' life-cycle, along with elaborated feasibility studies;
- Environmental protection measures;
- Scopes of construction works and construction cost estimate (IS, BA, T).
Clearness of the drawings shall be ensured in the Detailed Technical Design:
• When elaborating the Detailed Technical Design, requirements for work in the BIM system in
Section 3.11 shall be taken into account;
• It is advisable to adhere to A4 and A3 sheet formats as much as possible for specifications,
drawings of assemblies and components;
121
• Ensure legibility of sizes, explanations, labelling and graphic signs of all scales and black-and-
white copies;
• Ensure that graphic and text information is not unnecessarily duplicated or, on the contrary,
divided into multiple drawings.
General part and photos (VD, FF)
This Technical Specification and input materials, preconditions, technical conditions received together
with it.
Topographic survey and 3D point cloud.
Engineering-geology survey.
Other engineering survey documents for the land plot according to the Applicable law.
Explanatory description, which contains general information about the technical parameters of the
building, key usage type of object according to classification of structures and physical accessibility
solutions; vehicle and pedestrian traffic organisation description with numbers and figures.
Technically-economical parameters characteristic of the build-up area: area and scope of above-
ground storeys, area of underground storey, total build-up area, number of storeys, build-up intensity,
free territory indicator, efficient area of premises, area of joint usage premises (with a separate
indication of the area of technical premises).
Territory section (TS)
Master plan
Master plan of the Detailed Technical Design at a respective perceptible scale (1:250; 1:500) according
to LBN 202-15 „Būvprojekta saturs un noformēšana“ requirements on an approved topographic plan
with a traffic organisation layout demonstrating entrances/exits, and the traffic flow layout on existing
and future streets in context with adjacent streets.
Aligned plan of the designed utilities networks at a respective perceptible scale (1:250; 1:500) on an
approved topographic plan.
Territory section shall inclued also vertical planning of the territory with surfacing plan and rainwater
collection and drainage plan.
Territory improvements and greenery plan.
Vehicle, pedestrian and cyclists' traffic organisation layout. The Detailed Technical Design shall include
the traffic organisation layout and car parking location layout. It shall provide for vehicular, cyclists and
pedestrian traffic organisation, car and bus parking location, extension of Elizabetes Street up to
Timoteja Street by locating it under the railway. The extension shall accommodate a cycle road on the
sidewalk and two traffic lanes.
122
Temporary solutions for the uninterrupted functioning of the building and affected streets.
Requirements as regards territory zoning and improvements
Within the whole Project territory – the area of Works execution – the Contractor shall improve the
territory and establish the necessary access for vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.
The master plan and functional zones shall be developed based on the sketch design.
Considering that the border of the Project Works is smaller than the territory covered by the sketch
design, the Detailed Technical Design shall consider an option to continue the development of the
territory covered by the sketch design.
Within the zone – under the railway from station till the envisaged Elizabetes Street extension – provide
for a free square for future development of the station or urban infrastructure. Provide for an access
to this zone from Elizabetes Street extension.
Provide for a good link between urban public transport and the station to be designed.
Provide for space to locate art or interactive objects.
Requirements as regards roads and squares
Territory surfacing shall be designed easy to clean, safe, endurable and in context with the city.
Develop solutions for road surfacing, including materials, colours, shapes and patterns.
Designing the road and square planning, carry out an analysis of pedestrian and cyclist flows, avoiding
unauthorised tramping of greenery and inefficiently used hard surfacing. The location of squares and
the planning itself shall prevent crowding of people and shall provide for multilateral access to the
square.
Internal transport (service) roads of the territory shall be planned rational, providing the shortest
trajectory and at minimum statutory width.
Squares and access roads shall be planned to allow for convenient access by service vehicles and
access by garbage trucks. Vehicular access by special vehicles using connsection with the existing
streets shall be provided for in the design.
Enable statutory requirements fulfilment as regard access of fire-fighting trucks. All zones, which
provide for movement of fire-fighting trucks, shall have a covering of respective endurance to allow for
vehicles (at least 24 tonnes in weight).
The room under railway overpasses shall be designed light, spacey and enjoyable by visitors and as
much as possible avoiding unilluminated areas and dead-ends.
Provide for at lest 50 (fifty) reasonably located cycle stands. Riga city cycling development concept for
2015–2030 (in Latvian: Rīgas pilsētas velosatiksmes attīstības koncepcijai 2015–2030). -
http://www.rdsd.lv/uploads/media/557550c430e1f.pdf shall also be considered for planning and
design.
123
Cycling stands shall be placed under railway overpasses or at other covered zones, avoiding individual
shelters for bicycle parking. The bicycle lock structure at bicycle stands shall be designed according to
“Guidelines on the establishment of bicycle stands” (in Latvian: Vadlīnijas velosipēdu novietņu
izveidošanai) - http://www.divritenis.lv/box/files/91347573vadlnijasvelosipdunovietuizveidoanai.pdf
Provide for cycle road connections to envisaged bicycle parking sites.
Greenery and territory improvement elements
Solutions for the creation of a new greenery structure and location of territory improvement elements shall be elaborated according to functional zoning of territory and the Rail Baltica Design Guidelines, including the section „Architectural and landscaping, visual design requirements“ – RBDG-MAN-031-010.
The railway embankment and the rest of the design territory shall provide for a modern and easy-to-
manage greenery solution. The railway embankment greenery shall be minimalist.
The design shall provide for a variety of decorative greenery plants.
The valuable tree-like plants shall be preserved and integrated within the new greenery system (if in
line with the greenery concept and the existing plants are deemed valuable. The assesment of greenery
system shall be done by the Contractor).
As regards the greenery, provide for perennial plants suitable for the climate and public sites, mainly
offering the diverse perennial winter enduring plants.
Provide for relevant territory improvement elements – benches, trash bins, bicycle parking sites, mobile
plant pots, fencing elements, lighting, etc.
On the passenger platforms, provide for territory improvement elements in a single system with the
interior and pattern of the building.
Architecture section (AR)
Storey and roof plans of buildings including dimensions of premises and division into groups of
premises (scale 1:100) shall be done according to LBN requirements and legend of the type of use of
the groups of premises, titles of premises shall be assigned for all groups of premises.
Façades of buildings with elevation marks of key elements (including decorative), as well as including
information on the construction products of the façade finishing, decorative and constructive parts,
location of technical devices and openings.
Typical sections/profiles with elevation marks of existing and/or planned terrain, floors and key
construction elements such as openings in the external walls, parapets, cornices, ridges, roofs, stair
landing, height from floor to ceiling, including for suspended ceilings, description of external bordering
and inter-floor covering structure layers (scale 1:200) according LBN requirements.
Location of technical equipment.
124
Construction products' specifications, requirements and methodology as regards exchange of
materials or solutions during the construction process.
Temporary solutions for an uninterrupted functionality of the building during its construction.
Detailed solutions of the following (but not limited to) structural joints: windows and glass façade
installation solutions (support, top part, side connection), foundation construction solutions,
interflooring support, roof covering, parapet, connections of existing and designed structures, as well
as joints, where the materials are changed, e.g., from a masonry element to frame structure at a scale
not less than 1:10. The joints detailing shall provide for clearly solved and indicated solutions, which
include meeting the heating, damp permeability and air permeability requirements.
Constructive solutions for the placing and fixing of various equipment, as well as wall crossings and
insulation joints.
Requirements as regards architectonic and master plan solution.
Evaluation of heritage elements
To observe cultural and historical, as well as archaeological elements adjacent to the project territory
in performance of Works (see requirements of Chapter 4.4).
Planning of the station to be designed
Entrances to station shall be preserved from northern and southern sides of the railway. The exit from
Central market into the merged tunnels is located under the newly constructed Rail Baltica railway
overpass. Coming from centre, the entrance to the station shall be designed through the existing
building of Riga Central Passenger Station.
Existing façade of the building from the Station square side shall be preserved unchanged.
In the existing entrance hall, the commercial premises located alongside the glass section of the
building facade shall be dismantled to create a light, open and spacey area.
Existing Tunnel A an B under the railway shall be merged by dismantling commercial premises located
therein, and the tunnels shall be extended both ways to create a broad pedestrian passage.
The pedestrian passages shall be designed broad and free allowing for free movement from the station
square to the railway embankment side of the Central market.
On sides along the pedestrian passage commercial premises shall be located according to the
requirements by the technica conditions. Inside the passage, several stairwells featuring elevators
leading to passenger platform level (station building, 3rd floor level) and the future waiting hall (the 3rd
floor of the station building to be designed), and public utilities' shafts shall be designed.
Zones under the new railway overpass shall be designed to accommodate covered commercial
premises underneath it (provide utilities' connections needed for a normal operation).
125
On Central market side of the railway embankment (opposite of the Ministry of Transport), provide for
elevators and escalators to the future passenger platform level of the station (3rd floor level of the
station building) and future waiting hall (3rd floor of the station building to be designed).
In the existing Tunnel C, the existing stairs leading to/from platforms shall be dismantled and new
stairs with escalators to passenger platform level shall be designed.
In the basement of the existing station building, at 2nd and 4th floor levels the planning is not envisaged
to be changed.
At 3rd floor level of the station building, the vestibules on passenger platforms and the escalator
leading to a lower floor shall be dismantled. New exits to passenger platforms shall be created by
designing exits in the glass façade.
The tracks and platforms of the station are subject to complete reconstruction. To get to the platforms,
stairs and escalators from Tunnel C, stairwells with elevators from pedestrian passage, stairs and
escalators from Elizabetes Street extension and stairs from Lāčplēša Street overpass shall be
designed. Escalators leading from passenger platforms to the designed passenger waiting room above
rail tracks are envisaged. Crossings from one platform to another, without crossing the tracks, are
provided through waiting room above the tracks.
The designed waiting room is planned to extend for the entire area above the tracks. The scope of the
waiting room starts at the southern wall of the existing station building and extends as a shed over all
rail tracks ending at the Central market side of the railway embankment, thus creating a shed of the
station entry on the side of Central market.
The future waiting room shall be accessed from passenger platform level by escalators, from
pedestrian passage – by stairwells with elevators, from railway embankment on the side of Central
market – by escalators and elevators.
At the ends of the waiting hall, glass façades shall be developed to open up the view to the city.
The waiting hall shall feature ticket offices, small commercial premises and waiting zones with
benches.
On each floor of the designed building, a set of lavatories for men, women and disabled persons shall
be designed.
Programme of the premises and functional zones of the building
No. Name of the premise or zone Programme of the premise or zone Area (m2)
1. Reconstruction of existing Riga Central Passenger Station building
1.1. Entrance hall Existing entrance hall shall be
extended by dismantling commercial
premises at the façade side
1,000
126
1.2. Communications (stairs,
elevators, escalators, hallways,
lounges)
Existing stairs shall be kept (stairs or
some heritage value)
200
1.3. Waiting rooms Existing blood donation centre shall be
transformed into a waiting room for
passengers. The glass façade on
passenger platforms shall
accommodate exits to platforms. Shall
accommodate benches, tables, trash
bins, electric devices' charging sites,
wireless internet and other facilities.
Number of sites shall be determined
during the design process.
180
1.4. Commercial areas New commercial areas within the
existing station building are not
planned.
-
1.5. Existing premises to be kept Premises located within work borders
and do not change function.
According to
inventory.
2. Building to be designed and pedestrian tunnels to be reconstructed
2.1. Pedestrian passage By merging and extending the existing
Tunnel A and B under the railway
embankment, shall be designed for
convenient passenger movement with
relevant signs and other improvement
elements
4,100
2.2. Tunnel C Existing tunnel shall be reconstructed,
the existing stairs to passenger
platforms shall be dismantled, new
stairs and escalators shall be built, the
exit towards Gogoļa Street shall be
reconstructed
600
2.3. Communications (stairs,
elevators, escalators, hallways,
lounges)
Shall be designed to be easy to use by
passengers with luggage and
functionally-impaired persons
1,450
2.4. Waiting halls Shall accommodate benches, tables,
trash bins, electric devices' charging
sites, wireless internet and other
improvements. Number of sites shall
4,600
127
be determined during the design
process.
2.5. Commercial areas Shall be designed alongside the
Pedestrian passage, along the square
between Gogoļa and Turgeņeva
streets and in the waiting hall. The
commercial premises shall be located
and organised not to disturb the
passenger flows at the station.
2,350
2.6. Public restrooms Shall be designed according to LBN
208-15 „Publiskas būves“ and physical
accessibility requirements. On each
floor, at least one lavatory for
functionally-impaired persons shall be
provided for.
200
2.7. Equipment rooms Relevant technical premises for
ventilation chambers, heating nodes,
power distribution or for the provision
of other function of the building
1,300
2.8. Ticket offices with ancillary
premises
New ticket offices with ancillary
premises shall be built in the waiting
hall
50
2.9. Passenger platforms To design according to CoM
Regulations No. 724 „Technical
operation regulations of railway“ (in
Latvian: Dzelzceļa tehniskās
ekspluatācijas noteikumi) and the Rail
Baltica Design guidelines. To design
with respective equipment and
facilitation
To be clarified
during design
process
2.10. Stairs to passenger platforms Shall be designed to be easy to use by
passengers with luggage and
functionally-impaired persons. In
parallel to the stairs, escalators shall
be designed. Stairs on Dzirnavu Street
side shall be designed without
escalators, as technical and
emergency stairs.
128
2.11. Area for future developments Shall be designed as clearance under
railway overpasses for the
development of the station or urban
infrastructure. Access from envisaged
Elizabetes Street extension, Pedestrian
passage and the square between
Gogoļa and Turgeņeva streets.
11,000
Table 4.2. Programme of the premises and functional zones of the building
Equipment for building premises and functional zones
The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary equipment for building premises and functional
zones necessary for the comfortable and safe performance of the building's intended function. The
equipment shall contain at least the following:
General requirements
The equipment must be easy to maintain and safe of vandals. The Contractor must install equipment against vandalism and anti-graffiti finishing materials, with particular attention to toilet equipment, doors, handle and wall finishes.
Recreational benches and other equipment to be made hard to move or strengthened to the floor or walls. The equipment must be provided in a uniform style and must be incorporated into the common interior. Equipment tone and shape according to interior design.
Interior equipment shall include luminaires, ventilation bars, fire extinguishers, surveillance apparatus (including video cameras) and other equipment necessary for the functioning of the building.
Ensure free wireless internet access throughout the publicly available area of the station.
The Contractor must provide all IT equipment for the operation and management of BMS and video surveillance cameras.
Equipment surfaces may not contain:
• Dangerous substances that are carcinogenic, defecting reproductive system, mutagenic, toxic,
allergic, allergic when inhaled, or dangerous to the environment according to Directive
1999/45/EC;
• Halogenated flame retardants, flatates, aziridinamides, polyaziridines or plumbum, cadmium,
chromium, mercury and their compounds;
• Volatile organic compounds, if their proportion exceeds 5% of the coating mass.
Staircases and other escape routes may not contain equipment or other interior objects which may
interfere with the evacuation of persons or reduce the width of the minimum permitted escape route.
129
The interior of the building must be constructed according to LBN 208-15 “Public structures” and LBN
201-15 “Fire safety of structures”.
If the State Fire and Rescue Service requests to design and construct one more fire safety equipment, the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring it without additional payment within the performance of the Works.
The equipment of the building, finishing materials and interior elements must be designed to avoid
unduly costly construction and maintenance costs.
Place ticket control equipment with a turnstile pass system according to passenger movement
schemes. In places with no control system provide stainless steel and toughened glass barriers
between passenger flows.
Lockable doors
The doors must be provided with a security system where several doors can be opened with one main key (master key system).
Install electronic card locks and magnetic card readers, where necessary.
The doors must be equipped with a contact to inform the security of their position (open or closed).
Roof and facade
Place bird-deterioration devices on the roof.
The roof of the station shall be designed so that its inside and outside cleaning and maintenance does not result in excessive or unjustified costs.
A system must be installed on the roof to have easy access to cleaning with the connection point for electricity and water, as well as provide for access staircases and the possibility of carrying out maintenance work with mountaineer equipment.
The Contractor must install heating cables on the roof in all places where snow and ice can accumulate, as well as a technology must be introduced to prevent the fall of the accumulated snow.
WC / sanitation preparation area
Wall-mounted ceramic toilet with wall-mounted rinse box. Lid with shock absorber. Toilet flush box
button anodized aluminum or stainless steel - built in the wall.
Anodised aluminum or stainless steel toilet paper holders and wastebaskets with a verbable lid.
Stainless steel hangers inside the toilet booths at the wall.
Toilet brushes with holder.
130
Provide high quality, easy to maintain, moisture resistant, frameless system partition walls for toilet
cabines. Provide cabins with the same material swing doors with "busy-free" lock. The height of the
dividing walls and doors is 2.00m, with a departure from the floor not more than 0.15m.
Stainless steel sink counter. For each sink a water mixer with a hand dryer and a foam or liquid soap
dispenser. A high-quality non-contact sink equipment should be provided. Equipment finishing
according to design.
Provide in the toilet anteroom an anodized aluminium or stainless steel wall-fortified non-contact paper
towel holder and wastebasket.
In men's bathrooms, ceramic urinals with automatic rinse function shall be fastened on the wall. At
least one “child” urinal, smaller and to be fastened lower, shall be provided.
Provide between urinals light construction partition walls fastened at the wall.
Fasten mirror above the sinks on the wall across the whole width of the sink counter.
Toilets, partition walls, sinks and other interior fittings and finishings of WC / sanitation preparation
area must create a single stylistic ensemble.
For disabled toilet equipment see “Detailed requirements for toilets for disabled persons”.
Pedestrian passage and waiting halls
Recreation benches with backs and at separate places with tables. Benches and tables with a stainless
steel or pulverised steel frame, fixed to the floor. Seats and backs of recreation benches minimally
upholstered, with imitation leather finishing. Benches divided in seats with armrests for each seat.
Waste bins. Provide the possibility of placing waste bins with divided types of waste.
Charging points for electronic devices, including charging points for electric wheelchairs.
Interactive information stands and information screens.
Provide appropriate communication connections for vending machines for hot drinks and other
products, as well as self-serving ticket vending machines at conveniently accessible sites and in
accordance with the concept of passenger and pedestrian flow provided for in the architecture sketch.
In areas with enough daylight and if it fits the interior design, place natural plants planted in containers.
Commercial areas
The equipment, the furniture and the overall interior shall be addressed by the tenant of each
commercial area separately, but the Contractor shall equip the commercial areas with the utilities
necessary for their functions, connection points and equipment thereof. Commercial area functions to
be agreed with the Employer during the design. Furniture and equipment that the tenant wants to place
in the public area must be coordinated with the overall design of the building.
Technical premises
Equipment according to the specifics of the technical premises determined by the designer of the
respective engineering part and to be coordinated with the Engineer and the Employer.
131
In the maintenance inventory premises provide biduar and stainless steel hangers for storage of
inventory.
Staircase premises
Stair handrail armrest polished stainless steel round pipe. Fill, division and markings of stainless steel
handrails in accordance with LBN 208-15 "Public Buildings" and LBN 201-15 "Fire safety of buildings".
Passenger platforms
Recreation benches with backs and at separate places with tables. Benches and tables with a stainless
steel or pulverised steel frame, fixed to the floor. Seats and backs of recreation benches of stainless
steel or pulverised steel perforated sheet or bar.
Waste bins with roofs or openings from side. Provide the possibility of placing waste bins with divided
types of waste.
Ticket offices with auxiliary spaces
The cashier's room shall be equipped with the furniture and equipment necessary for cashier's
functions. Primary storage shelves shall be provided in the cashier's room and cupboards (open
shelves) may not be visible to the customers.
Each cashier's place must be equipped with an ergonomic office chair, a footrest, a computer with a
required periphery, a cash register and a ticket machine. If one cashier's room is designed for several
cashiers, provide acoustic table screens between workplaces.
For each cashier's workplace provide a loudspeaker and microphone system for communication with
a customer (there may not be holes in the glass between cashier and customer) and a stainless steel
deepening incorporated in the counter or a drawer for passing cash, cards, tickets or EFTPOS
equipment.
In the cashier's auxiliary room place secondary storage shelves and cupboards, a safe, a closet with
hangers and shelves for storing the personal belongings of cashiers and a table with chairs. The safe
must be placed on a platform at least 0.5 m from the floor.
Territory
Stainless steel bicycle stands.
Recreation benches and waste bins. The design needs to conform to the small architectual forms of
the existing surrounding areas.
Lamps
For each lamp, a single reserve bulb should be provided.
Finishing materials
For each finishing material at the end of the work, sufficient spare material must remain to enable
restoring of 1% of the relevant surface.
132
Scope of the station building to be designed
The scope of the designed building shall be made based on the sketch design.
Build-up concept shall be elaborated and it shall provide for a common spatial solution of the structure.
To elaborate visual looks of the spatial solutions within environment from several significant view
points in urban settings, yet communicating these in advance with the Riga City Construction Board
(view points indicated in the technical conditions by Riga City Construction Board) and during the
design stage the visualisation environment shall be communicated with the Riga City Construction
Board.
The Detailed Technical Design shall be elaborated, considering the conditions of construction permits
issued based on the Building Design in the Minimum Composition.
The new scope of the station provides for an arch-like roof structure consisting of several main steel
trusses, diagonally over the rail tracks and in parallel between the rail tracks. On the main steel trusses,
the secondary steel trusses perpendicularly are based, thus creating a single structure.
The roof structure shall be designed according to sketch design and Building Design in the Minimum
Content solutions. From the inside, the steel trusses feature a wooden finishing, which covers the
utilities placed in-between these.
The roof structures are based on reinforced concrete supports located across the passenger
platforms.
On passenger platforms, rhythmical column rows between the roof trusses supports shall be created,
onto which the ceiling of 3rd floor waiting hall shall be based.
From the 3rd floor waiting room, a view to the lower platforms and tracks stretching both directions
shall be ensured. Within the ceiling, according to the sketch design, light wells onto platforms shall be
created.
Facades and roof structures shall be made of maximum fine profiles to provide for maximum natural
lighting in the waiting room, which will also create a spacey and open ambience within the room.
Platforms are covered with sheds shaping an extension to the station building. The sheds are
supported by a row of columns in the middle of the platform. The column row of the shed shall be
created in a single composition with the columns, onto which the ceiling is based, and the roof
supports.
The arch-like shed structures create an architectural uniform ensemble with the existing railway bridge
arch structures and the shape of the Central market pavilions.
At centre view, the station dimension rises organically above the linear façade of the existing Riga
Central Passenger Station building. The arch-like dimension finishes with a vertical, flat façade in
parallel to the existing façade.
At the view from Central Market, the organic structure of the designed station building is completely
visible.
133
Like in the building dimensions, as also in its plan arises the organic structure of the designed building
and the linear structure of the reconstructed station building, which by natural contrast matches and
merges.
The shape of the building shall be of architectural high value, without distinct yard façades – for the
whole building dimensions, similarly high value materials and construction technologies shall be
applied.
The decorative façade and territory lighting solution for night-time shall be elaborated.
Volume of the existing station building
At the level of passenger platforms, the volume of small passages and escalators of the existing
building shall be dismantled. The preservable facade of the existing building at the level of the
passenger platforms shall be restored according to the historical form. To clean the facade's finishing
plates, replace the damaged plates if an analogue material is available. Dismantle unaccurately
installed, moving and partially unglued finishing plates and install anew.
From the facade of the rebuilt volume remove the elements that need to be re-installed what needs to
be saved. Reinstall elements in required locations.
Restore the facade in part of the dismantled volume with equivalent/of equal worth (or higher-value)
cladding material. To obtain the finishing material as precise as possible for the existing facade, where
possible use finishing materials from the dismantled volume to restore the facade.
Restore the existing building facades at passenger platforms. Dismantle the facade-degrading
elements, according to the sketch solutions. Cables and other engineering communications located on
the facade install hidden. Choosing the methods of restoring facade finishing and elements, prefer
methods that would preserve the historical structure of the elements as far as possible.
Improve the visually aesthetic position of the shopping center courtyard between the existing railway
embankment, Gogoļa Street and the shopping center. Cables and other engineering networks placed
on the courtyard facades and roofs immerse in the facade or place on the facade in cable channels.
Repair the scraped and damaged plaster, fully renovate the entire facade, renew it. Disassemble non-
functioning and unnecessary elements. Change the facade and area lighting on facades to new,
modern requirements. Fasteners, bars, stairs and other metal elements, fastened to the fasade, should
be cleaned and painted or restored, replaced. Dismantle the sheds of the basement window light shafts
and the passages to the basement and install new sheds in a unified stylistic performance. Change the
embankment slope concrete plate coverings, apply new covering plates on slopes where those are lost.
Cleane, restore and cover with protective coating concrete foundations, supporting walls, stairs and
other concrete elements. Dismantle beds and other unkempt green areas created in the courtyard and
install in the courtyard new asphalt concrete pavement with inclines on existing rainwater gullies.
134
Finishing materials of the building
General requirements
For architectural sketch-authors' requirements for interior decoration, see Annex 24.
The finishing materials must be coordinated with the responsible authorities and the Engineer, this
applies both to the volume of the newly built station building and to the volume of the existing station
building described in the previous chapter. Select only such Goods (including materials, equipment,
elements, devices and construction products) with a lifetime (including the longevity of materials,
elements, devices, construction products and connection knots of structure parts) corresponding to
the Contract and requirements of the Applicable law.
All finishing materials, both external and internal, must ensure the preservation of the original, designed
surface structure, tones and other material properties throughout the lifetime of the materials.
The roof cover material must maintain water, humidity, precipitation properties throughout the
intended lifetime. The cover material must maintain or change the tone and surface properties evenly.
If the Detailed Technical Design provides for material designed to change the tone, such as rotting,
solutions must be provided to prevent drainage or other damage to other finishing materials or Goods
installed at the place of work, including during the operation of Works, during the Defect notification
period, including the prolonged Defect notification period of respective Works.
Finishing materials shall be easy to clean and durable. Preference is given to materials (including glues,
paints), which comply with ecolabel requirements such as the Nordic Swan, EU Flower or similar
standards.
For the construction of the building only construction materials of a regulated field shall be used, which
are harmless to human health, life and environment, including electrotechnical products, which are
limited by legal acts of the respective industry and the conformity of which has been approved
according to legal acts regulating conformity assessment.
The use of products manufactured by local material producers shall be considered.
For the internal finishing of the building, safe for health finishing materials shall be used.
The following materials/substances are prohibited to be used in the building:
• Products containing sulfur hexafluoride (SF6);
• Indoors paints and varnishes containing solvents (volatile organic compounds (VOCs)
with a boiling point up to 250°C) exceeding the following level: for wall paints (according
to EN 13300): 30 g/l (without water), for other paints, the dispersion level of which is at
least 15 m2/l and the covering intransparency of which achieves 98% – 250 g/l (without
water);
• For all other products (including paints, which are not wall paints and the dispersion level
of which is less than 15 m2/l, varnishes, corrosive fluids, floor coverings and floor paints,
and similar products) – 180 g/l (without water);
• Materials containing > 0.1% of especially hazardous substances
(http://echa.europa.eu/addressing-chemicals-of-concern/
135
authorisation/recommendation-for-inclusion-in-the-authorisation-list/authorisation-list)
or their analogue materials (http://echa.europa.eu/web/guest/candidate-list-table). The
use of such materials is only allowed in exceptional cases, where safer options are not
available.
• To build in and use for construction works such construction products and materials,
which contain lead and its compounds, mercury and its compounds, if maximum
concentration thereof by weight exceeds 0.02 %, nickel and its compounds, if maximum
concentration thereof exceeds 0.04%, polybrominated biphenyl and polybrominated
diphenylether, as well as cadmium and its compounds, creosote oil, anthracene oil and
other hazardous substances, if their maximum concentration and use does not comply
with European Parliament and Council regulations.
• Lead and its compounds in plastic construction products and for construction works,
including: it is not allowed to use lead and its compounds like plastic stabilisers and
installation of such plastic construction products in the structures.
The applied materials and their installation technology shall be vandal-proof.
Façade materials located at easily accessible locations shall provide for an anti-graffiti covering.
By picking materials and their installation technologies, the railway-induced vibrations in the station
building shall be considered and solutions for reduction of vibrations and their impact shall be provided.
Inside the building, light-reflecting stone mass floor tiles shall be used. The tiles shall be resistant to
mechanical loads and frost. The flooring shall deliver anti-slippery properties both under wet and dry
conditions. Tile anti-slippery class – not less than R11, hardness and durability of tile shall be at least
class PEI 5.
All flooring materials used in the building must be easy to maintain and with high wear, chemical
persistence and high anti-slip class. The designed materials must be designed for public buildings.
Material must be sustainable without loss of physical properties, maintaining tone and texture
throughout the lifetime.
In the renovated area of the station, materials of similarly high quality as in the designed new part shall
be used. The applied materials shall be in harmony with the historic architecture of the building.
Models
For the display of the roof construction of the building, the Contractor shall establish a model that is a
natural size construction designed for inspection and for testing of design, coordination, testing and
operation; it is not a sample. In addition to the models indicated in the various chapters of these
specifications, the other Contract documents may require specific, special models, according to the
places displayed in the drawings and the individual costs indicated in the list of works.
136
1. Modeling must be performed before the construction of the roof of the Central Station. The
size of the model must be not less than (3 * 3) m and must include all the main elements of
the roof.
2. The roof model shall be subjected to inspection of wind and precipitation, demonstrating that
all elements of the model maintain their position and position in the effects of wind and
precipitation, and ensure the necessary waterproofing.
If requested by a separate specification chapter or the Engineer, the Contractor shall assemble the
constructions to be installed at site in a complete natural size model. All necessary inspections of
model shall be carried out in accordance with this chapter of the specifications. The model must be
demolished after completion, when confirmed and ordered by the Engineer.
The model may be saved as the completed work, if specified in the specification chapter and if
approved by the Engineer.
All related other materials and performance must meet (or have a higher value than) approved model
standards.
It is assumed that the Contractor has included all costs in the financial offer to comply with the
requirement to produce any model that may reasonably be requested by the Engineer.
Submit fully finished samples of natural size, hardened and with finishing in the prescribed manner, as
well as physically identical with the material or product offered for use.
Submit quality control materials including design data certification, manufacturer's instructions,
manufacturer's field reports, as well as other quality control materials in accordance with the different
chapters of these specifications.
All materials and works shall be tested according to the specifications and/or in such a manner and in
time, as required by the Employer, the Engineer. The Contractor shall pay all fees for material testing.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary labour force, tanks, packaging and markings in relation to
test samples and shall cover all transport costs.
The Contractor shall ensure all the equipment necessary at the site for testing works to be performed
by an approved testing authority and that are paid within the framework of the Contract.
Test samples shall be taken at the place of their origin or in the work territory or from the performance
place of the Works, depending on the situation and in accordance with the requirements of the
Engineer.
Materials whose surface with finishing shall be visible before incorporation must be approved by the
Engineer.
Thermal deformation criteria
Structural durability against atmospheric effects and other requirements established for operation. The
completed work must be equal to or above the criteria for future structural resistance to atmospheric
137
effects and other operational properties, incl. as determined by the Contractor's calculation or natural
size model tests. Operational properties criteria apply to both laboratory and site conditions.
Anticipate the expansion and shrinkage of structural materials caused by fluctuations of external air
temperature in the range from -45 ° C and the effects of external metal surface temperature up to + 85
° C in case of dark color materials, up to +65 ° C in case of light color materials and up to 95 ° C in cse
of stainless steel, as well as the effects of internal temperature ranges from + 12 ° C to +40 ° C, without
causing metal waviness, excessive glass tension; glass, metal or joint sealing fractures, excessive
structural elements tension, damage to the fastenings, downgrade of operational properties or other
harmful, adverse effects.
For areas where the reflections of adjacent aluminium, glass, or stainless steel, snow and ice-covered
or uncovered surfaces and with snow or ice covered surfaces, including ground surface reflections,
may lead to increased “solar” heat supply and temperature rise, heat-technical calculations must be
submitted, determining the relevant heat supply and temperature rise, permissible temperature
fluctuations. These calculations must include a solar temperature derivative, thermal gradient
calculations by using the derived solar temperature and the correction of the above maximum
allowable temperatures for specific locations.
The volume of such shrinkage and expansion movements shall be indicated in the drawings submitted
by the Contractor and shall be accompanied by heat technical calculations.
Anticipate the adaptation to such factors as deflection caused by dead load and dynamic load, thermal
expansion, shrinkage and/or rocking of building carcass, banking and spinning due to wind load, as
well as resilience to the effects of seismic forces.
Wall system without deterioration must maintain constructive stability and be resistant against
atmospheric effects.
Provide drainage of all water trapped in the joints and condensate generated in the structures to the
outside of the structure by using an appropriate condensate drainage system. Provide an uninterrupted
water drainage for each floor. Water drainage must be performed in a way to minimize the wall shading
and to prevent other harmful, adverse effects.
Exposed concrete surfaces
Moulds for exposed finishing concrete - plywood, metal, metal frame with plywood edges or other panel
material that provides straight, continuous, smooth open surfaces. Make the largest practically
justifiable size to reduce the number of connections. Connections must comply with the connection
system specified in the drawings.
For exposed concrete, provide an aggregate from one manufacturer.
For the exposed external surfaces do not use fine or coarse aggregate containing substances that
could cause separation of splinters.
Local fillers corresponding to LVS EN 12620: 2003 may be used. The filler must be solid, durable and
without materials that respond to cement or cause spots.
138
The moulds shall be made according to the dimensions, shapes and straight lines indicated in order to
obtain the exact conformity of the finished structures with the axles, position, level and verticality.
Ensure the openings, indents, recesses, keys, curves, ornaments, rustic, belts, rounds, blocks,
alignments, blockages, anchorages, inlets and other details necessary in work. Carefully place and
support parts to be built in moulds. Close the joints tightly and create pads to prevent the draining of
cement mass.
Make moulds so that they are easy to remove without pounding the concrete surface with a hammer
and without using lever against concrete. In places where the removal of the moulds may damage the
concrete surface, ensure dismantling or demoulding panels. In places that are too inclined to use only
lower moulds, provide the top plate as well. Use cuts and inlets in wood for keys, belts, indents and so
on to make it easier to remove moulds.
Round off the open corners and edges by using wood, metal, PVC or rubber rounding strip for obtaining
smooth continuous line of and tight edge joints.
Clean carefully the moulds and surfaces where concrete is intended to be present. Remove splinters,
chips, fragments of wood, mud and other dirt just before concreting. Secure and tighten the moulds
and spacers before concreting in order to prevent mortar flows and maintain compliance with the axles.
In the moulds insert and incorporate anchorage and other embeddable parts required for other work
attached to or based on monolite concrete. Use assembly drawings, charts, instructions and guidelines
of the part suppliers that are to be added.
Lay the concrete in moulds in horizontal layers not exceeding 60 cm in thickness and in such a way as
to prevent the formation of improper work joints. If concreting is in several layers, each layer is laid
while the previous one is still plastic in order to prevent the formation of cold joints. Seal the concrete
during concreting so that the concrete fully adheres to the reinforcement, other embedded in concrete
parts and corners.
Provide a smooth / decorative formed finishing for finished concrete surfaces that will be exposed to
the view or which will be directly covered with coating or finishing material such as waterproofing,
moisture insulation, rendering mortar, paint or similar thin surface finishing. This finishing must be
achieved immediately after the hardening of the concrete, by choosing the right edge material of the
mould and forming the moulds so that the number of joints is minimal, so that they are arranged
accurately and symmetrically. Correct and repair the defective places, remove and polish all kinds of
protrusions.
Repair defective places and create patches with cement java immediately after removal of the moulds
when the Engineer has permitted it.
The concrete with defective surface shall be dismantled and replaced if the defects cannot be
corrected in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer. Surface defects include irregular colour
or texture, cracks, slicing, air bubbles, cellular spaces, stone cavities, spaces and other surface
asperities, as well as non-cleanable stains.
139
Metal products
Deliver the metals with a smooth, flat surface, unless otherwise specified. Metal products that when
finished shall be in a visible place, must be delivered without visible places of joints, rolled metal, rolled
trade marks or defects.
Assemble the products at factory as completely as possible. Dismantle units only as required for
transport and relocation purposes. Use connections that maintain the structural integrity of the parts
to be connected. Clearly mark the units for back to assembly and coordinate the installation.
Create curved metal corners with the smallest possible radius without causing metal cracking or
otherwise damaging material.
Make the outer surface flat and level with precise corners and surfaces and straight angles.
Use materials and methods that reduce deformation and increase strength and corrosion resistance
of metals. Remove welding flux immediately.
In external connections, complete the open weld joints and surfaces smoothly so that there is no
roughness after completion of the work and the contour of the welded surface will match with the
adjacent surface.
Make joints and other connections that will be exposed to weather conditions, so as to prevent water from
entering. Provide ventilation gaps in areas where condensate can accumulate.
Decorative railings
Samples required for each visible finishing.
Provide railings capable of withstanding gravitational load and subsequent restriction and conditional
loads and voltages.
On a glass-based railing, each armrest section must be based on at least three glass panels, if one
panel breaks, then the armrest remains in place, safely based on the remaining panels.
Provide hidden fastenings unless otherwise specified. Apply stainless steel fastenings.
Balance the components in connection locations in order to ensure close matching or use specially for
this purpose designed fittings. Weld around the connection, including fittings.
Connect parts with hidden metal fastenings and fittings.
Change direction by bending or inserting pre-prepared fittings.
Close the empty and open ends of the railing parts with pre-prepared end fittings.
Provide wall brackets, flanges, different fittings and anchors in order to connect railing parts with other
elements, unless specified otherwise.
140
Wood finishing
Indoor wooden products must be free from damage to wood - decay, blue stain and other damage,
without visual defects, creases, visible filling places.
For finishing materials with transparent finishing wider than the available wood, use the frame
construction. Do not stick them together to get more width.
Create grooves or notches in the rear of flat finishing materials and cut grooves for flat materials of
other width, with the exception of materials for which the end finishing is intended to be carried out at
the end of the works.
The finishing of the architectural wood products shall be carried out in the manufacturing plant. Only
the end finishing and cleaning can be postponed for the performance after the installation.
To protect the surface of the wood products, apply one layer of protective coating or prime coating
that is compatible with the end coating. In turn, apply two layers in the rear.
Prior to the installation of wood products place them in conditions which do not exceed the average
humidity norms. Check the work of the manufacturing plant, whether it is completely finished, and
complete it in accordance with the required, including the removal of the packaging and the first layer
of the prime coating.
The wood products must be installed leveled, well-balanced, correctly and straight. Seal according to
the requirement with inlets.
The wood used should be obtained from legitimate sources, as evidenced by wood traceability
certificates such as the FSC (Forest Stewardship Council), PEFC (The Programme for the Endorsement
of Forest Certification) or other, equivalent certifications.
Metal wall panels
Provide metal wall and roof panel assembly units that, according to the ASTM E 1592 test, can
withstand the specified load and stress under the given conditions.
Provide metal wall panels manufactured in the factory, designed to be installed on the site, by passing
over and connecting the edges of the adjacent panels and by fastening the panels to supports by
using hidden fastenings. In the factory, the sealing material shall be incorporated into the edges of
the panels. Include the accessories required for the weather-protected installation.
The design and finishing of metal wall panels and accessories should be done already at the factory,
by using the supplier's standard procedures and processes required to meet the requirements of
laboratory tests. Use the specified profiles and act in accordance with the size and construction
requirements.
Metal wall panels must be produced to avoid condensation within the panels and to secure the panel
joints against the effects of weather conditions.
141
The entire length of the panel must be provided with a panel profile, including the larger spacers
and intermediate stiffness spacers, if any.
Metal wall panel connections must be made with factory-installed fixing gaskets or separating sheets
that provide a close seal and prevent the metal from contacting the metal, which reduces the inner
movement noise of the panel assembly unit.
It is necessary that metal panels, pediment, soffit, windowsills and other articles made of metal
plates or sheets, after installation, be flat and without bends, visible oil spots and without the shapes
of details ensuring stiffness, welded joints, threaded studs, etc., visible from the top. In this context,
the visible surface flatness of the building metal outside surface fastened with bearings shall be such
that the maximum permissible inclination to 1 meter and the maximum one panel difference between
the upper and lower point deviation from the plane shall not exceed 1.5 mm.
Doors
The automatic door equipment must be capable of handling an intense pedestrian movement.
Operating temperature range - 30 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. Electric door standard EN
1527.
The places where the doors will be installed must be inspected and measured. The Contractor must
prevent conditions which might adversely affect the assembly or use of doors. Installation work can
only be continued after the removal of all unsatisfactory conditions.
Install a 200 mm high and 4 mm thick stainless steel protective plate in the lower part of the door. For
fastening use hidden fastening types.
Glazing
Choose glazing seals that are compatible with each other and with other materials they will face,
including glass products, insulating glass unit seals and glazing for channel bases, under conditions
of use and application as demonstrated by the manufacturer of the sealant, based on testing and
practical experience.
Ensure compliance with the written instructions of seals and glass manufacturers on the choice of
glazing seals that are suitable for the prescribed application and the conditions in place during
assembly.
Colour of visible glazing seals as approved by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
The glazing details shall be made in the sizes required for the setting of the openings indicated in the
Detailed Technical Design, with the edges and forward spaces, edge and surface conditions and cuts
according to the written instructions of the manufacturer of the products and the indicated
publications on glazings to ensure the compliance with the system’s performance requirements.
Apply sunlight limiting glass with heat-insulating coating on inclined surfaces.
142
Immediately after assembly protect the indoor glass from the damage by applying cross-crossed
inscriptions to the frame away from the glass. Do not make marks on the glass surface. Until
completion of the construction, remove not remaining markings and clean surfaces. Protect glass
from contact with smearing substances that may occur during construction, including welding
sparks. If, in spite of such protection, the smearing substances come into contact with the glass,
they must be cleaned according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
The Contractor shall remove and replace at his cost glass broken, scratched, cracked, bruised or
damaged as a result of natural causes, accidents and vandalism during the construction.
Vertically placed heat insulating glass structures with an angle of inclination against a vertical plane
of less than 15 degrees shall be made of annealed, thermally hardened, hardened (laminated, if
required by construction standards or in the requirements of local regulatory enactments) glass, as
reflected in drawings, specified, requested or recommended by the specified glass manufacturer in
order to protect against fragmentation due to the effects of heat, temperature fluctuations and to
ensure the use properties of glass in the wind load conditions indicated in the Detailed Technical
Design.
Stone and paving
Ensure consistency with models coordinated with the Engineer by color, finishing and other stone
properties related with the aesthetic effects.
Select a stone for planned use in order to prevent cracks, wrinkles and ruptures in the components
manufactured that could damage the constructive integrity or function.
Corrections that are typical for the prescribed types are acceptable unless they affect constructive
integrity or function and, according to the Engineer's assessment, are not aesthetically unacceptable.
The necessary stone cutting should be performed on spot. Lines must be cut straight and the edges of
the cuts performed on the spot should to be processed in order to match the industrially made.
For stone cutting, use chainsaws with diamond blades, except for the stone that according to the
specifications must have rough-handled edges.
Ensure openings and open spaces to connect to adjacent structures.
Install the stone according to the drawings and work drawings. Ensure the consistency of the stone in
terms of color and pattern, by using the numbered details in order, as indicated in the work drawings.
Install anchors, supports, fasteners and other fittings as indicated or required to secure stone products
in the intended places. Wedge and adjust anchors, supports and other accessories to place the stone
in precisely specified locations, arranging the edges and surfaces as defined in the adopted relations
and in the indicated tolerances.
Install the stone units at level, straight and accuratelly with the same joint widths. Use temporary
gaskets to ensure the width of the joints.
143
Mark and cut the stone on the spot as necessary in order to take the correct shape in places where
there are obstacles. Create simple joints in the indicated or specified size.
Installation of expansion and control joints: perform installation of expansion and other joints filled
with compactors, including control, contraction and insulation joints, in accordance with drawings and
work drawings at locations indicated during the installation of pits, mortar and stone. After installation
of stone, do not create sawed joints.
Paint
Paint according to LVS EN ISO 4618-2 and manufacturer's standards.
Apply colours in a way to create thin surface sheets without dregs, stains, unpainted, rough places,
brush or roller scratches, flowings down, slidings down, thickenings and other surface damages. Use
sharp lines and color divisions.
Protect works of other professions from damage caused by colour application. Correct damage to
works of other professions by cleaning, repairing, replacing and refinishing, as approved by the
Engineer, and leave the place undamaged.
Upon completion of construction works of other professions, retouch and restore damaged painted
surfaces.
Use samples of each specified colouring system and each selected colour and finishing standard to
test the previous selection made in the sample submission and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and
to establish quality standards for materials and performance.
Ensure a prime coating, sub-layer, and final coating materials corresponding to the interoperability of
the indicated use and presented in the manufacturer's basic inspection and application experience.
Review surfaces and conditions in order to ascertain compliance with the requirements of maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting the performance of the work.
The maximum moisture content of the surfaces must be determined following the measurements with
an electronic moisture meter. Applicable dye materials must be suitable for the result of the surface
humidity measurements.
Test the suitability of surfaces, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishing
and prime coating.
Start application of coating only after the unsatisfactory conditions have been removed and the
surfaces are properly prepared and dried.
Stainless steel corner guards
Mounted on the surface of the wall corners, metal corner shields produced from one-piece shaped or
pressed stainless steel angles with a nominal wing size of 40 mm. Metal with moulded edges at 90
degrees or according to wall position.
144
Thickness of protective material not less than 1.6 mm.
Finishing – fine gloss finishing.
Metal corners rounded with radius 3 mm.
Corner guards assembly height not less than 1500 mm from floor level.
Install shock-resistant wall protection components at one level, vertically, and in a correct line without
deformation. Do not use materials with bursts, cracks, blanks, stains or other defects that may appear
in completed work.
Ensure overflows, assembly equipment, anchorages and other necessary accessories required for
complete installation.
Immediately after completion of installation, clear metal corner guards and other affected surfaces
and accessories using standard cleaning agent on ammonia base.
Internal and external escalators
Provide escalators suitable for the flow of people expected at the station. Unless otherwise specified,
ensure the components specified in the manufacturer's publications and carry out works in accordance
with the requirements of the manufacturer and the applicable regulatory enactments.
Provide drain-pipes to prevent water accumulation on horizontal surfaces and shift water away from
electrical equipment and moving parts.
Buildings and structures subject to demolition within the borders of design works
Documentation according to Applicable Law shall be elaborated and approved by the construction
board (if relevant, also the dismantling plans) regarding buildings and structures, which are located
within the Project borders and will be demolished. The relevant construction permits and other
documentation for the performance of these works shall be acquired by the Contractor, who is also in
charge of receipt of all relevant technical conditions and meeting provisions of other documentation/
construction permit. The documentation and works of the buildings/structures to be dismantled shall
be approved according to procedures stipulated by the Contract.
At least the following structures shall be dismantled within design borders:
1. multi-storey car parking house at Prāgas Street 2 (commercial building and multi-storey car parking
„Titāniks“);
2. Entry-exit tunnel to the multi-storey car park at Prāgas Street 2 (commercial building and multi-
storey car parking „Titāniks“);
3. Other demountable buildings, structures.
145
Physical accessibility for disabled according to LBN
The recommendations on physical accessibility elaborated by the organisation APEIRONS shall be
considered and applied; the recommendations are available at - http://www.videspieejamiba.lv/.
Within the Detailed Technical Design it is intended to reconstruct all passenger platforms at the 1520
mm track gauge and provide for a height above the rail head mark 550 mm considering LVS 282
dimension requirements.
To get to passenger platforms, within the passenger station building, in-between levels of the station
building, on each platform there shall be escalators and elevators for disabled people. Passages from
one platform to another shall be provided in a way not to cross the rail tracks. Elevators in the station
building shall comply with the following requirements:
- Elevators in the oval columns (4 elevators):
o Size 3215x2000 mm;
o Speed at least 1.0 m/s;
o Capacity at least 24 people;
o Load capacity at least 1800 kg;
- Elevators in the round columns (4 elevators):
o Size 1895x2475 mm;
o Speed at least 1.0 m/s;
o Capacity at least 17 people;
o Load capacity at least 1200 kg.
One elevator per the newly constructed waiting hall shall be provided for to serve the future commercial
operators and for the purposes of maintenance works. This includes the identification of technical
parameters of the elevator and inclusion thereof in the solutions of the Detailed Technical Design.
Mandatory is the requirement to ensure audio and visual information duplication of fire and other
emergency signals.
Entrances to the station are provided for from Gogoļa Street side, from Timoteja Street, and from the
side of the Station square. After the reconstruction, exit from platforms on Dzirnavu Street shall be
preserved as an emergency exit and to provide access for emergency services.
WCs
In the design of lavatories, the statutory requirements of Latvian legal acts, including those of CoM
Regulations No. 331 of 30/06/2015 „Regulations regarding the Latvian construction standard LBN 208-
15 „Public structures““ (in Latvian: Noteikumi par Latvijas būvnormatīvu LBN 208-15 “Publiskas būves”)
shall be considered. Physical accessibility according to Latvian statutory requirements, yet not less
than what is required by the present Technical Specification shall be provided.
146
Detailed requirements as to lavatories for disabled persons
On each floor, at least one lavatory for disabled persons shall be provided.
Planning of the room shall be simple, without sharp protrusions, and shall provide for an option to use
handrails.
Minimum free width of the aperture of toilet doors shall be 900 mm.
Doors shall be possible to open at a degree of at least 90°.
Doors shall be without a threshold.
Before entrance in the toilet, there shall be free manoeuvring area of a 1400 mm diameter.
The toilet doors shall feature a special marking at 1.6 m height. Minimum size of the label is 150 x 150
mm.
The flooring shall be smooth and non-slippery.
The toilet bowl shall be freely accessible from front at 1400 mm diameter and at least from one side
at 775 mm width to the support handrails. If the toilet bowl is accessible from one side only, in such
case the wall shall feature a permanent handrail for support and a pull-up handrail on the other side at
650–700 mm height. If the toilet bowl is accessible from both sides, it shall be equipped with a pull-up
handrails for support at 650–700 mm height on both sides of the bowl.
The top edge of the toilet bowl shall be 440–470 mm.
The handrail behind the toilet bowl shall be at least 915 mm long.
Electricity and water switches shall be in contrasting colours, easily visible and usable, at 900 mm
above the floor level.
The sink tap cannot feature rotating handles; the faucet shall have a long, liftable handle or feature a
sensor.
The top edge of the sink shall be at 750–800 mm height.
Underneath the sink, at 420 mm height, no cupboards or other obstacles may be located.
The sink shall be equipped with support handrails at 750 mm height around the sink edge or on both
sides of the sink.
The mirror shall be vertically adjustable at various angles (reclination angle from the wall of at least 10
degrees) and shall be at 1.1 m height.
Toilet ceiling height up to the finishing plane shall be at least 2.30 m.
Toilets shall be equipped with an emergency button for unexpected and emergency cases.
Stairs and wheelchair ramps
The first and last step of each flight of stairs, along with the beginning and end of wheelchair ramp
gradient shall bear a contrasting 100 mm broad band (dark on light).
147
Before each flight of stairs and wheelchair ramp (both at the top and at the bottom) there shall be a
warning surface belt (with a tactile surface) of 600 mm wide.
Optimum gradient of the wheelchair ramp is 1:20 (5%), yet not steeper than 1:12 (8%). The handrails at
wheelchair ramps shall be at two different heights – 700 mm and 900 mm. To overcome larger level
differences, use elevators.
Non-slippery hard surfacing access paths at respective width and level transitions as well as access
to the building by disabled person, people in wheelchairs and with strollers shall be provided. The path
shall be at least 1.5 m wide.
Support handrails at the stairs at 0.9 m height shall be fitted. The upper and lower pole of handrails
shall be in a contrasting colour – yellow.
If sliding or automatic doors are provided, the minimum free opening shall be at least 1200 mm wide.
The glazed areas of doors and partition walls shall be marked in contrasting colour.
For the purpose of door design, consider CoM Regulations No. 331 „Regulations regarding the Latvian
Construction Standard LBN 208-15 „Publiskas būves““ of 30/06/2015 regarding physical accessibility.
Inner doors and public use outer doors shall be without thresholds or, where this conflicts with
regulations, provide for automatic-lifting thresholds. The maximum threshold height of other type of
outer door intended for public use shall amount to 15 mm.
Room signs shall be at reach level, in contrasting colours, pictograms and letters are distinct, easily
legible.
The premises shall enable for free manoeuvring area at 1400 mm diameter.
Disabled persons shall be provided with access to all storeys of the building.
The building shall be designed in a way that disabled persons might independently and comfortably
get into it, move around, stay at it and use the building according to the designed function.
Requirements for heating, ventilation and air conditioning networks
This chapter describes the design works of heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems for the
reconstruction of Riga Central Passenger Station building within the framework of this Project.
The Detailed Technical Design shall provide for central heating solutions.
The respective sections of the Detailed technical design shall be elaborated based also on the
architectural layout of the building. Connections of the public communications and the related Detailed
technical design shall be provided according to the functional needs of the premises. Location of AVK
utilities' networks and serviceable premises shall be communicated with the Employer and Engineer.
Following laws and standards shall also be used for design:
• CoM Regulation No. 529 „Construction regulations for buildings“ of 02/09/2014 (in Latvian: Ēku
būvnoteikumi);
148
• CoM Regulations No. 253 „Construction regulations for particular structures“ of 06/06/2017 (in
Latvian: Atsevišķu inženierbūvju būvnoteikumi);
• CoM Regulations No. 339 „Regulations regarding the Latvian construction standard LBN 002-
15 „Heat engineering of envelope structures of buildings“ of 30/06/2015 (in Latvian Ēku
norobežojošo konstrukciju siltumtehnika) (heat engineering requirements for the building and
cladding structures);
• CoM Regulations No. 338 „Regulations regarding the Latvian construction standard LBN 003-
15 „Construction Climatology“ of 30/06/2015 (in Latvian: Būvklimatoloģija) (calculated
temperature of cooling period);
• CoM Regulations No. 312 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 016-
15 „Construction Acoustics““ of 30/06/2015 (in Latvian: Būvakustika);
• CoM Regulations No. 333 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 201-
15 „Fire-safety of structures“ of 30/06/2015 (in Latvian: Būvju ugunsdrošība) (fire-safety
requirements);
• CoM Regulations No. 331 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 208-
15 „Public structures“ of 30/06/2015 (in Latvian: Publiskas būves);
• CoM Regulations No. 310 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 231-
15 „Heating and ventilation of residential and public buildings“ of 16/06/2015 (in Latvian:
Dzīvojamo un publisko ēku apkure un ventilācija);
• CoM Regulations No. 246 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 215-
15 „Design of seismically resistant construction structures“ of 26/05/2015 (in Latvian:
Seismiski izturīgu būvkonstrukciju projektēšana);
• LVS CR 1752:2008. Ventilation for buildings – Design criteria for the indoor environment (air
circulation indoors);
• LVS EN 13779:2007. Ventilation for non-residential buildings - Performance requirements for
ventilation and room-conditioning systems (selection of air purification filters);
• LVS EN 15239:2007. Ventilation for buildings - Energy performance of buildings - Guidelines for
inspection of ventilation systems;
• LVS EN 15240:2009 L. Ventilation for buildings - Energy performance of buildings - Guidelines
for inspection of air-conditioning systems;
• LVS EN 15241:2009 L. Ventilation for buildings - Calculation methods for energy losses due to
ventilation and infiltration in non-residential buildings;
• LVS EN 15242:2009 L. Ventilation for buildings - Calculation methods for the determination of
air flow rates in buildings including infiltration;
• LVS EN 15243:2009 L. Ventilation for buildings - Calculation of room temperatures and of load
and energy for buildings with room conditioning systems;
• LVS EN 15251:2007. Indoor environmental input parameters for design and assessment of
energy performance of buildings- addressing indoor air quality, thermal environment, lighting
and acoustics (air circulation according to pollution of premises);
• LVS EN ISO 15265:2007. Energy performance of buildings. Calculation of energy needs for
space heating and cooling using dynamic methods. General criteria and validation procedures;
149
• Law on energy-efficiency of buildings (reasonable use of energy resources);
• Directive 2009/125/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 October 2009
establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related
products;
• as well as other valid legal acts, construction standards and national standards.
While achieving the aim, the parts of the existing Riga Central Passenger Station building of small
architectural value, structures and indoors interiors shall be preserved and conserved, whenever
possible.
During elaboration of the Detailed Technical Design, the heating balance of the building shall be
calculated, the areas of technical premises and communication shafts shall be identified, the key
aggregates and system elements shall be selected providing for solutions, which enable the regulated
indoors temperature and air circulation for each individual room or group of premises.
The content of the Detailed Technical Design shall include the elaboration of the concept and
description of ventilation smoke protection system at the building according to UPP (description of fire
safety measures), which is included in the explanatory note of the Detailed Technical Design.
The Contractor shall provide that the designed systems and devices are included as complete sets and
that these provide the relevant temperature and air circulation inside of the building.
Ventilation, air conditioning and heating systems shall be designed and built according to the plans of
station building premises and the function of premises showing all elements of installations, sizes of
main cables and pipes.
The designed systems, devices and materials shall be provided as a full set featuring maximum
standard mechanical and electric equipment.
Nominal operation parameters of systems and devices shall not be lower than marginal load and
voltage fluctuations of Latvian power standards. Sufficient operation of a system shall be ensured
within its whole allowable load and voltage fluctuations range.
To attach the utilities communications, industry-manufactured fastening systems shall be provided.
The Detailed Technical Design shall include:
• all the performed calculations and technical information about the equipment used in the
Detailed Technical Design;
• plans and axonometric schemes for all systems included in the Detailed Technical Design;
• cuttings of complex engineering communications, incl. crossings of overhead wires.
To avoid public visibility of the utilities whenever possible, their placement in wall and ceiling structures,
special communication shafts, coverings and zones above suspending ceilings, if such are provided,
shall be designed.
Within technological and technical zones uncovered utilities are allowed – at ceiling and wall
structures.
150
Whenever pipes cross the wall and slab structures, they shall be covered with protective encasement.
Air ducts crossing fire-proof walls shall be equipped with fire-proof valves, which enable the same fire-
resistance as the wall to be crossed.
All fire-proof valves shall be designed according to valid laws and regulations.
Pipes and their insulation areas, where these are subject to atmospheric impact, shall be provided with
a galvanized tin or aluminium sheet covering to protect these.
Include detailed technical drawings and models of solutions of equipment and mechanism fastenings
in the Detailed Technical Design.
Insulation of air ducts shall be ensured according to statutory requirements and calculations.
Air ducts shall be equipped with noise dampers.
According to the Detailed Technical Design, condensate from devices shall be diverted into the sewage
system.
Provide corrosion protection of metal structures according to statutory requirements.
To provide for maximum protection of historic structures and interior of the building, existing
ventilation channels shall be used as air ducts as much as possible, therefore providing for their
cleaning and renewal.
Enable cleaning of all air ducts all through a year by equipping these with cleaning hatches.
Cleaning hatches shall be installed at places, where the air ducts can be cleaned reaching 8–10 m each
direction. The overhead ducts shall be industry-manufactured, solution shall be confirmed with the
Employer.
Provide an anti-smoke ventilation system according to LBN and fire-safety regulations.
Provide technical solutions for the maintenance of utilities.
Requirements for the indoors air quality according to LBN and CoM Regulations No. 359 „Occupational
safety requirements at work places“ (in Latvian: Darba aizsardzības prasības darba vietās) of
28/04/2009.
Indoors air temperature during winter period +18° C +/- 2° C.
Indoors air temperature during summer period +22° C +/- 2° C.
Ventilation systems shall be equipped with recuperators.
Server rooms shall be provided with autonomous cooling system with a 100% reserve capacity.
At places where the air ducts may create risk of increased noise, measures shall be provided to reduce
noise and vibrations to prevent the vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts and structures
of the building.
Special requirements for the ventilation system:
151
• Design the ventilation system to allow for quick elimination of toxic materials from the station
environment.
• Provide separate heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems for public zones, delivery
zones and equipment rooms.
• If according to the Detailed Technical Design the ventilation and air conditioning devices shall
be placed on the roof of the station building, provide protection from unauthorized access.
• At public zones, video surveillance of air inlet zones shall be provided.
• An option to quickly stop the devices installed within the ventilation system shall be provided.
• Filtering and purification option of the ventilation system shall be provided.
• At the main entrances of the station systems to detect toxic substances shall be provided.
Special requirements for formatting of the Detailed Technical Design:
• Depict inlet and exhaust systems from smoke and heat control systems separately in the
technical drawings.
• Depict the air ducts system of each ventilation unit separately in the technical drawings.
• In the technical drawings and diagrams, depict the air exhaust systems in blue colour, while
the air inlet systems in red colour.
Under the waiting hall of the station building, above rail tracks, provide for ventilation of smoke and
odours coming from diesel trains.
Within the Detailed Technical Design, provide only eco-clean solutions, eco-clean materials and system
components.
Ventilation and heating systems in reconstructed and newly built parts of the station building shall
function independently of the components of ventilation and heating systems in unreconstructed parts
of station building.
Non-functioning or incompletely functioning components in unreconstructed buildings shall not
interfere with the operation of the components of the reconstructed / newly built building.
Requirements for water supply and sewage networks
This chapter describes the design works of water supply and sewage systems for the reconstruction
of Riga Central Passenger Station building within the framework of this Project.
Connections and related sanitary equipment shall be provided according to the functional needs of the
premises. Location of UK utilities' networks and serviceable premises shall be communicated with the
Employer and Enigineer.
Following laws and standards are also applicable during design:
• CoM Regulations No. 338 „Regulations regarding the Latvian construction standard LBN 003-
15 „Construction Climatology““ of 30/06/2015, CoM Regulations No. 312 „Regulations
regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 016-15 „Construction Acoustics““ of
30/06/2015 (in Latvian: Būvakustika);
152
• CoM Regulations No. 331 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 208-
15 „Public structures““ of 30/06/2015 (in Latvian: Publiskas būves);
• CoM Regulations No. 339 „Regulations regarding the Latvian construction standard LBN 002-
15 „Heat engineering of envelope structures of buildings““ of 30/06/2015 (in Latvian: Ēku
norobežojošo konstrukciju siltumtehnika) (heat engineering requirements for the building and
envelope structures);
• CoM Regulations No. 333 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 201-
15 „Fire-safety of structures“ of 30/06/2015 (in Latvian: ugunsdrošības prasības) (fire-safety
requirements);
• CoM Regulations No. 332 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 221-
15 „Internal watersupply and sewage of buildings“ (in Latvian: Ēku iekšējais ūdensvads un
kanalizācija);
• CoM Regulations No. 574 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 008-
14 „Location of utilities“ of 30/09/2014 (in Latvian: Inženiertīklu izvietojums);
• Law on energy-efficiency of buildings (in Latvian: Ēku energoefektivitātes likums) (reasonable
use of energy resources);
• as well as other valid legal acts, construction standards and national standards.
While achieving the aim, the parts of the existing station building of architectural value, structures and
indoors interiors shall be preserved and conserved, whenever possible.
Based on calculations, submit the design orders to the designers of the other sections of engineering
systems, architecture and structural design.
During elaboration of the Detailed Technical Design, elaborate the planning, diagrams, scope of works
specification, explanatory note, data tables of equipment, characteristic sections and detail solutions
as regards utilities networks.
The Contractor shall provide that the designed systems and equipment are included as a full set and
deliver the function of the respective premise, as well the functionality of therein installed sanitary
devices and equipment and operation thereof.
Connection locations of sewage and waterpipes shall be confirmed with VAS “Latvijas dzelzceļš” and
other authorities, if relevant.
Pipe tracing shall be ensured according to elaborated planning and function of premises demonstrating
all elements of installations, indicating the sizes of main and other pipes, and to confirm this with the
Employer.
To attach the utilities, provide industry-manufactured fastening systems.
To hide from sight the utilities whenever possible, their placement in walls, special utilities shafts, slabs
and zones above suspended ceilings shall be designed, if such are available.
Within technological and technical zones uncovered utilities are allowed – at ceiling and wall
structures.
Whenever pipes cross the wall and slab structures, they shall be covered with protective casings.
153
Pipes and their insulation areas, where these are subject to atmospheric impact, shall be provided with
a galvanized tin or aluminium sheet covering to protect them.
To provide for maximum protection of historic structures and interior of the building, existing utilities
shafts shall be used whenever possible.
Anti-dew measures for the pipes shall be provided according to LBN.
The Detailed Technical Design shall include:
1. All calculations made and technical information about the equipment included in the Detailed
Technical Design.
2. Plans and axonometric diagrams for all systems included in the Detailed Technical Design.
3. Sections of complex intersection areas of utilities.
4. Relevant detailed technical drawings and models of structures at locations of utilities.
Within the Detailed Technical Design only eco-friendly solutions, eco-clean materials and system
components shall be provided.
Water supply and sewerage systems in reconstructed and newly built parts of the station buildings
shall operate independently of the components of water supply and sewerage systems in
unreconstructed parts of the station buildings. Non-functioning or incompletely functioning
components in unreconstructed buildings shall not interfere with the operation of the components of
the reconstructed / newly built building.
Fire-safety requirements and description of fire safety measures (UPP)
The description of fire safety measures (UPP) shall include at least the following chapters:
- Description of fire safety measures during operations period of the building;
- Fire-safety parameters of the building;
- Fire safety solutions in the master plan (locations of building and civil structures, location of
external fire fighting systems, provisions of fire fighting and rescue works, etc.);
- Fire safety requirements on building structures and planning solutions (e.g., assessment of fire
risks, description of areas subject to fire hazards, fire-resistance classes of buildings and civil
structures, requirements on load-bearing and partitioning structures, their fire-resistance limits
and fire reaction classes, requirements to finishing of building structures, fire load of premises,
smoke protection solutions, requirements on fire and smoke spread in case of fire, special fire
safety measures, considering the specifics of buildings and civil structures, etc.);
- Emergency evacuation solutions (locations of evacuation plans, signs/markings of evacuation
ways and exits, etc.);
- Fire protection system solutions (fire detection and alarm signalling system, permanent fire
extinction system, fire announcement system, smoke and heat control systems, etc.);
- Provision of uninterrupted power supply for fire protection systems and smoke-protection
systems, emergency and evacuation lighting;
- Envisaged solutions for fire safety of utilities;
154
- Systems of manual fire extinction equipment (equipping premises with fire extinguishers and
other fire safety equipment);
- And other chapters according to statutory requirements.
At the elaboration of the Detailed Technical Design, fire-safety regulations of the following legal acts
shall be met:
- Law on fire-safety and fire extinguishing (in Latvian: Ugunsdrošības un ugunsdzēsības likums);
- CoM Regulations No. 238 „Fire-safety regulations“ (in Latvian: Ugunsdrošības noteikumi);
- CoM Regulations No. 333 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 201-
15 „Fire-safety of structures“ (in Latvian: Būvju ugunsdrošība).
The building shall be designed and built in a way to ensure that in case of fire or any other emergency
the building would preserve its static bearing capacity, would limit the fire and smoke spread within
building, would not impose a risk of fire spreading to nearby buildings, the people inside the building
might quickly leave it or be evacuated, would not create threats to environment due to emergency and
would not create unforeseeable threats to the operation of fire-fighting and rescue services, and would
provide for an opportunity to efficiently carry out fire-fighting and rescue measures.
The design of fire-safety systems shall be carried out according to valid standards regarding design
and operation of fire-fighting signalling systems, i.e. LVS CEN/TS 54-14:2004b and the CoM
Regulations No. 333 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 201-15 „Fire-safety
of structures“ (in Latvian: Būvju ugunsdrošība).
The automated fire-extinguishing system of the building shall be equipped with a sprinkler or drencher
system, assessing the fire hazard risk of each room or zone.
At places, which cannot be equipped with the automated fire-extinguishing system, indoors fire-
extinguishing taps with hoses shall be provided.
Joint operation of the existing and designed fire-detection and alert system shall be ensured.
Whenever possible, avoid mechanical smoke and heat extraction systems. The smoke and heat
extraction system shall be connected to the building management system (BMS).
Transmission of notifications (alert, damage, error,m etc.) of the condition of the fire-safety system to
external devices (SMS, e-mail, etc.) to previously determined persons in charge shall be enabled.
Energy-efficiency requirements
At the elaboration of the Detailed Technical Design, energy-efficiency and ecodesign requirements of
the following legal acts shall be met:
- Law on energy-efficiency of buildings (in Latvian: Ēku energoefektivitātes likums);
- CoM Regulations No. 338 „Regulations regarding the Latvian construction standard LBN 003-
15 „Construction Climatology““ of 30/06/2015 (in Latvian: Būvklimatoloģija);
- CoM Regulations No. 348 „Calculation method to calculate the energy-efficiency of a building“
(in Latvian: Ēkas energoefektivitātes aprēķina metode);
155
- CoM Regulations No. 383 „Regulation on the energy certificate procedure of buildings“ (in
Latvian: Noteikumi par ēku energosertifikāciju);
- CoM Regulations No. 382 „Regulations regarding independent experts in the field of energy-
efficiency of buildings“ (in Latvian: Noteikumi par neatkarīgiem ekspertiem ēku
energoefektivitātes jomā);
- CoM Regulations No. 339 „Regulations regarding the Latvian construction standard LBN 002-
15 „Heat engineering of envelope structures of buildings““ of 30/06/2015 (in Latvian: Ēku
norobežojošo konstrukciju siltumtehnika);
- Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council 2009/125/EK (to determine ecodesign
requirements for energy-related products).
At the elaboration of the Detailed Technical Design, analysis of the probable thermal bridge areas and
elaboration of solutions to prevent these shall be carried out.
At the elaboration of energy-efficiency solutions for windows, doors and glass façades, detailed
installation design drawings shall be developed.
At the places where constructive elements are connected, insulations and hermetic sealings to
increase the airtight parameters of the building as much as possible shall be provided.
A temporary energo-certificate for the building shall be elaborated for each construction round of the
building, considering each construction round might separately be put into service providing full
functionality.
Repeated use of heat energy (recuperation) for the building shall be provided.
At each of the elements, the best justified of two – passive and active energy-efficiency – for the
energy-efficiency solutions shall be chosen:
• Passive – calculate the energy-efficiency parameters of installed materials;
• Active – to ensure control and monitoring of the systems built into the building by enabling
efficient use of the energy resources of the building.
Cost analysis of the building’s life-cycle, elaborated feasibility studies
The life-cycle calculation of the building shall be done according to cost-optimal levels according to
Regulation (EU) No. 244/2012, its Guidelines and EU legal acts, standards and information sources
referred to in this document, and taking Latvian legal acts on energy-efficiency and construction into
account. If for the fulfilment of the work assignment the Regulation (EU) No. 244/2012 or its Guidelines
define optional solutions, the Contractor shall consider the optional solutions, which in turn shall be
confirmed with the Employer.
Cost analysis of the buildings' life-cycle shall be carried out for the following positions:
- Design and construction costs' efficiency during the life-cycle of the building for 10 years;
- Cost analysis of the devices' and materials' life-cycle – costs of maintenance and
replacements;
- Heat and power energy costs for a period of 10 years.
156
Acoustics. Requirements as regards provision of comfortable acoustics
The Detailed Technical Design shall be elaborated according to CoM Regulations No. 312 „Regulations
regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 016-15 „Construction Acoustics““ (in Latvian:
Būvakustika).
At the selection of indoors finishing materials and the respective works, acoustics parameters shall be
considered. As even as possible sound field shall be provided indoors, avoiding sound accumulation
areas.
Acoustic calculation shall be carried out and compatibility of acoustic comfort at least according to
requirements of LBN 016-15 shall be ensured.
Acoustic discomfort zones in terms of outdoors noises shall be identified, and all possible measures
to reduce the acoustic discomfort shall be taken.
At the selection of anti-noise screens and carrying out other anti-noise measures, if such are necessary,
the overall image of the building and provision of the functionality of the building shall be considered.
In acoustics calculations, noises by the voice notification system and trains shall be considered.
Requirements as regards sustainable maintenance solutions
A building management system (BMS) shall be developed and connected to utilities, fire-fighting and
security systems to the possible extent, thus enabling a more efficient management of the building.
Rainwater collection solutions shall be provided, by, if necessary, creating a respective terrain relief in
the territory.
Considering the environment and climatic conditions, respective and low-maintenance greenery shall
be provided. One-year plants, plants and their cultivation types, which need permanent maintenance
shall be avoided.
The railway embankment slopes shall be reinforced by lawn. A respective reinforcement layer and
mixture of lawns seeds to create a stable root system and avoid denudation shall be chosen.
A mechanical system to wash the roof, roof windows of waiting hall, or mechanical access to undertake
the washing shall be provided.
4.6. Requirements on design of bridges and overpasses
4.6.1. Introduction
This chapter describes the to-be-newly constructed and reconstructed bridges and overpasses within
the Project. Each individual structure is identified by its function (e.g., Lāčplēša Street overpass) and
by a title (e.g., P-01).
Structures addressed within this chapter:
1. Lāčplēša Street overpass (P-01);
157
2. Dzirnavu Street overpass (P-02);
3. Dzirnavu Street overpass of Rail Baltica (P-03);
4. Overpass from Timoteja Street till Tunnel B (P-04);
5. Overpass from Timoteja Street till Gogoļa Street (P-05);
6. Gogoļa Street overpass (P-06);
7. Overpass from Gogoļa Street till Kungu Street (P-07);
8. Overpass from Prāgas Street till Kungu Street (P-08);
9. Bridge over Daugava (P-09);
10. Bridge over Mazā Daugava (P-10).
All structures are reviewed by the order of the railway route chainage. Supports of all structures are
numbered in ascending order by chainage, starting with the support No. 0; spans are numbered in
ascending order by chainage, starting with span No.1.
Location of supports of the structures is depicted according the sketch design materials on
architecture. The Contractor is entitled to undertake relevant changes for location of supports and span
diagrams of all overpasses, if such need is established during the design process, such changes shall
be approved through the procedure defined in the Contract. Location of supports of bridges (structures
P-09 and P-10) shall overlap with that of the existing railway bridges over Daugava.
A technical layout regarding location of structures within the territory plan is attached as Annex 25.
Existing technical documentation of structures see attached as Annex 1.
4.6.2. Methodology
Documents attached: Building Design in the Minimum Composition (Annex 12), construction permits
(Annex 6) and EIA final report (Annex 5), as well as technical conditions and special conditions received.
The applicable Technical specification for interoperability relating to the rail system in the European
Union or parts thereof are publicly available on the official website of the European Union (eur-
lex.europa.eu).
As regards reconstruction of underground communications, the regulations of binding Technical
conditions shall be considered.
Actions to be carried out by the Contractor
Within the framework of Contract fulfilment, the Contractor shall individually and in due time retrieve
from archives available information and documentation of existing overpasses, bridges and technical
documentation of other structures possibly affected by the Works, where such documentation might
be needed to perform the Works. The Employer shall not be held liable for the accuracy or study outputs
of the studies as indicated in the appendices of the present technical specifications (e.g., Annex 1,
Annex 14, etc.), and the Contractor shall also consider that the outputs of historical studies are not a
guarantee of similar study outputs nowadays.
158
The requirements of technical conditions shall be updated by the Contractor considering the expiry date of technical conditions. The Contractor shall request technical conditions relevant for the design works, and shall receive these from authorities, from which these have not been received, but which are relevant for the works.
The Contractor shall identify all legal and natural entities, the interests of which are affected by
solutions of Detailed technical design, construction documentation to be elaborated within the Works
and work organisation or work performance projects, shall clarify the measures to be undertaken
during design and work performance. Each work (measure), which is deemed a compensation
regarding damages caused to third parties, if such occur, shall be communicated in due time according
to the Contract, before the solution in the Detailed technical design or other documentation is
elaborated.
The survey and study works (including material verification) shall be carried out at a scope, which
allows for the Contractor (and its employed developer of the detailed technical design) to take
responsibility for the justification of Design solutions and their compatibility to design standards,
regulations and specifications.
As part of studies, structures shall be inspected on-site and a respective technical statement of on-site
inspection shall be drawn up according to construction standard LBN 405-15 “Technical inspection of
structures” (in Latvian: Būvju tehniskā apsekošana).
As part of an engineering survey, for the design of newly built, reconstructable and renewable
structures, the requirements of the construction standard LBN 005-15 „Provisions of engineering
surveys in construction“ (in Latvian: Inženierizpētes noteikumi būvniecībā) shall be met.
Before design works of existing overpasses, a technical on-site inspection shall be carried out, which
shall be done considering the existing technical project documentation of the structure.
Conditions imposed by the Employer
The Employer’s requirements include a set of minimum measures. At the elaboration of the Detailed
Technical Design, in case of need, the Contractor shall carry out additional measures to extend the
content of the Detailed Technical Design by applying its professional and practical knowledge.
The Detailed Technical Design among other things also shall be designed according to the following:
- CoM 500 „General Construction Regulations“;
- CoM 530 „Railway Construction Regulations“;
- LVS EN 1990 to LVS EN 1997 and respective substandard requirements;
- Valid “Bridge specifications”, LVC (Latvijas Valsts ceļi) manual;
- Valid „Road specifications“, LVC manual, in cases, where the construction or reconstruction of a
bridge or overpass includes also the reconstruction or construction of streets infrastructure;
- CoM Regulations No. 421 „Regulations regarding equipping work places on roads“ (in Latvian:
Noteikumi par darba vietu aprīkošanu uz ceļiem);
- CoM Regulations No. 724 „Technical operation regulations of railway“;
- LVS 94 „Road restraint systems“;
159
- Rail Baltica Design Guidelines (Annex 9);
- as well as other valid legal acts, construction standards and national standards.
The relevant engineering surveys shall be carried out according to LBN 005-15 “Engineering survey
regulations in construction” and LVS EN 1997.
To model the effects of rolling stock within the Detailed Technical Design, the load model LM71 of LVS
EN 1991-2, α = 1.0 shall be applied, except for cases where the 1520 mm gauge infrastructure is
required otherwise according to LDz technical conditions.
Within the Detailed Technical Design, the following shall be considered / provided for and solutions
offered:
- Location of the emergency vehicles access and passenger evacuation routes on bridges and
overpasses according to solutions of Annex 10, also connection to nearby street network
according to construction permits and requirements of technical conditions shall be ensured (see
Annex 6).
- Traffic organisation during construction works, providing a feasibility comparison of the solutions
for traffic flows on bypass roads or by ensuring traffic at the object on one or more lanes, including
for the organisation of vehicular public transport according to requirements of the CoM
Regulations No.634 „Procedures for the organisation of public transport within route network“ (in
Latvian: Sabiedriskā transporta pakalpojumu organizēšanas kārtība maršrutu tīklā) of 13/07/2010;
- Issues regarding reconstruction / construction and crossing of utilities;
- The Detailed Technical Design shall include and assessment on the use of the structure during
construction works according to Article 21(3) of the Construction Law (in Latvian: Būvniecības
likums).
If according to the Detailed Technical Design due to construction works the points of local geodesic
network may be damaged or destroyed, the respective section of the Detailed Technical Design shall
include the costs for the establishment of new ones and improvement of local geodesic network
according to conditions imposed by Riga City Construction Board.
If according to the Detailed Technical Design due to construction works the points of national geodesic
network shall be damaged or destroyed, the planned construction activity shall be confirmed with the
Latvian Geospatial Information Agency (in Latvian: Latvijas Ģeotelpiskās informācijas aģentūra) and
the respective section of the Detailed Technical Design shall include a reference to the points of the
national geodesic network to be renewed, while the BOQ – costs of installation thereof.
The following shall be considered while elaborating the Bill of Quantities:
1) Each work position on the BOQ shall contain a reference to the specification volume of the
respective section of Detailed Technical Design;
2) The specifications volume shall contain a description of each construction work to be
undertaken and it shall be applied requirements based on the format and content of the valid
„Roads Specifications“ and „Bridge Specifications 2005“ (by LVC) excluding any conflicting or
twofold interpretation of wordings;
160
3) If any of the works to be undertaken within this document or the valid „Roads Specifications“
(in Latvian: Ceļu specifikācijas) and „Bridge Specifications 2005“ (in Latvian: Tiltu specifikācijas
2005) lacks sufficient description, additional specifications shall be elaborated in a similar
format.
Among other things the Detailed Technical Design also shall be elaborated according to legal acts and good industry practice in a way to make it possible:
- to determine the compatibility of the future structure to legal acts and other imposed
requirements;
- to undertake construction expert-examination of the Detailed Technical Design;
- to calculate construction costs with a precision determined by the Engineer;
- to provide the construction contractors with sufficient information to carry out the construction
works.
Content of Detailed Technical Design
The content of the Detailed Technical Design shall be developed according to CoM Regulations No.
281 „Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 202-15 “Content and Drawing up
of Construction Design”“ of 09/06/2015. Formatting of technical drawings of Detailed Technical Design
(tehniskais projekts) shall be done according to the professional standard by Latvian Association of
structural designers LBPA-PS-001:2016 „Requirements as regards content and formatting of
construction structures' project“.
The Detailed Technical Design shall be elaborated according to requirements as regards its content
and methodical BIM requirements under chapter 3.11.
The Detailed Technical Design shall be elaborated according to requirements of statutory
requirements, construction permit conditions and Contract requirements.
Ensure that the graphic and text information does not overlap or split between several technical
drawings.
4.6.3. Common requirements for bridges and overpasses
The following requirements also shall be met at the elaboration of Detailed Technical Design for bridges
and overpasses:
1. The supports of all railway bridges and overpasses shall be made of monolith reinforced concrete.
Span structures shall be made of monolith reinforced concrete and, whenever possible, as multi-
span girders minimizing the number of expansion joints as much as possible. All span structures
and elements thereof shall be monolith and concreted on site. Use of precast reinforced concrete
elements is allowed only at places, where it has a significant contribution to progress of the Project,
for example, where it reduces the time of traffic restrictions imposed on urban infrastructure. The
use of precast elements is subject to an individual approval by the Employer and the Engineer. To
use such elements, the Contractor shall provide an assuring and detailed solution to ensure the
same longevity as in the case of a monolith structure.
161
2. The buildings envisaged for 1520 mm gauge tracks shall be planned and built as structures
separate from structures intended for 1435 mm gauge tracks. Thus, the performance of Works
regarding the structures intended for 1520 mm gauge tracks and structures intended for 1435 mm
gauge tracks shall be done in a way, so that after the structures are commissioned, the structures
intended for 1520 mm gauge tracks may be transferred in property of a third party assigned by the
Employer, e.g., VAS Latvijas Dzelzceļš, while structures intended for 1435 mm gauge tracks – to a
third party assigned by the Employer, e.g., Ministry of Transport. Thus, the Design solutions shall
be adjusted to transfer the structures to several different owners.
3. All railway bridges and overpasses shall be equipped with rainwater collection systems. The
collected rainwaters shall be diverted into urban sewage system or settling filtrations wells. The
rainwaters shall be prevented from getting into the clearance under the overpasses.
4. Supports of all overpasses over street carriageways and sidewalks shall feature an increased
resistance to anti-icing salt effect.
5. Underneath all overpasses relevant infrastructure and improvement elements shall be placed to
enable the functioning of urban environment, including illumination facilities, traffic lights, etc.
6. The carriageways of all railway bridges and overpasses shall be constructed on granite gravel
ballast. Minimum depth of the ballast layer is 350 mm, measuring between the span structure and
railway sleeper foot. Detailed requirements on ballast, see in Chapter 5.5.15.
7. The traffic clearance under all newly constructed/reconstructed overpasses over the streets shall
be of at least the same dimensions as in the case of existing ones. The navigation clearance shall
be of at least the same height as under the existing railway bridge over Daugava.
8. All bridges and overpasses shall be provided with an anti-graffiti covering and fencing against
vandalism at places of public access.
9. The publicly visible concrete surfaces of all bridges and overpasses must comply with at least
Class B of NBN B15-007.
10. The geometry of all structures intended for 1435 mm gauge tracks shall be allowed reasonable and
feasible deviations for the use of superstructure of rail tracks, contact line networks and signalling
systems' components produced by various manufacturers. The structure may not serve as a
limiting factor at the choice of systems' manufacturers.
11. At places, where according to sketch design materials, future developments of the bus terminal,
car parking or premises of other functions are envisaged, the geometry of buildings shall be
adjusted to the development of such premises. At the sketch drawings level in the Contractor's
Detailed Technical Design it shall be demonstrated that such option is considered.
12. All bridges and overpasses (including their visual design) shall be designed according to the sketch
design R2I0G1A6 solutions.
13. Bearings used in all railway bridges and overpasses shall be of the same envisaged lifetime as the
structure itself.
14. Waterproofing materials and bearings shall demonstrate a successful use in railway overpasses or
bridges elsewhere in countries of European Economic Area or Switzerland and in railway
overpasses or bridges under similar weather conditions. Contractor upon offering particular
waterproofing materials shall submit a positive review of using the material issued by an operator
of the reference structure.
162
15. All railway bridges and overpasses between the overpass and embankment shall feature a
carriageway structure of flexible stiffness with a transition slab or a different solution, which
reduces impulse-type effects on the overpass structures.
16. On all bridges and overpasses counter-rails or other, similar systems, which in case of rail fracture
or in case of rolling stock accident keep the rolling stock on the overpass, shall be provided.
17. As for all bridges and overpasses, before these are put into permanent or temporary service, the
Contractor shall at its own cost undertake load tests of the structure, characteristic of the most
unfavourable load situation. During the test, the Contractor shall register deformations of the
structure, compare these with what was envisaged in the Detailed Technical Desin and shall draft
a verification protocol, which is submitted for approval to the Employer and the Engineer.
18. As for all bridges and overpasses, technical maintenance sidewalks along rail tracks and other
access and maintenance devices according to bridge and overpass standard cross-sections
stipulated by the Design Guidelines shall be ensured.
4.6.4. Bridges and overpasses to be built within the Project
Lāčplēša street overpass (P-01)
Present situation
At present, there is a reinforced concrete overpass on reinforced concrete supports over Lāčplēša
Street. One span of the overpass features 22 beams, however without particularly distinct span
structures. Five railway tracks are accommodated on the overpass. The overpass cones are affixed
with concrete slabs; at the bottom part of cones there are retention walls made of reinforced concrete.
Situation to be designed
Lāčplēša Street crossing of the 1435 mm gauge infrastructure needs a new railway overpass to be
built next to the existing one.
Requirements for overpass P-01:
1) The overpass shall be a two track crossing of Rail Baltica over Lāčplēša Street.
2) Distance between front walls of supports, which define the dimensions of the clearance
underneath it, shall be of at least the same size as the existing overpass.
3) The traffic clearance under the overpass shall be of at least the same size as the existing
overpass.
4) During construction and operation period of the overpass, the impact on the existing overpass
shall be reduced to a minimum. Construction works of the overpass may not cause depression
or deformation of the existing overpass.
5) Location of the overpass and rail tracks on the overpass shall comply with the construction
intention „Rail Baltica Riga railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central Passenger
Station design and build project”.
6) Underneath the overpass, relevant utilities, lighting and improvements for pedestrians shall be
located.
163
Dzirnavu Street overpass (P-02)
Present situation
At present, there is a reinforced concrete overpass on reinforced concrete supports over Dzirnavu
Street. The overpass features 4 spans with 12 individual span structures, between which the passenger
platform slabs and descent pavilions are placed. 2-girder span structures with 2 ribs for each girder
are places under Track 1, 2 and 9 – 12, while under Track 3 – 8 there are monoblock girders. 12 rail
tracks are accommodated on the overpass. The overpass cones are affixed with concrete slabs; at the
bottom part of cones there are retention walls made of reinforced concrete. Inside the overpass
support No 0, there are ascents to the platforms.
Under the overpass, there is a stairwell to enable passengers getting to the platforms.
Situation to be designed
As for the 1520 mm gauge Dzirnavu Street crossing, a new railway overpass instead of the existing
one shall be built.
Requirements for overpass P-02:
1. The overpass shall enable crossing of ten 1520 mm gauge tracks over Dzirnavu Street.
2. The existing overpass and descents of adjoining passenger platforms shall be completely
dismantled and a new overpass shall be built.
3. The overpass shall be independent of the structure P-03.
4. The overpass shall be made of a monolith reinforced concrete and in terms of architecture it shall
be adjusted to structures P-03 and P-04.
5. The traffic clearance under the bridge shall be of at least the same size as the existing overpass.
6. Nearby the overpass, emergency and rescue service accesses from passenger platforms to
Dzirnavu Street shall be provided.
7. Location of the overpass and rail tracks on the overpass shall comply with the documentation „Rail
Baltica Riga railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central Passenger Station design and
build project”.
8. Underneath the overpass, relevant utilities, lighting and improvements for pedestrians, public
transport and station shall be located.
Dzirnavu Street overpass of Rail Baltica (P-03)
Present situation
The overpass shall be built in the place, where the railway embankment slope is currently mostly
located. The overpass crosses Dzirnavu Street in parallel to the 1520 mm gauge railway overpass. Next
to the junction of Dzirnavu and Turgeņeva Streets, there is a transformer sub-station No. 0171, which
is located in a single-storey brick building.
164
In-between Dzirnavu Street and Elizabetes/Timoteja Street there is an public asphalted parking lot.
Within the red lines of Timoteja Street, as well as in the section between Gogoļa and Timoteja Street,
in the railway embankment there is an underground bomb shelter, and next to it is a guarded service
parking.
Situation to be designed
For the Rail Baltica rail track crossing over Dzirnavu Street a new, uninterrupted railway overpass shall
be built.
Requirements for overpass P-03:
1. The overpass shall enable an uninterrupted crossing of two Rail Baltica tracks over Dzirnavu Street.
2. The transformer substation next to Dzirnavu Street shall be preserved, if possible.
3. The bomb shelter located between Timoteja Street and Tunnel A of Riga Central Passenger Station
shall be demolished and the construction pit shall be filled up.
4. The overpass shall be independent from structure P-02 and in terms of architecture it shall be
adjusted to structures P-02 and P-05.
5. Location of the overpass and rail tracks on the overpass shall comply with the documentation of
Construction Intention „Rail Baltica Riga railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central
Passenger Station design and build project”.
6. Underneath the overpass, relevant utilities, lighting and improvements for pedestrians, public
transport and station shall be located.
Overpass from Timoteja Street till Tunnel B (P-04)
Present situation
In the section from Timoteja Street to Tunnel A of Riga Central Passenger Station there is a railway
embankment at present, which accommodates 10 through tracks and 2 dead-ends, along with the
relevant railway infrastructure to enable operation of the station, including the catenary system, its
supports, signalling and micro-processor centralisation systems. At the foot of the northern slope of
embankment, there is a construction site, whereas on the southern side the future site of overpass
borders with the overpass P-05.
Underneath the place of the envisaged overpass, there are the Tunnel A an B of Riga Central Passenger
Station almost in their entire length.
Situation to be designed
A new, uninterrupted railway overpass for the 1520 mm track crossing over Timoteja Street and
pedestrian tunnels of Riga Central Passenger Station shall be built.
Requirements for overpass P-04:
1. The overpass shall enable an uninterrupted crossing of ten 1520 mm gauge tracks over Timoteja
Street and the merged pedestrian tunnels of Riga Central Passenger Station.
165
2. The bomb shelter located between Timoteja Street and Tunnel A of Riga Central Passenger Station
shall be demolished and the construction pit shall be filled up.
3. The overpass shall be independent from structure P-03 and in terms of architecture it shall be
adjusted to structures P-03 and P-05.
4. The merged Tunnel A and B of the Riga Central Passenger Station under the overpass shall be
equipped according to the requirements of the present document. Inside the tunnel, relevant
communications, lighting and facilitation for pedestrians and commercial premises shall be
located.
5. Part of the future bus terminal premises as well as the reserved area for car parking and
commercial premises are located between Timoteja Street and the pedestrian tunnel of the station,
and these shall be ensured safe and convenient access by pedestrians for the entire length of the
section.
6. Passenger platforms and their facilities shall be located on passenger platforms according to
requirements of the present document.
7. Location of the overpass and rail tracks on the overpass shall comply with the application „Rail
Baltica Riga railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central Passenger Station design and
build project”.
8. Underneath the overpass, relevant utilities, lighting and improvements for pedestrians and station
shall be located.
Overpass from Timoteja Street till Gogoļa Street (P-05)
Present situation
The overpass shall be built in the place, where mostly the railway embankment slope is currently
located.
Within the red lines of Timoteja Street, as well as in the section between Gogoļa and Timoteja Street,
in the railway embankment there is an underground bomb shelter, and next to it there is a guarded
service parking.
In front of the pedestrian tunnel of the station (southern square of the station) there is a greened square
for pedestrians. At present, at the place reserved for the overpass there are entrances/exits of Tunnels
A and B featuring a portal wall of tunnel entrances. After Tunnels A and B, direction Gogoļa Street,
instead of the overpass there is a railway embankment slope, at the foot of which there are trade kiosks
to be demolished.
Situation to be designed
A new, uninterrupted railway overpass for Rail Baltica track crossing over Timoteja Street and
pedestrian tunnels of Riga Central Passenger Station shall be built. The overpass crosses Timoteja
Street in parallel to the 1520 mm gauge railway overpass.
Requirements for overpass P-05:
166
1. The overpass shall enable an uninterrupted crossing of two Rail Baltica tracks over Timoteja Street
and pedestrian tunnels of Riga Central Passenger Station.
2. The bomb shelter located between Timoteja Street and Tunnel A of Riga Central Passenger Station
shall be demolished and the construction pit shall be filled up.
3. The overpass shall be independent from structure P-04 and in terms of architecture it shall be
adjusted to structures P-04 and P-03.
4. The merged Tunnel A and B of the Riga Central Passenger Station under the overpass shall be
equipped according to the requirements of Chapter 4.5 and other requirements contained within
the present document. Inside the tunnel, relevant communications, lighting and facilitation for
pedestrians and commercial premises shall be located.
5. Part of the future bus terminal premises as well as the reserved area for car parking and
commercial premises are located between Timoteja Street and the pedestrian tunnel of the station,
and these shall be ensured safe and convenient access by pedestrians for the entire length of the
section.
6. Location of the overpass and rail tracks on the overpass shall comply with the application „Rail
Baltica Riga railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central Passenger Station design and
build project”.
7. Underneath the overpass, relevant utilities, lighting and improvements for pedestrians and station
shall be located.
Gogoļa Street overpass (P-06)
Present situation
Gogoļa Street railway overpass is a four-span monolith reinforced concrete frame-like structure with
eight individual sections in longitudinal direction of the structure. The span structure is made of a
continuous non-prestressed reinforced concrete slab, which is sting-joined with middle supports. The
span structure demonstrated no cracks or openings, or other damages, which might be due to
operational loads or might point at insufficient bearing capacity of the structure elements. Span
structures show no distinct concrete crumbling or corrosion spots.
Span structures, in the overpass facades, show a broad network of cracks of small opening width and
white salt efflorescences. The sidewalk concrete of the overpass demonstrates crumblings at some
places, however without significant detrition revealing reinforcement bars. Corrosion damages are not
visible. Nearby longitudinal joints, there are fillings of waterproofing injections, and through these salt
efflorescences are visible at some spots. The longitudinal joints are filled with polyurethane-based
synthetic material.
All overpass supports are made of monolith reinforced concrete. Supports 0 and 4 feature retrogressive
bank retention walls, while supports 1, 2 and 3 are monolithically merged with the span structure of the
overpass.
At both ends of the structure, crack network is visible at many places, or individual cracks without a
particular network, and salt efflorescences coming out of these.
167
The middle supports and span structure of the structure is in longitudinal direction split into 8 individual
segments. Joints between the segments are filled with rubber filling. The lower edges of the middle
supports feature steel profile string pieces, which at some places demonstrate corrosion-induced
damages.
Situation to be designed
The existing Gogoļa Street overpass shall be renewed and partly demolished for the 1435 mm and
1520 mm gauge crossing over Gogoļa Street, and next to it a new railway overpass shall be built.
Requirements imposed on overpass P-05:
1. The overpass shall be uninterrupted and shall accommodate eight 1520 mm and three Rail Baltica
gauge tracks over Gogoļa Street. The existing Gogoļa Street overpass shall be renewed
waterproofing and other structures according to technical conditions issued by LDz. Under Rail
Baltica tracks, the existing overpass shall be dismantled and a new and independent structure next
to it shall be built.
2. The architecture of the new overpass shall visually match and be similar to the architecture of the
existing overpass. The span length shall be equal. See Chapter 4.4 and technical conditions of
15/01/2018 issued by State Inspection for Heritage Protection.
3. During construction and operation period of the overpass, the impact on the existing overpass shall
be reduced to a minimum. Construction works of the overpass may not cause subsidence,
settlement or deformation of the existing overpass.
4. The length of the newly built overpass spans shall match with the length of the existing overpass
spans.
5. The rail head marks of the exisating and newly built overpass shall match.
6. On the extended part of the overpass, on the side of Central Market, an access for emergency and
maintenance vehicles shall be provided. The ramp shall be in parallel to the tracks. The ramp shall
be strengthened with a retention wall featuring greening or other architectural elements suitable
for the urban environment, which would make it fit in with the nearby facilitation. See the ramp
alignment in Annex 25 and 26.
7. Underneath the overpass, relevant utilities, lighting and improvements for pedestrians, public
transport and station shall be located.
8. On the newly built overpass part, passenger platforms and their improvements according to Rail
Baltica Design Guidelines and the requirements of annexes of the present document shall be
located.
9. Location of the overpass and rail tracks on the overpass shall comply with the construction
intention „Rail Baltica Riga railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central Passenger
Station design and build project”.
10. The technical solutions of the overpass shall comply with the requirements contained within the
chapter „Special requirements imposed on bridges and overpasses“.
168
Overpass from Gogoļa Street till Kungu Street (P-07)
Present situation
The overpass shall be built in parallel to the exsiting 1520 mm gauge track infrastructure. After crossing
Gogoļa Street, instead of the overpass there is the standing dead-end of LDz track geometry car and
its servicing infrastructure, which is located on the embankment. Along one side of the embankment
vehicular access to Riga Central Passenger Station tracks is organized. The embankment borders with
the underground entrance to multi-storey car parking (to be demolished), onto which trade kiosks (to
be demolished) are located.
At the place, where the overpass crosses the Pilsētas kanāls (City Channel), there is a single-span
bridge with two car traffic lanes. Next to it, on a brick culvert, there is the 1520 mm gauge infrastructure.
Underneath it is a steel pedestrian bridge, which leads to the underground car parking of the shopping
centre Stockmann.
After crossing the City Channel, at the foot of the railway embankment is a commercial building and
multi-storey car parking „Titāniks“, which shall be demolished, and an elevator of the building located
in a separate metal structure. Next to „Titāniks“, there is the Prāgas Street, which is used for tram, car
and pedestrian needs. The 1520 mm gauge tracks cross Prāgas Street on a steel/concrete overpass
on reinforced concrete supports. A tram stop is next to the overpass.
On the western side of Prāgas Street, in the slope of the railway embankment is the Riga International
Bus Terminal building, which shall be preserved and its functionality shall be preserved during
construction. On the western side of the building, there are the bus platforms, which shall be
dismantled to enable the construction of the overpass. The railway embankment in the platform area
is strengthened with a retention wall. The square between the railway embankment and the city channel
is used by the buses for standing, turning around and for the passenger to get on/off the buses.
Situation to be designed
A new, uninterrupted railway overpass accommodating 1435mm gauge tracks shall be built in the
section from Gogoļa Street till Kungu Street. The overpass starts at the newly built Gogoļa Street
overpass. The overpass ends on the embankment between Maskavas and Kungu streets.
Requirements for overpass P-07:
1. The overpass shall be built as an uninterrupted crossing in the section from city channel to Kungu
Street to accommodate two (at some places – three) Rail Baltica tracks.
2. To construct the overpass, the multi-storey car parking shall be demolished, the existing railway
embankment slope shall be partly levelled, the passenger platforms at bus terminal shall be
dismantled, and overpasses over Prāgas Street and city channel shall be built.
3. To cross the city channel, the existing overpass over city channel shall be partly reconstructed and
next to it the overpass P-07 shall be built. At the merging point of the overpasses, the leaking of
rainwaters or gravel ballast, or any other pollution under the bridge shall be prevented.
169
4. In the section from city channel to Prāgas Street, for the purposes of building the overpass the
commercial building and multi-storey car parking „Titāniks“ shall be disconnected from public
utilities networks, the structure shall be demolished and the opened territory shall be facilitated
creating a greened urban infrastructure for pedestrians. The Contractor is in charge to receive the
respective building permit from the construction board to carry out these works, meeting the design
and construction works' conditions and getting relevant approvals. The existing road traffic bridge
over city channel shall be adjusted according to the solutions of Detailed Technical Design for the
purposes of emergency transport access and it shall be renovated. Where needed, the existing
railway embankment slope shall be levelled and the residual embankment shall be strengthened
with a retention wall.
5. To construct the Prāgas Street overpass, part of the existing railway overpass over Prāgas Street
shall be dismantled. The road traffic clearance under the overpass shall be of at least the same
height as the existing one. The traffic clearance on Prāgas Street shall be of at least the same size
as the existing overpass. Road traffic, public transport and pedestrian traffic shall be ensured under
the overpass.
6. In the section from Prāgas Street to Maskavas Street the Riga International Bus Terminal building
shall be preserved. Before and after the construction works, the Contractor and the Emplyer shall
jointly inspect the building to establish for any defects.
7. In the section from Prāgas Street to Maskavas Street the passenger platforms at the bus terminal
and their coverings shall be dismantled for the period of construction works, and temporary
infrastructure shall be provided to enable the operation of the bus terminal. At the completion of
the overpass construction works the temporary passenger infrastructure shall be dismantled and
new passenger infrastructure shall be built at a scope which is needed to merge the bus terminal
area unaffected by the project with the project-affected territory.
8. In section between Prāgas Street and Maskavas Street, improved urban access infrastructure shall
be built under overpass P-07 in parallel to the railway, providing at least the following
improvements:
Concrete cobblestone pavement having envisaged loads of operative services vehicles applicable to the use of pedestrians and cyclists;
Rainwater drainage; Restrictive elements for vehicle access in areas from which access with vehicles is not
envisaged; to develop and coordinate technical and architectural solutions of these elements during elaboration of the design;
To ensure lighting throughout the territory, detailed solutions shall be developed and coordinated during elaboration of the design.
9. The architecture of the overpass shall be in line with structures P-08 and P-09.
10. During the construction period, after reconstruction of Riga Central Passenger Station, the
Southern Stage completion overpass shall be used for the 1520 mm rolling stock movements.
11. Location of the overpass and rail tracks on the overpass shall comply with the application „Rail
Baltica Riga railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central Passenger Station design and
build project”.
170
12. The technical solutions of the overpass shall comply with the requirements contained within the
chapter „Special requirements imposed on bridges and overpasses“.
13. Underneath the overpass, relevant utilities, lighting and improvements shall be located.
Overpass from Prāgas Street till Kungu Street (P-08)
Present situation
The 1520 mm gauge tracks cross Prāgas Street on a steel/concrete overpass on reinforced concrete
supports. 3 rail tracks are accommodated on the overpass. The metal girders of the overpass are made
of riveted sheet steel, onto which a reinforced concrete slab is placed.
At the lower part of the slab, at some places concrete crumblings and corrosion-affected reinforcement
bars are visible. Several girders demonstrate white salt efflorescences from sheet joints, which leads
to the assumption that the connection plane between the upper girder shelf and the slab is affected by
corrosion and humidity-induced damages.
Wooden shields are attached to the lower plane of the span structure, and under these shields catenary
networks for the trams are placed.
After crossing Prāgas Street, the rail tracks are located on the railway embankment earth structure. At
the southern side of the embankment there is the Riga International Bus Terminal building and its
covered passenger platforms with a retention wall. On the northern side of the embankment there is
the 13.Janvāra Street. Opposite of Kungu Street there is a public at-grade car parking. For the entire
length of the embankment there are rail tracks and other railway infrastructure, including catenary
networks, their piers and signalling systems.
Situation to be designed
A new, uninterrupted railway overpass accommodating 1520 mm gauge tracks shall be built in the
section from Prāgas Street till Kungu Street. The overpass starts at the support No. 0 of the Prāgas
Street overpass to be dismantled. The overpass ends on the embankment between Maskavas and
Kungu streets.
Requirements for overpass P-08:
1. The overpass shall be built as an uninterrupted crossing in the section from Prāgas Street to Kungu
Street to accommodate two 1520 mm gauge tracks.
2. To construct the Prāgas Street overpass, the existing railway overpass over Prāgas Street shall be
dismantled. The road traffic clearance under the overpass shall be of at least the same height as
the existing one. The traffic clearance on Prāgas Street shall be of at least the same size as the
existing overpass. Road traffic, public transport and pedestrian traffic shall be ensured under the
overpass.
3. The overpass shall be statically independent from structure P-07 and in terms of architecture it
shall be adjusted to it.
171
4. Location of the overpass and rail tracks on the overpass shall comply with the application „Rail
Baltica Riga railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central Passenger Station design and
build project”.
5. The technical solutions of the overpass shall comply with the requirements contained within the
chapter „Special requirements imposed on bridges and overpasses“.
6. All necessary utilities, lighting and improvements shall be placed under the overpass, providing at
least the following improvements:
Concrete cobblestone pavement having envisaged loads of service vehicles applicable to the use of pedestrians and cyclists;
Rainwater drainage; Restrictive elements for vehicle access in areas from which access with vehicles is not
envisaged; to develop and coordinate technical and architectural solutions of these elements during elaboration of the design;
To ensure lighting throughout the territory, detailed solutions shall be developed and coordinated during elaboration of the design.
Bridge over Daugava (P-09)
Present situation
Next to the existing overpass over Maskavas and Krasta streets an new overpass shall be built. At the
beginning of the bridge there is a single-storey non-residential technical building for the needs of Riga
International Bus Terminal, as well as the railway embankment slope.
The corridor under Maskavas and Krasta Streets overpass is used by car transport and public transport.
Maskavas Street accommodates tram traffic and there are contact line networks located. Between
Maskavas and Krasta Streets, as well as between the carriageways going each way on Krasta Street
there is a lawn belt.
Next to Krasta Street there is a pedestrian promenade along the River Daugava. Nearby overpass, the
promenade comes closer to the city channel outlet from Daugava, and the pedestrian and cycle road
crosses the city channel over Krasta Street channel overpass. The cycle road and pedestrian
promenade are connected by a low-gradient ramp with stairs next to it.
The 1435 mm gauge railway bridge over Daugava will be located next to the existing railway bridge
over Daugava. On the eastern bank of Daugava, there is a granite bank strengthening, while the western
bank is a natural slope on Zaķusala Island.
The existing bridge crosses Daugava with five ~87 m long spans, the structure of which is made of
arched steel framework on granite supports. The bridge supports might been damaged by explosions
during war period. The existing bridge spans have been placed on supports after the war, and the
above-water part of supports has been renewed.
Vessels navigate on Daugava under the existing bridge, several of the bridge spand are navigable.
172
Situation to be designed
A new, uninterrupted railway bridge accommodating 1435 mm gauge tracks shall be built in the section
from Maskavas Street till Zaķusala Island. The bridge starts on the embankment at Maskavas Street.
The bridge ends on the embankment on Zaķusala Island.
Requirements for bridge P-09:
1. The bridge shall be an uninterrupted crossing to accommodate two Rail Baltica tracks in the section
from Maskavas Street to Zaķusala Island, and it shall provide for an emergency services’ access
and pedestrian evacuation road crossing over Maskavas and Krasta streets, and the river Daugava.
2. The navigation clearance under the overpass shall be of at least the same height as the one of the
existing railway overpass next to it. Road traffic, public transport and pedestrian traffic shall be
ensured under the overpass.
3. The overpass/bridge shall feature monolith reinforced concrete supports and spans, and in terms
of architecture it shall be adjusted to structures P-07 and P-10.
4. The clearance under the bridge shall be navigable according to regulations, which the Contractor
shall receive from Maritime Administration of Latvia (Latvijas Jūras Administrācija). Under the
overpass the relevant navigation signs and other aids shall be provided.
5. During construction and operation period of the overpass/bridge, the impact on the existing
overpass shall be reduced to a minimum. Construction works of the overpass may not cause
depression or deformation of the existing overpass.
6. (deleted).
7. Location of the overpass/bridge and rail tracks on the overpass/bridge shall comply with the
Construction Intention „Rail Baltica Riga railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central
Passenger Station design and build project”.
8. Under the bridge section between the embankment next to Maskavas Street and along Daugava all
relevant utilities, lighting and improvements shall be located.
Bridge over Mazā Daugava (P-10)
Present situation
The 1435 mm gauge railway bridge over Daugava will be located next to the existing railway bridge
over Daugava. The eastern bank of Mazā Daugava is a natural slope on Zaķusala Island, while its
western bank features a granite/brick bank strengthening.
The existing bridge crosses Daugava with four spans (40 + 2x47 + 40), which are made of continuous
steel beams with a carriageway on top of it. The bridge supports might been damaged by explosions
during war period.
Vessels navigate on Mazā Daugava under second span of the existing railway bridge.
Next to existing overpasses over Mūkusalas Street, a new overpass shall be built. Mūkusalas Street
under the overpass is used by car and public transport; the contact line networks of trolleybuses are
173
attached to the existing overpass. Between the carriageways on Mūkusalas Street going both ways,
there is a bush lane and a railway embankment slope secured with concrete slabs. Between the
carriageways, next to the embankment there is a single-storey non-residential building.
Jelgavas street is crossed by an overpass of 1520mm tracks gauge railway.
On the existing overpass there are two rail tracks and two contact line networks. Underneath each rail
track there is an individual span structure. The span is reinforced concrete beam with openings. The
overpass piers are built from granite and reinforced concrete, the piers demonstrate traces of drainage
flows and crumbling. The existing slopes at the overpass are fixed with reinforced concrete plates.
Jelgavas Street under the overpass is used by car and public transport; the contact line wires of
trolleybuses are attached to the existing overpass.
Mouth of Kīleveina ditch running into Daugava is located next to the overpass corridor.
Situation to be designed
A new, uninterrupted railway bridge accommodating 1435 mm gauge tracks shall be built over Mazā
Daugava. The bridge starts on the embankment on Zaķusala Island. The bridge ends with the supports
after crossing Jelgavas Street.
Requirements for bridge P-10:
1. The uninterrupted crossing over Mazā Daugava, Mūkusalas and Jelgavas Streets shall
accommodate two 1435 mm tracks.
2. The bridge shall provide for emergency services’ access and the passenger evacuation road
crossing over Mazā Daugava, Mūkusalas and Jelgavas streets, and its access to embankment on
Zaķusala and the emergency services’ access and the passenger evacuation road crossing on the
structure P-09.
3. (deleted).
4. The navigation clearance under the bridge shall be of at least the same height as the one of the
existing railway bridge. Under the overpass the relevant navigation signs and other aids shall be
provided.
5. The architecture of the bridge shall be in line with structure P-09.
6. Location of the bridge and rail tracks on the overpass shall comply with the construction intention
„Rail Baltica Riga railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga Central Passenger Station design
and build project”.
7. All through the structure, relevant utilities, lighting and improvements shall be located.
174
4.7. Requirements on design of railway infrastructure
4.7.1. General requirements
This chapter describes general requirements on reconstructed and newly built track design, along
with specific requirements as regards particular railway infrastructure sections. Each railway
infrastructure section is identified by its location (e.g., railway infrastructure section Lāčplēša-
Dzirnavu) and by its name (e.g., DIP-01).
Structures addressed within this chapter:
1. Railway infrastructure section Lāčplēša - Dzirnavu streets (DIP-01) 19,092km – 19,596km;
2. Railway infrastructure section Dzirnavu-Timoteja streets (DIP-02) 19,596km – 19,777km;
3. Railway infrastructure section Timoteja-Gogoļa streets (DIP-03) 19,777km – 20,018km;
4. Railway infrastructure section Gogoļa-Prāgas streets (DIP-04) 20,018km – 20,248km;
5. Railway infrastructure section Prāgas-Maskavas streets (DIP-05) 20,248km – 20,587km;
6. Railway infrastructure section Maskavas-Jelgavas streets (DIP-06) 20,587km – 21,630km.
A schematic layout of the location of future tracks after reconstruction of 1520 mm gauge tracks
and construction of 1435 mm gauge tracks is attached in Annex 26.
The topographic survey of existing rail tracks see in Annex 4.
4.7.2. Methodology
Documents attached: Building Design in the Minimum Composition (Annex 12), construction
permits (Annex 6) and Environmental Impact Assessment final report (Annex 8), as well as technical
conditions and special conditions received by 05/03/2018. The applicable Technical specification
or its parts for interoperability relating to the rail system in the European Union thereof are publicly
available on the official website of the European Union.
As regards reconstruction of underground communications, consider the regulations of binding
Technical conditions.
Actions to be carried out by the Contractor
Within the framework of Contract fulfilment, the Contractor shall individually and in due time
retrieve from archives available information and documentation of existing railway infrastructure
and technical information of other structures possibly affected by the Works, where such
documentation might be needed to perform design and construction works. The Employer shall not
be held liable for the accuracy or study outputs of the studies as indicated in the appendices of the
present technical specifications (e.g., Annex 1, Annex 14), and the Contractor shall also consider
that the outputs of historical studies are not a guarantee of similar study outputs nowadays.
The requirements of technical conditions shall by updated by the Contractor considering the expiry
date of technical conditions. The Contractor shall request technical conditions relevant for the
175
design works, and shall receive these from authorities, including from which these have not been
received, but which are relevant for the Works.
The Contractor shall identify all legal entities and natural persons, which interests are affected by
solutions of Detailed Technical Design and work organization or work performance, shall clarify the
measures to be undertaken during design and work performance. Each work (measure), which is
deemed a compensation regarding damages caused to third parties, if such occur, shall be
communicated according to the Contract procedures in due time, before implementing the solution
in the Detailed Technical Design or before developing other related documentation.
The survey and study works (including material verification) shall be carried out at a scope, which
allows for the developers of a Detailed Technical Design to take responsibility for the justification
of the solutions and their compatibility to design standards, regulations and specifications of a of
Detailed Technical Design.
As part of studies, structures shall be inspected on-site and a respective technical statement of on-
site inspection shall be drawn up according to LBN 405-15 “Technical inspection of structures”.
As part of studies, structures shall be inspected on-site and a respective technical statement of on-
site inspection shall be drawn up according to LBN 405-15 “Technical inspection of structures”.
The construction time schedule (period of design and construction works) shall be communicated
with the Employer.
The Contractor shall elaborate and submit deliverables to the Employer for review, as well as in
cases of necessity – to external authorities for approval, according to Chapter 3.5. „Deliverables“.
The Detailed Technical Design shall be elaborated according to statutory, Employers and Contract
requirements, as well as technical conditions and other requirements of the present Technical
Specifications. In the construction permit the design conditions and the scope of Detailed Technical
Design is stipulated by the special construction regulations „Railway Construction Regulations“ (in
Latvian – Dzelzceļa būvnoteikumi) considering the type of railway structure.
Detailed Technical Design solutions shall be elaborated according to Employers’ notes, whenever
applicable.
Commissioning of the railway infrastructure by Rounds of construction shall be set out in the
Detailed Technical Design indicating each round to be put into service and the construction
sequence.
Irrespective of the interim reports to be submitted, during the whole design process, upon requeste
by the Employer, the Contractor shall submit written answers to the questions of Employer’s
interest.
176
Conditions by the Employer
The design order includes a set of minimum measures. At the elaboration of the Detailed Technical
Design, in case of need, the Contractor shall carry out additional measures to extend the content of
the Detailed Technical Design by applying its professional and practical knowledge.
The Detailed Technical Design shall be developed according to the following:
- LVS EN 1990 to LVS EN 1997 and respective substandard requirements; - Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 530 „Railway Construction Regulations“ - Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 253 „Construction regulations for particular structures“; - Valid „Road specifications“, LVC manual, in cases, where the construction works of track
infrastructure includes also the reconstruction of the adjoining street infrastructure; - Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 421 „Regulations regarding equipping work places on
roads“ (in Latvian: Noteikumi par darba vietu aprīkošanu uz ceļiem); - Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 724 „Technical operation regulations of railway“. - Rail Baltica Design Guidelines.
Within the Detailed Technical Design, the following shall be solved, considered/provided for:
- Issues regarding reconstruction/construction and crossing of utilities; - Detailed Technical Design shall include an assessment on the use of the structure during
construction works according to Article 21(3) of the Construction Law (in Latvian: Būvniecības likums).
If according to the Detailed Technical Design due to construction works the points of local geodesic
network may be damaged or destroyed, the respective section of the Detailed Technical Design
shall include the costs for the establishment of new ones and improvement of local geodesic
network according to conditions imposed by Riga City Construction Board.
If according to the Detailed Technical Design due to construction works the points of national
geodesic network may be damaged or destroyed, the planned construction activity shall be
communicated with the Latvian Geospatial Information Agency (in Latvian: Latvijas Ģeotelpiskās
informācijas aģentūra) and the respective section of the Detailed Technical Design shall include a
reference to the points of the national geodesic network to be renewed, while the „List of work
amounts“ – costs of installation thereof.
The following shall be considered while elaborating the bills of quantities within Detailed Technical
Design:
1) Each bill of quantities position on the list shall contain a reference to the clause of
specification of the respective section of Detailed Technical Design;
2) The specifications volume shall contain a description of each construction work to be
undertaken and it shall be applied the format and, wherever possible, the content of the
valid „Roads Specifications“, excluding any conflicting or twofold interpretation of
wordings;
3) Where any of the works in „Road specifications“ or any other used standard is not described
to a sufficient detail, additional specifications shall be elaborated in a similar format
177
The Detailed Technical Design shall be elaborated according to legal acts and good industry
practice in a way to make it possible:
- to determine the compatibility of the future structure to legal acts and other imposed
requirements;
- shall undertake expertise of the Detailed Technical Design;
- to provide the construction operator with sufficient information to carry out the
construction works.
Content of Detailed Technical Design
The content of the Detailed Technical Design shall be developed according to Cabinet of Ministers
Regulations No. 281 LBN 202-15 “Content and formatting of a building design”“ of 09/06/2015.
The Detailed Technical Design shall be elaborated according to requirements as regards its content
and methodical BIM requirements under chapter 3.11.
Ensure that the graphical and text information does not overlap or split between several technical
drawings.
4.7.3. Technical requirements as to railway infrastructure sections
Common technical requirements for sections
In the design of railway infrastructure, consider the design solutions and parameters, requirements
imposed on construction performance and materials of Chapter 5 herein.
The following requirements shall be met at the elaboration of Detailed Technical Design for railway
infrastructure:
1) All track solutions, including the earth structure solutions shall be calculated and built in a
way to deliver an axle load of 25 tonnes/axle with a driving speed of 1435 mm gauge trains
no more than 80 km/h and a driving speed of 1520 mm gauge trains no more than 50 km/h.
2) The longitudinal profile of the station 1520mm gauge tracks as well as other parameters
shall comply with the CoM regulations No.724 “Dzelzceļa tehniskās ekspluatācijas
noteikumi” requirements. For the calculation of longitudinal profiles, the designed height
marks of the reconstructed station building and traffic overpass structures shall be
considered. The minimum length of longitudinal elements shall be at least 200 m, at the
station ends – at least 50 m.
3) The transverse of the earth structure at the sections, where the earth structure is
reconstructed, shall be no less than 4% towards the water draining devices in order to
ensure a quicker water drainage from the superstructure elements of rail tracks and
infrastructure devices.
4) The distance from the 1520mm gauge track axle to the earth structure edge shall be no
less than 3.5 m on the straight sections with no supports of contact line networks (the width
of the earth structure surface shall be no less than 7 m) with a respective widening in curves
178
as per LVS 282 “Dzelzceļa būvju tuvinājuma un ritošā sastāva gabarīti” requirements.
Determining the distance from earth structure surface from the track axle, the location of
supports of contact line networks, field devices and utilities' networks shall be considered
according to valid construction standards and regulations.
5) The gauge of structures for 1520 mm system shall be “C” according to the standard LVS
282:2013.
6) The gauge of structures for 1435 mm system shall be ”GC” according to the standard LVS
EN 15273.
7) The statistical deformation modulus (Ev2) of the earth structure base level shall be no less
than 80 MN/m2.
Design of 1520 mm gauge tracks
The 1520 mm gauge infrastructure and the reconstruction scope of the existing station are related
to the property of AS “Latvijas Dzelzceļš” and the management thereof will be carried out by VAS
“Latvijas Dzelzceļš”. This is why the technical solutions during the course of design and in the result
of it will have to be approved at VAS “Latvijas Dzelzceļš”, including the performance of requirements
set within this technical specification, which are not mentioned in the technical conditions by VAS
“Latvijas Dzelzceļš”. The 1520 mm gauge solutions are subject to valid legal acts, but not to the
Rail Baltica Design Guidelines, which are elaborated for the design of 1435 mm gauge tracks, unless
the application of the Design Guidelines is related to a joint solutions or issues as regards easement
of management.
The key documents (this is not an exhaustive list) defining the technical requirements for the design
and construction of the reconstruction of 1520 mm gauge tracks at the Riga Central Passenger
Station are as follows:
• Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 530 „Railway Construction Regulations“ of
02/09/2014;
• Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 724 „Technical operation regulations of railway“ of
03/08/2010;
• Latvian standard No. LVS 282 „Construction and rolling stock clearance diagrams for
railways“; “Railway adjacent building and rooling stock"
• Latvian standard No. LVS 448 „Railway applications. Passenger platforms and pedestrian
crossing for 1520 mm railway lines“;
• LVS 452 “Railway equipment. Signalling signs and signalling devices”
• Other documents and instructions valid in Latvia, which apply to design and construction
of 1520 mm gauge tracks;
• Other documents valid in Latvia, which stipulate construction, operational safety and
environment protection, etc.;
• Technical conditions issued by VAS “Latvijas dzelzceļš” and other relevant organisations;
179
• Building Design in the Minimum Composition “Elaboration of the construction project and
construction works of Rail Baltica's Riga Railway bridge, railway embankment and Riga
Central Passenger Station premises“ (see Annex 12).
All the requirements apply also to temporary solutions during the construction period.
During the reconstruction, the operation of snow cleaning devices (pneumatic blower of switches)
and installation of snow cleaning devices on temporary solutions during snowfall season shall be
enabled.
Detailed requirements on the design and construction of 1520 mm gauge tracks see under Chapter
5.
Design of 1435 mm gauge tracks
1435 mm gauge infrastructure, new construction dimensions of the station at the level of the
waiting hall and under 1435 mm gauge tracks within this procurement will be the property of the
state of Latvia and its management model will be clarified following completion of Construction
Works.
The technical solutions of the 1435 mm gauge infrastructure shall be confirmed according to the
procerdure defined by the Contract in the stage of Master Design of the Project, and in cases, if
derogation from the Design Guidelines are made.
The key documents (this is not an exhaustive list) defining the technical requirements for the design
and construction of the 1435mm gauge tracks are as follows:
• Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 530 „Railway Construction Regulations“ of
02/09/2014;
• Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 724 „Technical operation regulations of railway“ of
03/08/2010;
• Commission Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 on technical specifications for interoperability
relating to the ‘infrastructure’ subsystem of the rail system in the European Union.
• Rail Baltica Design Guidelines for the 1435 mm gauge tracks.
1435 mm gauge tracks in the station's section from Lāčplēša Street till Krasta Street shall be
designed respecting the earth structure, public utilities' structures and location of rail track
infrastructure, which will be temporarily used to place 1520mm gauge tracks and transport
passengers during the construction period by reconstructing the “Northern” part of the station
(existing tracks of the 1520 mm gauge infrastructure; Track I, II, III, 4, 5, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
17, 18, 19, 20, 21).
In the design of 1435 mm gauge tracks, the longitudinal profile parameters shall be assumed
according to technical indicators of the 1520 mm gauge tracks to be reconstructed in order to
provide for alignment of both infrastructures at a single level.
180
Solutions of earth structure for 1435 mm gauge tracks shall provide for an option to place supports
of contact line networks, field devices and utilities ofor these. The cross section profile of the earth
structure basic level shall be no less than 4%.
At the widening of the existing earth structure, the borders of the existing railway right of way on
the “Northern” side of the station shall be observed in order to prevent the location of embankment
traces and drainage structure beyond these. At the widening of the earth structure on the southern
side of the station, approaches shall be applied to limit the possibility of occupying additional areas
beyond the railway right of way. At the narrow places and according to architecture solutions, the
earth structure may be strengthened with geomaterials, using concrete blocks or gabions for the
strengthening of the slope.
Gradients of the slopes of the earth structure shall be assumed according to calculations; if needed,
slopes shall be stabilized by means of geosynthetic materials.
For the 1435 mm gauge tracks the design and construction works shall be carried out in full both
for the superstructure and the substructure, except for the cases described in section 2.3.
The temporary 1520 mm gauge tracks in the southern part of the station shall be built to enable
train traffic while the substructure at the northern side of the Riga Central Passenger Station is
being built. Having completed the construction works at the northern part of the station and having
put the tracks into service, the temporary 1520 mm gauge tracks shall be dismantled. The mounting
and dismantling of temporary tracks shall be done by the Contractor within the scope of Works.
Design and construct the Stations master office on the 1435 mm gauge passenger platform so that
the watching staff can duly perform its tasks at any season and time of the day under ergonomic
and comfortable circumstances. From that room, the platform and tracks shall be clearly visible
and its microclimate indoors shall comply with statutory requirements regarding buildings of such
type. The Contractor shall equip it with connections to utilities networks, including electricity and
the relevant low intensity current systems at a sufficient amount to deliver its functions and work
duties.
Specific technical requirements as to individual sections
Railway infrastructure section Lāčplēša-Dzirnavu streets (DIP-01)
Present situation
At present, in the section between Lāčplēša Street and Dzirnavu Street there are 1520 mm gauge
tracks located on the embankment. The embankment is made with slopes and where unauthorised
access to tracks is restricted by fencing.
In the embankment zone on its Southern side there is a storage and office building and a heating
unit with air receivers located.
On the Southern side of the earth structure, near the embankment foot, there is the microprocessor
and relay centralisation (MRC) unit, which is connected to the main cable sewage of the station,
which is installed in the embankment slope.
181
Situation to be designed
Two 1435 mm gauge tracks and one dead-end shall be placed on the extended embankment at the
southern part of the existing embankment. To do so, the existing earth structure shall be extended
in direction of South and all relevant dismantling and relocation works of the existing structures
shall be carried out.
The Contractor shall assess the technical condition of the existing railway overpass over Lāčplēša
Street and shall choose respective solutions during the elaboration of the Detailed technical design.
The Contractor shall in the Detailed technical design provide for and at its own expense undertake
all relevant renewal or reconstruction works, which might be needed to finish Lāčplēša Street
overpass Works.
At the southern part of the embankment where there is insufficient area to create slopes, it shall be
marked off by retention walls. In the section, where this is possible, a slope for the embankment
shall be created (the preliminary location of slopes and retention walls is attached as Annex 27).
On the northern side of the embankment, a technological car ramp coming from Kļavu Street shall
be built to enable the maintenance vehicles of VAS “Latvijas Dzelzceļš” to get to the track level. At
the end of ramp, on the embankment a turnaround square for vehicles and the new heating unit
shall be built, and the location and technical parameters shall be communicated with VAS “Latvijas
Dzelzceļš”.
The existing 1520mm gauge tracks on the embankment shall be reconstructed and the 1435mm
gauge tracks shall be designed according to the envisaged number and location of tracks as
depicted in Annex 26.
The distance between 1520 mm gauge tracks in the section from Lāčplēša Street to Dzirnavu Street
shall be assumed, considering the requirements of Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 724
„Technical operation regulations of railway“ and the requirements of technical conditions issued by
VAS “Latvijas dzelzceļš” shall be met.
At the design of 1435 mm gauge tracks, the solutions shall be elaborated considering the Rail
Baltica Design Guidelines requirements.
Railway infrastructure section Dzirnavu – Timoteja streets (DIP-02)
Present situation
At present, in the section between Dzirnavu Street and Timoteja Street there are 1520 mm gauge
tracks and passengers platforms, located on the embankment. The platforms can be accessed by
stairs via the existing pedestrian tunnel located on the side of Dzirnavu Street overpass.
The embankment is made with slopes and where unauthorised access to tracks is restricted by
fencing. On the northern side, the embankment slopes are marked off with retention walls to enable
clearance for Kļavu Street.
182
On the southern side of the embankment, next to it is a transformer substation TP-171 owned by
LDz.
Situation to be designed
Two 1435 mm gauge tracks shall be placed on the embankment, at the southern part of the existing
embankment, except for the section from Dzirnavu Street to western side of the transformer
substation, where Rail Baltica tracks shall be placed on a overpass to enable the operation of the
transformer substation TP-171 during construction works. To do so, the existing earth structure
shall be extended in direction of South, where necessary, and a section of overpass shall be
constructed and linked with Dzirnavu Street overpass, as well as all relevant dismantling and
relocation works of the existing structures shall be carried out.
Due to insufficient area to create a slope, at the southern part of the embankment it shall be
delimited by a retention wall.
The Detailed Technical Design shall provide for connection of Timoteja Street with Elizabetes
Street, creating an overpass over the connection (see requirements on overpass design in Chapter
4.6). At the construction of the overpass, underneath it new stairs to enable passengers getting on
platforms from Timoteja Street shall be built.
The existing 1520 mm gauge tracks on the embankment shall be reconstructed and the 1435 mm
gauge tracks shall be designed according to the envisaged number and location of tracks as
depicted in Annex 26.
The distance between the reconstructed 1520mm gauge tracks in the section from Dzirnavu Street
to Gogoļa Street shall be assumed according to architecture sketch design solutions, providing 10
m wide passenger platforms and meeting the requirements of LVS 448.
At the design of 1435 mm gauge tracks, the solutions shall be elaborated considering the provision
of the Rail Baltica Design Guidelines.
Railway infrastructure section Timoteja – Gogoļa streets (DIP-03)
Present situation
At present, in the section between Timoteja Street and Gogoļa Street there are 1520 mm gauge
tracks located on the embankment. The embankment at southern side features a slope, except for
sections with entrances to pedestrian tunnels. On the northern side of the embankment there is the
Riga Central Passenger Station building and related structures, as well as the business centre
„Origo“. Unauthorised access to tracks is restricted by fencing.
At present, passengers get to rail tracks via pedestrian tunnels and stairs located under the tracks
and crossing the embankment.
183
Situation to be designed
Two 1435 mm gauge tracks, one dead-end and a passenger platform shall be placed on overpasses
at the southern part of the existing embankment. To do so, the existing earth structure shall be
levelled and all relevant dismantling and/or relocation works of the existing structures shall be
carried out.
The existing embankment shall be levelled and the reconstructed 1520 mm gauge tracks and
platforms shall be placed on overpasses (Chapter 4.6), except for the zone between Gogoļa Street
and passenger Tunnel A/B, where the 1520 mm gauge tracks and platforms shall be placed on the
embankment, which will feature the reconstructed existing Tunnel C, and the embankment shall be
delimited by retention walls.
The existing 1520 mm gauge tracks shall be reconstructed and the 1435 mm gauge tracks shall be
designed according to the envisaged number and location of tracks as depicted in Annex 26.
The distance between the 1520 mm gauge tracks to be reconstructed shall be assumed according
to architecture sketch design solutions, providing 10 m wide passenger platforms and meeting the
requirements of LVS 448.
At the design of 1435 mm gauge tracks and platform, the solutions shall be elaborated considering
the requirements of the Rail Baltica Design Guidelines.
Railway infrastructure section Gogoļa – Prāgas streets (DIP-04)
Present situation
At present, in the section between Gogoļa Street and Prāgas Street there are 1520 mm gauge
tracks, located on the embankment. On the Southern side of the embankment is located the
commercial building and multi-storey car parking „Titāniks“ and car entrance to it. On the northern
side of the embankment the shopping centre Stockmann and the cinema are located. Unauthorised
access to rail tracks is restricted by fencing.
Situation to be designed
Two 1435 mm gauge tracks, one dead-end and the eastern part of a passenger platform shall be
placed on overpasses in the section from City Channel to Prāgas Street. To do so, the existing earth
structure shall be levelled where needed and all dismantling works of existing structures shall be
carried out, including the demolishing of the commercial building and multi-storey car parking
„Titāniks“. The section from Gogoļa Street to City channel shall be placed on a widened
embankment, establishing a technological car ramp to enable the maintenance vehicles to get to
the 1435 mm gauge track level (see Annex 26). The receipt of a construction permit, the elaboration
of the demolition design and the demolition works, as well as the improvements of the territory
following the demolition of the commercial building and multi-storey car parking „Titāniks“ shall be
carried out by the Contractor within the scope of Works.
184
The 1520 mm gauge tracks to be reconstructed shall be located on the existing embankment and
the embankment shall be delimited with retention walls along the 1435 mm gauge track
overpasses.
The existing 1520 mm gauge rail tracks shall be reconstructed and the 1435 mm gauge tracks shall
be designed according to the envisaged number and location of tracks as depicted in Annex 26.
As regards the Detailed Technical Design solutions, requirements of Cabinet of Ministers
Regulations No. 724 „Technical operation regulations of railway“ and the requirements of technical
conditions issued by VAS “Latvijas dzelzceļš” shall be met.
At the design of 1435 mm gauge tracks and platform, the solutions shall be elaborated considering
the requirements of the Rail Baltica Design Guidelines.
Railway infrastructure section Prāgas – Maskavas streets (DIP-05)
Present situation
At present, in the section between Prāgas Street and Maskavas Street there are 1520 mm gauge
rail tracks, located on the embankment. The southern side of the embankment is made up of a
slope, along which the Riga International Bus Terminal is located. The northern part of the
embankment is made up of a slope for its entire length. Unauthorised access to tracks is restricted
by fencing.
On the embankment there is the railway bridge guard unit, and on the southern slope of the
embankment there is the heating unit.
Situation to be designed
In the section from Prāgas Street to Kungu Street the existing embankment shall be levelled and
the 1520 mm and 1435 mm gauge tracks shall be placed on overpasses. To do so, the earth
structure shall be levelled and all relevant dismantling/relocation works of existing structures shall
be carried out preserving the functionality of the Riga International Bus Terminal buildings and the
bus terminal.
In the section from Kungu Street to Maskavas Street, the 1520 mm and 1435 mm gauge tracks
shall be placed on the embankment. To do so, the existing embankment shall be widened to the
relevant width to place both gauge tracks and their relevant infrastructure on the embankment, as
well as a pedestrian and cyclist descending ramp from 1435 mm gauge track bridge over Daugava.
Sides of the embankment in longitudinal direction shall be made as a slope. The embankment ends
shall be delimited by retention walls.
The existing 1520 mm gauge tracks shall be reconstructed and the 1435 mm gauge tracks shall be
designed according to the envisaged number and location of tracks as depicted in Annex 26.
185
As regards the Detailed Technical Design solutions, requirements of Cabinet of Ministers
Regulations No. 724 „Technical operation regulations of railway“ and the requirements of technical
conditions issued by VAS “Latvijas dzelzceļš” shall be met.
In the section from Prāgas Street to Maskavas Street, by determing the intertrack distance the
location of Rail Baltica's two 1435 mm gauge tracks along the bus terminal building to be preserved
shall be considered and a vertical seperator between both infrastructures shall be developed. To
determine the distance of intertracks, the location of contact line network of tracks and field devices
according to standard LVS 282 „Construction and rolling stock clearance diagrams for railways“, as
well as the location of utilities and various infrastructure track fencing shall be considered.
At the design of 1435 mm gauge tracks and platform, the solutions shall be elaborated considering
the requirements of the Design Guidelines.
Railway infrastructure section Maskavas-Jelgavas streets (DIP-06)
Present situation
At present, in the section from Maskavas Street to Jelgavas Street there are 1520 mm gauge tracks,
which are located on bridges over Daugava and Mazā Daugava, overpasses over Maskavas, Krasta,
Mūkusalas and Jelgavas streets, and on the embankment on Zaķusala Island and in the section
from Mūkusalas to Jelgavas Street. On Zaķusala Island, the embankment adjusts with a territory
used by services of VAS “Latvijas Dzelzceļš”, where are several buildings. The territory is fenced.
At the end and start of the bridge over Daugava there is a guard unit.
At the foot of the southern slope of the embankment between Mūkusalas and Jelgavas Street there
is the Kīveleina ditch, while on its northern slope there is the compressor central unit intended for
the switch fanning system.
Situation to be designed
In the section from Maskavas Street to Zaķusala Island, as well as from Zaķusala Island to Jelgavas
Street two Rail Baltica tracks shall be located on a bridge/overpass. On Zaķusala Island, the 1435
mm gauge tracks shall be located on an embankment. Sides of the embankment in longitudinal
direction shall be made with a slope. The embankment ends shall be strengthened by retention
walls.
On Zaķusala Island, promenade of Krasta Street, promenade of Mūkusalas Street and on Jelgavas
Street descending ramps for emergency transport and passenger evacuation.
The existing 1520 mm gauge tracks shall be reconstructed and the 1435 mm gauge tracks shall be
designed according to the envisaged number and location of tracks as depicted in Annex 26.
As regards the Detailed Technical Design solutions, requirements of Cabinet of Ministers
Regulations No. 724 „Technical operation regulations of railway“ and the requirements of technical
conditions issued by VAS “Latvijas dzelzceļš” shall be met.
186
Determining the distance of intertracks, the location of two 1435 mm gauge tracks in the section
shall be considered, enabling the establishment of fencing between both infrastructures. To
determine the distance of intertracks, the location of contact line network of tracks and field devices
according to standard LVS 282 „Construction and rolling stock clearance diagrams for railways“, as
well as the location of utilities and different infrastructures tracks fencing shall be considered.
At the design of 1435 mm gauge tracks and platform, the solutions shall be elaborated considering
the requirements of the Design Guidelines.
4.7.4. Requirements on the design of overhead contact lines (OCL) and traction
power supply subsystems
1520mm railway system
General requirements for OCL
The power supply of existing 1520 mm railway is ensured by 3 kV DC; VAS „Latvijas dzelzceļš“ plans
to change to 25 kV AC, thus the OCL shall be designed to be used also in a 25 kV system, including:
• The cross-sections of the contact wire and messenger wire shall make them to be used
both in 3 kV DC and 2x25 kV AC OCL.
• For the suspension insulation of the OCL, polymer insulators designed for 27 kV AC OCL
shall be used.
• The calculations of carrying capacity of load-bearing structures shall consider both the
planned electrification with 3 kV DC and 2x25 kV AC.
Besides the requirements stipulated by Commission Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014 of 18
November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to the ‘energy’
subsystem of the rail system in the Union, the requirements listed below and the requirements
contained within the technical conditions issued by VAS „Latvijas dzelzceļš“ shall be met. In case
the requirements contained within the technical conditions issued by VAS „Latvijas dzelzceļš“
contradict with the present specifications, the decision on the application on one provision or
another shall be taken by the Employer.
In design and construction works, the requirements of standards LVS EN 50119, LVS EN50122-1,
LVS EN50122-2 and LVS EN50122-3 shall be met.
In the design of reinforced concrete and steel structures, LVS EN 1990 “Eurocode: Basis of
structural design“, LVS EN 1991 “Eurocode 1 : Actions on structures“, LVS EN 1992 “Eurocode 2:
Design of concrete structures”, “Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures“, standard LVS EN206-1 and
other shall be applied.
The project calculations shall consider the impact of climatic, geological, hydrological, seismic and
other factors.
The height of the contact wire above the of rail head surface level at the section and at the station
shall not be less than 5750 mm, and on the level crossing – not less than 6000 mm. Within the
borders of the engineering structure which is located on station track and where the stabling of
187
rolling stock is not envisaged, subject to railway manager’s permission the contact wire suspension
height may be reduced to 5570 mm. The contact wire must be no higher than 6800 mm above rail
head surface.
A semi-compensated OCL suspension solution shall be used.
The structures shall be pre-fabricated, by a certified structure manufacturer under appropriate
conditions, with appropriate equipment, according to standards and technology. Production must
be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's used standards and operational conditions.
To receive output data, before design the OCL section to be reconstructed shall be visited on-site.
Where on existing masts overhead lines (high-voltage, low voltage, optics, waveguide and other)
are located, these shall be hanged over to new traverses or cable channelling shall be built, where
these shall be placed (except the waveguide).
Control and management of OCL disconnectors shall be ensured from the LDz Power dispatcher
centre by means of SCADA.
The old OCL masts, foundations and other structures thereof shall be completely dismantled and
disposed of.
Parts of theOCL, except for its suspension and fixing elements thereof, shall be located outside the
S contour of the structure gauge, as stipulated by the national standard LVS 282 „Railway structure
and rolling stock gauges“.
Dimensions of a static pantograph for a 1520 mm gauge track system shall comply with those
depicted on ENE TSI Picture D.3 (see also Fig. 4.2):
Figure 4.2: Dimensions of a static pantograph
Distances between the OCL and pantograph parts connected to the voltage and earthed parts of
the rolling stock and fixed installations in the 1520 mm track gauge system shall conform to the
ENE TSI Table D.1 (see also Table 4.3).
188
Vol
tage
of
the
cont
act
syst
em in
rel
atio
n to
the
gro
und
(kV
) Vertical air clearance A1 between the
rolling stock and lowest position of the
contact wire (mm)
Vertical air
clearance A2
between live
parts of OCL
and earthed
parts (mm)
Lateral air
clearance α
between live
parts of the
pantograph(mm)
Vertical distance δ between the
sections of OCL connected to
voltage (mm)
Normal
Min
imum
allo
wed
for
pla
intr
acks
and
mai
n st
atio
n
gaug
e tr
acks
Without
catenary wires
With catenary
wires
Rai
l tra
cks
and
mai
n
stat
ion
rail
trac
ks
Oth
er s
tati
on r
ail t
rack
s
Nor
mal
Min
imum
allo
wed
Nor
mal
Min
imum
allo
wed
Nor
mal
Min
imum
allo
wed
Nor
mal
Min
imum
allo
wed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1,5–4 450 950 250 200 150 200 150 150 100 300 250
25 450 950 375 350 300 250 200 150 100 300 250
Table 4.3: Distances between parts connected to voltage of overhead the OCL and pantograph and the earthed parts of rolling stock and fixed installations on 1520 mm gauge track system
Sectioning of the station tracks and location of protective devices shall be done according to
technical conditions issued by LDz and shall be communicated with the Contracting Authority and
LDz.
Detailed technical drawings of the OCLs shall be done at a scale 1:1000.
New numbering of masts, section insulators and the overhead OCLs’ turnouts shall be determined
in the detailed technical design.
On all OCL masts relevant informative captions and warning signs shall be provided.
In the platform area and on the newly built overpasses, as well as in other places, where it is
important that a single architectural image is maintained, specific OCL solutions shall be provided
(coordinated with the solutions of 1435 mm gauge track OCL), considering the architectural
solutions for the station passenger service infrastructure, including platform canopee solutions
and, if needed, special consoles and OCL fixing structures shall be used.
189
Requirements are fully applied also to the temporary solutions.
During the station reconstruction, OCL masts of 1520 mm gauge track shall be provided on the
1435 mm gauge track OCL mast foundations OCLs in the southern part of the station for as long
as the northern part of the station is being rebuilt. The OCL solutions during reconstruction shall be
subject to LVS 282 requirements. The 1520 mm gauge track OCL shall be dismantled after the
northern part of the station is rebuilt.
Requirements imposed on foundations, rigid cross-beams and masts
All foundation surfaces in contact with soil shall be coated with hydro-insulation membrane.
The top of foundations shall be at a single level with the rail head surface, exception of foundations on passenger platforms and elsewhere, where it is technically not possible.
The foundation and mast structure shall allow for the possibility to undertake repeated dismantling and mounting of masts, without damaging these and the foundations.
The bold ends to affix masts at the foundations following the mast installation and levelling shall be made weatherproof by means of thermoplastic nuts.
The masts shall be electrically insulated from the foundations and the insulation resistance must not be less than 10 kΩ.
Steel elements of the OCL shall be subject to “hot” galvanization, and the zinc layer must be no less than 110 µm thick.
Flexible beams are not allowed to be used. It is not allowed to use middle masts for permanent solutions by attaching the rigid beams from two sides.
The bottom affixing cables of the rigid beams, within the borders of high platforms and above non-electrified rail tracks, shall be insulated from parts under voltage and these shall be earthed.
The masts and rigid beams shall have a service life of no less than 45 years.
The Contractor shall elaborate detailed solutions of rigid beams, and he shall communicate these with the Engineer, Employer, and LDz.
Requirements imposed on elements of the OCLs
The cross-section of the OCL wires shall enable currents required for trains of certain weights, speed and intervals on certain traffic intensity. Contact wire types CuAg or CuMg shall be used. Preferred are circular cross-sectional contact wires (AC profile).
The cross-section of the OCL wires at station and places of electric longitudinal connectors shall not be less than the cross-section at adjoining sections.
Insulators shall conform to standards LVS EN 50124-1, IEC 61109 and other applicable EN and IEC standards.
There shall be used insulators, which do not require maintenance or cleaning during their entire service life. The configuration and location of insulators shall revent water accumulating on these.
190
The insulators (including polymer ones) of OCL consoles and arms shall demonstrate a mechanical breakout force at load no less than 70 kN, and the breakout bending moment - not less than 3.5 kN∙m.
At transitions of non-insulating tension sections, in the zone, where the contact wires connect to the pantograph, the horizontal distance on transition spans between the inner edges of contact wires shall be at least 100 mm. The height of the contact wire to be anchored above the operational contact wire, at the place, where the branch of the contact wire to be anchored enters the pantograph head area, shall be at least 300 mm.
Section insulators shall allow train speeds as intended at insulator installation sites, with a respective dynamics and at various loads.
To protect from electric arc impact on OCL elements, the section insulator structure shall enable efficient arc-extinction. Air gap between arc discharge horns must be 150±10 mm at 25 kV AC and 50±10 mm at 3.3 kV DC. Air gaps between different potential elements of section insulators shall be for AC at least 200 mm and for DC at least 120 mm.
All elements of section insulator shall be made of light-weight and anti-corrosion materials. Section insulators shall be located on the plane, so that the longitudinal axis matches with current collector axis. Maximum deviation shall be no more than 100 mm.
Section insulators shall be installed in the first third of the span between masts in the priority train direction, while on crossovers – in the middle part between rail tracks, but the bottom slip surface must be 20–30 mm above the nearby contact wire fixation places.
Section insulators, which are built into the messenger wire, shall be located along the section insulator axis outside the arc extinction device burning electric arc area.
Length of the current leakage path of polymer section insulator elements shall be:
- For DC – not less than 1600 mm; - For AXC – 1600–2400 mm depending on the atmospheric pollution levels.
Structural height (messenger and contact wire distance) of the OCL at the section insulator installation sites shall be at least 1.2 m.
Only current-conducting droppers shall be used.
The tolerance of the dropper length is ± 2 mm and the tolerance of the installation distance between the droppers is ± 30 mm.
Connecting individual pipes to masts, insulators and wires require different connections and clamps. The following material shall be used for connections and clamps:
- Bolt, U-clamps, nuts, pads, plugs, etc. – stainless steel; - Insulator heads, furniture made of cast iron, zinc plated and/or stainless steel; - Clamps made of CuZn, CuNiSi or Cu.
Cantilevers shall be protected against corrosion by hot galvanization or by use of stainless materials.
Within the territory of the station, spring tensioners (retractors) on steel structure anchor masts shall be used.
Tensioners shall enable operation of the OCL at a contact wire temperature range 145 °C (ranging from – 45 °C to +100 °C).
191
The length of the tension section shall not exceed 1600 m. If the length of it is less than 700 m, the tensioner is located only on one side and the middle anchoring is not used.
The OCL suspension cannot allow for uplift of contact wires by pantograph at steady arms for more than 250 mm at the maximum calculated wind, temperature values, and summary uplift force of the rolling stock pantographs.
On straight sections, the contact wires shall in relation to current collector axis be located in zigzag line, at each next mast or rigid beam changing the stagger direction. The stagger of a tensed contact wire the the current collector axis at its fixation point on the console or a rigid beam on straight section shall be at least ± 300 mm.
At curves, the contact wire stagger from the current collector axis may reach up to 400 mm.
If the double contact wire is used, the contact wire fixation points shall be located at a distance of 40 mm from each other. In case of double contact wires, the stagger value applies to the outer wire, starting with the current collector axis.
In case the double wire is located in diamond shape, the stagger at the fixation point on the console or rigid beam shall be ± 300 mm.
Maximum deviations of the contact wire from the current collector axis at the fixation point on the console or a rigid beam, considering the horizontal and vertical movements of the arm, shall not exceed 500 mm at curves and 400 mm on straight track sections.
Contact wire deviation from the current collector axis in the span at a maximum wind speed in a particular district, shall not exceed 450 mm at curves and 500 mm on straight track sections.
The stagger of the contact wires shall be shaped in a way that any three consecutive fixation points would not be on the same straight line.
The span length of the OCL is the smallest of the two calculated values:
• the highest wind load; • the highest icing load with concomitant wind load.
Non-insulated rail joints on electrified lines shall be equipped with welded electrical connectors of copper cable with a cross-section not less than 70 mm2 in case of DC and 50 mm2 (or steel 120 mm2 or steel-copper – 70 mm2) in case of AC.
Traction electrical connectors must be made of double-wire copper cable with a cross-section not less than 70 mm2 in case of DC and 50 mm2 in case of AC. These shall be insulated from the earth structure and ballast. It is allowed to use steel copper bimetallic cables with a cross-section of 120 mm2 in case of DC and 70 mm2 in case of AC.
Requirements imposed on overhead OCL turnouts
The OCL turnouts shall ensure undisturbed movement of the OCL wires of the OCL, considering their length changes due to changes in temperature.
OCL turnouts shall ensure smooth (without strikes and sparking) current collector transition from one rail track contact wire to another contact wire.
OCL turnouts located above simple and double slip switches, as well as above diamond crossings shall be fixed to enable mutual longitudinal transition of contact wires.
192
The contact wires at OCL turnouts of main tracks or tracks with a known dominant train direction shall be placed at the bottom.
Crossing site of contact wires, which make the OCL turnout, in case of simple switch, shall be located at a distance of 360 to 400 mm off the straight and diverted track axes, at the place, where the distance between inner edges of rail heads connecting the frog ranges from 730 to 800 mm.
The gripper area of the current collector head and the adjoining or crossing track contact wire shall be located at a distance of 630 to 1100 mm away from the respective track axis.
Single contact wire crossing at the crossing site of track axes is allowed. Above diamond crossing, the contact wires shall cross above the crossing point of track axes.
The movement area of non-operating parts of the current collector head of an electric rolling stock under non-operating branches of contact wire shall be located at 630 to 1100 mm away from the track axis.
Requirements imposed on consoles
Within the project, use as less as possible various consoles, forming them of standardized elements, which are unified with the latest structures applied by LDz, the applied solution shall be communicated with LDz.
Within the project, provide detailed description with a specification of each console, see an example in Figure 4.3.
Use insulated pipe consoles from aluminium alloy. At platform area and on newly built overpasses, as well as in other places, where it is important that a single architectural image is maintained, the console structure shall be adapted to architectural solutions by elaborating detailed drawings and communicating these also with the Employer and LDz. Use of standardized elements also for architecturally adapted consoles is desired.
193
Figure 4.3: Straight fixation standard console for a straight track section
Requirements imposed on earthing
Steel masts and fixation structures of the OCL, as well as all metallic structures (traffic lights, individual masts, lighting poles, etc.), which in plan are located 5 m closer to wires and elements under an operating voltage exceeding 1 kV, shall be earthed via a traction track circuit. All metal buildings located within the impact area of OCL, onto which dangerous induced voltage may occur, shall be earthed (see Fig. 4.4: Earthing areas of individual objects not linked to traction power supply (a) and graph for the determination of location height of non-earthed metal objects (b)). Earthing shall be in line with both the existing 3 kV DC electrification, and the future 25 kV AC electrification according to standard EN 50122-3 requirements.
The Contractor shall describe and include in its technical offer the proposed principal solution of earthing and applied structures, materials in the zone, which separates the AC and DC electrified railway systems, considering not only the aspects of electrical safety, but also the longevity of materials. Final solution shall be communicated during elaboration of Detailed Technical Design.
Figure 4.4: Earthing areas of individual objects not linked to traction power supply (a) and schedule for the determination of location height of non-earthed metal objects (b)
A zone – all metal elements of structures shall be earthed;
B zone – metal elements of structures are not earthed (provisional);
h – suspension height of the outer wire of a current of 1–35 kV;
H – minimum height of the non-earthed metal elements of structures;
0 – vertical projection of OCL, 6, 10 and 20 kV GVL outer wire.
Structures and facilities, which in case of OCL insulation or wire damage may be subject to tension, shall be electrically connected to the traction track network (earthing to the traction track network).
194
Connection of earthing tie-ins of structures and facilities to CCS track circuits shall not interfere with signalling at any of its state thereof (normal, shunt, control and cab signalling). All earthing areas shall be communicated also with VAS “Latvijas dzelzceļš”.
In case of single rail track circuit, the protective earthing of structures and facilities shall be connected to the traction rails of these circuits, while in case of double rail track circuits – to the middle points of impedance bonds or the nearest rail.
Group earthing of buildings and structures shall be made according to „Т” or „Г” layouts by adding these to tracks or to the middle point of impedance bonds only in one point; group earthing wire may not shunt the track circuit insulating joints. For the earthing of OCL masts, group earthing shall be used as much as possible.
At all available places fence earthing to the traction track circuit via double wires shall be undertaken.
4.7.5. Design and construction of 1520mm gauge tracks signalling subsystem
General
The present chapter describes the design and construction works to be undertaken within the
project for the 1520 mm gauge track signalling and interlocking subsystem of the Riga Central
Passenger Station.
Within the framework of the Project the 1520mm gauge tracks signalling subsystem design
(1520mm gauge tracks SCB part of the Detailed Technical Design) and construction will be provided
by the Employer by carrying out separate procurement/procurements, but Engineer will participate
in the coordination of the respective contracts execution, having its responsibilities defined in a
separate contract between Employer and Engineer. Contractor in accordance with instructions of
Engineer is responsible to:
• cooperate with the performers of 1520mm gauge tracks signalling subsystem design and
construction works;
• perform the necessary actions to integrate the respective design within the Detailed
Technical Design and provide the necessary information about Contractor’s solutions of
Detailed Technical design to the performers of the SCB design;
• provide the infrastructure and conditions of the construction site necessary for execution
of SCB construction works, provide access to working zones, provide involvement of the
performer of SCB construction works in organizing construction works of the Contract, as
well as provide Contract construction works compatibility with the SCB construction works.
The below described requirements shall be observed by the Engineer, as well as followed by the
Contractor in the execution of its responsibilities as far as it concerns the Contract Works.
To avoid misunderstandings, the term “Riga Central Passenger Train station” within this technical
specifications chapter is understood as a station as a single passenger service object (unless
indicated otherwise – without differing between the gauge in question), while in terms of railway
operation and signalling/interlocking systems the object consists of railway stations of two
195
different track gauges, where such stations are located in parallel with each other and are not
directly related with each other in everyday routine. In the design of signalling and interlocking
systems for 1520 mm and 1435 mm gauge tracks, the need for temporary solutions considering
the staged reconstruction of the station will be considered. Since during reconstruction the
structures intended for 1435 mm gauge tracks in the section from Lāčplēša Street to Maskavas
Street will be used for temporary placing the 1520 mm gauge tracks, respective solutions for the
operation of signalling and interlocking system will be provided.
On 1520 mm railways, signalling, centralisation and blocking (SCB) is a common term, which is
analogue to train control and command subsystem – a term used on 1435 mm railways.
Description of current situation
In term of signalling and operating organization, the LDz’s 1520 mm gauge station title is “Riga
Passenger”, which consists of three yards – Torņakalna yard (Torņakalna parks), Main yard
(Galvenais parks) and Vagonu yard (Vagonu parks).
Torņakalna yard includes all main and station tracks, including access sidings, which are related to
Torņakalna station (although in terms if operation, it is not an independent station, but only Riga
Passenger station yard); the border between Torņakalna yard and Main yard is demarcated by route
signals, which are located shortly before the railway bridge over Daugava, on the right bank of the
Daugava River (on the Krasta Street overpass).
The Main yard includes all rail tracks related to Riga Passenger station – in the section from
Daugava bridge to the bifurcation place of main tracks leading direction Zemitāni, Šķirotavas
station and to the beginning of Vagonu yard (Vagonu parks). The border between the Main yard
(Galvenais parks) and the main tracks direction Zemitāni station (tracks IGP, IIGP) is marked by
entry signals N, Np. The border between the Main yard and Vagonu yard is not clearly demarcated
– it is located on tracks IIIAP, IVAP, VBP between the switches No. 1, double slip switches No. 3/5,
7/9 from the side of Main yard, and on switches No. 102, 104, 130 from the side of Vagonu yard.
Vagonu yard includes all rail tracks related to the yard (it is also the title of a train passenger stop
“Vagonu parks”), rolling stock maintenance and equipment track set and private sidings. The border
between Vagonu yard and the main tracks at Šķirotava station leading direction Jāņavārti yard
(tracks IIIGP, IVGP and 1p) is demarcated by entry signals NJ, NpJ, NTR, while for the bypass V –
entry signal NŠ.
To control the Riga Passenger station and its yards, a microprocessor centralisation (interlocking)
(MPC) system Bombardier EbiLock 950 was installed in 2000 and modernised in 2015, and it
controls 111 switches in Riga and 27 switches at Torņakalna yard, incl. two swing nose switches
(with two drives). Riga Passenger station control system is connected to analogical EbiLock 950
interlocking systems at Zasulauks and Škirotava station. Within the system modernisation
undertaken by the general partnership Bombardier-Belam, the defect notification period (warranty
period) expires on 4 December 2019.
196
SCB system is linked to the switch snow cleaning (blower) system and the passenger information
system of Riga Passenger station.
Main SCB cables, which enable the operation of Riga Passenger station and its linkage to nearby
stations, as well as other SCB and communication cables laid within the territory of station up to
the Common train traffic control centre at Turgeņeva Street 14 and Gogoļa Street 3 are placed
mainly on the southern side of the station, where the Rail Baltica line is expected to be built. Next
to these, third party infrastructure is also laid. Since not only the operation of Riga Passenger
station, but the whole LDz dispatcher centralisation and communication depends on the operation
of these cables and their disconnection is not possible, the construction works and their sequence
shall be planned considering the location of these cables and the need for their temporary
relocation/re-connection. Exact cable location shall be clarified by the Contractor during the study.
At the existing MPC position at Rūsiņa Street 2A the object controllers of the Main (Galvenā) and
Vagonu yard (Vagonu parks) are located; on the 1st floor of MPC position there are SCB facilities
and related devices, while on 2nd and 3rd floor – there are rooms related to various operational
functions. The existing cable duct entry into MPC is 100% occupied and there is no room for new
cables, while for the placing of new SCB facilities either new premises shall be built, or the functions
placed at MPC shall be relocated to other premises. The object controllers of Torņakalna station
are located in an individual controller at Torņakalna station outside the Work performance area.
SCB cable ducts of Riga Passenger station is located pre-dominantly on the southern side of the
station, and together with these cables also the main SCB cables (from the Common train traffic
control centre at Turgeņeva Street 14) are laid.
Description of reconstruction works and cooperation with the performer of works
It is expected that a sequential, possibly, multiple staged reconstruction of the signaling system
will be required according to the solutions of the Detailed Technical Design to be developed, in order
to perform all the intended construction work without interrupting the functionality of the station.
Each short-term or for a continuous operation foreseen track configuration must ensure the
functionality of the station, continuous, unhindered train movement and sufficient train pass
capability. During construction works links with adjacent stations, train movements and railway
operations may not be affected, not only at the Riga Passenger Station but also in other stages of
the LDz infrastructure, which are controlled or communicated to the station by main SCB and
communications cables. During the construction works of Riga Passenger Station, the MPC system
must ensure links with the existing and/or newly installed passenger information system and switch
snow clearing (blowing) system to ensure safe and fully functional railway operation.
To ensure this, the performers of the SCB design and construction works shall carry out all
necessary surveys and studies, design works, construction works, disconnecting, dismantling and
disposal of existing equipment, the supply and installation of new equipment (both for permanent
and temporary solutions), connecting, new software development and other engineering works,
system elements and common system testing, works related to entry into operation, independent
safety assessment SIL4 acceptance works for each stage of implementation, documentation
197
elaboration and training organisation works, supply of tools and spare parts. But the Contractor
during the Contract execution shall cooperate with the performers of the above mentioned works
and the execution of the respective contracts is closely interrelated and interdependent during both
design and construction.
SCB design and construction works will include the following main types of work:
1) SCB system design and elaboration of a design according to the technological stages of
construction works;
2) Modification of existing MPC software or elaboration of new software, modification of CTC
main interlocking software and field surveillance station software;
3) Station-master, MPC engineer work positions;
4) MPC system and/or object controllers as well as other system components;
5) Trackside equipment, including but not limited to cable boxes, cable glands, signals, switch
drives, route or track indicators, green signal lines and light indicators with vertical
illuminated arrows;
6) Switches snow cleaning (blowing) control equipment and linking thereof with the MPC
system;
7) Track circuites equipment;
8) Continuous-type locomotive automatic cab signalling system (ALSN) equipment;
9) SCB cable ducts, trenches, cable network, cable delivery and laying;
10) Power supply of SCB equipment, including but not only two independent power supply lines,
standby diesel generator, entrance switchboard, power distribution panel, uninterrupted
power supply;
11) Layout of SCB equipment and cable network indoors;
12) Renovation of premises and construction of cable duct inputs in the MPC unit;
13) MPC system linking with the passenger information system;
14) and any other works necessary for the performance of the SCB system reconstruction and
for the functionality ensurance of SCB system, as well as the reconstructed Riga Passenger
Station and the ensurance of the established security level and for the successful
completion of the works within the deadline.
All types, volumes and proposed implementation methods described in this chapter shall be
considered indicative and based on the understanding of the Employer resulting from previous
technical studies and the construction intention documentation. The work volumes and
implementation should be clarified during the elaboration of the Detailed Technical Design and may
be different from those mentioned here, including taking into account the requirements of the
technical rules issued by LDz as the owner of the infrastructure, which, in particular, oblige the
project solutions to be coordinated during design with LDz. These clarifications, if those affect the
Contract Works, during the performance of the works may not be the basis for requesting additional
costs from the Employer.
The reconstruction of the SCB system shall be carried out throughout the project area of Riga
Central Passenger Station, by taking into account the work implementation steps offered by the
198
Contractor (in cooperation with performers of SCB works), their borders and the works to be carried
out within the framework thereof.
It is advisible to combine SCB cable duct and cabling relocation works with the relocation of other
communications, the reconstruction/construction of premises for the placement of SCB equipment
by executing in the same early stage of construction work.
Within the reconstruction of Riga Central Passenger Station, at Torņakalna yard it is currently not
intended to perform reconstruction works and changes in track geometry (unless required by the
proposed 1435 mm track design solutions), the operation of Torņakalna yard within the project is
affected as there are communications located in the project construction area. In view of the
ongoing progress and the expected solutions for the implementation of the Rail Baltica project in
the section from Jelgava Street to the International Airport Riga, within the elaboration of the
Detailed Technical Design it will be assessed whether there is a reasonable need for changes in the
MPC system of Torņakalna yard within the framework of this project.
The area of the project track reconstruction works ends with Lāčplēša Street overpass, however
due to the pecularities of the signalling and interlocking system (the microprocessor centralization
unit at Rūsiņa street 2A operates and controls both the Main park and the Vagonu yard), as well as
taking into account the implementation continuation of the Rail Baltica project towards Šķirotava,
the reconstruction of the signaling and centralization system within the framework of this project
also includes part of the Main yard odd side switches outside the boundaries of the project and the
Vagonu yard even side switches. The exact type of work, the scope and the boundary of the
reconstruction works will be determined during the design, as well as by taking into account the
progress in the design and construction of the Rail Baltica railway in the section from Lāčplēša
street towards the Šķirotava, and by taking into account the current project solutions in the Vagonu
yard area, in order to minimize the need for repeated SCB system reconstruction in the Vagonu yard
area and MPC unit, if possible.
In order to ensure the continuous operation of the locomotive signaling (automatic coding system
ALSN), the track circuits are encoded in the form of numerical codes. According to the Technical
regulations issued by "Latvijas Dzelzceļš", it is necessary to provide electronic coding which is
compatible with 50 Hz 25 kV alternating current electric traction (75 Hz digital codes), by taking
into account electromagnetic compatibility requirements. The actual need to switch to 75 Hz
coding occurs when the operation of alternating current electrification is started (Rail Baltica
railway line or LDz alternating current electrification), however 1435 mm electrification is not being
constructed in this project. Taking into account that the electrification for the Rail Baltica line will
be designed and constructed uniformly for the whole line, including in much wider section Imanta -
Šķirotava - Saurieši, in parallel with the existing 1520 mm railroad, the performer of SCB design
works during the design must coordinate with "Latvijas Dzelzceļš" the crossing points between the
existing numerical code coding with 50 Hz ALSN codes and the new track circuits with tonal coding
and 50 or 75 Hz ALSN codes, depending on the implementation stages of the project, as well as the
possibility of a later change-over to 75 Hz, simultaneously with the change over in the adjacent
sections of the 1520 mm railway line.
199
4.7.6. Requirements on design of 1435mm signalling subsystems
General
The present chapter describes the design works to be undertaken within the project for the 1435
mm gauge track signalling and station centralisation subsystem of the Riga Central Passenger
Station.
The signalling system of 1435 mm gauge track railway line shall be designed according to ERTMS
Level 2 (ERTMS L2) conditions. The plan shall include only infrastructure (duct and cable channels,
and similar structures), which is relevant for the construction of the railway line signalling system.
The centralized implementation of the signaling system (including the design and construction
works not subject to the Contractor’s responsibility) throughout the entire 1435mm gauge line shall
be performed by RB Rail AS. The Contractor’s obligation is to foresee and perform the necessary
preparatory work, including the design and construction of the necessary infrastructure for the
further implementation of the signaling system, as well as the Contractor is responsible for the
design of individual elements for the needs of a 1435mm gauge signaling system to the extent
necessary for the execution of contractual works. For the purposes of the 1435mm gauge signalling
system, the works to be performed by the Contractor and the restrictions thereof are defined in
section 2.3.
The following description of the signaling system is informative, that must be read in conjunction
with Rail Baltica Design Guidelines and used for the design of the necessary infrastructure.
Key requirements to the interlocking system
Interlocking systems shall be electronic (Solid State Interlocking -SSI), where the interlocking
function is enabled through software in specific control devices.
The interlockingsystem shall be of module type, easy to be replaced, extended.
Together with the Train Control System (European Train Control System - ETCS), the interlocking
system shall determine and guarantee smooth train traffic on rail tracks with the means of
signalling devices, switch control and monitoring, information exchange with train on-board
equipment, and by providing the momitoring system with relevant indicative information.
In the development of solutions, the Contractor shall consider the requirements of Rail Baltica
Design Guidelines.
The interlocking system shall operate in a secure, fail-safe mode, and stable: though control and
monitoring of rail switches, signalling devices, determining the number of running trains and
location thereof on particular track sections, by provision of transit train routes without conflicting
with other routes, and by sending information to trains. The whole formation of interlocking system
and its functions shall be fail-safe and stable, and shall guarantee at least Safety Integrity Level 4
(Safety Integrity Level - SIL).
200
Requirements as regards interlocking system
The blocking system shall have centralised control with an option to transfer the station or separate
switches to the local control.
Local station control shall be carried out from the staion master’s room, which is located on Rail
Baltica platform.
The interlocking system equipment shall be placed within premises, which are equipped with power
supply, are guaranteed the relevant micro climate, and have restricted access.
Some devices can be placed within local cabinets or containers.
To enable secure communication within SSI structure, reserve communication channels between
the principal SSI module and controller board of each device, cabinet shall be established.
ERTMS system
Rail Baltica railway line shall make use of Level 2, ETCS and GSM-R systems (or its successor),
according to actual TSI. ETCS and GSM-R solutions for the 1435 mm track will be elaborated by AS
“RB Rail”.
Train detection system
To control the track occupation at the station, axle counters (primary solution) or track circuits shall
be used.
Sections between stations shall use axle counters.
At the design of a railway station, the relevant division into track circuits and location of axle
counters shall be provided for; and considering that, channels to place cables.
The provisional plan for layout of insulating joints or axle counters on switches, station ends shall
be elaborated according to gauge clearence requirements on the nearby tracks, other tracks and
connections. Layout, type and number of insulating joints or axle counters shall be agreed upon
with the Employer during design.
On electrified tracks, the track circuits shall be able to endure return traction current.
Axle counters
Axle counter system shall meet the following requirements:
• Resistance to traction current and its harmonic components;
• Full resistance against interference and induction created by train brake system.
The axle counter sensors should be screwed onto the rail directly, without pads.
201
Signals
Signalling requirements imposed on Rail Baltica railway line will be elaborated by AS „RB Rail“. The
Contractor shall provide for preparatory works for the further installation of signals. For the station
entrance signal installation sites, the OCL sectioning solutions shall be taken into account,
considering the train stops at the entry stop signal (at the station border) at least 50 m before the
start of OCL sectioning bearing in mind the provisions for commencing movement.
Switch drives
All switches shall be motorised and connected to interlocking system. All switches shall have
lockable positions and position condition monitoring sensors.
Other requirements imposed on switch drives are described in the section on switches.
The Contractor shall provide for relevant preparatory works to further include switches in the
interlocking, including optional cable layout to control switches, monitoring and connect these to
track circuits.
4.8. Requirements on power supply systems
Introduction
The present chapter describes the design works to be undertaken within the project for the
reconstruction and construction of the Riga Central Passenger Station power supply. The present
chapter does not apply to OCL and traction power supply, which is referred to under Chapter 4.7.4.
Medium and low voltage supply
The design of railway line shall provide for power supply to railway infrastructure consumers both
at the station, and along the future railway line part. For the purposes of 1520 mm and 1435 mm
railway, separate (individual) systems shall be provided. As regards power supply of 1520 mm
railway consumers, the technical conditions issued by VAS „Latvijas dzelzceļš“ shall be considered.
The following (but not limited to) power consumers are at the station:
• Indoors signalling devices (interlocking and object controllers);
• Railway station devices along tracks (signals, switch heating devices, and similar);
• Public announcement (PA) system;
• GSM-R devices;
• Railway telecommunications system devices;
• Emergency signalling, fire signalling, fire extinguisher system;
• Video surveillance system;
• Lighting;
• Ventilation and air conditioning devices;
• Various administrative premises of railway infrastructure;
202
• Premises of other commercial entities (lessors) related to the servicing of passengers;
• Other devices.
Outside of the station, there are the following power consumers:
• Railway signalling and interlocking devices;
• Telecommunications systems;
• Video surveillance system;
• Other railway infrastructure objects outside station (such as lighting automation).
Other power consumers are possible.
Power supply of electric devices standing right next to the track, where possible, shall be enabled
via external power network (public grid), according to technical regulations issued by the manager
of enrgy supply network. To provide power supply of electric devices, contact lines, compact
transformer substations and power supply boards with commutation devices shall be developed.
Signalling and telecommunications systems shall be fed from 230 V line. During elaboration of the
project, it can be considered to construct higher voltage (~0,75..1 kV) power supply lines for remote
consumers at places, where it would be more feasible than 0.4 kV lines.
Key energy-intensive devices
Railway interlocking and signalling devices
The feeding of 1520 mm railway signalling system shall be ensured according to technical
conditions issued by VAS „Latvijas dzelzceļš“.
Signalling and telecommunications devices of the 1435 mm railway shall be provided with power
supply via the following energy sources:
• Railway 20 kV power supply lines;
• External (public) power supply network;
• From a back-up power supply diesel generator and/or rechargeable batteries, enabling 8-
hour operation.
In all cases, power supply of electric devices shall be provided via two sources – railway 20 kV line
and external power supply network.
Power supply system shall have at least two feeding systems:
• Network 1: via transformer, which is connected to railway 20 kV line and provides 230 V
+15 / - 30 % single phase AC, or via a respective AC line;
• Network 2: via public network or backup generator of 400 V +10 / -10 % three-phase AC.
Network 1 power shall be filtered and stabilised. Network 1 shall be equipped with filters and
stabilisation devices, which prevent interference from OCL, protects devices overvoltage, and
guarantees connected devices with stable voltage even in cases, when the OCL voltage is
fluctuating. Critical consumers (signalization, communications, protection devices, etc.) are
203
connected to Network 1, and non-critical consumers (air conditioning, etc.) are connected to
Network 2.
To switch feeding automatically from Network 1 to Network 2, a respective device and switchboard
shall be installed, which permanently controls voltage on both networks and provides devices with
the relevant and respective feeding voltage.
One of ERTMS system elements is the mobile communication system (GSM-R or its successor
system), and one of its components is the base station (BTS). Devices of this type shall be provided
power supply via 0.4 kV or increased voltage network. Considering the future developments of the
system at a later project stage, the power supply solutions shall provide for an option to enable
feeding of BTS at any of selected locations next to the line.
Power consumers at the station
Lighting of buildings
The feeding current of electric lighting is 400/230 V AC. The number of lights (luminosity) depends
on the necessary lighting, which shall comply with requirements of LVS EN 12464-1:2011.
Emergency lighting shall provide sufficient visibility in case of evacuation in the evacuation ways
and to identify fire extinguishing and safety equipment. Feeding for emergency lighting shall be
provided via rechargeable batteries ensuring lighting for at least 1 hour. Emergency lighting shall
be indicated also on the storey plans.
Outdoor lamps
Station, rail track, rail track yards and switch external lighting shall be provided according to
requirements of LVS EN 12464-2:2014. Lightning cannot interfere with perception of railway
signals.
Passenger platform lighting
Passenger platform lighting shall make use of LED technologies and shall be provided according to
requirements of LVS EN 12464-1:2011 and LVS EN 12464-2:2014. The envisaged luminaries need
to comply with the architecture solutions of the station.
Electric heating of switches
Automated heating system of switches is used to melt ice and snow on the switch and track
elements, to enable control and monitoring of heating elements and other system devices via
remote control. Automated heating system of switches is used to enable uninterrupted train traffic
during snowstorms.
The 1520 mm railway switches shall not be heated, instead of that switch blowing system shall be
used. As regards to this system, the technical conditions issued by VAS „Latvijas dzelzceļš“ shall
204
be considered. However, in case the need arise to heat the 1520 mm railway switches, then it and
the 1435 mm railway switch heating shall be provided by separate systems.
The system shall guarantee melting snow and ice at the blade and frame rail area, and for frogs
with movable core. Feeding thereof shall be provided via existing local sources of 0.4/ 0.23 kV AC.
The rail track and switches heating elements shall be connected to feeding devices via insulating
transformers. The transformer cabinet shall be installed not far from the heated switches. Feeding
cables from the switchboard are connected to heating elements mounted onto the switch. Even
distribution of heating elements by phases of the feeding network is required.
Electric heating of switches can be turned on, if:
a. rail temperature is below settings;
b. insulation resistance of 230V network does not drop below the standard.
Adjustment of rail temperature is enabled by temperature controllers, and a sensor is installed on
one of heated switches of the group. Marginal values of temperature are set depending on local
circumstances.
The automated device for insulation resistance monitoring protects employees against exposure
to electric current by switching off the feeding of heater transformer point. Reaction time does not
exceed 0.5 s.
To control and manage operation of switches heating, the premises of station master is equipped
with:
a. Switches to turn on and off the switch heating;
b. Heating operation indicator;
c. Indicator of the insulation condition. All new devices have to be developed and
integrated within a common control system.
Transformer points
The key device of transformer points shall be provided for at least the following elements/systems:
a. Input and 20/0.4 kV transformer feed cables;
b. Output 0.4 kV cables (and increased voltage, if such is used) to various consumers;
c. 2x160 kVA transformers with overvoltage protective devices, separators, busbars, feeder
lines, etc.;
d. Power consumption measurement devices;
e. Devices of buildings at transformer sites;
f. Remote control devices.
Power supply of auxiliary devices
Power supply of an auxiliary device shall be provided from 0.4 kV switchgear device. The switchgear
device shall be installed as a set consisting of input protection automation, automated switches
205
and power consumption measurement units. The following devices shall be connected to auxiliary
power supply network:
a. 20 kV socket heating;
b. 20 kV socket lighting;
c. 20 kV socket device runner control chains (through UPS);
d. 0.4 kV switchgear lighting;
e. Remote control switchgear.
Ventilation of transformer sites
Transformer points need to provide adequate ventilation based on calculations to remote the
heating produced by transformers.
Earthing
All transformer points shall be earthed through external earthing network. Earthing circuit shall be
connected to the metal switchgears of transformer points at two opposite edges. Total resistance
of earthing circuit shall be at least 2.5 Ω irrespective of the season.
Crossings with other communications
At places where rail track is constructed or reconstructed, the protection or reconstruction of cables
crossed shall be provided for. If the existing contact lines cannot be deepened, the respective
section of cables shall be extended.
Earthing and overvoltage protection
The earthing system shall provide:
a. Employee protection against overvoltage both at normal operation, emergency, and in
cases of short circuit;
b. Protection from atmospheric overvoltage;
c. Operating protection in case the OCL is torn;
d. Limiting inductive interruptions in signalling cables and for communication lines, which are
constructed running parallel to OCL.
All metal elements, structures, displays and armours, which are located closer than 5 m from the
outer wire (of OCL) projection to ground shall be connected to the earthing system or an individual
earthing circuit.
Devices, which are installed in tunnels, on bridges, overpasses, stations, shall be subject to earthing
by connecting the existing metal structure to earthing.
206
For metal structures located at greater distance shall also be developed individual earthing systems
or individual earthing circuits.
Earthing network in railways with OCL shall be developed as close, low-resistance connections
between metal structures and earthing circuit to conduct the emerged uncontrolled overvoltages,
to prevent potential gap.
The following can be used as earthing system:
• System of OCL supports for the elements placed along railway line;
• Devices and other metal elements installed in technical buildings shall be connected to
earthing circuit. An earthing network connecting all metal structures shall be installed within
all buildings. Earthing circuit of buildings shall be connected to nearby supports of OCL.
The connections shall be developed in a way for the earthing resistance not to exceed 5 Ω.
Earthing devices of rail tracks shall be developed in a way not to hinder track operation and
maintenance works, i.e., not to hinder track maintenance by mechanisms. Earthing elements shall
be developed in a way not to affect the operation of signalling devices.
4.8.1. Requirements on low current systems
Introduction
The present chapter describes the design works to be undertaken within the Project for the
reconstruction and construction of the Riga Central Passenger Station low current power system.
The present chapter does not apply to railway signalling and traffic control system, which is
described in the respective other chapters.
General requirements
1435 mm railway network telecommunications, video surveillance, passenger information and
notification systems and other low current systems will be elaborated according to Rail Baltica
Design Guidelines requirements.
1520 mm railway network telecommunications, video surveillance, passenger information and
notification systems and other low intensity current systems will be elaborated according to VAS
“Latvijas dzelzceļš” requirements.
As regards the passenger information system, video surveillance system the integration of both
(1520 mm and 1435 mm) systems shall be provided.
The task of the Contractor is to provide for relevant preparatory works for future placement of
telecommunication systems and other low current systems, solutions shall be communicated with
Employer during the design stage. These preparatory works include solutions, which allow for
installation of system elements, leading the relevant data exchange and feeding cables in the
territory of the station, especially in the passenger building and platform area.
207
4.9. Work organization plans
The Contractor shall elaborate Work Organisation Plans (hereinafter – DOP) according to CoM
Regulations No. 529 „Construction regulations for buildings“ of 01/10/2014 and CoM Regulations
No. 530 „Railway Construction Regulations“ of 01/10/2014. DOP shall be a significant part of the
Detailed Technical Design to be elaborated, and besides statutory requirements it shall include also
the following:
- Detailed time schedules for the works to be undertaken;
- If the preparatory works of construction or the assembly works will be done beyond the
construction site, a scaled plan shall be elaborated depicting all resource supply and
ancillary production locations;
- All information (data, location, time) of the planned technological interruptions („outages“)
in train traffic;
- Labour Protection Plan according to special construction regulations (in Latvian: speciālie
būvnoteikumi) and CoM Regulations No. 92 „Operational safety requirements at
construction works“ of 25/02/2003 (in Latvian: Darba aizsardzības prasības, veicot
būvdarbus).
The Project Preparation Coordinator (in Latvian: projekta sagatavošanas koordinators) and Project
Execution Coordinator (in Latvian: projekta izpildes koordinators) responsibilities fulfilment along
with the relevant staff according to CoM Regulations No. 92 „Operational safety requirements at
construction works“ of 25/02/2003 is ensured by the Contractor.
Master plan of DOP shall contain references to structures, utilities and tracks in service, the
operation of which is not suspended during reconstruction or renovation works, as well as
references to structures, utilities and tracks, the operation of which is suspended temporarily or
completely.
The explanatory description of DOP shall contain references to measures, which shall be
undertaken in order not to impair the key functions of respective objects (e.g., train traffic, power
supply, signalling and communications), and the procedures for operation of railway experts of the
Contractor.
Before transferring the Detailed Technical Design to the confirmations according to statutory
procedures, the Contractor shall confirm the DOP with the operator or owner of the property, with
the Enginner and the Employer.
208
5. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
5.1. Introduction
This Section describes Employer’s requirements for construction works, methods or used
materials. As far as necessary, the Contractor shall follow the requirements also during elaboration
of Detailed Technical Design.
5.2. General requirements
The construction works shall be performed in a technically and economically justified,
environmentally acceptable and safe way.
The Contractor must be registered in the Register of Construction Merchants in compliance with the Cabinet Regulations as of 01.10.2014 No. 116 „Regulations Regarding the Registration of Construction Merchants” and must have obtained the Safety Certificate pursuant to article 35 of the Railway Law.
In performing construction works, the following regulatory enactments of the Republic of Latvia governing Construction shall be observed: law „Construction Law”, the Cabinet Regulations as of 19.08.2014 No.500 „General Construction Regulations”, special construction regulations relating accordant buildings, the Cabinet Regulations as of 09.06.2015 regarding Latvian Building Standard LBN 202-15 “Content and Drawing up of Construction Design”, as well as other binding regulations.
Construction works may be commenced in accordance with the procedure prescribed by law only upon completion of all the provisions included in the construction permit, drawing up of the Work Performance Design and the Construction Supervision Plan elaborated by the construction supervisor based on the time schedule therein and approval thereof at the Construction Board/the State Railway Technical Inspectorate and according to procedure defined by the Contract.
For detailed requirements for elaboration of Work execution plan, see Section 5.3.1.
Construction works shall be performed under the supervision of a certified construction works
manager appointed by the Contractor and indicated in the Contractor’s Proposal.
The Contractor shall provide quality certificates and declarations of conformity for all materials
used and ensure that they are used according to the instructions given by their manufacturer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for organization of construction works on the construction site
in accordance with the Detailed Technical Design, DOP contained therein, Labour Protection Plan
and the Work Performance Design and for the consequences of the Contractor's orders.
The works shall be performed in high quality and shall comply with the approved Detailed Technical
Design and the Employer's requirements.
The Contractor shall carefully observe the effective regulations regarding work execution on railway
tracks and other railway structures.
Construction works in the railway land reserve shall be performed in accordance with the regulatory
documents in force at the SJSC "Latvijas dzelzceļš", incl. the instruction as of 05.04.2006 No. C-
209
123 "Performing works in the railway land reserve". The effective regulatory documents of the SJSC
“Latvijas dzelzceļš” are publicly available at www.ldz.lv.
For the purpose of performing works on or in immediate vicinity of railway tracks, SJSC "Latvijas
Dzelzceļš" may grant technological interruptions of train movement ("windows") in compliance with
the "Procedure for the allocation, use and cancellation of technological breaks ("windows")”
(approved by order No. D-3/538 of the Chairman of the Board of the SJSC "Latvijas Dzelzceļš" as
of 25 October 2010).
All construction works on the existing track or the existing railway structures shall be planned in
accordance with the Detailed Technical Design and DVP and coordinated in accordance with the
Contract. The Works shall be performed on the basis of a detailed Program approved according to
the procedure established by the Contract and the time schedule contained therein. All the
necessary „outages” in stations or railway lines must be announced beforehand and approved by
the Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and timely submission of the
application. Allocation of „outages” in the train timetable during work performance shall be also
coordinated with the Technology Division of the Technical Management Department of the JSC
„Latvijas dzelzceļš” (tel. 67234138, 67233734).
The Contractor shall ensure that the Cabinet Regulations as of 25.02.2003 No. 92 "Labour
Protection Requirements in Performing Construction Work" are followed. For detailed labour
protection and safety requirements, see Section 5.7.
When elaborating the Program (i.e., simultaneously with elaboration of the General Program and
the expanded Program respectively), the Contractor shall elaborate a monitoring program of the
buildings (requirements for monitoring and the list of the monitored buildings shall be established
by the Engineer) to be coordinated with the Engineer, the Employer and the representatives of the
owners of accordant buildings. The monitoring program shall ensure control of deformations of the
buildings to an extent ensuring their safe operation during construction works. During construction
period, the Contractor shall ensure fulfilment of this program.
Contractor’s equipment
The Contractor shall use equipment of quality not lower than the equipment offered by the
Contractor’s Proposal for performance of the works. The equipment, materials, construction
products, structures that are intended to be built-in within the scope of Works may not be removed
from the Construction site without the permission of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be obliged to determine the type, capacity and quantity of all the Contractor’s
devices, equipment in order to perform and complete the Works and eliminate deficiencies therein,
including, but not limited to:
a. All equipment, temporary works, materials, etc. of the Contractor that the Contractor has
received or uses on the construction site shall be complete, in good working condition, well
maintained, in excellent mechanical condition and suitable for work and in such a working
condition that the Contractor could perform works safely, timely and efficiently in
210
accordance with its own instructions of procedure and requirements of the Contract. The
Engineer shall perform inspection and acceptance of the equipment;
b. The Contractor shall immediately remove all equipment, temporary works, materials, etc.
of the Contractor that the Engineer has rejected as unsuitable and replace them for ones
acceptable to the Engineer without additional expenses to the Employer and without delays
in the Works time schedule;
c. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all employees have the necessary
licenses, qualifications or certificates to operate the equipment and shall cover all expenses
associated with obtaining of such licences, qualifications required for the work;
d. During performance of the Contract, the Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer
in writing of any defects, deficiencies or other events that may lead to decrease in capacity
of the Equipment specified in the regulations thereof. In such cases, the Contractor shall
review the Work program and, if possible, replace the Equipment that cannot ensure the
required capacity. The Engineer may request to remove and replace this equipment in such
cases;
e. The Contractor shall immediately take the necessary measures to ensure additional plant
or facility that may be necessary for proper and satisfactory completion of the Works in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract;
f. If the Contractor is requested to replace the equipment or additional equipment is requested
to be supplied, the Contractor shall do it without additional compensation.
5.3. Documents
5.3.1. Work performance design
In accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall elaborate Work performance designs
(hereinafter referred to as DVP) and submit them to the Employer and the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall elaborate the DVPs in accordance with the requirements of the Cabinet
Regulations No. 655 as of 21.10.2014 Regulations regarding the Latvian Construction Standard
LBN 310-14 „Work Performance Design”, as well as the requirements of the general and accordant
specific construction regulations and other binding regulations. The DVPs shall be elaborated for
the entire construction site, as well as individual DVPs in accordance with the construction permits
and division of Sections (rounds) or instructions of the Engineer. The DVPs shall contain
information required by the binding regulations, as well as:
• Locations, areas, etc. of office premises, warehouses for storing various materials and
equipment that the Contractor intends to use;
• Solutions and disposal sites offered by the Contractor for disposal of water accumulated
as a result of dewatering trenches etc.;
• Location offered by the Contractor for placement of a concrete mixer when such facility is
necessary, indicating places where the materials would be stored and routes that will be
used by the trucks;
211
• Traffic organization plan coordinated with the responsible services including information
about the bypasses planned to be used for traffic diversion so as not to interfere with
performance of Works, and about the planned labour protection measures;
• Description of methods planned to be used for performance of construction works;
• Detailed Labour protection requirements stating procedures for prevention of possible
accidents during performance of the Works, including a position for labour protection
engineer, first aid procedures, etc.;
• Location of large-format information stands at Work execution sites and dimensions of the
stands offered by the Contractor;
• Information about planned works if they affect interests of the residents, procedure for
informing about traffic or other disturbances;
• Other information required at the request of the Engineer or at the discretion of the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit the DVP to the Engineer for approval according to the procedure by
Contract, including submission in electronic form. DVP shall contain any amendments or additions
reasonably requested by the Engineer. From the moment when the Engineer approves DVP, the
Contractor shall ensure complete implementation of DVP. The Contractor may make any changes
in its operations only with prior written permission of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the offered temporary arrangement of the
site and the layout of the areas of stored materials, detailed and with all dimensions (based on the
master plan of construction works, drawings and information provided) indicating access roads to
and in the construction site, fences and gates (only if necessary), location of offices of the
Contractor with amenities, detailed information, staff amenities, including canteen equipment,
sanitary facilities, location of fire and first aid posts, etc., storage areas and all other things
necessary for execution of the Contract.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed drawings as described in the DVP 60 days
before commencement of Construction works for all temporary technical equipment. The operation
cannot be commenced without the Engineer’s approval.
28 days before submission of the final DVP to the authority or experts, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer for approval the layout of the buildings on the site and the security plan, as well as
any changes or movements that afterwards indicate layout of the buildings of the Contractor on
the site proposed by the Contractor.
Placement of equipment in the DVP shall provide clear, complete information about location,
capacity etc. and include the following elements, but not limited to:
1. Temporary equipment, including buildings, fences and gates;
2. Equipment, warehouse areas;
3. Access to other contractors, visitors, etc .;
4. Types and locations of temporary fire-fighting equipment.
212
Location of the Contractor’s site offices and warehouse area shall be indicated in the drawings
(general location only). The final placement shall be approved by the Engineer.
Method statements for particular works Within 28 days before commencement of the accordant activity on the site, the Contractor shall
submit to the Employer and the Engineer a detailed method statement for each activity. Such
method statement shall include at least the following information:
1. Stages of execution of activities;
2. Organization of execution of activities ;
3. List of the necessary equipment and materials;
4. Planning the schedule for the accordant activity, indicating the test date and presence of the
Engineer on the site;
5. List of tests for the accordant activity;
6. Allocation and determination of resources for implementation of the activity (labor force,
equipment and materials).
5.3.2. Report on construction methods
Based on the accepted Detailed Technical Design, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the
Engineer a Report on construction methods. This Report shall, as a minimum, include:
1) An overview of how the Employer’s requirements will be met;
2) Activity plan for construction and installation of each element, system or part of the Works;
3) Description of the method of implementation of the related activities and the activities;
4) A list of the basic resources to be used, including the Contractor‘s equipment, facilities and
personnel;
5) An overview of construction and installation methods of elements, systems and parts of
the Works;
6) Procurement plan, including names of suppliers of materials and equipment, and delivery
times;
7) Logistics statement that shall, as a minimum, include:
• access to the construction site and the work area with scale plans;
• supply and delivery of materials and equipment to the site, including delivery schedules;
8) A quality plan regarding construction and installation works, a list;
9) The amount of soil that needs to be excavated, transported and used for filling;
10) Procedure and methods of debris management;
11) An overview of the environmental impact of works;
12) An overview of work organization measures with scale plans for ensuring environmental
accessibility requirements during construction works.
213
The Report on construction methods shall include all parts of works - earthworks, tracks, power
supply system, buildings and structures, railway engineering structures, etc. The Report shall be
submitted in a timely manner, coordinating the time and amount with the Engineer.
With the agreement of the Engineer, the Report on construction methods can be combined with the
Programme for construction works (Chapter 3.5.1).
5.3.3. Construction works execution documents
Documents on execution of construction works (such as logbook and any electronically completed
documents) shall be considered Work execution documents reflecting progress of the works in the
work execution place from the beginning thereof and during the entire period of performance of the
Contract. During construction works, the Contractor (including the responsible designers and the
responsible construction managers), within the scope of their competence, shall make marks in the
work execution documents in accordance with the procedure established by the regulatory
enactments.
The construction work logbook shall be completed for each construction object (according to
instructions by Engineer) managed by a separate responsible construction work manager. All
entries in the journals shall be made legibly in the official language.
The Contractor shall fill in the construction work logbook in accordance with the instructions given
in the logbook, making daily records of the works being performed, work methods, materials and
measures on the Construction site, as well as the temperature and climatic conditions affecting the
works. The Logbook shall be signed by the construction work manager. The Logbooks shall be
available at the construction site for inspections. Construction work logbook records are subjected
to inspection of the Engineer and organizations controlling construction.
If special work not included in the construction works logbook must be performed on the site, its
registration shall be determined by the Contractor (main performer of the works) after coordination
with the respective individual performer of construction works (subcontractor), the developer of the
Detailed Technical Design and the initiator of Construction (the Employer), or shall be drawn up as
an acceptance certificate of hidden (covered) works and recorded in the construction works
logbook.
Prior to commissioning of the object, the construction works logbook together with the as-built
documents shall be transferred to the Employer for storage, except if accordant documents are
available in the Construction Information System (BIS).
During the Works, the Contractor shall continually maintain complete and accurate documentation
of all changes and deviations from the Contract documents that shall be kept on the construction
site for the Employer and/or Engineer to check.
214
5.3.4. Taking-over documentation
For general requirements for taking over process, documents and as-built documentation, see the
Contract provisions and Section 3.5.3 of this Technical Specification, as well as consider the
requirements of the regulatory enactments.
Railway infrastructure, bridges, overpasses
Prior to construction, owner of the bridge or overpass shall han-over and the Contractor shall take
over the construction site in accordance with the construction site taking over certificate of the
special construction regulations "Regulations on Construction of Roads and Streets" (in Latvian:
Autoceļu un ielu būvnoteikumi) (Annex 2) specifying the responsibility of the Contractor for
organization of traffic and maintenance of the construction site in the amount established by the
Contract.
Statement of acceptance of hidden (covered) works in accordance with the special building regulations "Railway Construction Regulations" Annex 10 shall be prepared for all structures that are covered with other constructive layers during construction works. The Employer and Engineer shall also be present at the acceptance of the covered works in addition to the Contractor.
Upon completion of the construction works, a report on completion of construction works (Railway Construction Regulations, Annex 14) and a statement on commissioning of the railway infrastructure construction site (Railway Construction Regulations, Annex 13) shall be prepared. The Contractor shall hand over and the Employer shall accept the renewed site of the structure (part of the structure). Upon signing of the commissioning statement of the construction site of the railway infrastructure, the Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of the site and organization of traffic ends.
The Contractor shall prepare survey documents of the completed construction works and hand
them over to the Employer not later than within 20 days after completion of construction works.
5.4. Organization of the construction site
5.4.1. Temporary structures, premises and equipment
General
The Contractor shall install, maintain and, upon the request of the Engineer or when finishing the
Works, demolish all temporary structures necessary for the work equipment or other needs.
The Contractor shall ensure all temporary structures for its own needs and the needs of its
subcontractors, including offices, dressing rooms, toilets, showers, warehouses and other
temporary buildings necessary for execution of construction works.
Permanent buildings or equipment on the site cannot be used as offices or for storage of materials
(construction products, equipment) without the Engineer’s permission.
Temporary works of construction site arrangement shall be performed, maintained, operated and
moved as required in the course of works and upon the request of the Engineer at the expense of
215
the Contractor. Until the date of issue of the Work confirmation, everything shall be removed and
the areas concerned - cleaned, and everything shall be arranged in accordance with the instructions
of the Engineer.
All temporary equipment shall be installed in accordance with the standards of similar permanent
equipment.
The Contractor shall ensure and maintain all temporary connections to utilities and
communications at locations acceptable to the Engineer and duly authorized local authorities. All
installations shall be performed so that they were accepted by these authorities and the Engineer.
This equipment shall be in good working condition until further instructions from the Engineer. At
the end of construction works, temporary installations and connections shall be removed and
correct working conditions of the utilities and supply sources shall be restored.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining permissions from the accordant parties and
institutions for installation of all temporary equipment.
The Contractor shall ensure tight temporary closing of openings of the exterior surfaces of the
buildings (for example, windows and doors) in order to maintain certain internal working conditions,
to protect the products and completed works from adverse weather conditions.
Temporary fence
Contractor shall perform installation, maintenance and removal of temporary fence. Fence is
needed to prevent public entry, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from
damage for the proper execution of the work.
Height of fence has to be 2,5m, enclosing each area where shall be executed works, and/or
located storage and/or site office areas as specified for the duration of the Project.
The safety fence and gates should be positioned to comply with the following requirements:
1. To fully enclose the area of works around the "limit of the contract" lines where works are
ongoing in specific moment;
2. To provide sufficient and secure access gates as necessary;
3. To make any adjustments as necessary to suit the various phases of the Works, and to suit
the Contractor's approved Construction Schedule;
4. To fully enclose the Project field offices and sheds;
5. To comply with any instructions of the Employer or Engineer in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract documents.
Contractor shall submit to approval the Engineer prior to submission of DVP for approval of design
set of phase and works shop drawings showing for each phase of works position of fences areas
and guarded access and layout, details of construction, foundations, sizes of fence and gates and
automatic barrieres and tourniquets.
216
Fence shall be designed in accordance with statutory requirements and instructions of the Engineer
and to withstand wind load with basic value of vb0=24m/s. Fence shall withstand weathering, fading,
and chipping for duration of Project execution.
All areas where works are forecasted to last more than 2 month shall be fenced using material
with following specification:
1. The fence panels shall be fitted to form a total enclosure with vision windows. Posts shall
be at maximum 2.4m centres, set in concrete foundation minimum size 450 x 450 x 450mm.
2. Fence support poles shall be galvanized
3. Fence panels shall be galvanized fixed in way to not be easily disassembled by vandalism
act and finished with anti tag painting
4. The fence shall be fitted with hinged and lockable accesses for vehicles. The access shall
be minimum 5 meters wide and shall match the fence. Each access shall be equipped:
a. with galvanized gate shall be forecast main gate 5m for traffic equipped with
electric barrier badge controlled;
b. sided by small gate 2 m large for public access.
Contractor is responsible for temporary fence and gates to works execution and storage areas and
temporary WCs and workshop areas. Appropriate fences around dangerous uncovered zones,
openings in slabs, stairwells, trenches etc shall be set up.
Each access shall be equipped with biometric registration control and data of biometric control
shall be transmittable every day to Engineer. Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain
licence permits and pay any fees in relation with the work herein.
The contractor shall maintain the fences during progress of work, wash and repaint painted
surfaces semi-annually at request of Engineer. The Contractor shall relocate and extend the fences
during successive stages of construction and is authorized to use already installed material used
in other areas only having received prior written approval of Engineer.
Contractor shall remove temporary materials, equipment, and construction and foundation at
temporary handover, repair damage caused by installation or use of barricades and enclosures.
Contractor shall Provide adequate safety barriers, guard rails, handrails, and covers for trenches,
openings as required by the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.
All area where works are forecasted to last less than 2 month may be enclosed with temporary
fence net 100x200mm galvanized supported on concrete plots high 2,2 meter minimum.
Access in this area maybe done trough defined and approved by Engineer removable section but
also for this area shall be equipped with budged reader and each person present in area shall
register at entrance and at exit using badge biometric system.
All fence perimeter shall be equipped with camera covering all perimeter of fence. Camera shall
be installed also at each entrance gate in way to allow good vision of vehicle and people entering
on site. Video shall be recorded and archived for 6 month and submitted to Engineer together with
monthly report.
217
Each access both equipped with fixed or removable fence shall be guarded:
1. From 7:00 till 20:00 in evening by one guard from each entrance;
2. From 20:00 till 7:00 in morning all access a part the main one shall be closed and locked;
3. On main gate one guard having vison on each of the camera shall be kept from 20:00 till
7:00 am;
4. From 20:00 till 7:00 am 2 guards shall inspect at regular intervals all perimeter of fence.
At least one responsible person appointed by the Contractor shall be on the duty by the transport
access gateway from 7:00 to 20:00 and shall organize access and movement of transport in the
construction site.
Contractor Shall remove safety fence and gates at completion of the Project after getting
permission from the Engineer. Foundation shall be removed and ground surface shall be restored
according to requests of Engineer and Authorities or Employer and the solutions of territory
improvements as per Detailed Technical Design.
Warehouses and equipment
Storage and protection of the Goods (including materials, facilities and equipment) shall be ensured
in appropriate and correct manner in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure and maintain suitable waterproof storage utilities for materials on the
construction site or in the vicinity thereof if they can be damaged by open storage, and shall provide
adequate fire protection in accordance with the approval of the Engineer.
Upon completion of the Works or upon the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove all
temporary storage equipment, facilities and restore the areas to their previous condition according
to the instructions of the Engineer.
Engineer and Employer accomodation
Contractor shall provide and maintain, throughout the period of construction, fully heated and air
conditioned accommodation for the use of the Engineer and Employer.
Design, supply and erect or rent in accordance with statutory requirements and instructions of the
Engineer the Project’s field offices and sheds. Contractor shall obtain approvals from authorities
having jurisdiction, pay related fees and provide guarantees as required.
Prior to procurement the Contractor shall submit for Engineer’s review and approval, copies of
manufacturer's specifications for all field offices and equipment substantiating that products
comply with the requirements or respective land book documentation in case of rented premises.
Prior to respective procurement Contractor shall submit layout plans for all field offices to Engineer
for review and approval.
218
Contractor shall supply, erect, connect, operate, and maintain fully the Site offices for the Engineer
throughout the Contract period until demobilization from site. Office can be prepared in portable or
mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to
foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors.
Accomodation shall be structurally sound, secured, weather tight enclosures for office and storage-
spaces. Temperature transmission resistance of floors, walls, and ceilings must be compatible with
occupancy and storage requirements. Exterior materials shall be weather‑resistant, and heat
insulated finished in one colour accepted by Engineer.
Interior materials shall be sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, heat and sound insulated
pre‑finished or painted, resilient floors and bases. Provide false ceiling and recessed type light
fittings in all rooms. Lightning shall be provided to all rooms, 500 Lux at desk‑top height, exterior
lighting at entrance doors.
Appropriate type fire extinguisher shall be at each office area and each storage area. Comply with
authorities’ regulations. Interior materials in storage areas shall be as required to provide specified
conditions for storage of products.
Windows shall be minimum of size approx. 10% of floor area with operable sash and insect
screens. Locate according to approved shop drawings to provide views of construction area
wherever practical. All windows shall be provided with venetian blinds.
Electrical Distribution Panel must be MCB and number of ways as required. Minimum four, 13A,
240 volt, single convenience outlets, one on each wall of each room.
All furniture and equipment shall be new and assebmled and including maintenance.
Microclimate and lighting
Heating, Cooling and Ventilating for all offices: Automatic equipment to maintain comfortable
conditions of 20 degrees C heating and 23 degrees C Cooling by split unit A/C system with built‑in
heating element.
Ventilation shall be as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents;
adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of products.
Exhaust fan with automatic shutter, one per each W.C. (fitting), kitchen and meeting rooms.
Engineer’s offices
30 days prior to starting of works on site Contractor shall provide site offices for sole use of the
Engineer and Employer as following content of this specification located not more than 100 meter
from central station or within forecasted fenced area with new lock and three keys to main entrance.
Provide one sign board 1sq. m. with Latvian and English lettering to indicate the offices.
Contractor shll Install office spaces ready for occupancy and fully equipped, provide electricity,
bottled gas (if required) and water and drinking water supplies, daily janitorial services for offices
219
and sanitary facilities including daily cleaning, vacuuming and dusting and maintenance for office
and storage areas, maintain and clean etc. equipment and furnishings for Contract period and
maintain approach walks free of mud and water and snow.
Contractor shall submit the respective shop drawings for the approval of the Engineer before
placing the order for the site offices, furniture and Equipment.
Employer’s representative rooms (two rooms of 32 sq. m. area) shall have the following furniture
each:
1. Managerial desk, size 1800x800mm approx. including armchair
2. Credenza size 1000 x 600mm
3. Table 2000x1000mm with 4 chairs
4. 4 Drawer vertical file cabinet with sling type suspension system
5. Two bookshelves slide door cabinet
6. Tack board (fibreboard) size 2400 x 1200mm approx.
7. 2 Sets of 3 filing trays
8. Mobile drawing racks
9. Plastic waste bin
Presentation room (approx. 120 sq. m.) area shall be equipped with the following office standard
furniture:
1 Conference table and chairs to seat 40 persons
2 Projection Screen with projector
3 40 inch Tv screen
4 2 Tack Board (Fibreboard) size 2400x1200mm approx.
5 2 Waste Plasic Bins
6 Black out blinds
7 Two bookshelves slide door cabinet
Engineer’s room (One room of 24 sq. m. area) shall be equipped with the following furniture:
1. Managerial desk, size 1800x800mm approx. including armchair
2. Side unit 1600x450x600mm approx.
3. Table 2000x1000mm for drawings
4. 4 Visitor Chairs
5. Tack Board (Fibreboard) size 2400x1200mm approx.
6. Three Drawer filing cabinet
7. Filing cabinet (glass fronted)
8. Plastic waste bin
Construction Supervisor’s room (one room of 24 sq. m. area) shall be equipped with the following
office standard furniture:
220
1. Desk size 1600x700mm approx. with side unit, with drawers including armchair
2. Table 2000x1000mm for drawings
3. 2 Visitor Chairs
4. Tack Board (Fibreboard) size 2400x1200mm approx.
5. Drawing Rack capacity six holders minimum
6. Filing cabinets with double door and four shelves
7. Plastic waste bin
Discipline Engineer’s (two rooms of 72 sq. m. area each) shall be equipped with the following
office standard furniture:
1. 3 Desks size 1600x700mm approx. with side unit, with drawers including armchair
2. Table 2000x1000mm for drawings
3. 3 Visitor Chairs
4. Tack Board (Fibreboard) size 2400x1200mm approx.
5. 3 Drawing Racks, capacity six holders minimum
6. 3 Filing cabinets with double door and four shelves
7. 3 Plastic waste bin
Quantity surveyors room (One room of 24 sq. m. area) shall be equipped with the following office
standard furniture:
1. Desk size 1600x700mm approx. with side unit, with drawers including armchair
2. Table 2000x1000mm for drawings
3. 2 Visitor Chairs
4. Tack Board (Fibreboard) size 2400x1200mm approx.
5. Drawing Rack capacity six holders minimum
6. Filing cabinets with double door and four shelves
7. Plastic waste bin
Secretary`s room (one room of 24 sq. m. area) shall b eequipped with the following office
standard furniture:
1. Desk size 1700x600mm approx. including armchair
2. Computer Side table
3. Table 2000x1000mm
4. Table for fax machine
5. 2 Visitor Chars
6. 4 Lockable fireproof steel filing cabinets each with hinged lockable doors and three
intermediate shelves, size 920x1800x450cm approx.
7. 2 Three Drawer filing cabinets
8. Waste Plastic Bin
221
Corridor shall have notification board with wood framing overall size 1200x600mm approx.
Conference room (approx. 30 sq. m.) area for twenty persons, shall be equipped with the
following office standard furniture:
1. Conference table and chairs to seat 20 persons
2. Projection Screen
3. 2 Tack Boards (Fibreboard) size 2400x1200mm approx.
4. Telephone table or shelf
5. 2 Waste Plastic Bin
6. Black out blinds
Sample/storage and archive room (40 sq. m.) shall have complete shelving of 30cm wide and
210cm high, in six tiers covering the whole room perimeter. Room shall have 12 steel filing
cabinets each with hinged lockable doors and three intermediate shelves, size 920x1800x450cm
approx.
Kitchen 40 m2 suitable size, and shall be containing:
1. Refrigerator with freezer compartment (h= 1,8 m., single door)
2. Big waste bin with plastic cover
3. Min. 1200mm length floor cabinet with stainless steel sink, with hot and cold water, and
1200mm long wall cabinet
4. Cooker range - 4 hot -plates electric and 1 unit gas with table, gas cylinder and connection
5. Crockery, kitchen ware, cutlery and glassware; for making and serving refreshments
6. Water filter with spares
7. Water Cooler
8. Vacuum cleaner
9. Microwave oven
10. 60 cm dishwashing machine
Washrooms/toilets:
For male toilets, suitable size, include the following fixtures: 4 western WC, each with toilet roll
holder, coat hooks, 2 wash basins with hot and cold water supplies, 2 paper towel holders, 2 mirrors
60 x 50cm, 2 urinals, 12 waste paper bins, 1 shower.
For female toilet (at least 3 sq. m.) shall include the following fixtures: western WC, each with toilet
roll holder, coat hook, 1 wash shower with hot and cold water supplies, 1 paper towel holder, 1
mirror 60x50cm, 1 waste paper bin.
222
Contractor shall provide high speed internet access for Engineer’s and Employer’s office.
Miscellaneous:
1. Air Conditioning: to all staff rooms, split unit A/C system for heating and cooling.
2. Lighting: fluorescent lighting for all rooms.
3. Plumbing and Drainage: As required to provide workable systems acceptable to the
Engineer.
4. All windows to be fitted with Venetian blinds.
Contractor shall provide paper and all consumables for photocopiers, fax machine, computers,
camera, plotters and printers including memory sticks, batteries and the like.
Also, Contractor shall provide stationery items for each member of staff, maintenance service for
all equipment of photocopiers, computers, printers, camera, network, and fax machine, adequate
number of files and box files of different sizes.
Parkings
The Contractor shall ensure or build temporary parking lot for construction personnel. The
Contractor shall ensure that at least 20% of the available temporary parking lot (but not less than 1
parking space) is available to the Engineer for free use. Location of the parking lot shall impact
urban infrastructure as less as possible.
The Contractor shall maintain traffic and parking areas, including the ones used by the Engineer, in
good condition, free from excavated materials, construction equipment, products and mud and
snow.
Termination of provision, servicing and removal
The Contractor, in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer, shall terminate provision of the
specified temporary equipment and services if their use is no longer required or they interfere with
the progress of the Works.
According to the instructions of the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove and clean temporary
equipment, communications, control devices, materials and various other things. According to the
instructions of the Engineer, the initial condition of the area, premises and surfaces shall be
restored or the indicated and specified finishing shall be performed.
223
Protection of current construction site elements
Trees and bushes: Protect the remaining trees and bushes with the help of fences or other approved
means. If the roots of the existing, preserved trees hinder installation of new pavements and other
objects, they shall be cut or pressed down so as not to damage the trees.
Streets, borders and sidewalks: Protect existing streets, roads, borders, sidewalks and other
existing elements on the street that will not be demolished. Repair and replace, without additional
expense for the Employer, parts that could be damaged as a result of the Works. Repair or
replacement shall be performed according to the instructions of the Engineer.
Whatever equipmet for existing railways present on site shall be protected and cannot be
dismanted without prior instruction from Engineer. Contractor at starting of works of each Section
shall submit to Enginner drawings with inventory of equipment and within 30 days before starting
of works submit proposal for inventory protection measures acceptable by LDZ.
Lighting and power supply
The Contractor shall take all measures to ensure temporary provision of electricity at the Work
execution site, at the construction site, shall cover all expenses, shall provide all necessary
equipment for temporary power supply and lighting. Power supply shall have the capacity suitable
for all construction tools and equipment (including welding equipment) that would not overload
temporary equipment, and shall be available for electric, lighting and construction works of
workers of all sectors and for all Subcontractors, contractors free of charge. If temporary supply
is not provided by local authorities, the Contractor itself shall arrange power supply to perform the
Works.
Distribution of power supply for all types of electric tools shall be ensured as needed, throughout
the Works. Electricity distribution plugs shall be provided at locations approved by the Engineer.
Along with the plugs, interrupters, switches and other electrical devices necessary for protection
of the power supply system and its safe use shall be ensured.
Temporary lighting system shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor as necessary to
meet the minimum safety and security requirements. Temporary lighting system shall ensure
suitable lighting at all locations where works are performed by Subcontractor, contractor. If works
are performed in dark, at night, increase the level of illumination up to appropriate safe level for
the relevant works. The Contractor shall ensure suitable outdoor lighting to illuminate scaffolds,
trenches, under the roof, etc., in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer, as well as
general lighting everywhere, suitable for guards and emergency services and for all other people.
Temporary equipment and wiring of power supply and lighting shall comply with the accordant
regulations and standards. Maintenance of temporary wiring shall be performed safely, and used
so as not to endanger people or property.
After completing the works, all temporary electrical equipment and wiring shall be removed in
accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.
224
Water supply
The Contractor shall ensure suitable water supply for all construction works, temporary
construction requirements and fire-fighting equipment. Water supply shall be ensured by the
Contractor. The Contractor itself shall arrange water supply in the necessary amount and quality
according to the needs of Works. All water shall be clean, clear, drinkable and free from harmful
substances. Water outlets shall be installed in convenient locations on the construction site, at
ground level, so that they can be used by experts of all sectors, including subcontractors. Ensure
supply of drinking water of acceptable quality suitable for workers from approved source.
The Contractor shall ensure and maintain water distribution network to various outlets, including
storage tanks, pumps, etc., and to all necessary hot and/or cold water plumbing installations
necessary in temporary buildings.
Once permanent drinking water supply and distribution system is installed, it can be used as a
source of water for construction purposes, provided that the Contractor obtains a written
permission of the Employer and assumes full responsibility for the consumption costs and the
entire water distribution system.
Temporary pipelines and connection from the fixed line, both outside the building, the Works
execution site and inside, necessary for the Contractor, its subcontractors, individual construction
workers shall be installed, protected and maintained by the Contractor, following the approval of
the Engineer.
After completing the works or upon the instructions of the Engineer, all temporary water supply
installations and equipment shall be removed and all worn or damaged parts of the permanent
systems shall be replaced in order to leave the system in excellent condition equivalent to new one.
Construction works equipment
If necessary, the Contractor shall ensure temporary lifting mechanisms approved by the Engineer
to facilitate performance of the Works. Such lifting mechanisms shall be installed and maintained
in accordance with the Cabinet Regulations No.526 as of 9.12.2002 „Labor protection requirements
when using work equipment" and other regulatory requirements. Mechanisms for lifting of material
should not be used to move personnel.
Personnel lifting mechanisms shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the provisions
of the Applicable Law.
All lifting mechanisms shall be installed, maintained and removed so as not to damage, stain or
distort permanent work. Permanent cargo lifts installed for the Works may be used only for lifting
of materials during construction and only with appropriate protective equipment approved by the
Engineer, and damaged parts must be repaired and replaced.
225
The Contractor shall ensure and maintain all equipment, such as temporary stairs, scaffolding,
ladders, ramps, tracks, gutters, tower cranes and/or other lifting devices, etc. as necessary for
correct and timely execution of Works.
As soon as permanent staircases are built, temporary safety covering of steps and railing shall be
installed.
The Contractor shall take into account that scaffolding, etc. must be ensured both for performance
of its own works and works of the subcontractors employed within the framework of the Contract,
including the equipment necessary for performance of the works of subcontractors only. All
scaffolds and equipment shall be installed and used in accordance with the accordant regulatory
enactments of Latvia.
Sanitary / toilet equipment of the construction site
The Contractor shall ensure sufficient amount of prefabricated structures, such as site toilets with
all the necessary plumbing, power and ventilation connections necessary for performance of the
system. Location and moving shall be approved by the Engineer. Toilet facilities shall comply with
the permission of the Riga Municipality and the Public Health Agency.
Toilets shall be kept clean, hygienic and provided with soap, detergents and cleaning products.
The Contractor shall remove and dismantle all structures, buildings, containers, hatches, pits,
making the Works execution site clean and tidy, as and when the Engineer requires it.
The Contractor shall comply with the regulations of the municipality and health authorities and
ensure that the equipment is ready for inspection by these authorities at any time.
Changing rooms
The Contractor shall ensure sufficient number of rooms for clothes and personal things on the
construction site, equipped in accordance with the requirements of the regulatory enactments.
In case such premises would be located in existing neibourhood, Contractor shall provide Engineer
with layout plan and pictures of accomodation to verify adequacy to number of workers on site and
shall allow Engineer to visit and inspect such premises if required.
The Contractor shall ensure that hygiene requirements of local health authorities and the Engineer
are observed in all kitchen and canteen premises.
Food prepared in all kitchens shall be prepared and served in accordance with the requirements of
the regulatory enactments and relevant health authorities. All kitchens shall be available for hygiene
checks by the appropriate authorities.
Moving or removal of premises shall be performed in accordance with the instructions of the
Engineer without additional costs to the Employer.
226
Temporary sewerage
When assuming ownership of the construction site, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility
for drainage of rainwater, groundwater and water, waste water of construction works. Also, the
Contractor shall ensure and maintain temporary drainage installations that might be required during
construction, as approved by the Engineer, and in such a way as not to negatively affect permanent
works or adjacent territories and properties.
Temporary drainage (rainwater and contaminated water) installations may be connected to the
existing sewage system provided that a written permit from the local competent authorities is
obtained and these connection works are performed and maintained at the expense of the
Contractor and strictly in accordance with the regulations and instructions of these authorities.
After completing the works or upon the instructions of the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove
all temporary drainage installations and arrange the existing ones according to the instructions of
the Engineer and as required by the authorities involved.
5.4.2. Information stands
The Contractor shall prepare and place information stands on the construction site according to
the Applicable Law and instructions by Engineer and Employer. The stands shall be installed before
commencement of construction works. Prior to installing, the information, presentation and
placement of the stands shall be coordinated with the State Railway Technical Inspectorate, the
Riga City Construction Board and the Employer.
Any posters or notices without Employer’s approval are not allowed on the construction site.
5.4.3. Mobilization
The requirements apply to all works connected with delivery of all equipment, facilities and
structures necessary for construction works to the construction site, as well as maintenance and
demolition of the construction site after completion of construction works, transporting the
equipment, machinery, structures and other necessary items to the place chosen by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall elaborate plans for mobilization, construction site arrangement, construction
site equipment, as well as site demolition plan after completion of the works that shall be
coordinated with the Engineer prior to establishment of the construction site and commencement
of construction works.
The Contractor shall establish a construction site compliant with the sanitary and safety standards
suitable for placement of the necessary auxiliary buildings. The Contractor shall establish access
roads compliant with traffic safety to work areas, production and utility areas, as well as
connections of the necessary utilities (water, power, communications). The Contractor shall duly
inform all interested organizations and landowners about the location and access conditions of the
accordant construction site.
227
The Contractor shall take into account the effective regulations governing mobilization of
construction sites in construction territory.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring power, water supply and other necessary
connections for establishment of the construction site and the place of work execution.
The Contractor shall perform enclosing and guarding of the territory of construction site. Additional
fencing shall be installed along deep foundation pits (H>2 m) and along the fixed axe marking or
other geodetic points. When performing constructing works in areas connected with the city
infrastructure (on street carriageways, sidewalks, etc.), work sites shall be enclosed with safe,
strong, easily noticeable fencing that would prevent accidental entry of unauthorized persons into
the territory of construction works.
5.4.4. Establishment, maintenance and recultivation of the construction site
Prior to commencement of works, the Contractor shall obtain the intended construction site by
concluding accordant land use agreement with the owner of the land plot, as well as drawing up an
take-over certificate of the construction site.
The Contractor may use the land in the land plots specified in the Construction Intention. Works in
the railway reserve area shall be performed in accordance with the work execution program
coordinated with SJSC "Latvijas Dzelzceļš".
The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging the territory used for or affected by the works to
its original condition after completing the works, as well as for maintaining the territory in order
during construction works.
During construction, the site transferred to the Contractor must consist of at least the following
territories:
1. Works execution territory – territory where works are being performed and that is not
accessible to the unauthorized persons. The maintenance of the territory is performed by
the Contractor.
2. Passenger access territory - territory necessary to ensure the continuity of railway traffic or
urban traffic. The territory must provide the access options in at least the existing level of
the access quality. The Contractors is responsible for the maintenance of the territory. The
Contractor may conclude a contract with merchants regarding maintenance of the territory.
3. Territory transferred for temporary taking over - the railway infrastructure territory that has
been temporary taken over due to the works performed. The Contractor is responsible for
maintaining the territory and must conclude a contract with the SJSC “Latvijas Dzelzceļš”
regarding the maintenance of the infrastructure.
The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with the air and underground utilities protection
regulations. The Contractor shall be obliged to obtain all the necessary approvals related to the
execution of construction works and to obtain permits from the owners of the utilities.
228
The Contractor shall maintain the construction site (roads) and maintain bypasses, if envisaged in
the Detailed Technical Design, in safe-for-traffic condition in winter and summer in accordance with
the established maintenance class according to the Cabinet Regulations as of 9 March 2010 No.
224 "Regulations on state and municipal road routine maintenance requirements and
implementation control".
All necessary access roads to the construction works shall be indicated in the Detailed Technical
Design. The Contractor shall be responsible for establishment of all access roads to the
construction site and for covering of all expenses connected with establishment of access roads
and temporary use of land. The Contractor shall restore the areas of access roads and temporary
land use areas after completion of construction works.
The Contractor shall elaborate transport routes for freight transport and coordinate them with the
responsible authorities.
The Contractor shall ensure and is responsible for washing truck wheels before leaving the
construction site.
The Contractor shall ensure access to the properties whose connections are located on the
construction site.
The Contractor shall ensure traffic of the Riga Central Passenger Station passengers, the Riga
International Coach Terminal passengers and public transport passengers, ensuring safe and
convenient access to transport and urban infrastructure suitable to the traffic flow.
The Contractor shall supervise the construction work to ensure that no part of the structure,
whether completed or not, during the construction is not subjected to hazardous, destructive or
otherwise harmful effects. Depending on the situation such exposure includes, but is not limited to
the following:
1. Static or dynamic overload.
2. Internal or external overpressure.
3. Very high or very low temperatures.
4. Thermal shock.
5. Very high or low humidity.
6. Air pollution.
7. Water.
8. Solvents.
9. Chemicals.
10. Light.
11. Radiation.
12. Puncture.
13. Abrasions.
14. Intensive traffic/movement.
15. Smearing, staining and rusting.
16. Bacterium.
229
17. Pervasion and outbreak of rodents and insects.
18. Burning.
19. Electric current.
20. Incorrect lubrication.
21. Unusual wear and tear and other misuse.
22. Contact of incompatible materials.
23. Destructive testing.
24. Deviations.
25. Excessive weathering.
26. Unprotected storage.
27. Incorrect transportation or transhipment.
28. Theft or vandalism.
The Contractor shall transport construction debris generated during construction works to
construction waste landfill. The Contractor shall dispose of debris hazardous and dangerous to
environment and health in accordance with the requirements of the national regulatory acts. The
Contractor shall ensure documents proving management and transfer of construction waste.
If leakage of materials dangerous to the environment takes place during construction works, the
Contractor shall immediately take measures to restrict spreading of pollution and to stop the
leakage. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer, the Employer and the State Fire and Rescue
Service about the incident.
All waste water and pumped groundwater from the construction site shall be diverted to the city
sewerage system.
After completion of the works, surface of the construction site shall be flat, levelled and with a drop
ensuring water drainage, as well as with covering suitable for further use of the territory. After laying
the covering, no debris or other abrasive substances or massive objects are allowed to be carried
on it.
After completion of the works, the Contractor shall restore entire covering of streets, roads and
squares also outside the construction site if damaged by the construction works.
Storage of materials
Goods (including Materials, products and equipment) shall be adequately packed and protected to
prevent damage during transportation and loading.
Store the goods in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions with undamaged and legible
stamps and markings. Store sensitive products in weatherproof covers, maintain temperature and
humidity within the limits required by the manufacturer's instructions.
For outdoor storage of goods made in the factory, place them on sloped pallets on the ground.
Cover the goods so that they are not damaged, with a waterproof slab covering, provide ventilation
to prevent condensation.
230
Store bulk materials on a solid surface in place with a good drainage. Prevent the presence of
admixture therein.
Organise storage in order to ensure access for the inspection. Regularly make sure that the goods
are intact and maintained under the required conditions.
5.4.5. Organization of street and railway traffic and traffic safety
Street traffic
The Contractor shall appoint a person responsible for traffic organization that can be contacted at
any time of the day.
Every time when making temporary changes in traffic organization, the Contractor shall draw up
traffic organization plans and obtain the agreements necessary for implementation of these plans
from the relevant institutions. The Contractor shall ensure and install, at its own expense, all the
necessary temporary traffic signs, traffic lights, horizontal markings and any other elements
necessary for traffic organization, and the Contractor shall fulfill, at its own expense, the
requirements of the technical regulations of SIA “Rīgas Satiksme” and the Riga City Council Traffic
Department, including the requirements for conversion of the electric transport overhead line.
Traffic signs and markings shall be selected in accordance with the provisions of the CoM
Regulations No. 279 "Road Traffic Regulations" and the standards specified therein. Changes in
traffic organization are allowed only after fulfilment of the above requirements. These requirements
also apply to traffic interruptions, as well as to limitations of transport and cargo dimensions,
including height.
Organization of street traffic includes all materials and works related to elaboration and
coordination of traffic organization schemes (traffic structures), installation, maintenance and
disassembly of inventory of traffic organization and, if necessary, establishment of power supply
connection to ensure operation of traffic lights.
Traffic organization during construction works shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of the Regulation No. 421 of the Cabinet of Ministers of the Republic of Latvia
"Regulations on equipping of workplaces on roads". Traffic signs and markings shall comply with
the technical requirements of LVS 77 and LVS 85.
Traffic restrictions on streets and the schemes for traffic organization and equipping of workplaces
shall be coordinated with the Employer, the Riga City Council Traffic Department, Rīgas Satiksme,
SJSC "Latvijas Valsts ceļi" and other institutions involved. If necessary, the Contractor shall inform
and involve other institutions and companies in the planning that might be affected by the planned
changes in traffic organization.
The Contractor shall cover all expenses connected with taking up areas outside the red lines of the
construction object, including the accordant payments to the Riga City Council Traffic Department.
The Contractor shall be responsible for traffic organization on the construction site and bypasses,
as far as construction works are concerned, and equipping of the construction site. Prior to
231
commencement of works, the Contractor shall prepare a Traffic organization plan and coordinate
it in the institutions responsible for traffic organization, including traffic organization and workplace
equipment schemes, establishing the procedure for their change, terms and the responsible person.
A copy of the traffic organization plan shall be kept at the workplace. The construction works
logbook shall indicate which traffic organization and workplace equipment scheme is being used
at that particular moment.
All technical means for traffic organization and workplace equipment shall be installed not earlier
than one day before commencement of works and shall be removed immediately after completion
of the works, unless planned otherwise. With the work area being relocated or termination of works,
traffic organization and workplace equipment inventory that is not relevant to general road safety
shall be promptly relocated, removed or covered with opaque covers.
The horizontal markings necessary for traffic organization shall be in yellow both during
construction works and technological interruptions. Horizontal markings in white may be used on
an established wearing course, provided that dislocation of these markings matches the intended
dislocation of permanent horizontal markings.
On the wearing course, where road markings are only required for local traffic organization during
construction works, road markings that can be removed or cleaned without damaging the wearing
course shall be used that do not leave visible markings or traces of their removal ("foot") in places
where permanent horizontal markings are not intended. Removed or cleaned temporary marking
shall not impair or negatively influence application of permanent horizontal markings, their
serviceability and visual perception in further service life.
While the envisaged quality checks of the works affecting traffic safety have not been performed
and there is no certainty about safe traffic, the technical means of traffic organization and
workplace equipment used during works shall be replaced by warnings or restrictions suitable for
safe driving when removing them.
The Contractor shall inform the Employer of all risks for traffic safety related to performance of
construction works and their prevention measures.
Before coordinating traffic organization plan with other institutions, the Contractor shall submit the
following information to the Employer for reviewing and approval:
• Plans showing the intended traffic and pedestrian movement organization, enclosures,
construction work areas, traffic signs and markings and their location, as well as internal
traffic and pedestrian movement organization on the construction site.
• A descriptive part with a work schedule showing and explaining the works to be performed
during temporary traffic organization outside traffic areas.
The Contractor shall be responsible for traffic safety against the risks of construction. It shall cover
all penalties connected with safety and road traffic offenses, including stopping and parking
232
prohibitions, resulting from organization of construction works, while performing the works and
supplying the materials.
Railway traffic
The Riga Central Passenger Station is equipped with microprocessor controller interlocking system
(MPC) Bombardier EbiLock 950 installed and operated by the “Bombardier-BELAM” general
partnership.
Solutions of temporary railway traffic shall be developed in cooperation with the Employer, the
Engineer and SJSC "Latvijas Dzelzceļš" in accordance with the technical conditions.
Temporary railway traffic solutions shall be developed in accordance with the technical conditions
issued by SJSC “Latvijas Dzelzceļš” and this Technical Specification.
For graph of current railway traffic versions, see Annex 20.
Performing work on permanently closed railway tracks or during traffic interruptions - in outages –
is possible by coordinating the order and duration of track closure with the Employer and LDz in
accordance with the procedure established by the technical conditions.
Safety
Uzņēmējam ir jānozīmē Darba aizsardzības inženieris un jāveic pasākumus, lai nodrošinātu darba
drošības standartus, kas ir aprakstīti Uzņēmēja apstiprinātajā Kvalitātes nodrošināšanas sistēmā.
Uzņēmējam jāievēro Darba aizsardzības likuma prasības. Pirms darbu uzsākšanas jābūt
nozīmētam sertificētam Darba aizsardzības inženierim, kurš ir atbildīgs par visu drošības
pasākumu nodrošināšanu būvniecības laikā saskaņā ar Latvijas Republikā spēkā esošo
likumdošanu un VAS „Latvijas dzelzceļš". Darba aizsardzības inženierim regulāri jāpārbauda
Būvlaukums un būvdarbu izpilde, kā arī jāsagatavo un jāiesniedz Inženierim ikmēneša atskaites par
drošības apstākļiem. Uzņēmējam ir jāsedz visi izdevumi, kas saistīti ar drošības pasākumiem.
The Contractor shall comply with all safety instructions elaborated and used by the Employer.
Safety issues shall be included in the agenda of all site meetings, and the Engineer and the
representative of the Contractor shall jointly approve the plans to minimize the risk of dangerous
situations and work practices in future work. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable
effective laws, regulations and instructions in all activities, operations and administrative steps
necessary for complete protection and safety of the environment.
233
5.5. Technical and technological requirements for the types and
processes of works to be performed
For performance of works, materials corresponding to those presented in the Detailed Technical
Design shall be used and the work execution methods indicated in the Work Performance Design
compliant with the ones specified by manufacturers and suppliers of the materials/systems shall
be applied. Use of other materials and any deviations exceeding the permissible values set forth in
the Detailed Technical Design, the Work Performance Design and the binding standards shall be
agreed upon with the Engineer and the Employer before performance of works. If deviations from
the solutions of the Detailed Technical Design occur during the execution of works, the measures
for their elimination shall be coordinated with the Engineer and the Employer.
Conformity checks of materials with the Detailed Technical Design shall be performed prior to
commencement of works.
Quality checks of materials used shall be performed during receival of materials and during
construction works.
Conformity check of work technologies with the technology indicated in the Work Performance
Design and the one established by manufacturers and suppliers of the materials/systems shall be
performed during construction works.
Quality checks of work execution shall be performed during construction works and after
completion of the works.
5.5.1. Investigation, geodetic setup and survey works
The Contractor shall perform detailed marking of placement, including marking of all points for
works to be performed that will be necessary during construction works. An axis marking statement
of a geodetic service object and a geodetic service statement on correctness of location of the
object shall be prepared. If it is established while marking the railway tracks, buildings or structures
that the location, level, size or layout thereof differ from those adopted in the Detailed Technical
Design, amendments shall be made in the Detailed Technical Design in accordance with the
procedure specified by law, coordinating it with the Employer and the Engineer. Checking the
marked placement by the Engineer of the axis or levels of railway tracks, buildings and structures,
as well as engineering communications shall not release the Contractor from its responsibility for
correctness of the above-mentioned, and the Contractor shall carefully protect and preserve all
markings, including poles and other elements used for marking the placement of works, except for
places where they have to be removed for the purposes of construction works, and Engineer's
approval shall be received before removing them.
The Contractor may, if necessary or at the request of the Engineer, install temporary markings
during construction works. The Contractor shall take all precautionary measures to protect all
temporary markings from intentional or accidental damage.
234
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer any records connected with survey poles and markings
as soon as possible and shall keep these records until the date of issue of the official
announcement of the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure, install, use and maintain all
instruments and equipment necessary to achieve high quality of all measurements and surveys to
be performed during construction works. The Contractor shall make an offer regarding the type,
brand, manufacturer and quantity of these instruments and equipment and shall obtain approval of
the Engineer. All instruments and equipment shall be in a suitable and safe working condition,
calibrated, certified and fully suitable for work conditions.
The Contractor's Proposal shall include all costs and works connected with marking of grids of the
building, digital surveying of the structures and drawing up of as-built schemes, as well as any
additional survey works to specify location of the new and existing structures. Requirements of the
Cabinet Regulations No. 879 "Regulations Regarding the Geodetic Reference System and the
Topographic Map System" shall be followed in survey works.
Before commencing construction works, the Contractor shall make sure that the design dimensions
of the structures comply with current situation. Any geodetic setup works may only be performed
from an established and aligned support network. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
results if the above requirements are neglected and construction works are continued.
The Contractor shall be obliged to store and collect all survey materials, including field survey data,
network alignment data, schemes, geodetic setup protocols and other materials. These materials
shall be stored also after the building is put into operation. At the request of the Engineer or the
Employer, the Contractor shall submit the survey materials necessary for verification and provide
the necessary explanations. The Contractor shall perform all control measurements necessary at
the Engineer's discretion.
The Contractor shall establish and maintain temporary markings for lines and levels to ensure
accurate geodetic setup of the building and control of the works in question in all stages of
construction, also upon request by Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure two base points for setup
of each gridline of building - at either end of the building and at least one benchmark or polygonal
point for each building. In its calculations, the Contractor shall rely on these reference points. In
order to ensure accuracy of the measured values and elevation marks, the Contractor shall employ
only professional, certified surveyors. It shall be ensured that the given data are not conflicting.
Upon completion of the building, the Contractor shall perform surveys and as-built surveys of the
completed construction works, the procedures and amounts of which shall be determined by the
Employer.
The Contractor shall ensure acquisition of high-detailed topographic information (hereinafter -
topographic information) about the building and/or engineering communication acquired during its
construction and its representation in the as-built survey plan in compliance with the topographic
survey geodetic framework, topographic information specification, information acquisition,
preparation and processing methodology, general requirements for preparation of as-built survey
plan, general requirements for its coordination, as well as the responsibility of the surveyor in the
process of acquisition and preparation of topographic information established by the Geospatial
235
Information Law as of 16.12.2010 and the Cabinet Regulations as of 24.04.2012 No. 281
"Regulations on the Topographic Information of High Detailed Elaboration and its Central Data
Base".
The as-built survey plan shall indicate the dimensions of the building, the supporting structures of
each building and other significant usability details, boundaries of land units with their cadastral
designations, boundaries of parts of land units and their cadastral designations in accordance with
the data of the Cadastre Information System.
If engineering communications are laid using an open trench method during the construction works,
the Contractor shall ensure as-built survey at an open trench. If a newly built building has deviation
as compared with the design, its actual deviation shall be indicated in the as-built survey plan.
The surveyor shall request and gather all possibly useful graphic and textual materials which could
be necessary for acquisition of topographic information about the building and/or utility and its
representation in the plan (layout), such as information on geodetic points, past survey works,
underground utilities plan materials, as-built schemes and utilities overview schemes.
The procedure for obtaining, coordination and approving of topographic information is established
by the binding regulations issued by the local government. The as-built survey shall correspond to
actual situation in the area, approved with a signature by the Employer and the Engineer.
All expenses related to requesting and receiving of information necessary for performance of
works, work verification and registration shall be covered by the Contractor.
Topographic survey works shall be deemed complete if:
- the survey case has been arranged in accordance with the requirements specified in Annex
1 of the Cabinet Regulations as of 24 April 2012 No. 281 "Regulations on the Topographic
Information of High Detailed Elaboration and its Central Data Base";
- topographic data have been entered in the local municipality’s data base of topographic
information of high detail, the surveyor is registered in the SLS Geodetic and topographic
works registration data base and confirmation of all concords specified in the regulatory
enactments, these specifications and binding regulations of the local government have
been received.
- digital as-built survey plan (layout) of the building and/or engineering communication
obtained during its construction in a digital data storage, print-out of the plan in two copies
and a certified copy of the topographic survey case have been prepared;
- title and number of the contract on construction works has been specified in the as-built
survey plan (layout).
The Employer may also randomly verify conformity of digital measurements.
Requirements specified in Section 3.11 shall be taken into account in performance of survey and
processing of the obtained data.
The Contractor shall employ a professional certified surveyor or engineer: Ten years experience in
the discipline required for specific service on Project and specialized in railway geodesic survey
with 10 year experience. Name of surveyor and qualification shall be submitted to approval of
236
Engineer. Engineer is entitled to request to Contractor to provide verification certificate of
topographical survey equipment.
Contractor shall request approval of Geodesic surveyor to Engineer as for any other subcontractor
before starting survey work both prior to design phase and construction phase. On request of
Engineer Contractor shall submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
Contractor shall maintain complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses over
design and construction works. On completion of foundations, walls and major site improvements,
carry out a survey by certified surveyor showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of
completed construction work. Whenever requested by Engineer provide survey of new or existing
structures, infrastructure of construction site and transport infrastructure.
Before ordering any materials or doing any works Contractor shall verify all measurements and be
responsible for their correctness. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of
difference between actual measurements and the dimensions given in the Contract documents.
Any difference, which may be found, shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing for consideration
before proceeding with the Design or Works.
Site bench marks shall be accurately and safely established by Contractor at beginning of design
phase, protected, maintained and cleared away only upon completion of works or when no longer
required all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Such, bench marks, shall be related to the nearest
permanent bench marks, fixed by the respective authority.
Prior to start design Contractor shall execute precise survey of each transport infrastructure line
(railway) in the area of Works. Measuring shall start 50 meter from point where works will be located
the dismantling of rail and shall be done every 10 meter along all area and rail where works will be
executed.
Prepare a plan detailing the location of the bench marks and keep up to date throughout the
Contract execution period. Plan so prepared shall be provided to the Engineer, as and when it may
require.
The Engineer reserves the right to require elevations to be taken at any time considered necessary
for the full and proper design, supervision and measurement of the quantities works.
Such elevations, shall be related to the bench marks of aforesaid and plotted by the Contractor and
after agreement of the drawings shall be signed by the Engineer and the Contractor, and shall form
the basis for design and construction works.
Contractor shall Protect survey control points prior to starting site work, preserve permanent
reference points during construction. Make no changes without prior written notice to the Engineer.
Contractor shall promptly report to the Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point or
relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. Replace dislocated survey
control points based on original survey control.
Contractor shall periodically, verify layouts by same means.
237
When requested by engineer Contractor shall provide instruments and assistance for checking the
laying out and levels when ever engineer my require.
Contractor is fully responsible of laying out of works.
Contractor shall lay out the Works using methods and necessary instruments described in relevant
specifications.
Lay out the Works as shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall protect and maintain all building
lines, co-ordinates and bench marks, within the Project confines. Re-establish and protect whenever
damaged throughout the duration of the project.
Contractor shall check the levels and dimensions of the Site against those shown on the Drawings
and record the results on a copy of the Drawings. Notify the Engineer in writing of any discrepancies
and obtain instructions before proceeding.
Contractor shall inform the Engineer when overall laying out is complete.
Contractor shall arrange the setting out, erection and application of finishes (working within the
practical limits of the Detailed Technical Design and Technical Specification) to ensure that there
is a satisfactory fit at junctions and that the finished work has a well aligned, true and regular
appearance.
Wherever satisfactory accuracy, fit and/or appearance of the work is likely to be critical or difficult
to achieve, Contractor shall obtain from Engineer approval of proposals or of the appearance of the
relevant aspects of the partially finished work as early as possible.
Work which fails to meet the specified levels of accuracy, must not be rectified without informing
Engineer and receiving approval of Engineer.
Contractor shall submit proposals for such rectification and meet all costs arising, including effects
on other work.
Contractor shall allow for the possibility that approval will not be provided if removal and
replacement of the work is necessary.
5.5.2. Demolition of structures
Implementation of the Project requires demolition of several structures. Prior to commencement
of demolition works, appropriate documents for demolition works need to be prepared, coordinated,
utilities need to be disconnected and other activities prescribed by the regulatory enactments need
to be performed.
To demolish buildings registered in the Land Register, the Contractor needs to receive a separate
building permit from the Riga City Construction Board and to disconnect the utilities in accordance
with the procedure prescribed by law, as well as to obtain a statement on non-existence of the
building in nature after completion of demolition works.
238
All specified structures shall be demolished, debris shall be gathered and removed. With regard to
the environment, special attention should be paid to environmental protection requirements during
demolition works. The Contractor shall prevent entering of construction waste in waters.
Demolition of concrete structures
The requirements apply to all kinds of materials, equipment, instruments and works connected with
demolition of existing structures, removal of construction waste and transportation thereof to
Contractor's landfill or other certified waste disposal site.
The Contractor shall have the right to choose the methods, equipment and materials for works.
Prior to commencement of demolition works, the Contractor shall elaborate a demolition design
(demolition work program) to be coordinated with the labor safety coordinator, the responsible
construction works manager and the Engineer at least 15 days before commencement of the works.
If the construction works affect traffic organization, requirements included in section "Organization
of street and railway traffic" of this document shall be observed.
The Contractor shall ensure performance of works so as not to endanger the workers and third
party. The works shall be organized by the works manager of the Contractor with experience in
performance of such works and a corresponding construction specialist's certificate.
As a result of demolition of structures, the materials shall be reduced (cut up) to pieces of
transportable size. Geometry of the pieces shall ensure stability during lifting and removal.
The amount of the demolished material in m3 shall be the measurement unit.
Demolition of asphalt concrete pavement and damp proof course
Demolition of asphalt pavement includes all works, materials and equipment necessary to perform
demolition of asphalt pavement by cutting, crushing or using any other method per choice of the
Contractor. The demolished materials shall be immediately removed from the structure.
The amount of the demolished material in m3 shall be the measurement unit.
Demolition of metal structures
The requirements apply to demolition of steel supporting structures and auxiliary structures
(barriers, lighting elements, railings) in the entire territory of construction works in the amount
necessary for performance of works, as well as their transportation to scrap disposal site per choice
of the Contractor. Unless particularly specified, reuse of dismantled structures on the construction
site is not permitted.
The demolished metal structures that are replaced by new ones shall remain the property of the
Contractor after dismantling.
The measurement unit for amount of the demolished material shall be tonnes.
239
Demolition of other structures
The requirements apply to demolition of all necessary wooden, plastic, stone, decoration and other
structures not mentioned above and transportation thereof to a construction waste disposal site
per choice of the Contractor.
The measurement unit for amount of the demolished material shall be m3.
Dismantling of cables (transfer, protection)
The requirements apply to dismantling of existing utilities and transfer thereof in a temporary state,
extending and protecting them, if necessary, during the entire construction period. The process
considers additional equipment (connection sleeves, cabinets, switches) necessary for
performance of works and renewal of cable operation. Quality of the additional equipment shall
comply with the functioning quality of the existing utility as minimum.
Where established by the owner of utilities, works in utilities protection areas shall be performed in
the presence of their owners, timely obtaining digging permits and agreeing upon cable layout
schemes and protective measures with owners of utilities and the Engineer. Where cables are
located in construction areas, they shall be marked also in nature with additional indications.
Cables that are not transferred to temporary state shall not be damaged during disassembly, they
shall be stored and handed over to their owners.
Inspection and monitoring of buildings
Detailed requirements regarding the inspection and monitoring of structures located in close
proximity to construction works, or close to them, which may have an impact on the structures
from construction work, shall be determined by the Engineer during the execution of the Works,
however, in any case, the Contractor shall also fulfill this obligation in such a way as to prevent the
possible negative effects of Works on the environment, structures, buildings, human life, health and
property (regardless of its affiliation).
Repeated inspection shall be performed after completion of construction works. During each
inspection of the building, a defect statement shall be drawn up, signed by the Contractor and the
owner of the building.
When performing technical inspection of buildings, the Cabinet Regulations as of 30.06.2015
No.337 Regulations Regarding Latvian Construction Standard LBN 405-15 "Technical Inspection of
Buildings" shall be followed.
5.5.3. Earthworks
Excavation and filling of foundation pit
The process covers delivery and all works involving excavation of ground materials at the site of
the foundation pit and filling of the foundation pit with suitable ground material.
240
Earthworks shall be performed in accordance with the technical conditions issued by SJSC "Latvijas
Dzelzceļš" on 22.01.2018.
Earthworks can be performed above or below water level. Expenses connected with differences
between theoretical and actual water level during performance of works shall be included in work
costs.
Works performed after artificial lowering of water level shall be considered as works performed
below water level.
Digging, dredging and anchoring of ground shall be performed so as not to alter stability of ground
around the foundation pit and not to cause landslides or slumps.
If geotechnical conditions notably differ from those envisaged in the design, it shall be immediately
reported to the Engineer.
If base of the foundation pit is in soft clay or organic grounds, digging shall be performed so as not
to mix the bottom grounds.
Excavation of foundation pit
The process covers all activities to ensure a dry foundation pit, digging of loose, rocky or coherent
ground in the foundation pit, withdrawal of rainwater and groundwater from the pit in the required
amount, as well as drainage of water to an approved water collector outside the foundation pit and
maintenance of the pit.
The requirements apply to installation of equipment necessary for excavation, installation and
demolition of temporary anchoring, digging with loading and removal or placement of the excavated
masses next to the digging site, alignment of the bottom of the pit, as well as protection of utilities.
The Contractor shall elaborate an appropriate solution or plan for ensuring a dry foundation pit and
submit it to the Engineer for approval.
The ground excavated from the pits shall be placed behind the outer edge of the pit or, if it is not
possible, it shall be transported to Contractor's dump. The Contractor shall ensure a dry foundation
pit by establishing an enclosure of the foundation pit and drain-off of water throughout the
construction works.
Digging, dredging and anchoring of the ground shall be performed so as not to alter stability of
ground around the foundation pit and not to cause landslides or slumps.
Although locations of utilities must be indicated in the drawings, representative of the utilities owner
shall specify their location before commencing excavation works.
Shape of the foundation pit shall be formed so as to ensure construction of the structures in an
appropriate amount and dimensions. Slant of the side slope shall be assumed 1:1, unless otherwise
indicated. If slopes of the pit turn out to be unstable after construction, the Contractor shall increase
the gradient of the slope at its own expense.
241
The measurement unit for amount of the excavated material shall be m3.
The roots of the neighbouring to the groundworks trees shall be protected. If the Contractor or the
Engineer deems it necessary, use the sheet pilings and spacers.
Remove any soft or non-compactable soil found at the bottom of excavation and replace it with a
suitable base material covered in layers of a thickness not exceeding 150 mm and to be compacted.
In places where the soil is excessively developed, the required filling with mass concrete takes place
at Contractor’s cost.
Unnecessary and inappropriate excavated material shall be removed from the site and legally
disposed of it.
Filling the foundation pit
The requirements apply to all works connected with purchase, delivery and digging of the filling
material.
The Contractor shall coordinate the required sand material and its extraction place with the
Engineer. Drainage sand used for filling of foundation pits, construction of cones and joints shall
be clean, free of organic impurities and with physical properties that would allow the coefficient of
compaction k = 0.98-1.0 to be achieved, as well as with good drainage properties (with filtration
coefficient of not less than 1 m/day.):
• fraction of less than 0.125 mm, content <25% of weight;
• content of clay and dust particles <5% of weight;
For methodology for determining of the above indicators, see Rail Baltica Design Guidelines.
If the ground excavated from the foundation pit meets these requirements, the excavated ground
may be used for filling of the foundation pit, provided that the Contractor can demonstrate
compliance of the ground and absence of contamination in it with measurements.
The pit shall be filled with layers of ~25 cm and compacted to compaction coefficient of at least
0.98.
Foundation pits above which roadbed is planned shall be filled according to the requirements of the
"Road specifications" by LVC or their current version.
Foundation pits above which railroad is planned shall be filled according to the requirements of
section "Railway tracks" of this document.
The measurement unit for amount of the filled-in material shall be m3.
Shoring of pits
The requirements apply to establishment of shoring in foundation pit with unstable sides if no
special reinforcement of walls of the pit creating restrictions on excavation works is performed.
242
The process shall include all measures connected with shoring of pit walls, processing of ground,
observance of safety measures and dismantling of anchoring, if necessary. Filling of the foundation
pit without disassembly of temporary shorings is prohibited.
For additional requirements for construction of temporary sheet piling, see Section "Steel sheet
piling".
Excavation shall be performed so as not to create risk of ground falling down in the excavated part
and to prevent damage to the shoring of the pit.
The measurement unit for amount of a constructed shoring shall be m2.
Laying and leveling of ground in foundation pit under the water level
The requirements apply to delivery, laying and leveling of special equipment and loose ground
material in foundation pit envisaged for the foundations of bridges and embankments, for example,
the reinforcing or leveling ground or leveling crushed stone layer below the foundation pad, filling
up to the support - the leveling layer of material, laying, compacting and leveling underneath the
foundation and other structures in the foundation pit below water level.
At high water depths, the laying works shall be managed and controlled with the help of divers in
order to guarantee precise laying of ground or crushed stone, slant of the slope of the pit, leveling
and control of laying heights.
The measurement unit for amount of the filled-in material shall be m3.
Crushed stone foundations
The requirements apply to all works connected with purchase, delivery, leveling and compacting of
crushed stone material. Ground under the crushed stone foundation shall be compacted to ≥ 98%
of the Proctor density.
The crushed stone for foundations shall be made of granite or dolomite. Under the foundations and
basis of bearing structures of bridges and overpasses, crushed stone corresponding to strength
class N-1 of coarse aggregates shall be used.
Upon coordination with the Engineer, crushed stone in cement mortar or concrete of not less than
C16/20 according to LVS EN 206:2017 may be used for construction of preparatory and leveling
layer in foundation pits.
The crushed stone shall be poured on a levelled, compacted or untreated natural ground or laid-in
geotextile as specified in the drawings of Detailed Technical Design, and then shall be compacted
to ≥ 98% of the proctor density.
The measurement unit for amount of the finished layer shall be m3.
243
5.5.4. Structures in ground (pile foundations, shallow foundations, retaining walls)
Foundation structures specified in the Detailed Technical Design shall be used for construction of
structures envisaged in the design. The Employer does not request the using of specific foundation
structures, but states that they shall be designed and installed in accordance with LBN 207-15, LVS
EN 1990, LVS EN 1992-1 and LVS EN 1997-1.
Prior to construction of foundations, the Contractor shall verify whether there are no wires, cables,
channels or other engineering communications in the ground where the works will be performed.
Other obstacles (debris, slabs, blocks, etc.) shall also be removed before commencing works.
When constructing pile foundations, pile works shall be supervised by a person with theoretical
knowledge and practical experience in pile works, as well as with an appropriate construction
specialist’s certificate.
Driven piles
Driving the pilot pile
The Contractor shall perform driving of pilot piles in places and amounts envisaged in the Detailed
Technical Design.
If it is found while driving the pilot pile that the length of the pile differs from the design length by
more than 1m, including if the length of the pile decreases, changes in the pile design shall be
coordinated with the author-supervisor. If such differences occur, the Contractor shall find out the
reasons. If necessary, the Contractor shall perform additional geotechnical research. Research
works shall be coordinated with the Employer.
If changes in the length of the piles envisaged in the Detailed Technical Design exceed 1m, the
Contractor shall coordinate the adjusted pile length with the Engineer, the Customer and the author-
supervisor.
Driving a pile
The requirements apply to all expenses connected with piling equipment for pile driving,
transportation (including installation by pile group) up to driven piles (including chopped pile ends),
including possible additional ground research that the Contractor deems necessary to choose
length of the piles and the method for determining the amount of piles. In addition, the process
includes noise reduction measures during piling.
Requirements regarding the type, dimensions, bearing capacity and production of piles shall be
indicated in the drawings of the Detailed Technical Design.
Piles for which any transverse or longitudinal cracks have been discovered before installation shall
not be used without the Engineer's consent. The inappropriate products shall be replaced.
244
Concrete piles shall be designed and produced in accordance with LVS EN 12699:2015 "Execution
of special geotechnical works – Displacement piles". Area of cross section of a pile shall not differ
from the nominal area envisaged in the design by more than ± 5%.
Time for hardening of reinforced concrete pile shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
transportation and driving. Driving of pile may only be performed when it reaches the designed
concrete strength. The piles shall be transported, moved and stored so as not to damage the
construction. They shall be stored or marked so as to avoid mixing of different types, ages or
otherwise classified piles. The pile shall bear information about the date of manufacture, concrete
grade and reinforcement.
During driving, the direction of beat of the driving hammer shall coincide with the longitudinal axis
of the pile.
During driving, the direction and refusal of the pile shall be controlled. Size of the refusal shall be
recorded in the piling logbook.
Prior to cutting of pile ends, inclination, direction and position of the pile in the layout plan shall be
documented. Prior to commencing concreting of the pile grid, the Engineer shall approve position
of the pile field in the layout plan.
The construction works manager shall constantly keep track of the works on site and ensure that
a pile driving report is drawn up for each pile. The driving report shall include at least the following
information:
- identification of each pile;
- type, cross-section and material properties of pile;
- total length and length of pile elements;
- type of pile-driver;
- falling height of the hammer, rhythm of power supply and/or beats;
- number of beats per meter and schedule for reduction of beat series;
- measurements of lowering and deformation (inclination);
- deviations from the provisions specified in the design;
- conditions that may affect bearing capacity;
- names of the construction work manager and the recorder.
The final pile and driving report shall also include the following information:
- all leveling data with specified date;
- the measured final height mark/inclination;
- special control measurements specified in the Detailed Technical Design;
- type and length of the point of the pile;
- calculated length of lowering.
Leveling of surface of the construction site shall be performed with suitable materials. Equipment
for pile driving must guarantee safe and stable control of the pile-driver and the pile. Tower of the
245
equipment shall have secure supports. It should be possible to easily adjust inclination of the tower
during driving of the pile. The possible floating equipment shall have sufficient capacity, stability
and anchorage.
The measurement unit for amount of the finished piles shall be meters.
Reaching the refusal
The requirements apply to achieving of refusal of concrete piles in loose ground, leveling of each
individual pile both after driving and before cutting.
At the end of driving of pile, although the calculated refusal has already been achieved in the
previous beat series, another series of beats shall be performed during which it shall be verified
whether the refusal remains unchanged and whether the pile is not blocked by a penetrable
obstacle. The depth must constantly decrease or remain unchanged during the additional beat
series. If the depth increases during the additional beat series, the driving shall be considered
restarted until lowering begins to decrease again and becomes less than 4 mm per beat. Measuring
of depth shall be performed for the last 10 beats.
Driving should not be interrupted during the additional beat series to remove layers of the loosened
or piled-up ground. Control leveling shall be performed for each individual pile immediately after its
driving. Later, before cutting, each pile in the pile group shall be leveled again to determine whether
repeated driving of the pile is necessary.
If the results of control leveling show that the pile has risen, then, if considered necessary by the
construction works manager, driving of the pile shall be repeated. The workplace shall be arranged
so that repeated driving was possible.
Repeated driving
The requirements apply to repeated driving as described above and leveling of all piles after
repeated driving. The requirements also apply to all expenses for possible new or modified
equipment for repeated driving.
The repeated driving shall be terminated if lowering of piles per series, in the last two beat series
with 10 beats in each, is equal or smaller than their refusal (in loose ground masses), and the pile
has been driven up to the level that the pile had when the refusal was reached. Lowering from beat
series should decrease or remain unchanged.
If these requirements are not met, a new additional beat series shall be performed to reach the
refusal.
Control leveling shall be performed for each individual pile immediately after repeated driving. Later,
before cutting, each pile in the pile group shall be leveled again to determine whether driving of the
pile needs to be repeated.
246
Pile cutting
The requirements apply to cutting (chopping) of piles retaining reinforcement bar exits and other
structural additions in the length envisaged by the Detailed Technical Design, removal of
hammerred concrete debris to the dump.
Minimum length of reinforcement opened as a result of cutting shall comply with LVS EN
12699:2015 "Execution of special geotechnical works - Driven piles".
Deviations resulting from cutting of piles shall not be systematic and recur on several piles.
Deviation measurements shall be made on two mutually perpendicular side planes. On each of the
side planes, deviation of the vertical axis shall be measured between two freely chosen points.
Bored piles
Installation of bored piles
The requirements apply to all deliveries and works required for production of bored piles, such as:
installation of equipment, measures to prevent landslides (for example, use of stabilizing
suspension), inserting and lowering of drill-pipes or drills and excavation of ground from the
borehole, removal of the drilled-out ground masses, drilling through hard ground layers or other
obstacles, drainage of possible water, installation of reinforcement in the borehole, and extraction
of the control pipe, as well as formation of crushed stone layer in case of landslide. The
requirements apply to all works and materials connected with additional ground research that the
Contractor or the Engineer deem necessary.
The process involves all works required to prepare the piling equipment for work. The requirements
apply to transportation, installation and disassembly of equipment for all machines and devices
necessary for production of bored piles.
During installation of bored piles, the Contractor shall ensure all activities necessary for drainage
of flush water, groundwater, mud and stones from the construction site, as well as possible
establishment, use and removal of crushed stone base layer. The process also includes use of
additional pipe set and ensuring of the required counter-pressure of water column if groundwater
flows into the borehole.
The Contractor shall perform preparation of the site for installation of the equipment, leveling of
the ground surface, possible filling of pits with suitable materials, establishment of rigid and level
basis for construction machinery, measurements and control measurements during production of
the piles.
The bored piles shall comply with the requirements of LVS EN 1536+A1:2015 "Execution of special
geotechnical works. Bored piles".
Dimensions of the piles, placement in the plan and bearing capacity thereof shall be indicated in
the design drawings. Bearing capacity and provisions for selection of dimensions may also be
specified in the Detailed Technical Design.
247
Geometric tolerances of a finished bored pile are given in Section 7.2 of LVS EN 1536: +A1:2015.
If there are signs of landslide during excavation of ground from the borehole, excavation of ground
shall be terminated and treatment of the walls of the borehole with a stabilizing suspension shall
be performed.
The constructed amount measurement unit shall be meters.
Concrete for filled steel hollow piles
The requirements apply to delivery of concrete, filling in the pipe, protection of concrete against
harmful effects during transportation, storage, filling and hardening, as well as the necessary
maintenance measures for concrete.
The requirements also apply to preparation, control of filling, removal of rubble from steel pipes,
control of concrete density and other works.
Pile concreting shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of LVS EN 1536. Filling of
concrete in the pipe shall comply with the requirements of section "Concrete" of this document,
class of the used concrete shall be at least C30/37. The Contractor, when calculating volume of the
concrete, shall take penetration of concrete in the surrounding ground into account.
Prior to installation of piles, the Contractor shall perform chemical aggressivenes tests of
groundwater and adjust the concrete recipe according to their results.
The constructed amount measurement unit shall be m3.
Load test of bored pile
In accordance with the requirements of LVS EN 1997-1 and the requirements of the design, load
testing of piles shall be performed. At additional request of the Engineer or the Employer,
homogeneity testing of the bored piles shall be performed using acoustic defectoscopy method
with special equipment.
Static load testing of piles shall be performed in accordance with LVS EN 1997-1, LVS EN 1536, EN
ISO 22477-1 and an elaborated program. Pile testing program shall be coordinated with the author-
supervisor and the Engineer. The program must contain data on the loading order of the test pile,
number of loading and unloading stages and load amounts, duration of stages, the controlled
compaction stabilization rate, provisions for termination of tests.
The piles shall be inspected only when the concrete strength has reached at least 80% of the design
and not earlier than 20 days after piling.
Sheet piling and retaining walls
The requirements apply to installation of sheet piling and retaining walls in loose ground. Sheet
piling shall be designed and produced in accordance with the requirements of LVS EN 12063 and
248
LVS EN 1537 "Execution of special geotechnical works. Ground anchors". The retaining walls shall
be designed and installed in accordance with the requirements of LVS EN 1990, LVS EN 1992 un
LVS EN 1997.
The installed amount in m2 shall be the measurement unit. The amount shall be measured as the
area of installed sheet piling. Height of sheet piling shall be measured from the reached depth mark
or boundary of the specified depth up to the designed contour of sheet piling. Length shall be
measured along the designed center line of sheet piling.
Steel sheet piling
The requirements apply to all deliveries and works necessary for production and anchoring of steel
sheet piling. The process includes also specifying the placement of sheet piling in the layout plan,
as well as a possible plan for noise prevention measures.
Steel sheet pile material shall comply with the requirements of LVS EN 1537 Excavation of
foundation pit, and the possible filling of the foundation pit goes in the process S2.
Sheet piles that form an independent sheet piling as part of the structure must be intact and
undamaged during the driving process, and they should not be used before. Used materials can be
used for temporary sheet piling if they meet functional requirements and do not form part of the
structure.
The sheet piles shall be transported, placed and stored so as not to be damaged. Moreover, they
shall be stored or labeled so that sheet piles of different types and quality are not swapped or mixed.
Z-profile sheet piles are recommended for permanent sheet piling. U-profile sheet piles can be used
for temporary sheet piling.
For temporary sheet piling, the Contractor shall draw up documentation regarding placement of
sheet piling in the layout plan, specifying dimensions of sheet piling, possible end fixing, supporting,
possible anchoring, driving method and accordant plan for excavation of foundation pit, unless
otherwise indicated in the Detailed Technical Design. Calculations and layout plans shall be
submitted to the Engineer before commencement of works.
Prior to digging or driving, the Contractor shall verify whether there are no wires, cables, channels
and other utilities in the ground where driving will be performed. Other obstacles (debris, slabs,
blocks) shall be removed in advance. During installation of sheet piling, a report shall be drawn up
on driving and anchoring of the sheet piling. Driving of sheet piles shall be performed in accordance
with requirements of Section 8 of LVS EN 1537 "Execution of special geotechnical works. Ground
anchors". The report shall be dated and signed by the works manager and the recorder. The report
shall contain information about identification of the workplace, method of execution, data on the
sheet piling and its anchorage, details about the results of drilling or casting.
If necessary, connection points (keys) of sheet piling shall be sealed by filling bitumen in them. The
bottom end of the front key shall be closed so that no stones could get stuck in the key during
driving.
249
Sheet piling shall be driven with pile-drivers or vibrators. All expenses connected with replacement
of driving equipment shall be included in the price.
Expenses of sheet piling shall also comprise all works connected with fixing of ends of sheet piling,
and it should also be taken into account that the Unit Price shall not be increased if problems occur
during driving.
Anticorrosion protection shall be provided for permanent steel sheet piles, ground anchors, pivots,
dividing beams, anchor ends and anchorages.
Anchoring of retaining walls of sheet piles shall be performed after compacting the ground filling
up to certain level, in accordance with the Work Performance Design approved by the Engineer. In
order to determine the characteristic resistance of anchor, at least 3 performance tests for pilot
anchors shall be performed for each distinctively different condition of ground and structure, unless
the Detailed Technical Design envisages another number. For anchoring in loose ground, where the
conditions are the same, only every tenth of the designed ground anchors shall be installed first. If
the test load is not mentioned in the Detailed Technical Design drawings, it shall be determined by
the author of the Detailed Technical Design.
Driving of sheet piling shall be performed according to the driving plan. If possible, driving shall be
done centrally. Frames shall be used when driving sheet piling.
Sheet piling shall be fixed so that it was not drained away, unearthed and did not lose its bearing
capacity in any other way during the works. Sheet piling that breaks during driving shall be restored
or repaired so that it could perform its functions. The same should be done if water leaks through
the sheet piling or significant deviations from the estimated thickness of ground layer or the
required driving depth are detected.
The excavated ground masses shall not be placed behind the sheet piling closer than 0.5 m if the
works are performed in the foundation pit at the bottom of the sheet piling. Load restrictions on the
edges of the foundation pit immediately behind the sheet piling shall be indicated in the Detailed
Technical Design.
Sheet piling where works are performed in the lower part of the foundation pit shall extend at least
0.15 m above the earth surface.
Tolerances for placement of sheet piling in the plan and vertically are given in Clause 8.6.1 of LVS
EN 1537 and envisage that:
- Maximum permissible deviation of the plan: ± 0.10 m (sheet piling in water) or ± 0.075 m
(sheet piling in the ground)
- Maximum permissible vertical deviation for straight sheet piling: 1% (sheet piling in the
ground) or 1.5% (sheet piling in water)
- Maximum permissible vertical deviation for inclined sheet piling: 2%
- Verticality shall be measured in a 1 m long section of the upper part of the sheet piling.
250
Diaphragm walls
The requirements apply to all materials and works for complex installation of diaphragm walls in
the ground. The requirements apply to equipment for excavation of diaphragm walls, excavation,
stabilizing suspension for anchoring of walls of boreholes, establishment of bottom, reinforcement,
concrete, etc.
A mesh shall be placed at the bottom part of the reinforcement reducing the risk of reinforcement
lifting during concrete pouring.
Diaphragm walls shall be designed and installed in accordance with the requirements of LVS EN
1538 "Execution of special geotechnical works. Partitions".
The installed amount in m2 shall be the measurement unit. The amount shall be measured as the
area of installed diaphragm walls. Height of walls shall be calculated from the specified depth limit
up to the designed contour of diphragm wall, length shall be measured along the designed center
line of the diphragm wall.
Permanent retaining walls
The requirements apply to all materials and works for installation of permanent ground retaining
walls.
The Employer does not require specific structure, type of operation or materials to be used for the
permanent retaining walls.
Reinforced concrete retaining walls shall meet the requirements specified in Section "Concrete" of
this document. Retaining walls of geosynthetic materials shall meet the requirements specified in
Section 5.5.15 of this document "Railway infrastructure".
Retaining walls shall comply with the requirements of LVS EN 1997-1.
The passive sides of the permanent retaining walls shall be architecturally coherent with other parts
of other buildings, suitable for the urban environment and with constructive protection against
vandalism.
Reinforcement of slopes
The requirements apply to all materials and works for reinforcement of slopes.
Slope reinforcement shall be used on all slopes with the angle of more than 1:1.5. The used
materials shall be easily maintained and their expected lifetime shall correspond to the expected
lifetime of the reinforced embankment.
Slope reinforcements shall be architecturally coherent with other parts of other buildings, suitable
for the urban environment and with constructive protection against vandalism.
251
5.5.5. Concrete works
The process includes all the materials and works that are connected with creation of structures
from concrete and reinforced-concrete.
Materials, execution and control as well as personnel competences and qualifications shall comply
with the corresponding standards for concrete works, that is LVS EN 1992 “Design of concrete
structures. General provisions and provisions for structures”, LVS ENV 1992-2 “Reinforced-concrete
bridges” and LVS ENV 13670-1 “Manufacturing of concrete structures”.
The grade of concrete shall be determined in accordance with indications in LVS EN 206-1
“Concrete - characteristics, manufacturing and correspondence to technical provisions”.
The works shall be performed within tolerances given in LVS ENV 13670-1 and related to safety and
stability, and also taking into account the tolerances that provide usability of structures and
aesthetic requirements. Regardless the tolerances full effort shall be applied to make the structure
attractive and aesthetic. For visible parts of the structure, for instance, for superstructures, the
surface shall be smooth without cams and defects, columns shall be right, and the other elements
shall be visually attractive. The pattern of concrete structures shall be smooth, it is not allowed to
leave footprints of wooden shuttering and board connections.
The execution quality of concrete works shall be such that on surfaces of concrete elements there
are no different colour spots or colour tones.
Tolerances to concrete structure elements are applicable in accordance with the requirements of
LVS ENV 13670-1 “Manufacturing of concrete structures”
The class of inspections, in accordance with LVS ENV 13670-1 “Manufacturing of concrete
structures” shall be not less than the 2nd class.
When passing from one structure element to another (for example, from a base part to a column)
joints shall be created in such way to satisfy the tolerance requirements for both parts of the
structure.
If in the process or standard there are tolerances with absolute and relative requirements (mm and
%), then the higher one shall be used. Requirements for common tolerances for supports in the
water shall be indicated in the Detailed Technical Design.
Post shores, temporary bracings and covering structures
The requirements refer to all materials and works that are connected with post shores and bracing
that have the use to take vertical or horizontal load during bridge construction, installation,
exploitation and removal. The requirements also refer to creation and mounting works for such
auxiliary constructions, expenses for which are not included into the process of formwork usage.
The Contractor shall design post shores and bracing structures, determine the calculated loads on
post shores and be responsible for design and calculation thereof. Subtruss drawings, prior to
252
construction of post shores and bracings, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer not
later than 30 days before installation of post shores and bracings.
If the construction method, due to addition loads taking, requires additional bracing or increase in
element dimensions, then Engineer’s permit shall be received on time (20 days before commencing
the works). All additional expenses shall be included into this process.
Post shores and formworks, including bracings and supports thereof, shall be designed in such a
way that they are:
- Able to take any load that may arise during the construction process;
- They are rigid enough to provide geometrical precision of structure shape and integrity;
- Post shores installation would provide maximally less interference for pedestrians, station
passengers and traffic. Even under full load, post shores shall fulfil the geometric
requirements for free space.
Post shores and bracings shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the requirements
of LVS ENV 13670-1 "Manufacturing of concrete structures” given in chapter 5.1 and annex B.
Post shores shall be testable and tested. Post shores shall be manufactured in such way that static
operation thereof would be easily understandable and deformations would be easily computable.
Post shores and bracings shall be designed in such way that dismounting them from structures
would be easy and slow.
If formwork of one structure or nearby structures is done simultaneously by various subcontractors
of the Contractor, each of them shall use post shores and mould bracings in different colours, in
order to avoid possible mistakes when removing from the mould. The same approach is necessary
if removing from the formwork is anticipated to be done in stages.
Telescopic post shores
The requirements refer to delivery, use and dismount of telescopic post shores. Control and
displacement of telescopic post shores is included into the formwork unit price.
Recommendations for section length of telescopic post shores, concreting and reinforcement
procedure come from the data given in the Detailed Technical Design. The Contractor shall assess
the necessity of permanent post shores for any part of the structure. Telescopic post shores shall
be fixed in such way that they carry their own weight, and also the load needed for concreting one
section if no other indications are given in the Detailed Technical Design.
At each construction stage, using telescopic post shores, it shall be provided that a concrete
element that is fixed with a prestressed reinforcement, is able to take actual loads. Asymmetric and
unbalanced construction is not allowed, if only it is not foreseen by the project. When performing
symmetric construction works, the length of post shores section and concreting procedure shall be
chosen in such way that there are no additional tensions larger than 1 MPa in supports and
superstructures.
253
In various stages of construction works, the height mark of telescopic post shores shall be
determined in accordance with computations, which are based on the reconciled time schedule of
the construction works. Later the Contractor is not allowed to deviate from the approved work plan,
unless there is a new plan approved.
The strength and constructive solution of telescopic post shores is under the responsibility of the
Contractor. The requirements for strength of span superstructures shall be in the Detailed
Technical Design. Post shores shall have appropriate equipment and shall function in such way that
starting from the first ready section, under any circumstances formwork construction and
concreting could be performed. Telescopic post shores shall not be displaced before concrete has
reached the necessary strength.
Slab of telescopic post shores shall have dense walls and roof, but these shall be adjusted to the
technology of construction works, that is, in case of necessity in the roof and walls there shall be
hatches for delivery of concrete and other materials. It is not allowed to displace the slab structure
in order to facilitate the construction works.
Formwork
The process includes assembling and disassembling of formwork together with the necessary
bracings and supports, relining, grooving, creation of technological apertures etc.
The process includes creation of complex formwork with such geometry that is indicated in the
drawings. The requirements also refer to the necessary work and access post shores and
structures, which are not indicated separately in post shores process descriptions, together with all
bracings and supports necessary for performing mold creation, bracing and concreting works.
If the Engineer allows the Contractor to use concrete casting seams (construction joints) in the way
different from the one indicated in the Detailed Technical Design or if it is not indicated in the
Detailed Technical Design, all the expenses related thereto shall be included into the prices for
formwork.
The formwork materials shall have such strength, plainness and surface structure that allow
fulfilment of the requirements to the ready concrete surface. It is not allowed to use formwork
connection clamps without special reconciliation with the Engineer.
Formwork materials shall comply with the requirements given at the moment of concluding the
Contract in the existent edition stated in the standard LVS EN 13670-1.5.2. chapter. In the cold
season of the year the metal formwork shall be thermally isolated with at least 15 mm thick veneer.
The formwork shall be thick and strong enough to keep the cement milk or to prevent change of
the concrete shape by chemical or mechanical impact before curing, thus decreasing the quality of
concreting works. The formwork, apart from this, shall be thick enough not to allow the extra water,
even before curing, to enter into the formwork. The structure shall be such that during construction
there are no cracks or deformations in the structure, which are larger than indicated in the
tolerances, possible post shores deformations shall be taken into account.
254
If before tensioning the reinforcement it is not possible to remove the reinforced-concrete structure
formwork, then it shall be constructed so that it would not affect changes of the construction shape,
which can appear at the time of tensioning.
All the angles of the structure shall be rounded with 50 mm radius, if not specified otherwise in the
Detailed Technical Design.
For the parts of structures, which are expected to be sealed against one-side water pressure (for
example, sinking case), it is necessary to use water-proof bracings.
Possible smearing of formwork shall be performed in such way that oil does not gets on the
reinforcement. Mold grease, coating, labelling etc. shall not damage or colour the ready concrete
surface or hinder creation of construction joints or the further surface processing.
Before commencing removal of formwork, the Contractor, using various testing methods,
temperature measurement or other approaches, shall make sure that the concrete has reached the
necessary resistance to pressure. The most disadvantaged places in the structure shall be
considered separately. The formwork can be dismantled only if the Contractor has submitted to the
Engineer the documents, which approve that the concrete strength is satisfactory and there will not
be any unexpected deformations in the structure.
At any time the Engineer or the Contractor have the right perform tests and checks of the material.
Constructive deflections of newly built structures on account of formwork shifting shall be less
than 1/600 of the span length of structure. In each case the limit of 5 m deviation shall not exceed
5 mm.
Concreting works shall not be started if the Engineer has not performed formwork test before and
has not signed the corresponding act.
As a unit of measurements the constructed volume in m2 shall be used. The amount is measured
as theoretic contact area of the formwork with concrete. All the edges, cams, croppings etc. shall
be included into the unit price.
Construction joints
When performing concreting step by step, construction joints are created. The construction joints,
which are located on visible planes, shall be located as parallel to the formwork joint as possible.
Prior to concrete casting the formwork and construction joints shall be cleaned from dirt, remains
of wire and foreign objects. The inner surfaces of the forms shall be even and clean. The surface
of the form shall be free from unexpected traces, deviations, cams, chips and mortar leaks. On the
visible surfaces the joining element pipes shall be placed in a regular pattern. The joining elements
shall be removed when dismantling forms.
If there are no other indications in the Detailed Technical Design, the open ends of joining pipes,
which are close to the traffic lanes or are closer than 3 m to the ground surface, shall be installed
with sun and weather protection covers made of plastic or other material, which provide protection
255
of any kind of dirt. The visible joining pipes in the walls of bridge supports, shall be installed from
the ground side.
Reinforcement
The requirements refer to non-tensioned and tensioned reinforcement in concrete structures.
The requirements refer to delivery, storage, cutting, bending, mounting and tying of reinforcement,
including all the auxiliary elements such as: mounting bars, distance bars, joining wires,
reinforcement fixing rebars etc. until the reinforcement is fully mounted.
- LVS EN 1992-1 “Design of reinforced-concrete structures. General rules and rules for
buildings”,
- LVS EN 1992-2 “Design of reinforced-concrete structures. Reinforced concrete bridges”,
- LVS EN 13670-1 “Manufacturing of concrete structures. 1st part - General provisions'”;
- regulations for non-tensioned reinforcement, given in LVS EN 10080 “Steel for concrete
reinforcement. Welded reinforcing bar steel. General information”;
- regulations for tensioned reinforcement - LVS EN 10138 “Steel elements for concrete
reinforcement” parts 1 and 2.
The Detailed Technical Design may contain references to other standards, if requirements thereof
are not lower than the ones mentioned above.
The reinforcement steel cannot be damaged, it shall be clean, without markable corrosion or oil
spots. Any non-tensioned reinforcement shall be profiled steel for reinforcement starting from the
grade B500B or higher in accordance with LVS EN 1992-1. For mounting loops it is allowed to use
smooth reinforcement.
The reinforcement shall be mounted in such way as it is shown in the drawings, and with such
precision, so that in the ready structures they would be located in the places indicated in the
drawings observing the indicated tolerances. Mounting and application of reinforcement shall be
performed in accordance with LVS EN 13670-1.
Distancers shall be strong and rigid enough to provide precise location of reinforcements and it
shall be possible to insert them into the concrete. Suggestions of the Contractor about the distance
used to place the distancers, shall be reconciled with the Engineer.
Gaps between the distancers shall be small enough to provide the defined tolerances of the
indicated protective layers. Distancers shall have a stable system. It is not allowed to shift or
destroy distancers.
Using distance bars the reinforcement shall be fixed against the formwork from each side, where
forms are located.
In each separate cross-section it is allowed to create overlaps not larger than 1/3 of the
reinforcement. The indicated overlap lengths shall be increased by 50% if such restrictions are not
fulfilled, only if it is not otherwise specified in the Detailed Technical Design.
256
One reinforcement layer in respect to another shall be fixed with fixing strings. In no circumstances
shall the fixing strings go inside the concrete touching layer zone.
The fixing strings shall not be connected by welding unless it is specified in the Detailed Technical
Design. The type of connection joint for strings shall be determined in the Detailed Technical
Design.
In each separate case, welding works for mounting and fixing the reinforcement are allowed only
with Engineer’s accept. If welding of reinforcement is allowed, it shall be performed by qualified
welders, in accordance with the procedure approved by the Engineer.
Mechanical screw type rebar joints are allowed to be used only if it is specified in the Detailed
Technical Design.
Before concreting, the reinforcement shall not be left uncovered for a long time period. During
mounting of the reinforcement, each time when it is not used, the reinforcement shall be covered
with tarpaulin or other applicable material.
Check of the reinforcement steel shall be performed in the volume and by methods described in
LVS EN “Steel for concrete reinforcement. Welded reinforcing bar steel. General information”.
For each delivery of reinforcement bars there should be a manufacturer’s certificate in accordance
with LVS EN 10080.
Tolerances for placing the reinforcement are given in LVS ENV 13670-1.
Inspection of the reinforcement shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of LVS
ENV 13670-1, chapter 5.
Always after receiving the reinforcement from the supplier, the Contractor shall control if it
corresponds to the purchase order, the certificate or labelling, and there should be an act composed
for the results of such control.
Control of the concrete protective layer thickness shall be performed at regularly distributed places
covering 3% of the concrete area.
As a unit of measurements tonnes of constructed volume shall be used. The reinforcement is
measured as nett amount of reinforcement with the corresponding diameter, basing on the nominal
weight indicated in LVS EN 10080, without additional overlaps or ends of reinforcement volume,
but including the necessary connection joints for strings. Mounting bars, distance bars, joining
wires, reinforcement fixing strings and other necessary auxiliary equipment shall be included into
the reinforcement unit price. This refers also to the reinforcement welding joints and rebars, which
the Contractor wants to use as constructive reinforcement.
257
Prestressed reinforcement
The requirements refer to delivery of tensionable rebars and tendons and to complex mounting,
including all the necessary equipment, for example, anchors (including spiral type reinforcement
for anchor support places), tendon duct pipes (with valves for air and draining), plastic pipes for
mortar injection, as well as stressing of prestressed reinforcement, injection of tendon ducts,
protection of anchors against corrosion, and also temporary protection of the prestressed
reinforcement against corrosion. The requirements also refer to delivery, mounting of tensioning
equipment, stressing of reinforcement, dismounting of the equipment after finishing the tensioning
works.
The Employer does not indicate the use of external or internal prestressed tendons. Use of external
tendons shall not be in conflict with the architectural requirements of the structure.
The type of prestressed reinforcement shall be chosen in accordance with the requirements of EN
10138 “Prestressed steel” parts 1-5. Reinforcement elements and prestressed steel (wires, tendons,
bars) shall comply with LVS EN 1992-1.
The necessary amount and location of tendons, the type of anchors and duct pipes shall be
indicated in the drawings of the Detailed Technical Design.
It is not allowed for corrosion damage to be seen on the tensioned steel reinforcements, tendon
duct pipes, anchoring, tendon connection structures etc., they have to be free from rust, oil, grease
etc.
Tendon duct pipes and joints thereof shall be sealed and have sufficient endurance and strength in
order to endure all the tests and pressure that take place during concreting and injection. Tendon
duct pipes shall be large enough to provide effective injection therein. It is not allowed to use the
pipes that can damage reinforcement or concrete. Tendon duct pipe shape and surface shall be
such that allows good adhesion with concrete and injected mortar thus providing the necessary
adhesion between the reinforcement and the concrete.
The duct cover shall be waterproof and shock-resistant at the time of concrete placement and
consolidation. The cover shall not be galvanized.
The agent that can be used for protection against frost and corrosion in the duct pipes shall have
low freezing point (this cannot expand when frozen) and this shall not negatively affect the steel
and injected mortar adhesion properties.
The Contractor in cooperation with the supplier of tensioned reinforcement shall develop a detailed
description of: tensioning tendons, tendon duct pipes, anchoring, joints and other elements. The
description shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 15 days before commencement of the
mounting works.
Together with the description to the Engineer shall submitted the following data:
- Steel quality (fpk /f p0.1k );
- Maximal tensile breaking strength (N/mm²);
- Stress-deformation diagram;
258
- Maximal relaxation (in 1000 hours) (%);
- Tendon elastic modulus (GPa);
- Tendon cross-section (mm²);
- Tendon duct diameter (mm), outer and inner;
- Anchoring dimensions and the necessary concrete strength at tensioning.
Tensioned reinforcement with equipment: tendon duct pipes, anchors, joints etc. shall be
transported and stored in such way to protect from any mechanical damage, smearing and
corrosion in accordance with the requirements given in LVS EN 1992-1 and EN 10138.
The tensioned reinforcement with equipment shall be stored in a ventilated and dry place with
moisture proof walls and roof. Materials shall be placed on the shelf, which is at least 0.15 m above
the ground. In the floor of the warehouse there should be a drainage for surface water.
When storing, the placed tensioned reinforcement with equipment shall be also protected against
aggressive environment, as well as it shall be stored and labelled in such a way that different types
of reinforcement could not be mixed. Storing conditions have to be reconciled in advance with the
Engineer.
The steel elements, duct pipes and anchors, joints etc. shall be cleaned up the need degree before
use.
Prestressed reinforcement shall be installed in the locations shown in the drawings, in accordance
with the requirements of LVS ENV 13670-1 and LVS EN 1992-1. Special attention must be paid that
the tendons are driven in anchors and connections without studs or folding, it is also to ensure
centric anchorage of the tendons in anchors.
Type and grade of prestressing steel must be recorded in inspection reports. Oxy-fuel welding and
cutting of prestressing steel or anchorage and welding of steel near the prestressing steel products
is not permitted. Welding of pressure distribution spirals, anchor plates and spot welding of
perforated plates is prohibited.
Tendon ducts and their joints must be insulated against water ingress. Tendon duct tubes must be
fastened in such a way that they cannot be dislodged during concreting. Maximum distance
between the tube fasteners must not exceed 1.0 m.
Valves must be installed at both ends of the duct tube, in the highest and the lowest points of the
duct, and in every spot where air or water can accumulate. Valve quantity, position and distance
between the valves must be approved by the Engineer. Valves must be marked in such a way that
it can be distinguished to which tendon they belong. Valves and duct tubes must be secured against
damage during the placement and consolidation of concrete. After use, all the valves shall be cut
at concrete surface level and covered with epoxy adhesive which shall be then sprinkled with fine
sand, or other valve sealing method shall be used, if such is provided for in the Detailed Technical
Design.
Injectable mortar must comply with the requirements of LVS EN 447. If suspicion of incomplete
filling of tendon ducts with mortar has been raised during injection, the Engineer, at the expense of
259
the Contractor, shall require precise monitoring to determine duct filling, for instance, by control
drilling with reinjection.
Tendon tensioning shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of LVS EN 13670-1.
Tensioning must be guided and carried out by an engineer with special knowledge and adequate
experience in such work.
Prestressing must comply with the previously developed and approved prestressing programme.
Tendon prestressing forces are specified in corresponding drawings. The Contractor must develop
a detailed description of prestressing work, which shall be approved by the Engineer. Before starting
the prestressing work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer valid documents on prestressing
equipment calibration.
Tensioning of tendons may be carried out in a single or multiple stages, which shall be specified in
the Detailed Technical Design. Written instructions for prestressing must be accessible on the
construction site. During tensioning, elongation of each tendon shall be measured under
corresponding load. During tensioning, operation sequence, load values and measured
deformations must be recorded in a protocol. After finishing the prestressing work, the Engineer
shall receive a copy of the protocol.
Tensioning of reinforcement shall be performed gradually and it is only permitted if the actual
strength of concrete complies with the requirements of LVS EN 1992-1 and is equal to or greater
than defined minimum compressive strength. It is highly important to make sure that the concrete
in anchorage areas has substantial strength. The results of the prestressing programme and their
compliance or non-compliance with the design requirements must be recorded in the inspection
report.
It is prohibited to carry out tensioning at ambient temperatures below -10 °C, unless otherwise is
stipulated in the Detailed Technical Design.
If during construction work serious damage in the structure occurs, for instance, tendon rupture or
duct damage, work must be stopped immediately and the Engineer must be informed of the
incident.
Maximum deviation of the reinforcement position must comply with the requirements of
LVS EN 13670-1. Inspection of the reinforcement shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of LVS ENV 13670-1.
As a unit of measurements the constructed volume in tonnes of the corresponding diameter
reinforcement in net quantities (based on the nominal weight specified in EN 10138 1) shall be
used. The unit price must incorporate all the material (including duct tubes, injected mortar, valves,
additional reinforcement which is necessary for prestressing, as well as joining wires and other
materials required for duct and tendon fastening, tensioning and injection), labour, equipment, and
tool costs, as well as incidental expenses for the completion of work.
260
Concrete
The requirements apply to the concrete components, concrete manufacturing and laying, as well
as for the caring and testing of fresh and hardened concrete.
The concrete composition and the materials used must ensure the characteristics of fresh and
hardened concrete, including consistency, density, strength, durability, reinforcement protection
against corrosion, taking into account the process of manufacturing and laying of concrete.
The concrete classification, according to requirements of LVS EN 206-1 “Concrete. Technical
provisions, performance of works, production and compliance”.
The overall compliance of liquid additives shall be determined in accordance with the requirements
of LVS EN 934-2:2012 “Additives for concrete, concrete mortar and mortar - Part 2: Concrete
additives - Definitions and requirements”.
Plasticisers, air-bound additives, if there are no other indications in the Detailed Technical Design,
may be used for all class concrete.
No other additives may be used without the approval or the authorisation of an Engineer on a case-
by-case basis. Additives shall be chosen in such a way as to ensure good laying and durability of
the concrete. If necessary, the test laying of the concrete with alternative compositions and
combinations of additives shall be performed in order to determine the best recipe.
The fillers of a normal weight concrete must comply with the requirements of LVS EN 12620
“Mineral materials for concrete”. The fillers of lightweight concrete must comply with the
requirements of LVS EN 13055-1 “Light mineral materials - Part 1: Light mineral materials for
concrete, cement grout or injection mortar”.
The rock, of which the crushed stones are made, must be solid, healthy, durable, with good abrasion
resistance and frost resistance, the fillers must be dense and with high mechanical strength, low
water absorbability, non-responding with binders and easy to operate. It is not permissible to use
marine mineral materials.
If the Detailed Technical Design specifies the requirement for a hardened concrete E-module, the
fillers must be chosen with such strength as to comply with this requirement. To use a filler with a
density exceeding 2800 kg/m³, an authorisation from the Engineer must be obtained if there is no
other indications in the Detailed Technical Design.
The fraction size of the coarse fillers shall not exceed 32 mm, but may not be less than 16 mm.
Granite crushed stone may be used as coarse fillers if there is no other indications in the Detailed
Technical Design.
For structures exposed to freezing effects, frost-resistant fillers shall be used in accordance with
the requirements of LVS EN 12620: 2009 “Mineral materials for concrete”.
Mixing water for concrete must meet the requirements of EN 1008. The mixing water for concrete
must have the quality of drinking water. The amount of mixing water for concrete involved must be
documented.
261
In the manufacturing of concrete, the requirements established by LVS EN 206-1 must be fulfilled
if there are no other indications in the Detailed Technical Design. All components of concrete, when
delivered at the concrete production site, must be clearly marked and the delivery note must be
accompanied by the following information:
o Name of the supplier;
o Type of material, fillers - also origin and nominal dimensions;
o Recipient;
o Delivery date;
o Amount.
Containers with raw materials must be labelled so that they can be easily identified. Powdered
materials (cement, fine ash and dry microsilicate) must be stored in dry, sealed containers.
The microsilicate suspension must be stored in sealed containers and stirred often to prevent
material deposition. Containers may not be exposed to freezing effects.
Containers must be used for storing fillers or they may be stored on a dry steel or abrasion resistant
concrete floor.
In addition to the above requirements, fillers must also comply with the following requirements:
Alkali reactivity in 52 weeks: > 0,040 % (coarse fillers)
Alkali reactivity in 14 days: > 0.1 % (coarse fillers)
Water absorption in % of filler volume: > 1.0 % (coarse fillers)
The requirements given in LVS EN 206-1 must be fulfilled when performing the dosing of materials.
If a digital reader is not used for the dosing equipment, the required dosing accuracy shall be
coordinated with the Engineer.
Throughout the mixing process, all dosing data must be recorded, indicating the intended and
actual quantity and the percentage of deviation. The same applies in relation to water content in
fillers and additional water.
Data recording shall be carried out immediately after filling material components into a mixing
machine or bunker before mixing equipment. Data shall be recorded and stored in the work journal.
Stirring and transport capacity must be sufficient to enable concrete works without unexpected
construction joints.
When concreting new structures of ceilings, spans or supports, the Contractor must demonstrate
his abilities (experience and possibilities) to produce a high-quality reinforced concrete structures.
Therefore, the Contractor must produce a control sample that includes a cross-sectional part of a
full-size design, similar to that provided for in the Detailed Technical Design. The size and shape of
the control sample to be produced the Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Engineer. For producing
of the control sample the concrete made in the intended concrete factory and transported with the
same means of transport and as long as the concrete intended for basic structures must be used.
The Contractor must develop a detailed plan for producing and testing of the sample.
262
The test plan of the sample must include procedures for the installation of formwork and laying of
concrete. Such a test based on the procedure performance must provide the basis for the process
of carrying out the works. Verification procedures, checks and final working procedures must be
approved by an Engineer who must be given the opportunity to follow the course of the inspections.
For the production of the sample, the same thickness of the layer to be incorporated, the methods
of laying, compaction and care to be used for the producing of the main structures should be used.
Vibration efficiency for fresh concrete shall be determined visually but for the hardened - with air
content control.
The caring of the concrete control sample, which includes time until demolding and protection
against evaporation of water, must be the same as to be performed when producing the structures.
Temperature change monitoring system must be applied during the production of the control
sample.
As a minimum such concrete inspections shall be performed:
At the place of concrete production it is necesarry to inspect:
o Water/cement ratio;
o Chloride ion content;
o Alkali content;
o Characteristics of consistency;
o Density;
o Concrete temperature;
At the place of concrete laying it is necesarry to inspect:
o Consistency (prior to pumping the concrete);
o Air content (prior to pumping the concrete);
o Density;
o Concrete temperature;
o Cement milk accumulation on the surface to be concreted;
o Concrete strenght test (considering the notes of LVS EN 206-1:2017 Annex A3).
If the structure is exposed to freezing effects during the operation, a cylindric sample with a
diameter of 100 mm must be drilled from the control sample, which must perform the inspection
of the air content. If the concrete in the samples of fresh and hardened concrete do not meet quality
requirements, the concrete composition, raw materials, equipment (mechanisms) or laying
technology must be adjusted and new samples must be made. The results of the sample
inspections shall be the basis for the quality of concrete laid in the structure. Therefore the
information on the inspection results should be kept until the Project is implemented.
Changes to the concrete recipe or any changes to the ingredients of the recipe must be submitted
to the Engineer for approval.
At the time of laying the concrete, the Contractors’s responsible construction work manager shall
be at the construction site.
263
Before the concrete is laid, the Contractor must prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval a
concrete laying programme.
If the concrete is to be laid directly on the ground or rocky foundation, the fresh concrete mass
must ensure protection against mixing with soil and leakage of water.
The temperature of the soil, stone, mold or existing structure being in the contact with the concrete
mass may not lead to the freezing of the concrete before it has achieved the necessary strength.
Laying of concrete on a frozen soil without taking special measures is not permitted.
The laying and compaction of concrete must be carried out in a way that reinforcement and all
other concretable elements are located in the compacted concrete at the locations provided for in
the design at all times until the concrete reaches its intended strength. Particular attention for
proper compaction of concrete shall be paid to places where the dimensions of the cross-sectional
structure changes, narrow spaces and places with dense reinforcement, in construction joints.
The free fall of the concrete mass may not be more than from 1 m height unless the Contractor
proves the opposite with tests. The falling concrete when striking against the reinforcement or
against the mold, must not break or differentiate.
Before the fresh concrete mass is laid, a thorough preparation of the existing concrete surface must be carried out, including:
• Cleaning of the concrete surface with a sand jet or equivalent method, resulting in the removal of cement grout film and uncovering of coarse filler elements in at least 3 mm depth;
• The surface of the processed, rough joint concrete must be moistured so that it is sufficiently wet during the laying of the fresh concrete.
Laid concrete must be protected against water erosion.
The presence of material parts on the construction joints, on the concrete surfaces which will be
subsequently processed, or which are intended to be linked to another material, that are used during
the caring of concrete is not permissable.
When laying the concrete in late autumn/early spring or during the winter conditions (ambient
temperature +5 °C and below), the concrete must be transported and laid by using methods and
equipment that prevents concrete from freezing before the concrete achieves the sufficient
strength. At low temperatures, before the concrete is laid, the safety measures taken to prevent the
concrete from freezing must be documented. If the temperature is -5 °C and below, the Contractor
shall not allow the concrete to be laid without heating. Safety measures for the laying of concrete
at low temperatures (ambient temperature +5 °C and below) may include but are not limited to:
o Use of heated fillers and water;
o laying at maximum temperature;
o concrete isolation;
o concrete heating.
264
The maximum temperature during concrete hardening shall not exceed 65 °C unless the Contractor
has documented that a higher temperature will not affect the strength and duration of the structure
and has not coordinated it with the Engineer.
The documentation submitted should take into account that the larger voids may occur and the
concrete strength may decrease at an increased temperature.
The Contractor must demonstrate, by means of a temperature analysis with the production of a
control sample or with a calculation, that the temperature control method foreseen is sufficient to
ensure adequate conditions for the concrete hardening. Where experience in the construction site
shows that the method adopted does not provide the intended results, it must be adjusted.
The temperature monitoring system to be used for production inspection must also be applied to
all concrete control samples.
Requirements for the temperature:
• Maximum temperature difference throughout the whole laying phase:
Normally, the temperature difference between the centre and the surface of the structure may not
exceed 20 °C unless otherwise provided on the basis of the Contractor’s detailed documentation.
• Maximum temperature difference between the structure parts at the same time:
The difference between the average temperature of adjacent concrete structures at the same time
may not exceed 20 °C.
• Maximum temperature difference between just embedded part and previously embedded part:
The difference of the average temperature between the hardening concrete and the adjacent
recently hardened concrete, which would interfere with the movement of the hardening concrete,
must not exceed 12 °C, provided that, on the basis of a detailed documentation of the Contractor’s
calculations, the contrary has not been demonstrated.
Detailed documentation of the calculations means that the Contractor can prove with temperature
and stress modelling that the tensile stress in concrete will not exceed the permissible values and
0.65 of the shear strain during hardening.
Demolding and compaction of structures may be carried out only after the Contractor has
demonstrated that the structure has obtained the necessary strength. This is proved with the
structure temperature measurements and check of control samples.
The concrete hardening may be affected by demolding carried out before the concrete has achieved
the necessary strength. If demolding is carried out before the concrete has achieved the necessary
strength, the measures for the protection of the concrete surfaces must be taken not later than
within one hour after demolding.
265
In order to comply with the requirements on minimum temperature difference, the Contractor must
provide for the implementation of the following preparatory work during the concrete hardening
period, by performing them individually or in combination:
• Plan such concrete laying sequence to ensure minimal temperature differences;
• Concrete with adjustable laying temperature;
• Isolating the embedded concrete by creating ceilings or insulation of formwork
and/or concrete surfaces;
• by heating and/or isolating the prevoisly embedded concrete. During the heating of
prevoisly embedded concrete, the occurrence of harmful temperature differences
in concrete must be avoided;
• by leaving the molds for a longer period of time as necessary, in accordance with
the requirements for achieving the concrete strength and demolding;
• cooling with built-in cooling tubes;
• heating with built-in heating tubes;
• surface protection against wind effects.
Before starting the works, the Contractor has to develop a plan for monitoring the performance of
the works. The plan has to be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor is responsible for controlling the performance of work, the production and
verification of control samples, the collection and evaluation of results.
In the concrete factory, the requirements for the air content in the concrete must be monitored
every day as well as immediately after the changes to the component dosing. On the construction
site, the air content must be controlled, at least, every 3rd hour or at least 1 time per 50 m3. If there
is no other agreement, every 500 m3 concrete shall be subject to an overview of the conformity of
the recipe with the design and concrete mass compliance with other requirements specified in the
design.
As a unit of measurements m3 of the constructed amount for each concrete class separately shall
be used.
Mechanical processing of a hardened concrete
Requirements apply to the mechanical processing of all visible hardened concrete surfaces,
including surface cleaning, collection, loading and removal of waste until the surface has gained a
smooth, unexposed of mineral substances or free of cement grout film, architecturally attractive
appearance.
If it is foreseen to apply a new concrete layer or new covering on a previously hardened concrete
slab, the strength of the processed concrete must be ascertained. It shall be carried out with a test
of tearing off a glued measuring body, verifying the strength of the concrete surface.
266
The minimum tear off resistance must be > 1,5 N/mm2. The test shall be carried out in accordance
with the requirements of LVS EN 12636. One test shall consist of 3 attempts. The medium tear off
resistance of the prepared concrete surface must be greater than 1.5 MPa, but the minimum tear
off resistance must be greater than 1.0 MPa. The tests shall be carried out in the presence of an
Engineer. The test volume shall be at least 1 test per each 50 m2 for the first 300 m2. If the first 6
tests produce satisfactory results, 1 test per each 200 m2 shall be carried out in the future if not
otherwise specified in the Detailed Technical Design.
As a unit of measurements square metres of the surface processing area shall be used.
Coating of concrete with protective layer
Requirements apply to the preparation of the concrete surface for coating, application of coating
as well as all necessary transport, work organisation and other measures to ensure high quality
performance.
If the Contractor deems it necessary, it is permitted to apply concrete coating with impregnated or
flexible protective coating.
The coating may not damage the visual appearance of the structure.
The properties of the selected material must comply with the requirements of LVS EN 1504-2:2008.
By establishing that the steam flow rate must comply with Class I requirements, the impact strength
must meet the requirements of Class III, the strength in the compressor must comply with Class I,
the resistance of sliding must meet the requirements of Class III.
As a unit of measurements square metres of the constructed area for each coating system
separately shall be used.
Prefabricated reinforced concrete structures and their elements
The process covers the purchase, transport, storage and assembly of prefabricated concrete
structures or elements, including fixing in place and in the position as foreseen by the design,
rectification of potential damage and the responsibility for the costs relating to the replacement of
damaged elements.
Requirements apply to all materials and works necessary for the installation of structures or
elements, for example, the installation of pos tshores and formwork, temporary fastenings and
tension of assembly, concreting of assembly, steel parts, etc. materials and works specified in the
Detailed Technical Design or drawing.
Tolerance requirements for fixing and assembling the structures or elements are given in LVS EN
13670-1.
As a unit of measurements the number of the designed elements shall be used.
267
5.5.6. Metal structures
The requirements apply to all materials and work related to the delivery, transportation, assembly
and control of the steel structures and parts of structures.
The load-bearing and auxiliary steel structures should be made of steel conforming to the classes
and requirements stated in LVS EN 10021, LVS EN 10204, LVS EN 10025 and LVS EN 10113, taking
into account the standards referred to or specified in the Detailed Technical Design.
All work should be carried out in accordance with the requirements of LVS EN 1993 “Design of steel
structures”, Part 7 “Manufacturing and assembly” and LVS EN 1090 “Execution of steel structures”.
The delivery should take place in close cooperation with the Engineer. The Contractor is required to
report the progress of works to the Engineer and inform the Engineer about any possible
complications that may affect the quality or the delivery deadline of the product.
The control of work is carried out in accordance with the tolerance requirements specified in LVS
EN 1090.
Delivery of steel materials
The requirements apply to procurement, delivery and quality control of steel materials. All costs,
including factory treatment, are included in the process. The requirements also apply to
procurement of the material.
The materials shall be delivered in accordance with the general technical delivery conditions and
designations specified in LVS EN 10021 “General technical delivery conditions for steel and cast
iron products”. The grade of steel shall be specified in accordance with the requirements of LVS EN
10020 “Definition and classification of grades of steel”.
Materials for load-bearing structures should be delivered accompanied by test certificate 3.1B or
3.1C in accordance with the requirements of LVS EN 10204 “Metallic products - Types of inspection
documents”, and the other materials should be accompanied by a test certificate in accordance
with the requirements of Paragraphs 2.1 and 2.2 of LVS EN 10204.
The Contractor shall ensure and control that the materials are delivered in accordance with the
requirements given in the standards, this document and the Detailed Technical Design. Before the
materials are put into use, the Contractor shall review and approve all certificates for the ordered
materials. The certificates must be available to the Engineer and shall become a part of the as-build
documentation.
The materials received shall be labelled and stored in a manner that prevents damage and ensures
easy control of their data (quality, price, number, etc.). The steel quality should be legible from the
labelling. The contractor is responsible for the labelling and its preservation.
When ordering rolled steel, the required length tolerances should be specified. Materials with strong
deformation shall be rejected; however, it is permitted to straighten and use materials with slight
deformation that does not exceed 3% of the surface area. The Detailed Technical Design may
contain other instructions.
268
The measuring unit shall be the mass of the delivered elements in tonnes.
Bolts with nuts and washers
The requirements apply to bolts with nuts and washers. The process also includes the possible
surface treatment of bolts, for example, metal coating.
The delivered bolts and nuts shall be accompanied by the test results specified in Paragraph 2.2 of
LVS EN 10204. The mechanical properties of bolts shall correspond to the requirements of LVS EN
20898-1 and the mechanical properties of nuts shall correspond to the requirements of LVS EN
20898-2. Class 8.8 bolts shall be used in standard-strength bolted joints and Class 8.8 or 10.9 bolts
shall be used in high-strength bolted joints with controlled tension force.
To ensure even tensioning of the bolts, the tensioned bolts must be covered with a suitable grease.
The thickness of the galvanisation layer of bolts, nuts and washers should meet the supplier's
standard properties, but not be smaller than 40 µ.
Boltholes of high-strength bolted joints should be drilled. Allowance should not exceed 1 mm. The
allowance for standard-strength bolts depends on the bolt diameter and is determined in
accordance with LVS EN 1090-1.
The exposed thread must not exceed four full turns and must not be lower than two full turns.
Washers made from the same steel as the bolts must be used in all bolted joints under the bolt
head and the nut.
The bolts must meet the requirements of EN 20898-1/2 and be of grade specified in the drawings
or in the Detailed Technical Design.
The measuring unit shall be the mass of the delivered elements in tonnes.
Treatment and connection of steel elements
The requirements apply to all work carried out at the factory or the construction site (except for
surface treatment) that is required in order to deliver the steel structures according to the
requirements contained in the project documentation, as well as the instructions in the Detailed
Technical Design. Among other items, the process includes the preparation of the product
drawings, lists of materials, welding plans and clarifications of welding procedures, welding
procedure tests, painting, sorting, preparations, processing (cutting, sawing, bending, drilling,
machining, turning, etc.), joining and welding, installation and checks, assembly, internal
transportation, balancing, marking, storage and control of all components. The process also
includes all costs related to welder control, as well as extended control and follow-up control for
rejected or repaired welded items.
The steel structures compliant with these instructions shall be manufactured, delivered and
assembled by the Contractor who has the required competence and suitable technological
269
equipment. If the Contractor itself does not have such competence, it shall contract qualified
subcontractors for performance of this work.
Tolerance requirements for various structures and elements of structures have been given in LVS
EN 1090-1 “Execution of steel structures and aluminium structures - Part 1: General provisions and
provisions for structures”.
The measuring unit shall be the mass of the constructed elements in tonnes.
Rolled steel processing
The requirements apply to all types of rolled steel processing, such as cutting, sawing, bending,
filing, machining, turning, etc.
Straightening and bending
Any straightening and bending of materials should be performed gradually, using thermal treatment
(hot bending). Any straightening and bending of materials should be performed carefully to avoid
notches, cracks, bulges or other material defects.
Thermal treatment of normal steel should be performed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions, and normally should be at the temperature of 550-600°C.
The Contractor must develop a procedure for thermal treatment. It is to be submitted to the
Engineer prior to starting the works.
Hot forming of thermomechanically rolled and high-strength steel (fy = 420-540 Mpa) is usually not
permitted and its quality should be approved by the Engineer on a case-by-case basis.
Cold bending is permitted, but should be performed according to the steel manufacturer’s
instructions. The procedure is to be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to starting the
works.
Engineer's approval should be obtained for straightening structures with flame. Temperature
control is required when straightening elements using flame. Temperature up to 650°C is usually
required. Straightening using flame should be done by qualified staff and recorded in the work
logbook. The Contractor must develop a procedure for straightening. It is to be submitted to the
Engineer prior to starting the works.
Cutting
Cutting and splitting can be done using cutting with flame, sawing or mechanical cutting. All
deformed material along the cut edges should be removed when cutting.
If using cutting with flame, holes should be drilled at all corners where the cut line changes direction,
even if not specifically indicated in the drawings. If drill hole dimensions are not specified, it is
assumed the hole diameter is Ø 20 mm.
270
Treatment of end plane edges and cavities
Grooves and rough areas at the edges, end planes and cutout planes should be removed by
machining, grinding or filing. All edge corners after cutting should be grinded to a radius greater
than 2 mm.
If the surface is to be coated with metal (galvanised), then any surface defects, for example, left
from welding, should be removed by grinding.
Welding
The requirements apply to all works related to welding. The process applies to: welding works,
development of welding procedure clarifications, development of the required product tests and
welding procedure tests, cleaning of joints and removal of weld joint residue, compilation of welding
protocol, the required preheating and postheating, welding control, the required corrections and
follow-up control. The process applies to electric arc welding as the source of heat.
The powder and additives should be stored according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Preparations
For all major or important welding works, the Contractor must prepare a detailed welding plan with
descriptions of the procedure of welding works. The welding plans and welding procedures must
be submitted to the Engineer at least 15 days prior to commencement of the works.
The welds and welded joints must be indicated in the drawings in accordance with the requirements
of ISO 2553. Welding procedure clarifications should be prepared for all load-bearing welds in
accordance with the requirements of LVS EN 288-2 “Specification and qualification of welding
procedures for metallic materials - Welding procedure specification - Part 2: Arc welding”.
General requirements for welding works
All welding works should be supervised by an experienced welding specialist who holds a relevant
certificate confirming his/her competence to perform such works. The joints must be executed in
accordance with the drawings. The joined surfaces must be free of dirt, residues of rust, paint,
grease, etc.
When welding one-sided V-joint, the base opening must be smaller than 2 mm. If the base opening
is larger than 2 mm, but smaller than 5 mm, the adjacent elements shall be welded using two-sided
weld.
The welding works should be performed so as to reduce deformations created in the welding
process to a minimum and to ensure the shape of structure as foreseen in the design. If the
structure nevertheless needs to be straightened after welding, it should be performed using thermal
treatment (hot bending).
271
The welding location must be dry and protected from wind and draught. Welding is not permitted
at temperatures below + 5°C.
If no other requirements are stated in the project documentation or the Detailed Technical Design,
then the welding joint must comply with the following requirements:
• Impact strength test: The same requirements as the basic material in the direction of rolling; refer
to LVS EN 10025 and LVS EN 10113. For materials delivered in accordance with the requirements
of LVS EN 10113, the test temperature shall be - 20°C.
• Macro grinding: Welding joints must be clearly visible, so that each welding bead or area subjected
to heat can be easily identified.
• Tensile test: The rupture must occur in the main material, outside the area subjected to heat. The
tensile strength must be higher than the minimal one defined for the main material.
Acceptance of welds
Tolerances for visual control of welds are defined below. If tolerances for welds have been
exceeded, this must be reported to the Engineer before commencing the rectification of errors.
In case of repeatedly exceeded weld tolerances, the welding process should be examined and
revision of the welding procedure may be made.
Acceptance requirements for visual control of welded joints, unless defined otherwise in the
Detailed Technical Design:
• Welds shall have smooth surface and evenly transition to the main material.
• V-type welds should be symmetrical and with a slight bend or straight surface.
• The rise of butt welds above the main material must not exceed the figures given in
the table 5.1;
• All welds must have an even transition to the main material, without sharp edges.
• Unevenness in welds must not exceed 2 mm. Furthermore, the welding joints must
comply with the requirements of Annex H to LVS ENV 1090.
Plate thickness Permitted rise
Up to 10 mm 2 mm
10–25 mm 3 mm
25–50 mm 4 mm
More than 50 mm 5 mm
Table 5.1 Rise of butt welds
272
Correcting welds
Correction works may only be carried out after the Engineer has approved the weld repair
procedure.
The joint repair procedure must include a method for correction of errors, making joints, etc. The
error correction method, if required, shall include a new welding procedure.
The correction of welds shall take place according to an approved procedure: the corrected welding
joint must be of a regular shape, free of rust, grease, oil or other contaminants. After flame
treatment, all main material contaminated by carbon must be carefully filed off the treated surface.
The minimal correction length is 100 mm.
The corrected area must be inspected visually and control of 100% of the area using a non-
destructive method must be carried out.
Quality control
The Contractor is responsible for carrying out thorough personal control during the entire work
process supervised by an experienced welding professional. The Contractor must carry out control
of the welding works: visual and X-ray and/or ultrasound and magnetic control, etc., to discover
cracks, porosity, joint faults, presence of contaminants, unfilled areas at joint edges, faults in the
base, etc.
Control of weld joints must be carried out at the locations where the occurrence of faults is the
highest, with not less than 100% control extent.
Non-destructive weld control must be carried out not earlier than 24 hours after the completion of
work.
X-ray control should be performed in accordance with LVS EN 12517 “Non-destructive testing of
welds. Evaluation of welded joints by radiography. Acceptance levels”.
Ultrasound control of pipe unit points should be performed in accordance with LVS EN 1714/A2
“Non destructive testing of welded joints. Ultrasonic testing of welded joints “.
Magnetic powder control shall be performed in accordance with LVS EN ISO 3059 “Non-destructive
testing -- Penetrant testing and magnetic particle testing -- Viewing conditions”. Magnetic clamps
shall be used.
Bolted connections
The requirements apply to all bolted connections.
Bolted connections shall be manufactured in accordance with LVS EN 1993-1 and EN 1090-1.
The length of the bolt body shall be sufficient to accommodate a washer and nut on it at the joint.
The bolt head and the nut must be in full contact with the steel surface of the joint or with the
washers.
273
All bolt holes in joint elements must be drilled. The drill hole diameter is to be determined in
accordance with LVS EN 1090-. The drill hole edges shall be milled after the final drilling.
Standard-strength bolts must be insertable into place by hand, without requiring hammering or
similar methods.
The exposed thread must not exceed four full turns and must not be lower than two free turns.
Washers made from the same steel as the bolts must be used in all bolted joints under the bolt
head and the nut.
The bolts must comply with the requirements of LVS EN 20898-1/2 and the grade specified in the
drawings.
Test assembly
The requirements apply to the test assembly of structure components and development of
connections production procedures.
All load-bearing structures to be assembled and their parts must be subjected to testing assembly
at the structure production site, unless specified otherwise in the Detailed Technical Design. The
part of structures that will be subjected to test assembly must be coordinated with the Engineer.
The purpose of the test assembly is to verify the geometric dimensional accuracy of the completed
structure.
If several identical structures are to be produced under the project, the testing assembly shall be
done only once.
Anti-corrosion treatment of steel structure surface
The requirements apply to steel surface cleaning along with coating supply and application. The
process also includes surface treatment correction after assembly. The requirements provided for
in EN 1090-1 are to be fulfilled, unless otherwise specified in the Detailed Technical Design.
Corrosion protection system must correspond to corrosivity category and comply with the
requirements of LVS EN ISO 12944 and ISO 9223.
The type of paint shall be offered by the Contractor, taking into account the requirements specified
in the standards. The type of paint must correspond to and cleaning and application must be
performed in accordance with the type offered in the supplier’s specifications which is to be
consistent with the paint system attributed to a corrosivity category.
For the anticorrosion system, the Contractor is not allowed to use coating applied by spray of zinc-
rich paint, also referred to as "сold galvanizing".
All painting products and possible additives, solvents, etc. that are used for painting must come
from the same supplier. The Contractor must specify the supplier and the painting system. The
supplier must submit a product description containing the following data:
274
• the requirements for surface preparation;
• volume of solid colorant, %;
• wet-film thickness / dry-film thickness (max./min. specified);
• overcoating interval at 5, 10 un 23°C (max., min.);
• solvent used (amount and type);
• coating expected lifetime;
• guidelines / requirements for application.
All painting products and solvents must be stored in the original packaging and labelled in
accordance with the supplier’s instructions. Product number and shelf life are to be indicated on all
products.
The Contractor must establish a detailed procedure for application of steel surface anticorrosion
coating. The procedure is to be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Unless otherwise specified
in the Detailed Technical Design, steel surfaces are to be painted at the factory before the structures
are transported to the construction site.
For surface preparation, the requirements provided for in EN 1090-1 are to be fulfilled, unless
otherwise specified in the Detailed Technical Design.
Steel surface must be cleaned, prime coated and painted at temperatures above +5°C, the relative
humidity in the room where steel cleaning and painting take place should be lower than 80%, steel
temperature must be at least + 3°C, unless the material manufacturer with tests and previous
comparable experience can prove that the coating successfully functions during the necessary time
period under other conditions as well.
Monitoring should be carried out in accordance with the monitoring plan established by the
Contractor. The hot dip galvanizing method offered by the Contractor must also contain a
description of the parameters to be monitored.
Inspection procedure, documentation, approval and possibly repeated galvanization procedure
must be agreed with the Engineer before the start of operation. All conditions affecting surface
treatment quality at the production/construction site such as weather conditions and wind,
temperature, air humidity, dew point, steel temperature etc. must be recorded at least twice during
a work shift and always if there is a major change in conditions. The registered data are to be stored
and submitted to the Engineer upon request.
Paint adhesion is to be tested against base metal, as well as between paint coats. Test shall be
carried out after the paint coating is dried up and hardened. Paint adhesion shall be measured on
separate test panels that are previously treated and coated in parallel with the structure itself. Paint
adhesion shall be measured using the pull-off test for adhesion provided for in ISO 4624, adhesion
must be at least 2 MPa.
Wet paint thickness shall be measured during application. Unless otherwise specified in the
Detailed Technical Design, dry-film thickness shall be monitored after application of each coat and
for the whole paint system.
275
Paint adhesion control shall be carried out as follows: one spot measurement obtained over each
40 m2 of panel or one spot measurement obtained over each 10 m2 of panel if surface has
sophisticated geometry.
Paint coating thickness control shall be carried out as follows: one spot measurement obtained
over each 20m2 of panel or one spot measurement obtained over each 1m2 of panel if surface has
small and sophisticated geometry.
Thickness must be controlled with the use of coating thickness gauge. Each spot measurement is
the average of three coating thickness measurements taken at points located at a distance of
25mm.
Readings must be recorded. The registered data are to be stored and submitted to the Engineer
upon request.
As a unit of measurements the coated surface area in square metres shall be used.
5.5.7. Structural bearings and expansion joints
Structural bearings
The requirements apply to structural bearing kit supply and assembly. Structural bearing types and
size must be defined in the project documentation or in the Detailed Technical Design. The
requirements also apply to transportation, temporary installation and dismounting. The
requirements also apply to materials and works required for structural bearing reinforcement,
adjustment and possible concrete casting.
If concrete casting of structural bearings takes place during cold seasons, frost-resistant grout or
concrete must be used. Structural bearings must be supplied with anchorage consisting of at least
4 anchoring elements on each side, or as specified in the project documentation or in the Detailed
Technical Design. Anchoring parts shall be designed in such a way that enables easy replacement
of structural bearings. For bridge and overpass structural bearings, its manufacturer must provide
evidence of or demonstrate that the expected lifetime of the structural bearing slip plane is
equivalent to that of the building structure (5th category according to LVS EN 1990-1). The
requirements referring to structural bearing properties are provided for in the project
documentation and in LVS EN 1337-1 – "Structural Bearings. General Design Rules".
The model of the structural bearings used in the bridge and overpass structures must be the one
which has been already successfully used on rail overpasses or bridges in the rail infrastructure
which is built and maintained according to EC TSI requirements. The Contractor with calculations
must prove that the structures supporting horizontally moving structural bearings are tested for
horizontal forces, evaluating the friction factor of the bearing slip plane, or, alternatively, the
manufacturer of structural bearings with tests must prove that the friction factor of the bearings is
negligible.
276
The structural bearings must be transported and stored on the construction site in such a way that
they would not be damaged, according to the requirements laid down in LVS EN 1337-11 –
"Structural Bearings. Transport, Storage and Installation".
The structural bearing must be installed in the condition stipulated in the design, taking into account
air temperature and span structure condition during installation. After bearing reinforcement is
accomplished, all the auxiliary structures are to be removed.
Installation tolerances for the structural bearings are provided for in the project documentation or
in the supplier's requirements.
As a unit of measurements the number of bearings for each bearing type shall be used.
Bridge and overpass expansion joints
The requirements apply to supply and installation of the expansion joint structure kit, as laid down
in the project documentation or in the Detailed Technical Design.
Installation comprises preparation of the place for expansion joint installation, concrete joint
cleaning, possible adjustment and concrete casting of the expansion joint structure.
A bridge or overpass expansion joint is to be understood as a junction of spans or junction of an
approach zone and a span exposed to traffic loads on a carriageway.
The expansion joint must be waterproof and durable, and it must be easy to replace and repair. The
joint structure is to be designed in such a way that it does not make significant changes in noise
emissions when a rolling stock crosses the joint surrounding area.
The requirements for materials and expansion joint types are laid down in the project
documentation or in the Detailed Technical Design. The expansion joints are to be made in
accordance with the design and the supplier’s instructions.
As a unit of measurements the length of expansion joint of each type and size in metres shall be
used.
Building expansion joints
The requirements apply to supply and installation of the building expansion joint structure kit, as
laid down in the Detailed Technical Design.
Installation comprises cleaning of the place for expansion joint installation, concrete joint cleaning,
possible adjustment and concrete casting of the expansion joint structure.
A building expansion joint is to be understood as a covered bond of ceilings or other mass sections
which may be exposed to load impact. For the expansion joint, it must be provided independent
movement ability of separate building sections, retaining of continuous usability of the ceiling.
The expansion joint must be waterproof and durable, and it must be easy to replace and repair.
277
The requirements for materials and expansion joint types are laid down in the project
documentation or in the Detailed Technical Design. The expansion joints are to be made in
accordance with the design and the supplier’s instructions.
As a unit of measurements the length of expansion joint of each type and size in metres shall be
used.
5.5.8. Waterproofing
The requirements apply to all the works relating to waterproofing material purchase, supply and
application, including surface preparation, priming and coating. Before waterproofing, the
Contractor must perform structure geometry control.
The Contractor must demonstrate that concrete surface slopes for drainage under the design are
maintained and water drainage is provided.
For bridge and overpass structures, it is necessary to use the waterproofing covering which has
been already successfully used on rail overpasses or bridges in the rail infrastructure which is built
and maintained according to the European Commission regulations on Technical Specifications for
Interoperability (EC TSI), as well as the waterproofing system which has successfully served under
weather conditions similar to those occurring on the construction site.
Before applying waterproofing covering on prepared surface, a pull-off test must be carried out,
according to LVS EN ISO 4624. The pull-off test value is to comply with the one specified in the
manufacturer’s requirements.
Protective coating for waterproof layer, if such coating is used, and waterproofing itself must come
from the same manufacturer. Protective coating for waterproof layer may not be used if the
manufacturer with tests can prove that such coating is not necessary and the system has been
successfully used in the railway infrastructure which is built and maintained according to EC TSI
requirements.
During the whole process of waterproofing, the Contractor must carry out at least the following
measurements:
- air humidity;
- air temperature;
- surface temperature;
- rainfall (mm/24h).
Measurements must be recorded in waterproofing protocol, and the protocol is to be submitted to
the Engineer.
As a unit of measurements the surface area of waterproofing layer applied in square metres shall
be used.
278
5.5.9. Masonry The requirements apply to all the works relating to masonry construction, material selection, supply and quality control.
Quality of the materials used
Allowable deviations from brick or block sizes:
- in length +/- 5 mm;
- in width +/- 4 mm;
- in thickness +/-3mm.
It is not permitted more than one 1-1.5 cm deep spall or one 30 mm deep crack on a brick or a
block.
Works technology requirements
Masonry must be separated from foundation by waterproofing layer.
Regardless of brick bond pattern system masoning shall be started and finished with a header
course.
Vertical joints shall be 8-10 mm thick, but horizontal – 10-15 mm thick.
When constructing reinforced masonry, it should be taken into account that the joint thickness must
be 4 mm greater than the reinforcing bar diameter.
Masoning shall be started from the corners.
After each increase in height for 0.5-0.7 m, the masonry shall be checked for horizontal and vertical
alignment.
All the masonry joints must be bonded. Horizontal and vertical transverse joints are to be fully filled
with mortar.
If in cold weather conditions interruption of work is planned, the masonry has to be protected by
insulating.
Works quality requirements
Deviations from the outlined gridlines must not exceed +/- 10 mm.
Allowable deviation of surfaces and corners from the vertical:
- for one floor +/- 10 mm;
- for the whole building +/-30 mm.
Allowable deviations of masonry thickness +/- 15 mm.
279
Allowable deviations of joint thickness:
- horizontal – 2 to 3 mm;
- Vertical – +/-2 mm.
Allowable deviation of separate masonry courses from the horizontal for 10 m is 15 mm.
Allowable deviations of window and door opening from the vertical is +/- 20 mm.
Allowable deviations for window and door opening width +/- 15 mm.
Allowable local roughness of wall surface, when measuring with a 2 m long rod, +/- 10 mm.
5.5.10. Wall insulation
The requirements apply to all the works relating to external wall insulation, material selection,
supply and quality control.
Works technology requirements
Wall insulation must be carried out in accordance with the technical solutions designed by the
suppliers and with the Detailed Technical Design. In order to make sure that wall insulation is
carried out on a high quality level, the Contractor must perform, at its own expense and under
appropriate weather conditions, a thermography inspection.
The surfaces to be insulated must be dry.
Insulation material butt joints must be tight.
Insulation material must tightly adjoin walls and floors.
If overall density of wall insulating sheathing exceeds 10 kg/m², insulation anchors are to be used.
Insulation anchors shall be fixed in the corners and in the middle of a panel, at least 4 pieces per
m².
5.5.11. Internal water supply, heating systems, heating units, gas pipes, pressure
pipes
The requirements apply to all works related to the construction works, choice of materials, supply
and quality control of water supply and heat supply systems.
Internal water supply
The displacement from the perpendicular of the ends of cut off tubes may not be larger than 2°.
Inaccuracies in the length of the prepared parts +/- 2 mm on 1 mm and +/- 1 mm on each
subsequent meter.
Irregularities of the ends of cut off tubes are not more than 0,5 mm.
280
Inaccuracy of thread length:
- Of the short thread until 10%;
- Of the long thread +/-5 mm.
Heating system. Heating units
Quality of the materials used
The Contractor must ensure closed storage for storing fittings, valves, radiators etc. parts.
When storing pipes, it must be ensured that they are protected against exposure to the outside
environment, i.e. should be covered if they are placed in a prolonged exposure to direct atmospheric
precipitation.
Works technology requirements
In places where pipelines cross the enclosing structures, they shall be covered in shells of fireproof
material. The edges of the shells must be at the same distance from the wall, frame or ceiling
surfaces, but 30 mm higher than the clean floor. Gaps and holes between pipe-laying areas must
be provided with fireproof materials that provide fire protection for the cross-surfaces. Heating
mains located in unheated premises, in the attic, basement or floor ducts must be insulated, the
thickness of the insulation layer is 40-60 mm.
The risers can be mounted open or hidden by placing them in channels. Risers with a diameter of
up to 32 mm are mounted 35 mm from the wall, and with a larger diameter - up to 50 mm from the
wall.
In-line valves or valves must be provided for the disconnection of the risers, which are installed 120
mm from the forward and reverse mains.
The horizontal pipelines shall be fastened to the wall with hooks or brackets. Metal pipes without
thermal insulation shall be fastened:
- with ø līdz 50 mm – 2,5-5 m;
- with ø 70 - 100 mm – 6 m;
- with ø 125 - 150 mm – 7-8 m.
Metal pipes with thermal insulation shall be fastened:
- with ø līdz 50 mm – 1,5-3 m;
- with ø 70 - 100 mm – 4-4,5 m;
- with ø 125 - 150 mm – 5-6 m.
The risers are fastened every 3 m (one fastening for the floor if the height of the floor is up to 4 m).
281
All service lateral pipes shall be mounted with a slope of not less than 0.002 (recommended is
0.003 - 0.005), for heating systems with natural circulation - not less than 0.01.
Service lateral with a length of more than 30 m require expansion joints with fixed supports.
Radiators are installed openly without a fence, as far as possible assembling them in niches, strictly
horizontally without inclination to one side or the other.
The connection to the radiator is mounted with a gradient of 0.01, but not less than 10 mm for the
entire length of the connection. The forward with inclination from risers to radiator, reverse - with
inclination from radiator to riser.
It is allowed to connect the radiators in a row only within one room.
For the assembly and maintenance of a heating unit manufactured in a factory, a free space must
be left around the heating unit. The distance from the nearest obstacle (or the wall) must be not
less than 0,8 m. The heating unit is installed without a special foundation on the floor and does not
require special fastening with screws.
In the heating unit area the minimum aisle distance between:
- pumps with electric motors until 1kW – 1,0 m;
- pumps with electric motors more than 1 kW – 1,2 m;
- between pumps and wall - 1 m;
- between pumps and swichboard or automation cabinet – 2 m;
- between the prolonged parts of equipments and wall – 0,8 m.
Minimum distance between the prolonged parts of the pump and electric motor to the wall without
a passage - 0.3 m.
The air output fitting with ø 15 mm must be provided at the highest pipeline points of the heating
unit, and at the lowest points - output valves with ø 25 mm.
The heat exchangers must be selected so that the heat exchanger is cooled as efficiently as
possible under all conditions with a 20% heat exchanger surface reserve for heat exchangers. Spare
heat exchangers are not foreseen.
It is strictly forbidden to mix the forward flow with reverse flow.
The connection of the heating unit in any case shall not be less than ø 32 mm.
The heating unit must be equipped with plenum – leakage ventilation. A ramp should be installed
in the floor, but if this can not be done - a water receiving pit with dimensions of not less than
0,5x0,5x0,8 m to be covered with a removable grid. A drain pump should be provided for pumping
water from the pit.
Prior to connecting the expansion tank to the heating system, air should be introduced into the
heating system to the static pressure of the heating system (= / - 0,1 bar). The expansion tank must
bear a sticker indicating the size of the pressure to be pumped in bars.
282
Exits must be provided from the heating unit:
- if the heating unit is shorter than 12 m and the distance to the outside of the building is less
than 12 m - one exit to the adjoining room, corridor or staircase, but if the distance to the
outside of the building is greater than 12 m - then one permanent outward;
- if the heating unit is longer than 12 m - two exits from which one to outward, and the other
– to the adjoining room, corridor or staircase.
The door of the heating unit must be made of metal and must be positioned outwards of the room.
If the heating unit has a window, then it should be fitted with a metal grid.
Works quality requirements
Deviation of the risers and straight sections from the design - not more than 2 mm per 1 m pipeline.
The hydraulic test is carried out at a pressure 1.25 times the maximum working pressure but not
lower than:
- for heat exchangers, heating coil equipment – 10 bar;
- for direct connection heating systems – 7,5 bar;
- for the primary side of the heating point – 16 bar.
The hydraulic test is considered to be passed if no leakage is estabished, the leakage of the welds
and a drop in pressure for 15 minutes does not exceed 0.2 bar.
Indoor temperatures must comply with the statutory limits:
- in public premises +18°C;
- shared lobby, staircase and corridor +16°C;
- engine room of the elevator +5°C;
- the hot water temperature at the water distribution point must be not less than 55 ° C and
not higher than 70 ° C
Gas piping
Works technology requirements
The shuting-off devices on the vertical and horizontal gas pipelines shall be so arranged that the
axis of the shuting-off devices are parallel to the wall.
The release handle of the shuting-off devices must not be against the wall.
283
The gas pipeline's leakproofness and resistance testing should be performed on a disconnected
machine.
Provisions for inspection of the internal gas pipeline:
- low pressure 0,05 MPa;
- test pressure on resistance 0,1MPa, duration of the test 1 h;
- test pressure for leakage 0,005 MPa, duration of the test 5 min;
- average pressure 0,1 till 0,3 MPa;
- test pressure on resistance 0,45 MPa, duration of the test 1 h;
- test pressure for leakage 0,03 MPa, duration of the test 1 h;
- high pressure 0,3 till 0,6 MPa;
- test pressure on resistance 0,75MPa, duration of the test 1 h;
- test pressure for leakage 1,25 from the work pressure, not lower than 0,6 MPa, duration of
the test 1 h.
Installation of the internal gas pipelines can be carried out after the completion of the following
works:
- after the installation of intermediate floor, walls, partitions and floors;
- after the installation of holes in walls and ceilings for the construction of gas pipelines;
- after plastering;
- after the installation of sanitary equipment;
- after chimney inspection and cleaning.
Closing up of gas pipeline connections in walls and ceilings is prohibited.
Works quality requirements
Deviation of the risers and straight sections from the design is acceptable if not more than 2 mm
per 1 m pipeline.
The minimum distance between pipeline and wall is d / 2 (d-pipeline diameter).
Resistance test results are considered satisfactory if the actual pressure drop does not exceed P =
50T / d (T - duration of the test (h), d - diameter of the pipeline (mm)).
284
Ventilation equipment
Works technology requirements
Air channels are added after the installation of the technological equipment.
The installation of air ducts is performed so that there is no longitudinal welding in the lower part.
The part of the air duct where the water wapor condensation is possible should be placed with a
gradient of 0.01 to 0.015 on the side of the drainage equipment.
The spacer between the air duct flanges must not slip inside the air duct.
The flange connection screws must be on one side of the flange.
The air ducts must be fixed in such a way that their weight is not transmitted to the ventilation
equipment.
The air ducts must be attached to the fans through the vibration insulators.
When installing a fan on a solid foundation, its foundation must fit tightly into the soundproof
spacers.
The following works are intended for the testing of ventilation systems:
- Testing of simultaneously operating systems;
- checking and comparing the actual parameters of the ventilation systems with the design;
- locking and signaling check of the protective system;
- measuring the sound pressure level at certain points.
Works quality requirements
Inspection is carried out during construction works and after completion of work.
The air duct deviation from the vertical shall not exceed 2mm per 1 m in length.
5.5.12. Pavement construction
The requirements apply to all works related to the pavement construction, choice if materials,
supply and quality control.
Works technology requirements
Paving can only be started after a complete preparation of the foundation.
The surface of the foundation should be evened out and rammed prior starting the work on paving,
reaching the level of soil compaction indicated in the design.
285
The paving stone should be aligned with the bottom of the sand at about 1/3 of its height, so that
the top of the stone remains 10 ... 30 mm above the height foreseen in the design for ramming the
paving stones.
The paving on the concrete shall not be rammed.
Works quality requirements
Complete water run-off from the finished pavement surface shall be provided. Sided concrete
elements’ surfaces shall be the levelled evenly, but concrete elements rows in cross direction (with
allowed symmetrical deviations) and longitudinal direction (parrallel to pavement edges) shall be
straight. The quality of finished work shall comply with the requirements laid out in Roads
Specifications 2017 (Ceļu Specifikācijas 2017) in table 5.5-2.
5.5.13. Construction of elevators
The requirements apply to all works related to the construction of passenger and freight elevators,
choice if materials, supply and quality control.
Quality of the materials used
The elevators may be delivered only by an elevator installer registered in the Register of Enterprises
of the Republic of Latvia.
In order to certify the suitability of the elevator and its safety components, the elevator installer or
manufacturer of elevator safety components shall draw up a declaration of conformity for each
elevator offered on the market and for each safety component for the elevator.
Works technology requirements
The elevator must have at least two independent cable or chain systems and each system requires
its own fixing.
The ropes and the chains may not have connections or curlicues in the suspension system, except
where the rope or chain linkage or loop is required.
The elevators are fitted with a speed limiter if the movement system of the elevator is designed so
as to ensure the stability of the drag cable (wire cable) on the pulley sheave.
The functions of the elevator controls must be clearly indicated.
The electrical equipment is installed and connected so that:
- it would not be possible to mistaken them with the connections that do not have a direct
connection with the elevator;
- the power supply can only be switched on if the elevator is loaded;
286
- the movement of the elevator depends on the electrical safety devices with a separate
electrical safety connection;
- the damage to the electrical connection will not cause dangerous situations.
The elevator shaft must not contain pipelines, wiring, or other constructures other than those
necessary for the operation and safety of the elevator.
The elevator is designed and manufactured in such a way that the room in which the cabin moves
is only available for the maintenance of the elevator or in emergency situations. Prior to the service
personnel entering these premises, the normal operation of the elevator is suspended.
The elevator is designed and manufactured in such a way as to prevent the risk of cabin
compression when in any of the extreme positions of the movement. Free spaces or covers are
created in the extreme positions of the elevator.
Blocking devices must avert:
- starting of the cabin movement while the elevator shaft door is not closed and locked;
- opening of the elevator shaft door, while the cabin still moves and is not in the stop position.
The elevator cabin from floor to ceiling must be closed with walls, except ventilation openings and
cabin doors, which must be at full cabin height.
The cabin must stop immediately if its door is opened.
The elevator requires devices that restrict the cabin from falling or uncontrolled change of the
movement, if the elevator cabin has a damaged drive or other elevator elements. Devices limiting
the cabin from the fall must be independent of the cabin suspension (means of suspension). When
the elevator cabin has reached the maximum speed established by the elevator installer, if the cabin
is loaded to the rated capacity, these devices must ensure that the elevator cabin stops. Such a
cabin stop must not be detrimental to the passengers of the elevator.
Between the elevator shaft floor and the floor of the cabin, a buffer is required which, in the
maximum compression condition, provides the required free space.
The elevator shaft door and the cabin door or both doors, if they are automated, are equipped with
a device that prevents the risk of crushing people at the time of closing them.
The elevator shaft door must be secure against open flame and thermal radiation.
Counterweight shall be installed in such a way as to avoid any risk of collision with the cabin or
collapse on the cabin.
The elevator is equipped with means by which it is possible to release people and evacuate them
from the elevator in emergencies.
The elevator cabin is equipped with two-way communication means that enables people in the
cabin to constantly contact the service staff.
287
The elevator is designed and manufactured in such a way that, in cases where the elevator engine
temperature exceeds the temperature set by the elevator installer, the elevator cabin could
complete the movement started but would not start the next until the corresponding damage has
been remedied.
The elevator cabin is designed and manufactured in such a way as to provide passengers with
adequate ventilation, even during the long standing of the elevator.
An elevator cabin requires emergency lighting.
A plate is placed in a visible position in the elevator cabin clearly indicating such information:
- name and address of the elevator installer;
- series and type designation of the elevator;
- serial number of the elevator (if there is a series);
- installation year of the elevator;
- nominal capacity of the elevator in kilograms;
- maximum number of passengers;
- CE marking.
Works quality requirements
Each elevator requires at least such documentation in the official language:
- instruction of use (manual) with drawings and descriptions required for normal use of the
elevator, technical maintenance, conformity assessment, repairs and periodic inspections,
as well as emergency evacuation of people;
- a log book with notes on repairs of the elevator and periodic inspections.
The elevator installer makes a declaration of conformity of the elevator. The conformity declaration
of the elevator type refers to the installation of the elevator. This is the procedure by which the
installer of an elevator declares that the installed elevator, after final evaluation, complies with the
model described in the elevator type examination certificate and requirements of 20.04.2016.
Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 206 on regulations for the design, manufacture and
installation, and conformity assessment of elevators and their safety components.
Within the framework of the quality assurance system, the manufacturer ensures the final
inspection of each elevator safety component in accordance with applicable standards or
equivalent methods to assess the compliance of the system with the requirements of the
"Regulations for the design, manufacture and installation, and conformity assessment of elevators
and their safety components".
288
All quality assurance measures and activities are systematically and sequentially documented by
the manufacturer in the form of reports and procedure descriptions in order to ensure a common
understanding of quality programs, plans, manuals and records. This documentation includes:
- information on the manufacture quality assurance objectives and organizational structure,
responsibilities and authorities of the company’s management with regard to the quality of
the elevator safety components;
- information on the inspections and tests to be carried out after the manufacture of safety
components for elevators;
- information on the means for verifying the operation efficiency of the quality assurance
system;
- records of quality assurance procedures (such as inspection reports, testing and calibration
data, qualification statements of personnel).
An authorized institution assesses whether the qualification assurance system complies with the
requirements of the Regulations for the design, manufacture and installation, and conformity
assessment of elevators and their safety components.
The elevator quality assurance refers to the final evaluation of the elevator after it is installed. This
is the procedure whereby the installer of the elevator declares within the framework of the quality
system that the elevator, after the final assessment, complies with the elevator model described in
the type examination certificate and the requirements of the Regulations for the design,
manufacture and installation, and conformity assessment of elevators and their safety
components.
5.5.14. Openings in building structures
Openings in slabs, walls and partitions must be provided where it is necessary for carrying in or
carrying out large parts of equipment and devices. All openings must be closed or opened and
finished after the devices and equipment is in place or removed. Issues related to changes in
structures shall be reviewed by the Engineer.
5.5.15. Railway infrastructure
Earthworks and subgrade
In the process of developing the Detailed Technical Design, the existing subgrade and local
conditions should be surveyed. The subgrade needs to ensure the stability of rail roads and the
transport safety. The expansion of the subgrade should be designed and rebuilt in such volume to
ensure the shift of the existing 1520mm gauge railway, related to it construction and construction
of the new 1435mm gauge railway by considering the required distance between them for the
289
installation of fences and the placement of other railway infrastructure elements. All such
reconstruction shall be provided in the Detailed Technical Design.
The embankment shall be constructed of uniform draining soil. Varying layers that form sticking
and non-sticking soil shall be avoided.
For the design and construction phase, additional measures shall be provided for protection of the
existing embankment. When the existing embankment is levelled, calculations shall be done and
separating constructions shall be applied so that useable parts of the embankment would be
separated from those parts that would be reconstructed.
For the purpose of carrying out this work, soil condition survey of the construction site shall be
carried out and solution shall be developed carefully on the basis of geotechnical reasoning and
calculations.
To ensure stability of embankment slopes, where it is admissible, slope protection against erosion
shall be ensured by means of a geogrid, vegetation soil layer and lawn. Soil layers used for biological
protection of the slopes shall be characteristic to the local region and such that ensure fast
formation of the lawn layer and that help avoid damage to and overgrowth over nearby rail roads,
buildings and facilities. The stable slopes of the embankment shall be reinforced with perennial
lawn sowing. The thickness of the vegetation soil layer shall be at least 10cm. Upon commissioning
embankment slopes that are reinforced by lawn sowing, the lawn layer shall be uniform completely
covering the whole territory of the sowing.
In locations where the stability of the embankment slope cannot be ensured by conventional
methods, special measures shall be applied for the stabilization thereof by making calculations and
designing specific technical solutions.
Work on subgrade must include the following:
1) The slopes of the existing embankment must be cleared of turf, trees and shrubs.
2) Heaping of subgrade up to the designed level and in accordance with the designed
geometrical shape.
3) The reconstruction of the existing water drainage system and construction of a new water
drainage system.
For the purpose of heaping the embankment, mineral materials shall be used in accordance with
section Mineral materials of the subgrade and the requirements developed in the Rail Baltica Design
Guidelines.
During the heaping of the subgrade, the layers of the subgrade shall be compacted. The compacting
shall be carried out upon layers, the thickness thereof depends on the material used.
The slope incline sahll ensure the steadiness of the embankment in accordance with the
calculations.
For the protective layer of 1435mm railway infrastructure, a mix of mineral materials shall be used
complying with the requirements of Rail Baltica Design Guidelines. The thickness of the protective
290
layer shall be determined by means of calculation but it cannot be less than 0.32 m. The static
deformation module (Ev2) of the protective layer shall be no less than 120 MN/m2 on its surface.
The edge of the subgrade in the width of at least 0.80m shall be reinforced in the thickness of 7cm
with a mix of 8-16 graded granite crushed stone. The mix of crushed stone shall be compacted by
vibration.
The backfill between station rail ways shall be at least 7cm thick with a mix of 8-16 graded granite
crushed stone up to the top surface of the sleeper tie end. The mix of crushed stone shall be
compacted by vibration.
Reuse of cutout soil shall be determined during the development of the Detailed Technical Design.
The use conditions of the cutout soil shall be indicated in the Detailed Technical Design. Black soil
may be used as the vegetation soil layer for the purpose of slope reinforcement or greening of
areas.
Cutout soil that is not going to be used for further construction shall be removed from the
construction site, the unloading sites shall be indicated during the development of the Detailed
Technical Design.
Measurement and monitoring regarding stability and ground settlement
The Detailed Technical Design shall provide or refer to building standards, the technical indicators
characterizing the subgrade construction, the principles of measuring the compactness of the
subgrade, and the sequence of measurement. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to deliver
and install all the necessary measurement instruments and to provide the supervision of soil
compacting. The supervision and monitoring methods shall be described in the Detailed Technical
Design and shall be included in the system of quality assurance. Before carrying out the supervision,
the section on work organization plan in the Detailed Technical Design shall include a supervision
plan and shall indicate the type of equipment, the arrangement of instruments in the construction
site, the frequency of measurements.
The Contractor shall carry out the measurements under supervision of the Engineer, the
measurement data shall be entered in statements on acceptance of hidden work. Before confirming
the data the Engineer may carry out measurements to ascertain and check the provided data.
According to the results of the measurements, the Contractor shall carry out measures and actions
to ensure the stability of the foundation. The Contractor shall guarantee the stability of the
foundation (soil consolidation) after completing the work on subgrade and protective layer
construction. Soil settlement during the construction of railway shall not be acceptable. All the
costs related to additional work or carrying out the measurements in order to ensure the foundation
stability shall be covered by the Contractor.
When developing solutions for supervision and measurement of soil reinforcement, the
reconstruction stages of the existing 1520mm gauge rail tracks of the station shall be considered
as well as their usage for the duration of the construction.
291
Water drainage systems
The Contractor shall design and construct the water drainage systems so as to guarantee the water
collection and the drainage thereof out of the station territory.
The Detailed Technical Design shall provide for the construction of a new water drainage system
for the 1435mm gauge railway tracks and the reconstruction of the existing water drainage system
for the 1520mm gauge railway track within the limits of the station reconstruction from Lacplesa
street to Jelgavas street, in accordance with the technical provisions of VAS Latvijas Dzelzceļš and
the requirements developed in the Rail Baltica Design Guidelines.
The water drainage systems shall include all the structures to guarantee the drainage of water,
waste water and ground water off of railway tracks and the territory of the station to be
reconstructed all year round. Water drainage systems shall include the storm drainage, water drains
of reinforced concrete, drainage pipes and drain wells.
The water drainage structures’ longitudinal slope shall be designed and constructed so as to
guarantee water drainage and it shall be no less than 3% (in exceptional cases, given reasoning, it
may be decreased to 2%).
For the water drainage ditches, the edge of the ditch should be at least 0.2m above the maximum
calculated water level all year round.
The depth of the water drainage ditch shall be not less than 0,6 m and the bottom width of the ditch
shall be not less than 0,4 m. Water drainage ditches with depth less than 0,6 m are not permissible.
The slope inclination shall be not less than 1: 1.5.
The bottom of the water drainage ditch shall be filled with 10-15 mm fraction granite crashed
stones or pebbles with a layer at a thickness of 0.10 m.
In places where it is planned to construct water drainage reinforced concrete gutters, gutters with
a ceiling shall be installed. Not less than 10 cm thick crushed stone base shall be under the
reinforced concrete gutters. The vertical stitches at the places of gutter block joints shall be
covered with a 20 cm wide geotextile, by creating the reverse filter.
Drainage pipes shall be installed to collect and to drain ground water and surface water.
The installation of drainage pipes shall provide the following:
• The pipes shall be made of perforated polyethylene. The diameter of the pipes shall be
calculated according to the calculated volume of water;
• The reverse permeable filter shall be made of geotextile and covered with a layer of crushed
stone or coarse gravel around the pipe, the filtration shall be ensured of at least 10m/day;
• The inspection wells should be of reinforced concrete or plastic with a protective ring and
lockable manhole cover;
• The drainage ditches need to filled with a mix of draining mineral material with a filtration
coefficient of 3m/day;
292
• The drainage outflow locations in the relief need to reinforced against wash-out.
Mineral materials of the subgrade
In the construction of a 1520mm railway subgrade protective layer, use widely graded GW, SW, GU,
SU and ST mineral materials in accordance with the ground construction technical classification of
the standard LVS 190-5: 2011 "Road design rules. Part 5: Subgrade" and mineral filtration
coefficient Kf ≥ 3 m / dnn (determined according to the method for the detection of the filtration
coefficient of sandy soil of "Road Specification 2017"). The thickness of the protective layer must
be determined by calculation, but it may not be less than 0.2 m.
In the construction of a 1520mm railway subgrade use GW, GI, GE, SW, SI, SE, GU, GT, SU and ST
mineral materials in accordance with the ground construction technical classification of the
standard LVS 190-5: 2011 "Road design rules. Part 5: Subgrade" and mineral filtration coefficient
Kf ≥ 1 m / dnn (determined according to the method for the detection of the filtration coefficient of
sandy soil of "Road Specification 2017").
The static deformation module (Ev2) of the basic area of a 1520mm railway subgrade shall be at
least 80 MN / m², and the dynamic deformation module (Evd) of the subgrade shall be not less than
40 MN / m². The subgrade basic area density coefficient shall be not less than 0,98, and for the rest
of the subgrade the density coefficient shall be not less than 0,95.
The mixed mineral material production shall be certified according to the the appendix ZA to the
standard LVS EN 13242+A1:2009 with a certification, declaration of conformity 2+.
Geomaterials
Geotextile shall conform to the following technical requirements (Table 5.2.):
No. Technical requirements Unit of
measurement
Value Reference
1. Mechanical properties
1.1. Tensile strength, longitudinal/transverse kN/m ≥ 20/20 EN ISO 10319
293
1.2. Tearing extension % ≤ 45/45 EN ISO 10319
1.3.
1.4.
Static puncture (CBR test)
Dynamical puncture (falling cone test)
N
mm
≥ 3100
≤ 16
EN ISO 12236
EN ISO 13433
2. Hydraulic properties
2.1. Water permeability l/m2s ≥ 60 EN ISO 11058
2.2. Porosity mm from 0,07
to 0,10
EN ISO 12956
3. Chemical and biological stability
3.1. Withstand degradation from acid, alkali, bacteria
3.2. Withstand direct sunlight influence without affecting stability no less than one month after
installation
4. Durability
4.1. Estimated minimum service lifetime in natural
soils with 4<pH<9 and soil t°<25°c
years
25
EN ISO 13438-A1
4.2. Maximum allowed time from laying in till covering
the material with ground
weeks 2 EN ISO 12224
Table 5.2. Technical properties of geotextile
Geonetwork shall conform to the following technical requirements (Table 5.3.):
No. Technical requirements Unit of
measurement
Value Reference
1. Tensile strength, longitudinal kN/m >30 EN ISO 10319
2. Tensile strength, transverse kN/m >30 EN ISO 10319
3. Tensile strength with 2% expansion longitudinal kN/m >10,5 EN ISO 10319
4. Tensile strength with 2% expansion transverse kN/m >10,5 EN ISO 10319
5. Longitudinal expansion upon maximum load % < 12 EN ISO 10319
6. Strength at joint points % > 90
7. Size of cell mm 65 x 65
Table 5.3. Technical requirements for geonetwork
The geocomposite shall comply with the following technical requirements (Table 5.4.):
294
No. Technical requirements Unit of
measurement
Value for
decaying PP
grid
Value for
welded PP grid
Test method
1. Geogrid properties
1.1. Tensile strength of the network, longitudinal/vertical
kN/m ≥30/30 ≥30/30 EN ISO 10319
1.2. Tensile strength of the network with 2% expansion longitudinal/vertical
kN/m ≥12/12 ≥12/12 EN ISO 10319
1.4. Tensile strength of the network with 5% expansion longitudinal/vertical
kN/m ≥25/25 ≥24/24
1.3. Expansion upon maximum load longitudinal/vertical
% ≤ 11/≤ 11 ≤ 7/≤ 7 EN ISO 10319
1.4. Cell size mm 60x60 vai 65x65
31x31vai 42x42
2 Geotextile properties
2.1. Unit weight (mass) g/ m2 ≥120 ≥150 EN ISO 9864
2.2. Max. tensile strength, longitudinal/transverse
kN/m ≥8/≥8 ≥7/≥7 EN ISO 10319
2.3. Extension at nominal strength, longitudinal/transverse
% ≥ 45/45 ≥ 30/30 EN ISO 10319
2.3. Water permeability perpendicular to plane
l/m2s ≥90 ≥90 EN ISO 11058
2.4. Static puncture force (CBR test) N ≥1600 ≥1500 EN ISO 12236
2.5. Geotextile pore effective diameter mm ≥0,07 ≥0,07 EN ISO 12956
3. Durability
3.1. Estimated minimum life in natural soil with 4<pH<9 and soil t°<25°c
years
25
25
EN ISO 13438-A1
3.2. Maximum allowed time from laying to covering the geosynthetic material
weeks 2 2 EN ISO 12224
Table 5.4. Technical requirements of geocomposite
Railway tracks
On 1520mm railway tracks, the distance between the inner edges of the rail heads on straight
railway tracks, carrying out the measurement 13mm below the surface of the rail head, shall be
1520mm.
295
In curves, the railway track width shall be as follows:
- with radius 350m and larger - 1520mm;
- with radius 300 to 349m - 1520mm for tracks with concrete sleepers / 1530mm for
tracks with timber sleepers;
- with radius 299 m and less - 1540mm.
For all railway track construction, granite ballast (31.5-63mm fraction granite crushed stone) shall
be used.
Detailed specification of 1520mm railway track reconstruction shall be harmonized with VAS
Latvijas Dzelzceļš upon developing the Detailed Technical Design.
Railway track superstructure
The design parameters of the railway tracks are given in the table 5.5.:
No. Parameters Station tracks
1. Type of rail 60E1
2. Type of sleeper:
1435mm
1520mm-
Reinforced concrete
- in straights and curves with radius of 800m and more Reinforced concrete
sleepers with System
W21 or equivalent
elastic rail fasteners
- in curves with radius of 300m to 799 m
− in curves with radius of 299 m and less
Reinforced concrete
sleepers with System
W30 or equivalent
elastic rail fasteners
Oak timber sleepers
with System W12 or
equivalent rail
fasteners
3. Number of sleeper ties per 1km (pcs/km):
1435mm 1666 pcs.
1520mm-
- in straights and curves with radius of 1200 m and more 1840 gab.
- in curves with radius of 1200m m ad less 2000 gab.
4. Thickness of the ballast layer underneath the sleeper tie -
railway ballast (cm):
296
1435mm-
-on the subgrade
-on structures
1520mm
At least 30 cm.
At least 35 cm.
- underneath tracks At least 35 cm.
- underneath switches At least 35 cm.
5. Switches
1435mm-
-type of rail
-type of frog
-sleeper ties
1520mm-
60E1
1:15 and 1:12
Reinforced concrete
- type of rail 60E1
- type of frog 1:11 and 1:9
- sleeper ties Oak-wood
6. Buffer stop support metal
Table 5.5. Basic parameters for railway tracks design
For 1435mm railway tracks, the width of the ballast shoulder in straight sections shall be no less
than 50cm. In curves, the ballast shoulder width shall be expanded in the direction of the external
edge by 10cm. For 1520mm railway tracks, the width of the ballast shoulder in straight sections
shall be no less than 35cm. In curves with radius of 600m and less, the expansion of ballast
shoulder shall be by 10cm towards the external edge.
The straight railway tracks, in transition to the curves, as well as the one-way and different-radius
curves, have to pass through the transition curves, which require the construction of the outer rail
elevation and gauge extension. When straight moving to the curve, if the curve radius is equal to or
more than 3000 m, the transition curve may not be built.
The increase of the outer rail elevation and gauge extension in the transition curve is not more than
1mm to 1000mm.
The minimum incline of the ballast slope shall be 1:1.5.
The station tracks shall be formed of continuous welded rails (the welding shall be carried out either
by thermite welding or flash welding), except for curves with radius of 300m and less.
In places where different types of rails must be connected, they must be connected with a transition
rail, one end having one type of rail, and the second - another. The length of the transition rail must
not be less than 12.5 m.
297
The switch joints, in places where it is not technologically possible to weld with electric contact
welding method, must be welded with aluminothermic welding, except insulating joints.
The isolating joints shall be glued, with metal composite 6-hole fishplates.
The geotexstil must be set under the crushed stone ballast on rail tracks and switches throughout
the length and width.
Level crossings and pedestrian crossings, where necessary, shall be formed of reinforced concrete
pavement with rubber rail seal.
All railway track superstructure materials shall be new and produced in accordance with the
requirements set by the Employer and the respective standards. Material specification shall be
detailed in the Detailed Technical Design. All the materials to be used in the superstructure of the
railway track shall have the declarations of conformity, certificates of quality and certificates of
origin. Any variation in the material conformity to the requirements of the standards, norms and the
requirements of the Employer shall not affect the parameters of the material and work quality, and
the use of such materials may only be allowed upon confirmation by the Employer. The technical
specification of the railway infrastructure materials is given in the following sections.
All sleepers must be in their place and the base underneath them must be completely compacted.
The distance from the crushed stone ballast surface to the foot of the track for ensuring the
insulation should not be less than 3 cm.
All bolts must be lubricated and secured with an appropriate force to tighten the nuts.
Joint gaps (except insulated joints) shall be adjusted by considering the rail temperature. At the
time of taking over, the rail grid must match the calculated temperature mode (Tables 5.6. and 5.7.):
Gap size for 25m
rails, mm
Rail temperature °C
0 +40 and more
1,5 From +40 to +35
3,0 From +35 to +30
4,5 From +30 to +25
6,0 From +25 to +20
7,5 From +20 to +15
9,0 From +15 to +10
10,5 From +10 to +5
12,0 From +5 to 0
13,5 From 0 to -5
15,0 From -5 to -10
298
Gap size for 25m
rails, mm
Rail temperature °C
16,0 From -10 to -15
18,0 From -15 to -20
19,0 From -20 to -25
21,0 From -25 to -30
Table 5.6. The size of the joint gaps for 25m rails depending on the rail temperature
Gap size for 12.5m
rails, mm
+60 and more
0 From +60 to +50
1,5 From +50 to +40
3,0 From +40 to +30
4,5 From +30 to +20
6,0 From +20 to +10
7,5 From +10 to 0
9,0 From 0 to -10
10,5 From -10 to -20
12,0 From -20 to -30
13,5 From -30 to -40
15,0 +60 and more
Table 5.7. The size of the joint gaps for 12.5m rails depending on the rail temperature
In the assembled rail – sleeper section with the reinforced concrete sleepers, the electrical
resistance between two rails shall comply with the specified indicators (Table 5.8):
Air temperature Minimum electrical resistance, ОM with chain length
C˚ 25 m 12,5 m
Weather conditions
299
dry moist dry moist
From 0 to +5 400 200 800 400
From +6 to +10 300 150 600 300
From +11 to +15 250 125 500 250
From +16 and more 200 100 400 200
Table 5.8. Electrical resistance between two rails
Rails
The technical requirements regarding rails are based on the Latvian standard LVS EN13674-1:2017
(Railway equipment. Railway track. Rails. Part 1: Flat-bottom railway rails with weigth of 46kg/m
and larger).
All rails shall have the European Commission conformity declarations in accordance with the
requirements of the Commission Regulation (EU) No. 1299/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the
technical specifications for interoperability relating to the infrastructure subsystem of the rail
system in the European Union.
This specification refers to flat-bottom symmetrical railway tracks for general use of railway tracks.
No. Item Requirements Reference to standard LVS EN
13674-1+A1A
1. Rail profile 60 E1 Appendix A, A.22
2. Grade of steel R350HT Paragraph 5
3. Profile class No less than Y Paragraph 9.2.1
4. Straightness class No less than B Paragraph 9.2.2
5. Rail length at least 25m
Table 5.9. Basic requirements regarding track rails
The rails shall not have any drilled holes. Hot-rolled identification numbers shall to be indicated
near the ends of the rails and easy to read. Steel grade class shall to be indicated. Rail ends shall
be marked with a special colour as coordinated among the Employer and the Contractor.
Acceptance inspections and tests
The laboratory test results and the results of other significant acceptance tests with regard to every
delivery shall be submitted to the Engineer and the Employer.
300
Measuring instruments
All the measuring instruments, including those that are indicated in Paragraph 9.3 of LVS EN 13674-
1+A1 as necessary for carrying out rail inspection in the production plant shall to be provided at the
cost of the Contractor.
Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee that no defect can arise from the materials of the production
process or the raw materials, during the Defects Notification Period.
The above guarantee shall cover the following defects:
1. Metal scaling or spalling in the surface in connection with the production process, e.g. small
cracks, surface layer scale, coating layers etc.;
2. Notches and cracks in the hardening layer;
3. Perpendicular cracks in the rail head and fractures created as a result of inner metal defect
(gas bubbles, veining and other impurities);
4. Vertical scaling in the rail head;
5. Horizontal scaling in the rail head caused by accumulation of non-metallic impurities;
6. Micro cracks, fractures in the foot of the rail, cracks and fractures in the foot caused by the
above defects;
7. Transverse crack in the rail due to residue/slag impurities and other microstructure defects.
The new 60E1 type rails shall be welded into continuous welded rails by means of flash welding,
without length limitation.
The welding of rails into continuous welded rails by means of flash welding shall be carried out by
the Contractor in the construction site using a mobile rail welding device, or in a rail welding site. If
the Contractor would choose to carry out the welding in a rail welding site, the length of the CWR
shall not exceed 800m. Any type of welding shall be carried out on the basis of rail welding
regulations adopted by the Employer. The Contractor shall cover all the costs involved in the
welding and transporting of the continuous welded rails to the construction site.
At each end of the continuous welded rail, on the internal side of the rail web (on the side of the
track axis), there shall be white oil colour marking (the installation and reinforcement date, the
reinforcement temperature, the length of the CWR).
The joints welded on the construction site shall be colour marked with two vertical lines on the
internal side of the rail web, symmetrically aligned with the joint at 10cm distance from it.
Oak railway sleepers for 1520mm railway tracks
The railway sleepers and fastenings shall have the European Commission conformity declarations
in accordance with the requirements of the Commission Regulation (EU) No. 1299/2014 of 18
301
November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to the infrastructure
subsystem of the rail system in the European Union.
Oak railway sleepers to be used for the construction of 1520mm railway tracks in curves at radius
299 m and less should be made and cut in accordance with EN 13145: 2012 and in accordance with
the indicated size of oak railway sleepers, and following the shape (not in scale) as shown in figure
5.1 and according to values given in the table 5.10. Railway sleepers with smaller upper plane and
lateral sizes b1 and h1, but not smaller than indicated in Table No.5.10. are acceptable.
Figure 5.1. Oak railway sleeper
No. Name Size (mm) Tolerance (mm)
1. Height of the railway sleeper (h) 160 +10
- 0
2. Height of the railway sleeper (h1) 130 Not less than 130
3. Width of the lower surface of the railway
sleepers (b)
260 +5
- 5
4. Width of the top surface of the railway
sleepers (b1)
180 Not less than 180 mm
5. Length of the railway sleeper (l) 2750 +10
-10
Table 5.10. Sizes and tolerance of the oak railway sleepers
Oak railway sleepers must be treated (saturated) with standard special substances authorised in
the European Union and in the Republic of Latvia. A preservative (B or higher type creosote oil or
equivalent) corresponding to Directive 2001/90/EC dated 2001.26.10 and LVA EN 13991: 2003
standard must be used for the impregnation of railway sleepers.
In accordance with Article 31 of Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006 (formerly Directive 2001/90/EC),
industrially produced oils may be used in the treatment of wood if they contain:
a) benzo-pyrene at a lower concentration of 0,005% by weight;
b) water extractable phenols at a smaller concentration than 3% of weight.
302
The wood density of oak railway sleepers shall be ≥68 g/cm3, Brinell hardness ≥34 N/mm2.
Railway sleepers shall be impregnated with electrically insulating protective cover. The Contractor
shall submit detailed information on the protective cover that will be used to the Engineer and to
the Employer for the approval.
The wood is permitted to be impregnated if the absolute humidity does not exceed 22%.
For tolerance for cracks and ruptures of oak railway sleepers, see LVS EN 13145: 2012 in Tables 2
and 3.
The ends of the railway sleepers must be inverted perpendicular to 90 ° with a maximum tolerance
of 3 ° and secured with metal plates.
Metal plates of oak railway sleeper ends
Galvanized railway sleeper end plates (see Figure 5.2.) shall have an optimised geometry ensuring
optimum performance of the plate against the formation of cracks and further development of
existing cracks in railway sleepers. The tooth form of a plate must minimally damage the wood
structure of railway sleeper ends.
No. Parameter Unit Value
1. Size of the plate: mm 70x218x1.5
2. Material of the plate: FeE280G
3. Mechanical properties: Rm, MPa 370-510
Re, MPa min. 280
4. Coating: Hot zinc 275 g/m2
5. Manufactured according to: DIN EN 10143
DIN EN 10142
DIN EN 10147
Table 5.11. Basic requirements regrading oak sleepers metal end plates
303
Figure 5.2. Galvanized plate of the railway sleeper ends
The Contractor is entitled to offer his version of metal plates for ends, but only the geometric
dimensions of the sample metal plates for ends may be modified, which may be larger than those
indicated (may not alter the composition of the material).
The Contractor shall be required to submit a sample metal plate for ends to the Engineer for
approval, regardless whether the version of the Employer or the Contractor is proposed.
Rail fastenings for oak railway sleepers
The rail fastenings for oak railway sleepers must have flexible clip, the bolt type (e.g. Vossloh track
fastening type W12 or equivalent). Track fastening clips must ensure 10 kN extraction force on
track.
The tracks must be placed on a metal pad, which will be tightened with 4 screws on the oak railway
sleepers with two-turn spring washers. A 10 mm (+/- 0,8 mm) rubber track spacer must be inserted
under the foot of the track. A 10 mm rubber pad spacer must be inserted under the pad.
Reinforced concrete railway sleepers for 1520mm railway tracks with flexible rail
fastenings
Technical requirements for reinforced concrete railway sleepers with flexible track fastenings are
based on Latvian standards LVS EN 13230-1:2016 and LVS EN 13230-2:2016.
The railway sleepers and fastenings shall have the European Commission conformity declarations
in accordance with the requirements of the Commission Regulation (EU) No. 1299/2014 of 18
November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to the infrastructure
subsystem of the rail system in the European Union.
304
The railway sleepers must be pre-tensioned monoblock reinforced concrete sleepers, which may
be used in railway tracks of 1520 mm width, with railway ballast covering and rails 60E1. The railway
sleeper must withstand a minimum axle load of 25 tonnes. The flexible track fastenings on curves
with a radius of 800m and more must be Vossloh track fastening type W21 or equivalent, on curves
with a radius of less than 800m must be Vossloh track fastening type W30 or equivalent, which can
be easily mounted and for which visual inspections can be carried out.
The railway sleepers must be fully compatible with the proposed track fastening system and must
be compliant with this Technical Specification. The railway sleepers must be designed,
manufactured and inspected to ensure the following minimum requirements:
No. Parameter Value Tolerances
1. Type of sleepers: Pre-stressed, monoblock reinforced concrete
sleepers.
2 Operating conditions of sleepers:
2.1. Width of railway track 1520 mm ±2 mm
2.2. Distance between the axis
of the sleepers according to
the diagram
Between 500 and 550 mm
2.3. Axle load of the rolling stock 25 t
2.4. Maximum train speed 140 km/h
2.5. Minimum radius of the track
curve 300 m
2.6. Maximum elevation of the
outer rail in the curve 150 mm
2.7. Ballast - granite splinters
with fraction 31,5 - 63 mm
2.8. Minimum ballast depth
under the sleeper 350 mm
2.9. Operating temperature
range of the sleeper Between -37°C and + 55°C
2.10. Type of rails (according to
LVS EN 13674-1:2011) 60E1
2.11. Type of rail fastener • in straight lines and curves R≥800m System W21 or equal;
• in curves R≤799m System W30 or equal;
3. Main dimensions of sleepers:
305
3.1. Length, L 2700 mm ±10mm
3.2. Width of the base, b1 200 - 230 mm +5, -3 mm
3.3. Height from the surface of
the base to the support area
of the rail axis, hp
300 mm ±5mm
3.4. Slope in the support area of
the rail, i 1:20 ±0,25°
3.5. Weight of the sleeper
together with the weight of
rail fastener
≤ 305 kg
3.6. Minimum distance from the
surface of the base to pre-
stressed metal
reinforcement
≥ 30 mm
4. Labeling of sleepers Year of manufacture, number of shape, name of
the manufacturer cemented in each sleeper.
In addition, date of manufacture, batch No. and
lettering „LDZ” are marked on each reinforced
concrete sleeper
5. Provisions for designing of sleepers, manufacturing technology and materials used:
5.1. Crushed stone
Only broken stone with frost resistance
(freezing/thawing) category not less than F1
(according to standard LVS EN 1367-1:2013) or
MS18 (according to standard LVS EN 1367-2:2011)
or equal can be used in production process.
5.2. Cement Class 1 portland cement with minimum density value
of 52.5 corresponding to (LVS EN 197-1:2012) with
small alkali amount with total content determined as
equivalent of Na2O not more than 0.60%.
5.3. Minimum class of concrete C50/60
5.4. Frost resistance of concrete freezing/thawing minimum for 200 cycles
corresponding to frost resistance mark F200
according to LVS 156-1:2009 (Table C.4 – for
obtaining final results)
5.5. Environmental exposure
class of concrete
XA1 with slightly aggressive chemical effects (LVS
EN 156-1:2009 and LVS EN 206-1:2017).
5.6. Tensile stress in concrete 3 N/mm2
306
5.7. Compressive stress in
concrete 20 N/mm2
5.8. Protection of pre-stressed
metal reinforcement
Visible ends of sleeper reinforcement must be
treated with anti-corrosion agent.
Anchorage of sleeper reinforcement must be
covered with a concrete layer.
5.9. Calculation of designed
bending moments and
testing of the finished
sleeper
Calculation of the designed bending moments and
determination of the moments of testing of finished
sleeper must be performed in accordance with the
provisions of standards LVS EN 13230-1:2016 and
LVS EN 13230-2:2016.
5.10. Designed bending moments
of the sleepers Mk,r,pos;
Mk,c,pos; Mk,c,neg (LVS EN
13230-2:2016)
When calculating the designed bending moments
Mk,r,pos; Mk,c,pos; Mk,c,neg, the following test
moments for the sleeper manufactured according to
this project shall be ensured:
− Mk,r,test ≥ 22,5 kNm
(this is not the designed bending moment, but the
test bending moment (Fr0) with the designed safety
coefficients according to LVS EN 13230-2:2016
already incorporated);
− Mk,c,test ≥ 20,5 kNm
(this is not the designed bending moment, but the
test bending moment (Fc0n) with the designed
safety coefficients according to LVS EN 13230-
2:2016 already incorporated).
5.11. Verification and testing of
sleepers
Verification and testing procedures shall be
performed in accredited laboratories for testing of
sleepers that meet the quality requirements of EN
ISO 9001 or equal.
6. Rail fasteners:
6.1 Type of fasteners and
components of the set
In accordance with Clause 2.11 of the table, in
accordance with LVS EN 13481-2.
One set consists of:
− spring clips (clamps) (e.g., W21) - 4 pcs;
− sleeper screws with washers (e.g., Ss35/Uls7) - 4 pcs;
− corner spacers (e.g., Wfp-21K900/NT12) - 4 pcs;
307
− rubber spacers of rail (e.g., Zw900d NT/201) - 2 pcs;
− plastic dowels cemented in the sleeper (e.g.,
Sdü25) - 4 pcs.
6.2. Technical parameters of
spring clip (clamp)
− Length of spring clip - 14mm;
− Vertical fatigue strength of spring clip – 2.5 mm;
− Pressure force of spring clip - 10kN.
6.3. Compliance of fastener sets The fasteners must be suitable for use on reinforced
concrete sleepers manufactured according to this
technical specification.
6.4. Qualification of
manufacturer of rail
fasteners
The manufacturer must have the quality
management certificate EN ISO9001 or equal.
Table 5.12. Basic requirements for reinforced concrete sleepers 1520mm
Start of manufacturing
Prior to the manufacture of sleepers, the Contractor in accordance with Article 4.4.3 of LVS EN
13230-1:2016 must submit to the Engineer and/or the Contracting Authority:
1. full set with drawings and track fastenings of proposed railway sleepers;
2. description of the materials to be used;
3. information on manufacturing and manufacturing description;
4. full description of the tension system and the reinforcement bars to be used;
5. all information as required by Article 8 “Quality control” of LVS EN 13230-1:2016.
Quality assurance
Reinforced concrete railway sleepers with flexible track fastenings will be accepted only if the
manufacturing process of railway sleepers is officially recognised with the quality management
system certificate EN ISO 9001 or equivalent.
The Contractor will have to present and at the request of the Engineer and/or the Employer will have
to submit the manufacturer's quality management manual in accordance with Article 8 of LVS EN
13230-1:2016.
The Contractor must ensure the conformity of concrete manufacturing in accordance with LVS 156-
1:20 17 and LVS EN 206-1 (including Article 9) and, at the request of the Engineer and/or the
Employer, the Contractor must submit all the data and documents recorded.
The Engineer and the Employer may perform a production quality audit at the manufacturer's
factory if deemed necessary. The Engineer and the Employer may at any time examine and check
308
the production methods and materials and shall be entitled to participate in all testing relating to
the production of railway sleepers under this Contract. The Engineer and the Employer shall be
entitled to check the results of the testing. The inspections will be carried out in a way not interfering
with the day-to-day production, except if there are sufficient grounds for doing so.
Quality inspections shall include all relevant documents (e.g. material delivery certificates, tests
and other certificates, etc.) on the materials used as provided for in LVS EN 206-1, table 22, Article
9.9 and the results of daily tests in accordance with these specifications as well as a declaration of
conformity issued by the manufacturer (in accordance with LVS EN ISO/IEC 17050-1:2010 A) that
the railway sleepers delivered comply with these technical requirements.
In addition, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a certificate of conformity issued by an
authorised certification institution.
Visual inspections
The Contractor must carry out visual inspections of reinforced concrete railway sleepers to prevent
any surface defects, including “hair cracks” and micro cracks.
The surfaces of the reinforced concrete railway sleepers, including metal forms, must be smooth
and regular in geometry.
The railway sleepers' surfaces must prevent pores as far as possible. Pockets of water or wavy
forms shall not be permitted.
Only for minor (minimal) defects the grinding of an external surface below the track level shall be
allowed to ensure uniformity, but it may not reduce the dimensions below the established
tolerances.
Transportation and storage
Railway sleepers with fitted flexible track fastenings must be transported and stored in horizontal
line packages (stacks) with a foot of railway sleepers down. All components of flexible fastenings
must be delivered fitted on the railway sleepers. The maximum batch height shall not exceed 16
rows of railway sleepers and the maximum weight of one package may not exceed 10 tonnes.
Absorbing spacers with a minimum cross section of 80 x 100 mm must be provided under and
between the railway sleepers.
Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee that railway sleepers with flexible track fastenings will not have any
defects which may arise from the production process and/or the materials used and/or the design,
during the Defects Notification Period.
309
During the warranty period, the Contractor undertakes to replace the railway sleepers with flexible
track fastenings without delay if the deficiencies and defects in railway sleepers originate from the
materials used and/or the production process and/or the design.
Reinforced concrete railway sleepers for 1435mm railway tracks
The railway sleepers must be fully compatible with the proposed track fastening system and must
be compliant with this Technical Specification. The railway sleepers must be designed,
manufactured and inspected to ensure the following minimum requirements:
No. Parameter Value
1. Bending moments of the design (see LVS
EN 13230-1:2016, Article 4.4.2 (a))
Bending moments of the design Mdr, Mdc, Mdcn have to
be calculated and ensured by considering the minimum
testing moments of the design referred to below.
To determine design testing moments LVS EN 13230-
1:2016 and LVS EN 13230-2:2016 shall be applied.
The calculation of the bending moments of the design
shall be carried out in accordance with the methods
referred to in Annex E of LVS EN 13230-1:2016, which
provides the required railway sleeper strength and design
testing moments (including with referred to coefficients).
1.1. Design testing moment under the track
(positive)
Mrtest - 22,0 kNm,
(this is not the designed bending moment, this is the
testing moment of bending (Fr0) with already
incorporated designed safety coefficients in accordance
with LVS EN 13230-1:2016);
1.2. Design testing moment in the central part
(negative)
Mcn test - 16,8 kNm
(this is not the designed bending moment, this is the
testing moment of bending (Fc0n) with already
incorporated designed safety coefficients in accordance
with LVS EN 13230-1:2016);
2. Inspections/tests (see LVS EN 13230-
1:2016, Article 4.4.2 (c))
Inspections and tests shall be carried out in accordance
with LVS EN 13230-1:2016 and as described in these
technical requirements.
3. Sizes of the reinforced concrete railway
sleepers (see LVS EN 13230-1:2016, Article
6.1, drawing no. 1)
Parameter Value (mm)
Lenght 2500
Width of foundation under the
foot of the track
180
Hight of the railway sleeper at
the foot of the track
220
310
Track foot bending 1:40
Width of the railway track 1435
4. Specific maximum tolerances for sizes In accordance with LVS EN 13230-1:2016, Article 6.1, table
1.
5. Flexible track fastenings Vossloh, W-14NT or equivalent, in accordance with LVS EN
13481-2. The fastenings must be usable and adaptable
for reinforced concrete railway sleepers manufactured in
accordance with this Technical Specification. The
manufacturer of the fastenings must have a quality
management certificate EN ISO 9001 or equivalent.
After a vertical load of a single tension clamp with 25 kN
and after its release for a 4 mm, the inspection (test) load
shall be maintained at least 5.5 kN.
The fastening must ensure track adjustment of up to 10
mm with a step 2.5 mm.
The fastening must allow vertical track adjustment up
from a railway sleeper of at least 10 mm with a step of 2
mm without losing any mechanical properties of the
fastening system.
The screw thread of the fastening system, screwed into
the embedded in the concrete of a railway sleeper dowel
for securing the clamp, must be smooth with rounded
edges of the thread without splinters (sharp edges) that
may arise in the manufacturing process.
The screws, before being screwed into the embedded in
the concrete dowel, must be handled with oil/lubricant
protecting the dowel against dirt.
6. Inspections and testing procedures: Have to be carried out in laboratories that are accredited
laboratories for railway sleepers and comply with EN ISO
9001 or equivalent quality requirements;
7. Maximum railway sleeper weight including
track fastenings:
365 kg
8. Other technical criteria of the railway
sleepers:
Distance between the railway sleepers 600 mm
Axle load 25 tonnes per axle
Train speed 240 km/h
Minimum rail curve radius min. 300 m
311
Crushed stone–granite macadam
composition/ size of the crushed stone
fraction
31,5 – 63 mm
Minimum ballasting thickness under a
railway sleeper
350 mm
Work temperature amplitude of a railway
sleeper
-37°C till +55°C
9. Rail type 60 E1 (in accordance with LVS EN 13674-1+A1:2017)
10. Minimum concrete class C50/60
Manufacturing of such railway sleepers must be ensured
so that the tensile stress in concrete would be at least 3
N/mm2 and compressive stress would be at least 50
N/mm2.
11. Concrete environment exposure class XC4, XS1, XF3 – in accordance with LVS 156-1:2017
and LVS EN 206-1
12. Surface handling of railway sleeper ends After removal from the form the reinforcement bars of
railway sleeper ends shall be cut off. The reinforcement
bars from the concrete may not be moved out for more
than 1 mm. In case the reinforcement bars are outside the
concrete frame, the ends of the railway sleepers with the
reinforcement bars shall be painted in black.
13. Lifetime of railway sleepers The railway sleepers shall be designed and produced in a
way that its operating and lifetime is not less than 40
years.
Table 5.13. Basic requirements reagarding reinforced concrete railway sleepers for 1435mm railway tracks
Railway ballast for 1520mm tracks
The following requirements for ballast apply to 1520mm track gauge. For the requirements for
1435mm track gauge refer to the Design Guidelines.
Technical requirements for railway ballast shall be based on Latvian standard LVS EN 13450 + AC
“Mineral materials for railway ballast”, identical to the European standard LVS EN 13450: 2003 A
and LVS EN 13450: 2003/AC:2004 A. The Contractor shall use the crushed natural granite stone
railway ballast, sifted fraction 31.5 - 63 mm.
Railway ballast must be an unused crushed sifted stone, which must be a solid, durable natural
stone with good bearing capacity, high frictional resistance against the movements of a railway
sleeper.
General material properties and form:
312
The ballast material must consist of splitted/crumbled natural volcanic rock without the impurity
of clay, sedimentary rocks and organic or other harmful substances. Rocks, organic pollutants and
inorganic residues exposed to atmospheric effects are not permitted.
The ballast material must be of ridged shape with approximately the same dimensions and must
be free of dust. Individual pieces must not be schistose, the surfaces must be flat with no more
than two round/roundish surfaces (edges).
The ballast material must be obtained from an approved quarry in accordance with these
specifications. If there is more than one rock type in a quarry, the requirements of these technical
specifications should be applied to each type of rock.
Requirements for the ballast material:
No. Parameter Value
1. Granulometric composition (see LVS EN
13450+AC Article 6.3)
Railway ballast, of a size of 31,5 mm to 63 mm, shall
comply with the limits of sieve size and category “F” of
granulametric composition in accordance with Article 6.3,
table 1 of LVS EN 13450 + AC.
2. Fine particles (see Article 6.4 of LVS EN
13450+AC)
The content of the fine particles must correspond to the
limits of the sieve size and the category “B” of the fine
particle content in accordance with Article 6.4, table 2 of
EN 13450 + AC 6.4 of LVS EN 13450 + AC.
3. Fines (see Article 6.5 of LVS EN 13450+AC)
fine-grained fractions
The content of fines must comply with the limits of the
sieve size and category “B” of the content of fines in
accordance with Article 6.5, table 3 of LVS EN 13450 +
AC.
4. Particle shape (see Article 6.6 of LVS EN
13450+AC)
4.1. Flakiness index According to Article 6.6.1, table 4 of LVS EN 13450+AC the
maximum value of the flakiness index is:
Flakiness index Category FI
<20 FI20
4.2. Shape index According to Article 6.6.2, table 5 of LVS EN 13450 + AC,
the maximum value of the shape index is:
Shape index Category SI
<20 SI20
5. Particle lenght (see Article 6.7 of LVS EN
13450+AC)
According to Article 6.7, table 6 of LVS EN 13450+AC
particle length should correspond to category "A" (4%).
313
6. Physical requirements (see Article 7.1 of
LVS EN 13450+AC)
6.1. Resistance to fragmentation According to Article 7.2, table 7 of LVS EN 13450+AC the
maximum value of Los Angeles coefficient is:
Los Angeles
coefficient
Category
LArb
<16 LArb 16
6.2. Resistance to impact According to Article 7.2, table 8 of LVS EN 13450+AC the
maximum impact value is:
Impact resistance value Category % SZRB
<22 SZRB 22
6.3. Resistance to abrasion According to Article 7.3, table 9 of LVS EN 13450+AC the
maximum value of abrasion is:
micro-Deval coefficient Category
Mde RB
<15 Mde RB15
7. Durability
7.1. Freeze resistance (see Article 7.4.1 of LVS
EN 13450+AC)
Freeze resistance (freezing/melting) may not be worse
than specified in the table:
Standard Category requested
(determined by calculation
according to standard)
Test in accordance with
LVS EN 1367-1
F1
or
Test in accordance with
LVS EN 1367-2
MS18
7.2. Bulk density The bulk density in kg/m3
(uncompacted/uncompressed) must be indicated, to
be determined in accordance with LVS EN 1097-3:
2000.
8. Water absorption (see Article 7.4.3 of LVS EN
13450+AC)
Water absorbtion value must be less than 1%, to be determined
in accordance with LVS EN 1097-6: 2000.
314
9. Quality assurance and testing The manufacturing process control system must be in
accordance with Annex I of LVS EN 13450+AC.
The Engineer and/or the Employer may perform the
necesarry production quality audits as considered as
necessary. The representatives of the Engineer and/or
the Employer should at any appropriate time be able to
examine and check the production method and shall be
entitled to participate in all inspections (tests) related to
the production of the railway ballast under this Contract.
The Engineer and/or the Employer shall be entitled to
check the results of such tests. Such inspection and
observation will be carried out in a way not interfering
with the day-to-day production process, except if there
are sufficient grounds for doing so.
The tests must be carried out to confirm the compliance
of ballast with the requirements of the Employer. All
tests, including any repeated tests, shall be carried out at
Contractor’s cost under direct supervision of the
Employer or by coordinating with the Employer.
The quality inspection certificate for each delivery shall
include the results of the required tests (i.e.
granulametric composition, fine particles, fines, particle
shape, particle length, etc.) in accordance with the
requirements of the Employer and a statement that the
railway ballast supplied complies with the Technical
Specification.
Table 5.14. Basic requirements regarding ballast materials
Railroad switches for 1520 mm gauge railway
The Contractor shall install 60E1 1:11 and 1: 9 railroad switches in accordance with the Technical
requirements of LDz.
A1. General provisions for 1520mm track switches:
A.1.1. Track width between the inner edges of rail heads, measured 13 mm below the surface of
the rail head, should be 1520 mm. Increase of track width of the neighbouring road is required in
the curve behind the frog according to the radius.
A.1.2. The shifting zone of frogs should be fitted with standard sleepers and fasteners with rail
slope between 1/∞ and 1/20.
A.1.3. Axle load - 25t.
A.1.4. Rail profile 60E1 according to the requirements of standard EN 13674-1.
A.1.5. Type of frogs 1:11 and 1:9;
A.1.6. Speed on the straight road and neighbouring road:
315
Radius of the switch, m Speed on the straight road, km/h Speed when moving towards
turnout, km/h
1:11 300 (simple)
1:9 212 (simple)
160
160
50
40
Table 5.15. Speed on the straight road and turnout
A.1.7. Components of the switches should ensure frog operation in rail temperature range
between -43°C and +56°C.
A.1.8. Sleepers should be laid in a shape of fan.
A.1.9. Flexible rail fasteners should be used in the structure of switches.
A.1.10. Drills for rail joints of switches should be made for all rails installed in the switch, incl. rails
that will be connected with tracks during installation of switches. Two drills at the end of the rail
should be made for each joint, and drills to ensure electrical circuits should be established.
A.1.11. The switches should be designed so that joint areas of rails could be welded together,
namely, so that switches could be welded seamlessly into the track.
A.1.12. Technical documentation - in accordance with the requirements of standard EN ISO 21267.
A.1.13. Preparation of drawings - in accordance with the requirements of standard EN ISO 21267-
1.
A.1.14. Preparation of specifications - in accordance with the requirements of standard EN ISO
21267-2.
A.1.15. Introduction of modifications in the technical documentation - in accordance with the
requirements of EN ISO 21267-3.
A.1.16. Exchange of technical data - in accordance with the requirements of standard EN ISO
21267-4.
A.1.17. General geometry of switches - in accordance with the requirements of standard EN 13803-
2 and EN 13232.
A.1.18. Technical documentation of frogs should be accompanied with drawings of the main
elements of the switch consisting of:
• drawings of the blade section and cross-section thereof;
• drawings of the frog section and cross-sections thereof;
• drawings of the location and fastener of the motor and its auxiliary devices, if any;
• drawing of metal sleeper with cover;
• drawing of the locking device of frog blades.
A.1.19. Switches should be equipped with snow-removal devices.
A.2. Switch blades
A.2.1. In a switch blade section such rail pads with sliders shall be used that do not contaminate
the crushed stone ballast, respectively sliders not requiring lubrication, and shall provide a lifetime
316
of not less than 100 million of passed gross tonnes, according to the annual statistical indicators
of the LDZ.
A.2.2. Space between railway sleepers must be free of auxiliary elements so that the compressing
operations of crashed stone ballast are not disturbed.
A.2.3. Stock rails must be with a mutual flexible fastening.
A.2.4. The switch blade supports shall be placed between the stock rail and the swich blade,
providing a stable position of the switch blade in the closed position.
A.2.5. The protective equipment must be fitted in a well-visible place and should ensure the
protection of the mutual counterdeviation of the stock rail and the switch blade.
A.2.6. Switch blade supports and protective equipment shall be fortified with high tenacity 10.9
class screws and 10 class nuts, in accordance with the requirements of EN ISO 898-1 standard.
A.2.7. The locking device of the railroad switch must ensure a secure closing of the railroad
switches (switch blade compulsion to the stock rail) in one of the traffic directions. The mechanism
must be stationary. The mechanism must provide a place for the installation of a padlock providing
easy operating service.
A.2.8. Geometry of the switch blade - in accordance with requirements of EN 13232-5 standard.
A.2.9. Stock rail profile 60E1 and material class R350HT in accordance with requirements of
EN13674-1 standard.
A.2.10. Switch blades - profile 60E1A1 and material class R350HT in accordance with requirements
of EN 13674-2 standard. A smooth transition from the switch blade profile (60E1A1) to the vehicle
profile (60E1) must be ensured. Switch blade profile ends compressed and welded with full-profile
edge in accordance with requirements of EN 14587-1 standard.
A.2.11. Rails and switch blades fastening in accordance with requirements of EN 13481-7 standard.
A.3. Connecting rails segment
A.3.1. Rail profile 60E1 and material class R350HT in accordance with requirements of EN13674-
1 standard.
A.3.2. Rails, including curved, shall be made according to the geometrical diagram of the railroad
switch, taking into account the radius and lengths assigned.
A.4. Frog segment
A.4.1. Frogs:
A.4.1.1 Bolted type frog. Wing rails of R370CrHT class material in accordance with the
requirements of standard EN 13674-1. Heel of the frog of high alloy steel with
hardness of 50 ... 55 HRC (570 +/- 10 HB) and closure rail R350HT material class.
Frog geometry according to the requirements of standard EN 13232-6.
A.4.1.2 Block-type manganese frog consisting of alloy manganese central part with initial
hardness not less than 340 HB, the hardness of which of at least 500 HB is reached
after commencement of operation of the switch, but not later than after letting 10
million t gross trains pass, with R350HT material class closure rails with hardness
of 350 - 390 HB according to the requirements of standard EN13674-1 connected
317
to it using resistance welding method. Frog geometry in accordance with the
requirements of standard EN 13232-6.
A.4.2. Fastening elements of bolted frogs shall be screws with high property class 10.9 and nuts
with property class 10, in accordance with EN ISO 898-1 requirements.
A.4.3. Running rails of the frog segment shall have dual-sided elastic fastening.
A.4.4. Guard rail profile 33C1 and material class R320Cr in accordance with EN 13674-3
requirements.
A.4.5. Max. 14 mm wear limit must be permitted for the guard rails during operation.
A.4.6. For guard rail supports, wear compensation up to 14 mm must be permitted. See A.4.5.
A.4.7. Switch guard rail screws M22 with property class 5.6 in accordance with EN ISO 898-1
requirements.
A.4.8. Guard rail end opening 86 mm, entry point 67 mm, parallel groove 44 mm, tolerance +/-1.
A.4.9. Wing rail end opening 86 mm, entry point 64 mm; tolerance +/-1mm, parallel groove 44 mm,
tolerance -0/+1mm, wing rail neck 64 mm; tolerance +/-1mm, measurements shall be done 13 mm
below the top surface or rail head.
A.5. Rail pad plates
A.5.1. Structure:
A.5.1.1. Rolled plates
A.5.1.2. Welded plates
A.5.2. Material of ribbed pad plates S275JR according to EN 10025 requirements.
A.5.3. On main lines, the thickness of ribbed pad plates shall be at least 20 mm.
A.6. Fastening materials
A.6.1. Vossloh SKL12 or equivalently elastic rail fasteners ensuring railway track resistance against
longitudinal offsets not less than 9 kN. Fasteners must comply with the requirements laid down in
the standards EN 13481-7 and EN 13146.
A.6.2. T-screw for spring clip fastening M22 with property class 5.6 in accordance with EN ISO 898-
1 requirements and a switch nut M22-5 (height 25 mm, wrench size across flats 36 mm).
A.6.3. Galvanized sleeper screws M24x160-4.6 in accordance with EN ISO 898-1 requirements,
geometry of the head shall be truncated pyramid with side length of 22/24 mm.
A.6.4. Thread quality for screws 6 g and for nuts 7H in accordance with ISO 1502 requirements.
A.6.5. All screws, except from those with high property class 10.9 and T-screws, must be hot-dip
galvanised.
A.6.6. Unspecified screws with property class 8.8 in accordance with EN ISO 898-1 requirements.
A.6.7. Unspecified fastening elements in accordance with EN 13481 requirements.
A.7. Oak-wood sleepers
A.7.1. Oak-wood switch sleepers in accordance with EN 13145 requirements.
A.7.2. Classification of impregnation in accordance with EN 351-1 requirements.
318
A.7.3. In accordance with Article 31 of Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006 (formerly Directive
2001/90/EC), industrially produced oils may be used in wood processing if they contain:
a) benzopyrene at a concentration lower than 0.005% of the mass;
b) water-extractable phenols at a concentration lower than 3% of the mass.
A.7.4. The ends of all switch beams should be fitted with anti-crack plates, similar to wooden
sleepers.
A.7.5. Switch sleeper cross-section dimensions: thickness 150+10/-3 mm and width 260+10/ -3 mm.
A.7.6. Minimal length of switch sleeper 2.6 m.
A.7.6. Switch sleeper length step 0.2 m.
A.7.7. All switch sleepers shall be labelled with switch sleeper number and year indicated on the
labelling plate.
A.8. Switch operating mechanism auxiliaries
A.8.1. It should be possible to ensure switch operation with electromechanical operating
mechanism.
A.8.2. If operating mechanism without closures is used, the switch must be provided with an
external closure.
A.8.3. For the switch structure, it must be provided minimum switch blade opening 66 mm.
A.8.4. The switch blade in closed position must have a snug fit with the stock rail within the whole
adjoining surface area.
A.8.5. If the switch structure consists of more than one switchpoint, all the auxiliaries for transfer
of operating mechanism closing force to the next switchpoint must be placed between the stock
rails; minimum hold-down force of the point to the stock rail shall be at least 900 N.
A.8.6. Drive rods and control rods shall be adjustable without mechanical deformation.
A.8.7. Drive rods and control rods shall be made of steel C45 according to EN 10277 requirements.
A.8.8. To ensure that the blade fits tightly to the stock rail along the entire length, a mechanic
auxiliary device - a spring breaker must be installed, mounted between the rails, ensuring minimum
opening between the stock rail and the blade, as well as the required drag force to the blade fitted
by the stock rail.
A.8.9. In all switch points, both in the section of the blades and the section of the frog, all parts of
the actuator must be built into a closed metal sleeper which is electrically independent from the
rails of the switch.
A9. Fastening for switch operating mechanism auxiliaries
A.9.1. Metal sleeper.
A.9.1.1. In all the switchpoints both in point and crossing segments, all parts of switch
operating mechanism must be integrated in a closed metal sleeper.
319
A.9.1.2. Metal sleeper cross-section (with covers): maximum width 640 mm and height
400 mm.
A.9.1.3. All the necessary insulations must be included in the scope of supply, in order to
ensure smooth functioning of the railway track circuits.
A.9.1.4. For metal sleeper, it is to ensure stable transfer of corresponding forces from the
railway track superstructure and the rolling stock to the track ballast made of
crushed stones. Minimum walls thickness shall be 15 mm.
A.9.1.5. In metal sleeper, there shall be a drainage hole for wastewater discharge.
A.9.1.6. All rods, locking devices of the actuator and controls, as well as all elements of
auxiliary devices must be protected and covered with metal covers made of sheet
with corrugated surface with wall thickness of not less than 3 mm. The covers
must be designed so that trackside service staff can freely move over them and
fitted with locking elements locking the covers in closed position so that random
opening of covers is not possible.
A.9.2. Metal fastening profile (L type)
A.9.2.1. In all the switchpoints both in point and crossing segments, all parts of switch
operating mechanism must be integrated between two supporting consoles.
A.9.2.2. Between the consoles, there must be such a distance that it would be possible to
mount the operating mechanism specified by the Employer.
A.9.2.3. All the necessary insulations must be included in the scope of supply, in order to
ensure smooth functioning of the railway track circuits.
A.9.2.4. The metal consoles shall have substantial load bearing suitable for the operating
mechanism.
A.10. Other provisions:
A.10.1. Insulated joint areas:
A.10.1.1. Ties must be placed in such a way that free access to fastening screws is not
hindered. The distance between the ties must be 420±5 mm.
A.10.1.2. It should be provided that the thickness of an insulated joint spacer is of 8 mm
thickness.
A.10.1.3. The centre of the insulated joint must be positioned in the middle of the sleeper
box.
A.10.1.4. The insulated joint area must be provided with special clamps, that provide
electrical insulation between joint shroud and rail foot.
A.10.2. The rails must be marked with indelible light colour indicating the length, curvature of the
rail, axis positions of sleepers, switch number;
A.10.3. The blade must be marked with an attached plate indicating the number of the blade; switch
No.; type of the blade; year of manufacture; manufacturer.
A.10.4. The frog must be marked with an attached plate indicating the number of the frog, switch
No.; type of the frog; year of manufacture; manufacturer.
A.10.5. All the rail profile surfaces mechanically treated with cutting shall be covered with indelible
paint.
320
A.11. General switch geometrical dimensions, tolerances and processing requirements
A.11.1 The operating edge of the rail where width of the track is measured is 13 mm below the
surface of the rail head.
A.11.2 Railway track width tolerance on a main line shall be +/-2 mm, and on a branch track – +/-
2 mm.
A.11.3 Blade opening to the working rod 152 mm +/-2 mm.
A.11.4 Minimum distance between the stock rail and the opened blade shall be 65 mm.
A.11.5 Rail longitudinal offset at the beginning and in the end of the switch to the right angle +/-
2 mm.
A.11.6 The fit between the switch blades and the stock rail max. 1 mm.
A.11.7 The fit between the switch blades and the blade supports max. 1 mm.
A.11.8 The fit between the switch points and the plates max. 1 mm.
A.11.9 Switch blade in level with the stock rail, where point cross-section is 50 mm and greater.
A.11.10 Rail straightness is 0.5mm/1500 mm.
A.11.11 Screw end protrusion above the nut shall be min. 2 turns.
A.11.12 The sharp edges of mechanically treated surfaces of rail elements must be rounded off.
A.11.13 Tolerance for rail-end bolt hole dimensions +/-0.5 mm.
A.11.14 Distance between the check-rail working plane and the crossing point at least 1472 mm.
A.11.15 Distance between the check-rail working plane and the wing rail working plane not greater
than 1435 mm.
A.11.16 The line of the frog working plane 0,3mm/1500 mm.
A.11.17 The gap between the rail and the frog plates not greater than 0.5 mm;
A.11.18 The gap between the blade foot and sliding pads not greater than 2mm.
A.12. Warranty provisions
A.12.1. The warranty period of the railroad switch and its elements shall be two years of operation
or 100 million gross tonnes, or 36 months of delivery, whichever occurs first.
A.12.2. Warranty provisions apply only to the material and mechanical processing defects. Wear
and tear of parts and knots is not classified as a case of warranty.
A.13. Acceptance procedure of railroad switches
A.13.1. Acceptance procedure. The Engineer and the Employer shall be entitled to information
regarding the course of production and to perform its supervision, to receive information on the
readiness of the product, as well as shall be entitled to perform the quality control of the railroad
switches and their spare parts in a assembled manner in the manufacturer's factory.
A.13.2. Quality documentation
A.13.2.1. The Contractor shall submit switch passports; acceptance certificates indicating
designed and actual geometric dimensions, as well as documents certifying quality of
the materials used.
A.13.2.2. The Contractor shall submit a declaration of conformity for each switch supplied.
321
A.13.2.3. The Contractor shall perform functional test of the switch system at the factory and shall
ensure that the representative of the Engineer/Employer can verify shifting functionality
of the switch systems at the factory, at the moment of acceptance of the switch.
A.14. General provisions for location of switches on 1520mm railways
A.14.1. Locating straight lines on the track between adjacent switches.
A.14.1.1. If there are two switches of opposite directions in the main, reception and departing
tracks, with turnouts moving from the straight line to various sides (Scheme 1), or with the turnouts
diverting to one side of the straight line (Scheme 2), straight line d with length of at least 12.5 m,
but in limited conditions – 6.25 m, should be between the joints of the stock rails.
Scheme 1
d a2a1
Scheme 2
da1 a2
where a - accordant distances from centers of the switch to the joints of the stock rails.
Width of the track in the straight line between the stock rails must be equal to that in the joints of
the stock rails.
A.14.1.2 . When placing two adjacent switches where end of the frog of one switch is placed behind
the end of the frog of the other switch (Scheme 3) and where stock rails of one switch are placed
behind the heel of the frog of the other switch (Scheme 4), the smallest distance L between the
centers of switches must be determined on a case-by-case basis, depending on the fact that
distance E between the axis of parallel tracks is not less than specified in regulation MK-724
„Railway technical operations regulations”, but the distance between the axis of reception and
departing tracks must be not less than 4.8 m.
Value of L is determined by the following formula:
sin
EL =
,
where E — distance between the axis of tracks;
— angle of the frog.
322
Length of the straight section d is determined by the following formulas:
for Scheme 3:
)(sin
21 bbE
d +−=
,
where 1b and
2b distances from the center of each switch to the end of the frog;
for Scheme 4:
)(sin
21 abE
d +−=
,
where 1b — distance from the center of the first switch to the end of its frog;
2a — distance from the beginning of stock rails to the center of the second switch;
The straight section to the main, reception and departing tracks must be not less than 12.5 m.
Scheme 3
d b2b1
E
L
Scheme 4
d a2b1
E
L
A.14.1.3. When placing two switches one after the other (Scheme 5), the following straight line
should be between them: in the main tracks not less than 12.5 m in length; in reception and
departing tracks (in complicated conditions also on the main tracks) - 6.25 m.
323
Scheme 5
d a2b1
L
A.14.1.4. The switches must be installed together with full-size stock rails, without cutting the front
ends of the stock rails (from the tip of the blade to the joint of the stock rail).
A.14.2. Installing two adjacent switches shall be done establishing a curve between them.
A.14.2.1. Installing of two switches, when a curve with elevated outer rail and transition curves
must be established between them, must be performed in accordance with the following
requirements: between the end of the frog and the beginning of the transition curve, there must be
a straight line equal to the length of section 𝑘1 and with the tracks to be connected along it are
installed on common switch beams (length of this section is determined on the basis of approved
diagrams), but no straight lines can envisaged between the front joints of the stock rails and the
transition curves (Schemes 6 and 7);
Scheme 6
Scheme 7
𝑘𝑝— circular curve;
m — half-length of the transition curve.
A.14.2.2. Installing of two switches on the reception and departing tracks, when a curve without
elevated outer rail and no transition curves must be established between them, must be performed
in accordance with the following requirements: straight line k is envisaged between the front joints
of the stock rails or between the end of the frog and the beginning of the curve (Scheme 8 and 9).
Transition from one track expansion to another track expansion can be established along this entire
straight line.
If there is an elevation and no transition curves, transition of the elevation must be established in
the straight line between the joint of the stock rail or between the end of the frog and the beginning
of the curve. Length of this straight line should allow establishing a transition with slope not steeper
than 1‰ in the straight line of the track behind the beams of the switch.
324
Scheme 8
Scheme 9
If the above requirements cannot be complied with, technical solutions must be coordinated with
JSC „Latvijas dzelzceļš” during designing.
A.15. Requirements for railway signal signs.
A.15.1. When performing reconstruction of 1520mm railway infrastructure, the existing signal signs
should be retained, rebuildable signs should be renovated, and new signal signs should be installed
in compliance with the requirements of the Cabinet Regulation No. 724 as of 03.08.2010 „Railway
technical operations regulations”.
A.15.2. Signs must comply with the requirements of the LR Standard No. LVS 452 „Railway
equipment. Signal signs and indicators”.
5.6. Protection of structures
5.6.1. Protection against mechanical damage
The Contractor shall ensure that surfaces with finishes, including frames of openings and soffits
used as passageways or through which materials are moved, are protected against possible
damage as a result of further Works.
Dense wooden lining shall be installed under all materials that are stored on surfaces with a finish.
Before moving materials over surfaces with finish, wooden lining shall be established. Wheels of
barrows used in such places shall have rubber tires.
Surfaces with finish, including factory finish and finish established during works, shall be clean and
without dirt, incl. also at the time of conveyance of Works. The Contractor shall repeatedly ensure
finishing of places where such surfaces have been insufficiently protected and thus damaged
without additional remuneration.
Waterproofed and roof surfaces shall not be subjected to heavy traffic, nor used for storage of
materials. If anything must be performed in these areas for the purposes of works, appropriate
protection shall be ensured in accordance with the Engineer’s approval.
The Contractor shall ensure all necessary protection for the works already performed in accordance
with the Engineer’s approval, including, but not limited to, temporary coverings and protective
equipment mentioned here.
325
5.6.2. Protection against weather
Depending on the weather, the Contractor shall install, maintain and then remove temporary
enclosure against weather conditions at openings of outer walls not permanently covered.
Temporary enclosures against weather at openings cut in external walls and parapets shall be
ensured. Erect such enclosures at the end of each working day and keep them in an atmosphere
resistant condition until works are resumed and completed. Enclosures shall be ensured without
additional costs to the Employer.
Roof openings shall be made by qualified skilled roofers approved by the Engineer. Such openings
shall be properly covered and sealed, except when working with them, to prevent the possibility of
damage due to weather conditions. Roof protection and restoration works shall be performed by
expert roofers.
The Contractor shall ensure and install temporary watertight enclosures for sleeve openings below
ground. Such enclosures shall remain in place until installation of pipes in cuffs and their
waterproofing is completed.
5.7. Labour protection and construction site safety requirements
The Contractor is responsible for complying with labor and environmental protection requirements
as established by the legislation of the Republic of Latvia as well as technical and special
conditions.
The Contractor shall ensure compliance with the Law on Labour Protection, Cabinet of Ministers
regulations No.92 dated 25.02.2003. “Labour Protection Requirements in performing the
Construction Work” and other requirements of the Latvian regulatory enactments regarding the
safety and order of construction works.
When performing all works on railway tracks and railway structures, it is necessary to comply with
the current regulations of the Latvijas Dzelzceļš VAS, including the "Instruction on ensuring the
safety of train movement during road work" of 10 October 1996. The organization of the required
traffic and labour force protection measures is the duty of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall comply with the "Procedure for carrying out business on railway infrastructure
of Latvijas dzelzceļš VAS (approved by order No. D-3/186 of LDz of April 15, 2010).
The Contractor shall ensure the performance of the project preparation coordinator’s and the
project implementation coordinator’s tasks as established by the Cabinet of Ministers regulations
No.92 dated 25.02.2003. “Labour Protection Requirements in performing the Construction Work”
and the personel necesarry thereof.
In order to ensure the safety and health of the employees at the construction site, the Contractor,
taking into account the construction site and the nature of the works, the working conditions and
risk factors, shall take measures ensuring the compliance of the work places with the requirements
326
of regulatory enactments. The Contractor must provide all the necessary protective equipment
(such as dust nets, plates, barriers and railings, etc.), and, after the completion of work, they shall
be removed.
The Contractor shall ensure and maintain all warning signs, warning lights and barriers in the
required locations. If necessary, temporary barriers along public places, pedestrian pavements, etc.
have to be installed, they must comply with the requirements of the responsible authorities.
The Contractor shall comply with the general principles of labour protection established by the Law
on Labour Protection, also in respect to:
- the delimitation of the construction site and the maintenance of its cleanliness and
order;
- the choice of workplaces by defining the routes of movement and traffic and the
location of the equipment, taking into account the need for free access to each
workplace;
- conditions for the use of different materials;
- the technical maintenance and inspection of machinery, equipment and installations,
during commissioning, as well as on-the-job inspections, in order to prevent defects
that pose a risk to the safety and health of workers;
- establishing and marking of different material storage areas (especially for hazardous
materials and substances);
- the collection and handling of hazardous materials and substances used;
- storage, collection, transfer and disposal of waste and debris;
- change of deadline for various works or work stages, based on the progress of work on
the construction site;
- cooperation with self-employed persons;
- co-operation and coordination of work with other industrial plants at or near the
construction site.
Labour protection measures
The Contractor shall employ a qualified site safety technician who shall be responsible for labor
protection measures.
In case of works overtime safety officer shall have enough assistants with similar qualification to
insure that one safety officer will be present on site during execution of each activity independently
which date or time this may happen.
In cases of overtime, the labour protection coordinator shall have an assistant with similar
qualification in order to comply with the requirements of the regulatory enactments on work
protection.
All works must be performed in a strict compliance with Minister Cabinet regulations No. 92 “Labour
Protection Requirements in Performing Construction Work”, as well as by complying with all
applicable laws and regulations of the Republic of Latvia.
327
Prior starting the works at site the occupational safety and health training must be provided to the
employees, including:
1. Introductory instruction for the employee entering into a working relationship with the
employer,
2. Instruction at workplace:
a. initial – by starting work in the object,
b. repeated,
c. unplanned and target instructions.
The Employer in cooperation with the Engineer shall decide on the elaboration of the Labour
protection plan (Darba aizsardzības plāns – DAP hereinafter) during the elaboration phase of the
design, by including it in the Work organization project or by elaborating LPP as a separate
document.
The DAP shall also contain information on the coordination of labour protection measures at site
and the exchange of relevant information between the Employer, the Engineer, the Contractor, sub-
contractors, performers of individual construction works and other employees.
Prior to the commencement of construction work, the designated labour safety coordinator shall
elaborate the DAP of the object in accordance with Chapter IV of Minister Cabinet regulations
No.92, as well as shall send to the Employer a preliminary notice on the performance of
construction works, who shall then pass it on to the State Labour Inspectorate.
The copies of the elaborated DAP and the preliminary notice on the start of construction works
shall be placed at the execution place of Works in a place clearly visible to everyone and, if
necessary, updated regularly.
Ten days before the start of each activity, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an updated
version. Without the prior approval of the method statement, the works described in the safety
method statement may not be started. The Engineer’s approval shall not relieve the Contractor of
the responsibility for the protection of the safety measures.
The Labour protection coordinator provided by the Contractor shall be responsible for the
implementation of labor protection activities and the elaboration of further procedures. In the
performance of his duties, the labour protection coordinator, as specified in regulatory enactments,
shall also be responsible for:
1. Managing monthly labour safety meetings for staff and sub-contractors;
2. Monitoring and reporting on labour safety meetings in the same day's report;
3. Updating the labour protection plan every day and recording all the apparent threats to the
safety, including identification of offenders;
4. The timely prevention of the threat to labour safety, making urgent corrections to the
Labour protection plan, if necessary, and organizing the implementation of appropriate
measures at site;
5. Monitoring all relevant safety reports for insurance purposes;
328
6. Verifying of compliance with cleanliness, order and labor protection requirements at least
once a day in all site work areas. Immediate steps to ensure compliance with the
requirements;
7. Elaboration and submission of work hazard analysis for each major phase or element of
work as needed or at the request of the Engineer.
8. Placement of security signs at the site.
Representatives and personnel of all sub-contractors, performers of individual construction works
shall be responsible for complying with the labour protection requirements, safety techniques. This
includes the provision of a sufficient knowledge of the site's general safety technique programme
to the representatives working at site.
Safety meetings shall be held at least once a month at site. Meetings are convened and managed
by the safety coordinator. All supervisors and work managers shall participate. One responsible
representative of each sub-contractor shall attend in order to follow the information and solutions
discussed and adopted at these meetings. The Engineer, like the Employer, shall attend these
meetings.
The agenda of the safety meetings, inter alia, shall include such items:
1. Preparing timely topics for discussion and distributing security booklets, notes and
announcements.
2. Inspection report of the safety coordinator.
3. Identifying potential threats to security for the next month and discussing and
implementing steps to avoid them.
4. Appointment of safety representatives for sub-contractors.
All supervisors and work managers shall be responsible for planning and executing of their work,
by taking into account the safety of all people at site. They are expected to eliminate all possible
accident hazards when planning the works under their control. Sub-contractors are expected to
comply with and correct any accident-causing practice before trauma. If an accident has however
occurred, they shall investigate in order to identify the cause and take the necessary corrective
measures to prevent recurrence. The Engineer shall also be notified immediately of any accidents.
Reporting on accidents
For all injuries in the event of loss of ability to work, property damage accidents (except project
vehicle accidents outside of working time and execution place of work) and material damage shall
be reported in writing to the Engineer, providing a copy to the Employer within 48 hours after the
accident or incident. Before the written notice, immediate notification is required.
If an employee is sent for medical treatment to a doctor, information must be obtained from the
doctor that determines whether (1) an employee is unable to perform his duties; (2) an employee is
able to perform lighter job duties; or (3) the employee is capable of performing his duties. A copy
of this note must accompany the accident act.
329
All civil liability accidents are reported in accordance with the provisions of the regulatory
enactments.
Work safety instructions
Prior to access on site Contractor’s safety officer shall provide to each worker or visitor safety
instruction and get signed protocol of the instruction to be provided every working day to
Engineer. During inspection shall be explained safety measure inclusive but not limited to:
1. Use of minimum protective clothing
2. use of hard hats and protective footwear are required at all times
3. use of protective eye covering
4. description of what shall be will be worn when welding, hammering metal, stone, or
concrete, grinding or cutting metal units
5. minimum other safety rules observances
6. Work areas and access ways are to be free of trash, materials and all tripping hazards
7. Methods of temporary electrical wiring protection from damage by traffic; it shall be in
good condition and protected by ground fault interrupters.
Non-compliance with safety requirements
If the Contractor violates any of the safety requirements, the Engineer shall take appropriate
measures, but all related costs are covered at the Contractor’s cost. The Engineer shall notify the
Contractor in writing on the safety violations.
In the event of the first violation, the Engineer shall issue a written warning to the Contractor and
shall request the violation to be eliminated at a specified time. If the Contractor does not eliminate
the violation within the specified time, he shall be forbidden to perform further works in the specific
area until the relevant risk, its consequences have been eliminated.
In case of further violations, the Engineer shall take into account the seriousness of each violation
and shall issue appropriate instructions to the Contractor. If the Contractor disregards the
Engineer's instructions without sufficient reason, then for the works in the area where the violation
took place, the responsible foreman or civil engineer is released from work at site and the violation
is reported to the responsible authorities.
If the Contractor repeatedly roughly violates the safety requirements, then the Contractor in
accordance with the instructions of the Employer and the Engineer shall immediately change,
replace the relevant Contractor's personnel, as well as shall take the appropriate steps to ensure
that its employees comply with the safety requirements specified in the regulatory enactments and
the Contract.
330
Labour Protection Plan
The Contractor shall develop Labour Protection Plans (DAP) in order to guarantee a safe and
healthy work environment. They are to be developed in accordance with the relevant building
regulations and the Cabinet of Ministers Regulations No. 92 dated 25.02.2003. "Labour Protection
Requirements in performing the Construction Work".
According to the Cabinet of Ministers regulations No. 92 dated 25.02.2003. "Labour Protection
Requirements in performing the Construction Work" the DAPs are to be elaborated in two stages
and are to be included in work organization plans (DOP) for the design (stage one), as well as in the
work performance designs (DVP) for the construction phase (stage two).
The Contractor must cooperate with the Engineer during the preparation of the DAPs.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an updated DAP for coordination at least 10 days before
the respective planned construction activities on the construction site.
For the construction works of the bridges the DAP shall provide for additional safety conditions for
the guarantee of maritime safety and performance of works on water, by agreeing on the procedure
of specific works with the responsible authorities and companies in order to prevent the risk of
accidents.
The Contractor shall arrange all necessary activities to protect the execution place of Works, Works,
Goods (including materials, equipment, temporary objects) and the Employer's property from theft,
vandalism and unauthorized entry to the site.
The Contractor shall ensure the security of the Employer’s staff and visitors.
Access to each site (construction area) or part of the construction shall be through guarded gates
equipped with an automatic barrier for trucks and personnel, who shall have access with an
electronic working time record only.
The list of personnel authorized to access the site shall be agreed with the Engineer upon
submitting the application for authorization 72 hours prior to arrival, except in cases provided for
in regulatory enactments. Only persons included in the Engineer's authorized list may be present at
the site. The following documents shall be submitted together with the request for access to the
site:
1. Confirmation that the person who works for an approved sub-contractor, performer of the
individual construction works is required to enter the site (at the execution place of work);
2. Copy of the employment contract, copy of the medical certificate or A1 certificate in the
case of a non-resident natural person or construction company
3. Photo of a person
During the design process, the visitor access procedure shall be coordinated with the Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain access to the register of the digital biometrics system and shall
submit it to the Engineer not later than 4 hours after the application register on entry and presence
at the site.
331
The Engineer shall be entitled to verify that all employees working in the workplace are registered
in the electronic working time records and the Contractor shall pay a penalty of EUR 1000 for each
case, when it is found that any employee at the site is not registered in the electronic working time
records.
The Contractor shall restrict the entry of people and vehicles to the site. Authorization to enter only
for authorized persons with appropriate identification.
The Contractor shall coordinate the access of the Employer’s personnel to the site.
The Contractor shall provide a temporary guardhouse at the entrance to the site, where an
employee is located 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, in order to control entry and exit of the site.
5.8. Fire safety requirements
The Contractor shall comply with the fire safety regulations existing in the Republic of Latvia and
must cover all expenses related to their fulfillment. During the entire period of the Contractor's and
subcontractors' activities, adequate fire safety measures must be taken. Highly flammable
materials must be kept to a minimum and, if kept, they must be properly unloaded and stored. Petrol
and other easily flammable substances, as well as tanks with liquid gas must be stored in safe
containers, but these containers may not be located in the office buildings. If there are no other
instructions, the Contractor may not allow to burn fire or use open-circuit heating devices at any
stage of the work.
Construction practices, including cutting and welding, and the protection of adjacent materials
during construction, must be in line with good practice standards for such works. The Contractor
shall provide the required quantity of approved portable fire extinguishers in buildings and on the
construction site.
The Contractor shall arrange periodic inspections of local fire service and must cooperate with
these services to comply promptly with their requirements.
The Contractor is responsible for the fire safety during the Works execution. The fire protection
system and equipment shall be installed as soon as possible, so that they can be used if necesarry
during the construction.
review of fire safety measures shall be included in the Detailed Technical Design in accordance with
the Cabinet of Ministers regulations "Regulations on the Latvian Construction Standard LBN 201
"Fire Safety of Buildings"".
Fire safety
Methods, means and equipment shall be provided to prevent such discomfort as smoke, dust,
waste, etc.
A temporary fire protection system shall be ensured at site in accordance with regulatory and
contractual requirements.
332
Temporary fire safety
The Contractor shall ensure that no fire is set at the execution place of Works, at the site or around
it, and take all reasonable precautions to prevent the occurrence of a fire at the execution place of
Works, at the site or around it, temporary objects, offices, warehouses and other places and cases
connected with them, in particular with regard to the safe storage of oil products, paints, explosives
and other combustible or hazardous goods. Comply with all regulations and orders issued by the
local competent authorities and ensure and maintain in a good order a sufficient amount of
effective fire-fighting equipment and devices, as well as ensure the availability thereof at all times
and in all places related to the execution of the Works, and provide the personnel trained to handle
them.
The type, location and sufficient amount of fire fighting equipment and devices shall be approved
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring all fire fighting equipment and
devices required by the State Fire and Rescue Service, regardless of whether it is specifically
indicated here.
The Contractor shall perform appropriate safety measures during the welding and gas-cutting
works of metals as indicated below:
1. Welding or gas cutting works shall only be carried out in well-ventilated rooms where there
is little or no burning materials nearby and preferably in a place specifically designated and
used only as a "welding workshop".
2. Where welding or gas cutting works are carried out on site, the surroundings shall be
suitably protected with coverings or enclosures, as well as suitable, portable fire
extinguishers ready for use and ready-to-serve personnel shall be available.
3. The quantity of gas cylinders in any working area and storage of such cylinders, both empty
and full, shall comply with the requirements of regulatory enactments.
The Contractor shall perform all measures to arrange regular inspections performed by the fire
service and the insurer's inspectors; cooperate with these authorities and immediately follow their
recommendations.
The Contractor shall comply with MC regulations No.238 Fire Safety Regulations.
The Contractor shall ensure that suitable and, as far as possible, unhindered evacuation exits from
all parts of the Work performance areas are available at any time for the event of a fire.
After completing the Work or after the Engineer's instruction, remove all temporary fire-fighting
equipment and devices. Temporary means must be maintained until the establishment of a
permanent system.
333
5.9. Environmental protection requirements
The Contractor must comply with laws and regulations on environmental protection requirements.
In the Works execution the risks of environmental pollution shall be taken into account, including
according to the DOP.
Within the framework of the research “Detailed technical study and environmental impact
assessment of the Latvian section of the European gauge railway line Rail Baltica“ carried out by
the general partnership RB Latvija, the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) for the construction
of the Rail Baltica Line has been developed. Based on that the Environmental Monitoring Bureau
(EMB) has issued “Statement No. 5 on the Environmental Impact Assessment Report of the
construction of the European gauge public railway line Rail Baltica”. The Contractor in the Works
execution shall comply with the environmental protection provisions contained in the referred to
EMB Statement.
The Contractor among other things is obliged to compy also with:
- the requirements of the Protection Zone Law regarding the placement of structures,
utilities and equipment (with existing / planned restrictions and protection zones).
- the requirements of the Waste Management Law regarding the management of waste,
including domestic and industrial waste and debris.
- the requirements of the Cabinet of Ministers regulations No.16 dated 07.01.2014.
"Noise Assessment and Management Procedures" and Cabinet of Ministers
regulations No. 163 dated 23.04.2002. "Provisions for noise emission from off-
premises equipment" for noise and vibration.
- bad odour restrictive measures and regulations in accordance with the Cabinet of
Ministers regulations No.724 dated 25.11.2014. "Regulations on Methods for Detection
of Odors Caused by Pollution and the Procedure for Limiting the Spread of these
Odors".
- Rail Baltica Design Guidelines.
5.9.1. Site cleaning
The Contractor shall ensure the daily cleaning and disposal of material residues, debris and waste
throughout the construction work. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing all debris to
the waste containers every day. In addition, the Contractor shall keep every day all areas and
premises free of dust. Dusty material shall be stored in such a way as to avoid dust blowing under
the influence of wind. Debris may not accumulate or endanger safety. The Engineer shall issue
instructions, if necessary, in order to strengthen the maintenance of cleanliness and order at the
site.
Each sub-contractor, performer of the individual construction works, shall be responsible for
keeping all work areas free of obstructions, unnecessary materials and unused equipment that
damage the visual view, constitutes an obstacle and / or endangers the lives of all people who may
334
be present at the appropriate locations at any time, but if these persons fail to comply with,
improperly fullfil these requirements, the Contractor shall ensure the proper fulfillment of these
requirements.
Contractor shall provide all covered containers in quantity not less than one by fenced area of
works, skips and chutes for deposit of waste materials, debris, and rubbish and include in the site
layout organization plan.
Containers shall be in each area in quantity sufficient to accommodate selective debris collecting:
1. Metal waste
2. Glass
3. Paper
4. Wet biological waste
Cleaning materials for cleaning of materials and equipment shall be used according to the
manufacturer of the product and as approved by Engineer.
Contractor shall maintain areas, floors and site areas under Contractor's control free of waste
materials, debris, and rubbish at all times.
Contractor shall remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces and
other closed or remote spaces, prior to closing the space.
Contractor shall Clean areas and all floors daily to provide suitable conditions for work.
Storages on site shall be organized by Contractor in appropriate way, following areas defined in
DVP and DOP.
Contractor shall provide all along construction period cleaning from snow of all the areas of
works.
Contractor shall when working outside fenced area insure that place is cleaned every ½ day and
no debris shall encumber public spaces.
Removal of waste
The burning of waste or spare materials on the construction site is prohibited. The Contractor shall
remove all debris, soil and waste from the construction site and dispose of it in a place designated
for it. The Contractor shall coordinate with the responsible authorities the waste disposal sites and
cover all disposal costs.
Contractor shall remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site on daily basis and dispose
of off site for storage/utilization to locations approved by municipality.
Engineer has right and Contractor shall provide within 24 hour from request proof that all waste
materials have been disposed to location approved by Municipality.
The Contractor shall comply with regulations of the local authorities regarding control and disposal
of construction waste.
335
The Contractor shall ensure the supply, maintenance and operation of approved waste collection,
surface water drainage and waste water removal system during the excution of the Contract, as
well as their removal, deodorisation, sterilization and backfilling, if relevant, after the execution, in
accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.
5.9.2. Erosion and sediment control
For the erosion and sediment control purposes The Contractor shall:
1. Plan and perform construction works with such methods to control water drainage from
the excavation and embankment surfaces. Eliminate erosion and sediment.
2. Reduce to a minimum the amount of the simultaneously uncovered soil.
3. Ensure such temporary means as embankments and draining-ditches to prevent water
leakage.
4. Carefully select a place for arranging the waste container stand.
5. Regularly inspect the earthwork to detect signs of erosion and silting; take corrective
measures without delay.
5.9.3. Water drainage control
The Contractor shall ensure the leveling of the site and all the necessary drainage to prevent the
accumulation of standing water and to drain surface sewage away from excavations, trenches,
adjacent properties and public traffic lanes until the permanent drainage is accepted.
The removal of temporary drainage after taking over of Works or in accordance with the instructions
of the Engineer shall b e ensured.
The excavations and trenches shall be maintained free of water. Pumping equipment with sufficient
capacity to control water flow shall be provided and operated.
A dewatering system shall be provided to maintain excavations dry and free of water 24 hours per
day.
Pipelines for discharging the pumped out water shall be provided in a way to prevent erosion.
Equipment and installations shall be removed when those are no longer required in accordance
with the instructions of the Engineer.
Regulations of local authorities shall be complied with.
5.9.4. Protection of waters
The Contractor shall take all precautionary measures to avoid getting of material, equipment, tools,
etc. into water. The Contractor shall not allow leakage of petroleum products and other chemicals,
336
and water discharged into water bodies must be free of harmful substances and chemicals. The
prevention of oil and chemical discharges shall be included in the working methods.
The Contractor shall take all precautionary measures to minimize the effects and pollution in the
waters. The Contractor is responsible for the immediate reporting of any and all incidents to the
Engineer and the collection of all objects and materials in the water. All materials in the water bodies
must be collected immediately and appropriately utilised. If the Contractor can not collect any of
materials that has got into the water, the Engineer may instruct the third party to collect these
materials, equipment and tools at the Contractor's cost. Such measures shall not relieve the
Contractor of his obligations under the Contract. The Contractor is responsible for all the
consequences that may result from materialsgetting into, being left in the water.
5.9.5. Reduction of noise
The Contractor shall design and carry out the Works, taking into account that the work is carried
out in the city area. The Contractor must take steps to reduce and eliminate the noise caused by
the equipment, trains and machinery, both during construction and during the operation of the
constructed object. If, in accordance with EIA studies or other circumstances, requirements it is
necessary or required from the responsible authorities, the Contractor must design and install noise
reduction walls. The Contractor must cover all expenses related to the installation of these walls.
The Contractor shall equip all generators, compressors, impact instruments and vehicles with
efficient silencers recommended by the manufacturer of generators, compressors, impact
instruments or vehicles, as well as shall comply with local government regulations.
Electric generators and other heavy equipment shall be in a soundproof enclosure.
5.9.6. Dust control
The Contractor shall perform construction works with such methods that do not create dust
concentration above the regulatory requirements. Ensure that work is carried out in a way to prevent
air-transmitted dust from dissipating in the air.
5.9.7. Pollution control
The Contractor shall provide methods, means and equipment to prevent soil, water and air pollution
with discharges of poisonous, toxic substances and work-related pollutants.
5.9.8. Supervision of structures and constructions thereof
90 days before the commencement of the construction works, the Contractor shall organise all
necessary preventive works, monitoring of those structures and constructions thereof that are
located less than 100 meters away or at another distance specified by the Engineer from the
expected location of the site's perimeter in order to detect cracks or significant structural
337
deficiencies in the existing structures, ensuring observation (monitoring) of structures and
constructions thereof during the construction work.
Reports shall be submitted to the Engineer not later than 45 days before the start of the
construction work.
338
6. ASSUMPTIONS AND POSSIBLE RISKS
The following assumptions and risks shall be taken into account by the Contractor. In case any of
the following assumptions and risks are met during the implementation of the Contract the
additional deadlines extension and/or payment thereof is not foreseen.
It is assumed that:
- The Contractor shall ensure that it shall have access to all the initial documentation
necessary for the performance of the works in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract;
- The Contractor shall submit reports on the execution of works on time, including also
in relation to accidents at the performance place of works or as the result thereof;
- Works shall be carried out in accordance with the Work performance schedule approved
within the framework of the Programme, by complying with the overall deadline for
completion of Works;
- Notes provided for in the Contract (including, but not limited to, entries in the
Construction Work Logbook, acts of hidden works, etc.) required for the preparation of
various reports will be prepared in a timely manner;
- All inspections / analyzes will be carried out by certified / accredited organizations /
laboratories in accordance with the requirements of the Contract (types and frequency
of inspections / analyzes) and that the Contractor will submit this documentation to the
Engineer in due time;
- The Contractor will alert the Engineer in due time on possible changes (work volumes
and changes), as well as will prepare the documentation justifying the changes;
- Construction shall be performed not in a lower quality and not in a smaller volume as
defined by the Contract.
- The estimated duration of the first (initial) expert-examination of the design
documentation shall be 3-6 months.
Possible risks:
- Considering that the Works shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of the
FIDIC Yellow Book contract, the elaboration of the design documentation may be
delayed and/or the coordination with the responsible authorities;
- Delayed commencement of Works due to protracted engineering maintenance
tendering / contracting procedures;
- The implementation of the contract may be affected by possible changes in the
regulatory enactments (Applicable Law);
- Unforeseen, completely independent of the parties involved circumstances (in so far
the Contract does not provide otherwise);
- Increase of costs during the construction due to unforeseen/additional works of the
Contractor;
- Construction works shall be performed next to the railway in service and in the objects
of the railway infrastructure in service (including also in service during the execution of
339
Works), which considerably complicates and can affect the performance of works in
various ways;
- Increase of service and work costs, considering the implementation period of the
Contract;
- Changes that can be identified during construction works and related engineering
research may be related to unforeseen environmental protection etc. factors such as
soil contamination, groundwater factor, work in public waters;
- Traffic organisation burdens;
- Impact of cultural-historical findings on the overall schedule for the execution of works
(termination of construction works to perform additional research);
- Contact during construction works with harmful, hazardous substances such as
asbestos, contaminated soil, etc.
340
7. LIST OF ANNEXES Annex 1 – Technical documentation from archive
Annex 2 – Land border plans
Annex 3– Construction site borders
Annex 4– topography .dwg
Annex 5– Environmental impact assesment, final report
Annex 6– Construction permits
Annex 7– Technical conditions
Annex 8- VPVB report
Annex 9- Rail Baltica Design Guidelines
Annex 10– Architectural sketch R2I0G1A6
Annex 11- Aproval by PLH on sketch design changes
Annex 12– Building design in the minimum composition
Annex 13- AECOM research
Annex 14- Summary of previous geotechnical surveys
Annex 15- Planned Rail Baltica railway right of way
Annex 16– Levels of detail (LOD) of Project information in Project stages
Annex 17– Forms and templates prepared by Employer
Annex 18– (deleted).
Annex 19– Passenger flows diagram
Annex 20- Diagrams of current train traffic schedules
Annex 21–Bridge evacuation routes plan
Annex 22- Floor plans sections, facades for station building. Illustration of Employer’s intention
Annex 23- Inventory cases of station building
Annex 24- Requirements on rooms finishings
Annex 25- Situation plans and combined views of bridges and overpasses. Illustration of Employer’s intention
Annex 26- Tracks layout plan for situation after reconstruction. Illustration of Employer’s intention
Annex 27– Territory plan. Illustration of Employer’s intention
Annex 28– Rail Baltica Riga local planning documentation
Annex 29- Exploration and research of cultural heritage within Latvian section Rail Baltica railway right of way.
